Home

John Deere 2630 Display

1. c ccceeescceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 50 1 Guidance Systems ccccesscceeeeeessessteeeeeeesees 50 1 GUIDANCE softkey ccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetees 50 2 VIEW tabi ta a RA eas eee 50 3 Moving Map view and Perspective View 50 7 Full Screen Mapnping 50 8 GUIDANCE SETTINGS Geh 50 9 Turning View 50 10 TUrn Predictor onta aie e 50 10 Recording Turn Points 50 10 Predicting Turn Points 0 ccesseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 50 11 Continued on next page Original Instructions All information illustrations and specifications in this manual are based on the latest information available at the time of publication The right is reserved to make changes at any time without notice COPYRIGHT 2011 DEERE amp COMPANY Moline Illinois All rights reserved A John Deere ILLUSTRUCTION Manual Contents Page Lead Compensation nnosssnnnnneeeeeenaneeeeeene 50 13 Vehicle Heading Arrow seeseeeeeeeeeeeeteeees 50 13 SHIFT TRACK SETTINGS ab 50 15 Shift Track Accumulator seeseeeeeeeeeeeeeen eene 50 16 StarFire Signal Monitoring System 50 16 Row Finder Mode eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesssereessreenee 50 18 Straight Track Mode sssonnnnnannnonnnnnneeneeneeeeee 50 19 Adaptive Curve Mode 50 24 AB Curve Mode nsesneeeseeesnnesernnesrnrnsrnssreenee 50 40 Circle Track Mode sssnsseeneeeseneessereesrrrrerneeneen 50 48 Swap Track Mode 50 52 A
2. 3 Z l 10 S2am Ry ees EE De TH CZ76372 000005D 19 09JUL10 3 5 Auxiliary Control Not Available IMPORTANT Auxiliary Control is not available The connected auxiliary input device does not meet the implement function requirements Auxiliary Control is not This message occurs if an input device cannot control available The connected any of the requested implement functions due to an eiesacasg el er cavea noss not incompatibility e g the input sends analog signals and mesti eip aa a the implement sends digital signals 5 S T g 5 Ea C WEL x Continued on next page CZ76372 000005D 19 09JUL10 4 5 85 4 062111 PN 267 Auxiliary Controls Communication Error i A XXXX Auxiliary Controis IMPORTANT Communication Error Communication problem with auxiliary input Communication Error Communication problem with auxiliary input Commu nication may be lost Communication may be lost Check connections to controller Check connections to controller This message occurs when the system detects a communication problem with auxiliary input i e the joystick is disconnected Press Enter key F to quit this error message then check all connections ZX1042511 UN 04DEC08 CZ76372 000005D 19 09JUL10 5 5 85 5 SE PN 268 Auxiliary Controls 85 6 062111 PN 269 Auxiliary Controls Auxiliary Controls Page The following screens allow map
3. 75 15 062111 PN 256 Swath Control Physical machine reaction Distance traveled at given Distance traveled per GPS Constant Ground Speed delay time speed and time update km h seconds meters meters 27 2 15 00 1 50 27 3 22 50 1 50 27 4 30 00 1 50 27 5 37 50 1 50 27 10 75 00 1 50 30 1 8 33 1 67 30 2 16 67 1 67 30 3 25 00 1 67 30 4 33 33 1 67 30 5 41 67 1 67 30 10 83 33 1 67 CZ76372 00002F6 19 28APR11 2 2 75 16 062111 PN 257 Swath Control Swath Control Settings Quick Sheet SAE Physical machine reaction Distance traveled at given Distance traveled per GPS Constant Ground Speed delay time speed and time update mph seconds feet inches 2 1 2 93 7 04 2 2 5 87 7 04 2 3 8 80 7 04 2 4 11 73 7 04 2 5 14 67 7 04 2 10 29 33 7 04 4 1 5 87 14 08 4 2 11 73 14 08 4 3 17 60 14 08 4 4 23 47 14 08 4 5 29 33 14 08 4 10 58 67 14 08 6 1 8 80 21 12 6 2 17 60 21 12 6 3 26 40 21 12 6 4 35 20 21 12 6 5 44 00 21 12 6 10 88 00 21 12 8 1 11 73 28 16 8 2 23 47 28 16 8 3 35 20 28 16 8 4 46 93 28 16 8 5 58 67 28 16 8 10 117 33 28 16 10 1 14 67 35 20 10 2 29 33 35 20 10 3 44 00 35 20 10 4 58 67 35 20 10 5 73 33 35 20 10 10 146 67 35 20 12 1 17 60 42 24 12 2 35 20 42 24 12 3
4. 140 3 062111 PN 348 Index Page Page A Area YTS ste euer Bake eer eege ebe eens 65 32 AB Curve Track Mode Area Re E 45 30 Creating an AB CUrVe c cecccecceseeeteeseeeseeeseenseens 50 43 Area Units Pause Recording c cssssessessessessessesetsessesseeseeeee 50 44 GOtOM EE 65 52 Saving Data 50 45 AULOT LAC enee 35 1 50 1 50 55 Accuracy lee 50 55 Accuracy Bar Step Size 50 9 Advanced Settings s eesneeeeeeeeeenneesnnresr reenen 50 59 EE 50 68 Combines Activating AutoTrac ccccccccccscsecseeseeseccseeseeeeeeens 50 55 Activating Guetem EE 50 74 E ene ee eee 50 74 Deactivating System eset 50 74 el 50 73 Deactivation Message 50 4 50 9 130 24 Sugar Cane Harvester c ccscssessssssssssesseseeeeeeeee 50 76 Non Deere Receiver s snsnnssnnrtnnnnrnnrnnnnrereneeee 110 2 NICE 50 71 Off track Emtee 50 3 Activation Self Propelled Forage Harvester Activations Tab Activating Gvstem 50 75 GreenStar 3 GS3 excited eect eecyexteeke 45 1 Deactivating SysteM eee 50 75 Ee 35 1 Enabling System En 50 75 Oomen 35 1 STEE EE E 50 55 Adaptive Curve Track Mode Sprayers Clearing Tears sen dace canna ies 50 28 Activating Guystem EE 50 73 Deleting Data EE 50 28 Deactivating System 50 73 Operation 50 32 Status Pie 50 5 50 55 Pause Recording ENEE 50 37 Steering Record and Repeat Pte At AUB a EE 50 34 Sensitivity SA erat dE ENEE Nee d ee EE NEE 50 58 SONI Eea a e T EE vane dear hancse
5. Connecting 3rd Party Controllers IMPORTANT When connecting with a Rawson controller turn main switch to OFF before leaving vehicle or performing maintenance NOTE 3rd Party controllers are controllers using RS232 connection Field Doc Connect and ISOBUS compliant controllers supporting Task Controller functionality NOTE Please visit www StellarSupport com for list of third party compatible controllers Data from 3rd Party controllers can be recorded directly from the following controllers NOTE Go to www StellarSupport com to find the latest information about approved platforms e Raven 440 450 460 660 e SideKick e GreenSeeker and YARA N Sensor e Rawson Accu Rate and Accu Plant e New Leader Mark III Mark IV e Dickey John Seed Manager e Vanguard PIC Seed Monitor e ISOBUS Implement with Task Controller enabled System will record Actual Rate Implement Width and GPS Recording Status implement switch not required directly from Field Doc Connect controller Task Controller will record all data implements can supply Rawson Raven and New Leader Controllers are also capable of accepting prescriptions from the GS3 display See the Map Based Prescriptions section for more information To setup a Field Doc Connect Controller NOTE You must purchase the harness PF90363 and follow the included instructions for connecting the controller to the display 1 Choose a Client Farm Field and Task in t
6. GREENSTAR 3 PRO button PC8677 UN O5AUG05 EQUIPMENT softkey Continued on next page CZ76372 000015F 19 27SEP10 2 6 95 1 062111 PN 291 YARA N Sensor 9 Select NEW in Profile drop down box then enter d desired Profile name Com Port Settings 10 Assign Com Port to number 2 YaraN 11 Select N Sensing in Port Type drop down box Profile 12 Select N Sensing LH in Controller Protocol drop down box 13 Then press ACCEPT button to continue Com Port Controller N Sensing LH Protocol d 2 a 7 k Ka Si Cancel 5 A COM Port Settings CZ76372 000015F 19 27SEP10 3 6 14 Select MENU button gt gt GREENSTAR 3 PRO E button gt gt DOCUMENTATION softkey gt gt PRODUCT APPLICATION tab MENU button PC12685 UN 14JUL10 GREENSTAR 3 PRO button PC8678 UN 05AUG05 DOCUMENTATION softkey Continued on next page CZ76372 000015F 19 27SEP10 4 6 95 2 062111 PN 292 YARA N Sensor GreenStar 2 Pro Documentation Product Application Type Single Product P ipti Le ake 0 00 lha Target pre 0 00 iha Actual Rate 0 00 iha 15 Select auto generated product application tab NOTE The product application tab needs to be generated manually in case of Field Doc Connect Continued on next page Prescription Application Method Height Depth 0 0 cm 16 Select Rx button to indicate prescription
7. Productivity Productivity Productivity Productivity Total Fuel Used Total Fuel Used Date Total Bales Total Lint Date PC8663 UN O5AUG05 MENU button PC12685 UN 14JUL10 GREENSTAR 3 PRO button PC8679 UN 05AUG05 TOTALS softkey To filter totals select criteria desired and press enter To clear totals press and hold 0 button Estimated time and area remaining require that an exterior boundary has been selected Interaction with Harvest Monitor Harvest Combine Harvest Cotton Harvest SPFH NOTE Today with the current GreenStar display and Operator Operator Operator mobile processor when Harvest Doc is on the Destination Destination Destination bus with Harvest Monitor the Totals come from Load Load Load HarvestDoc not Harvest Monitor The same shall be Load Name Load Name Load Name with Documentation on the GreenStar display family The user shall not be able to see Harvest Monitor totals through the Original GreenStar Monitor an auxiliary Original GreenStar Display or 70 Series Command Center unless Documentation is off Residue Management Gin Turnout Load Information In addition the totals will be filtered on the Load level If Harvest is not selected in the Operation list box the Load list box should be disabled CZ76372 0000130 19 13AUG10 1 1 General Overview PC8663 UN 05AUG05 Combine Specific Items are
8. MACHINE and IMPLEMENT tabs MACHINE tab allows setup of the following e Machine Type Used to select machine type e Machine Model Used to distinguish between different models Machine Name Used to distinguish between multiple machines of the same model e Connection Type Drawbar or 3 pt hitch e Machine Turn Radius e Turning Sensitivity e Recording Source Used to determine when recording turns on off e Machine Offset Used to eliminate skips or overlaps due to an offset receiver NOTE Not all recording sources are available for all machines Many recording sources require ground speed Recording Source NOTE If Manual Mode is selected the operator must push the Record or Pause Button to turn recording on or off for Documentation and Coverage Maps The following control units can be used with AUTO to turn recording on and off automatically e John Deere Harvest Monitor e John Deere SeedStar for Air Carts e John Deere SeedStar Gen 2 Monitor or Variable Rate Drive for Planters e John Deere SprayStar Gen A e John Deere Central Insecticide System e Raven 440 450 460 660 e SideKick e GreenSeeker e Rawson Accu Rate and Accu Plant e New Leader Mark III Mark IV e Dickey John Seed Manager e Vanguard PIC Seed Monitor e Task Control Unit compliant implements NOTE Dual Variety Function cannot be used with a three motor VRD planter NOTE PTO Hitch and SCV c
9. 1 30 1 1 062111 PN 329 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Task Controller Alarms Alarm Task Controller Device Configuration Error The device configuration block of the connected implement isn t valid The following error was detected Manufacturer Code Industry Group Identity Number Device Class ISO Error Code Faulty Object ID This alarm screen will be displayed whenever an error in the received Device Configuration Description of the ISO implement was detected Please contact your John Deere Dealer or the manufacturer of the implement Task Controller Device Configuration Error The device configuration block of the connected IMpPleMeNnt isn t vala The rollowing error was detected Manufacturer Code O Device Class o d Device Configuration Error CZ76372 00002B6 19 30MAR11 1 6 Alarm Task Controller Too Many Implements Connected The Task Controller has detected more than one supported ISO implements Please select the desired implement below p Task Controller This alarm screen will be displayed whenever the ISO Task Controller unit detects more then one compatible T l t ISO implement on the ISOBUS The pull down list will oo many IMmpiements contain all found ISO implements which can be used for connected documentation purposes Each ISO Implement is listed in the following format 10 chars of manufacturer name 10 E of ve implement type ISO network address in supported 15
10. 2 The intersection of current track and a perpendicular line through 1 stored turn point if only 1 stored point exists within 8 closest tracks 3 The intersection of current track and line through 2 closest stored turn points if 2 or more stored points exist within 8 closest tracks 4 lf 3 or more stored points exist within 8 closest tracks closest point will be checked to make sure it falls within 10 meters of projected line through 2nd and 3rd closest points If closest point is not within this distance then turn prediction will be based only on perpendicular line through closest point S A Point of Turn Prediction B NOT Point of Turn 7 Prediction ES d X A Point of Turn Prediction B NOT Point of Turn T Prediction 3 z N 2 Ka S O a gt 10m 3 z F D S 7 Ki 2 0 l 2 3 4 5 nz 8 a OQUO06050 00021E4 19 06NOV08 2 2 50 1 2 062111 PN 79 Guidance Lead Compensation NOTE This feature is disabled when working in Curve Track or AutoTrac modes Tracking lead compensation is used to calculate a position in front of receiver more closely associated with front of machine Tracking lead compensation helps minimize over steering when lining up with a track and position delays observed when making a turn Value entered will depend on speed of travel type of machine and user preference Default setting for lead compensation is 127 cm 50 in Settings range from 0 250 cm 0
11. A SATION Do not mount display control on the side of dual displays 2630 and Original GreenStar Dispaly This blocks the operator s view and overloads the bracket Mount the display control elsewhere The display control is the secondary navigational point on the GreenStar Display The display control contains 10 available short cut softkeys A J Thumb Wheel A ENTER button B CANCEL button C and MENU button D A Thumb Wheel B ENTER button C CANCEL button D MENU button PC8864 UN O9JANO6 Display Control CZ76372 000012E 19 13AUG10 1 1 15 3 062111 PN 16 Getting Started Display Secondary Navigation Secondary display controls consist of five buttons located on backside of display They provide backup navigation in the event that the primary display controls are not communicating with display ENTER button A and CANCEL button D operate the same as they do on the primary display controls Up Arrow B and Down Arrow C simulate thumb wheel operation on display control DISPLAY RESET button E resets display without cycling power on vehicle Hold for 3 seconds to reboot A Enter D Cancel B Up arrow E Display reset C Down arrow Wa K Te vy Web Display Secondary Navigation PC8580 UN 17AUG05 0QU06050 000229E 19 20NOVO06 1 1 Capturing Screenshots DISPLAY RESET button A can be used to capture screenshots from th
12. Cancel PC13242 UN 14APR11 the more accurate Swath Control is If the machine speed is drastically changing while entering or exiting a boundary or previous coverage area Swath Control cannot anticipate that change because it estimates your Turn on and off position based on current position direction and speed Once a machines Turn on and Turn off time is determined it remains the same unless a dramatic system change is made to the machine For example a change in system plumbing affects the average physical machine reaction time NOTE When using multiple Swath Control capable control units the Turn on or off time is most accurate at the primary operation location of implement offsets All other operations are less accurate Each operation can be assigned its own On and Off time Set the primary operation on off time using the directions above For the secondary operations follow the directions above and then adjust as necessary to compensate for distance from primary operation and the distance traveled by the implement s Speed will greatly influence theses on off times Keep this in mind when adjusting the times for secondary operations NOTE See the Understanding Swath Control Turn on and Turn off Settings later in this section for examples of Turn on and off times when multiple applications exist CZ76372 00002CF 19 28APR11 1 1 75 8 062111 PN 249 Swath Control Enabling
13. PC12850 UN 27SEP10 CZ76372 000015F 19 27SEP10 5 6 95 3 062111 PN 293 YARA N Sensor Prescription Product Type Rate Units Look Ahead sec Prescription Multiplier 100 Out of Field Loss of GPS Prescription 0 00 Rate Wha LI g D z 7 S S S Prescription 17 Select YARA N Sensor from Prescription drop down GreenStar 3 will read the rate provided by the YARA N Sensor and will send it as prescription rate to the 18 Select the ENTER button to accept the prescription connected implement controller 19 Setup is complete list CZ76372 000015F 19 27SEP10 6 6 95 4 062111 PN 294 GreenSeeker G PS Setti ngs PC8663 UN O5AUG05 NOTE GreenSeeker is for use in North America and YARA N Sensor is for use in Europe Press MENU button gt gt StarFire iTC button gt gt StarFire PC8659 UN OSAUGOS MENU Dutton iTC softkey gt gt Serial Port tab StarFire ic StarFire iTC button StarFire iTC softkey PC8680 UN O5AUG05 GreenSeeker is a trademark of NTech Industries Inc CZ76372 0000185 19 27SEP10 1 2 StarFire iTC Main Output rate Hz D 5 PC9709A UN 25SEP07 Reference the GreenSeeker manual to check for match the GreenSeeker settings GGA and RMC must GreenSeeker GPS settings Set the Baud and Output be checked in the Messages section of the Serial Port rates for the S
14. STANDARD CAL screen 2 Harvest a yield sample 3 Press STOP button to end procedure 4 Enter scale weight for sample just harvested Harvested Weight Approximate weight of cotton that has been harvested during calibration process Scale Weight Allows scale weight to be entered after a calibration run is complete During calibration run indicates approximate weight of cotton that has been harvested Calibration Factor Allows mass flow sensor to read accurately Value will be updated automatically by calibration procedure This value can also be adjusted manually Continued on next page Standard Cal Area ac Yield Calibration is Stopped Harvested Weight Ib Scale Weight Ib Calibration Factor Hos PEE SES Hoo PAGE SETUP Row Compensation o s Yield Cal Standard Cal INFO alli 2 z PC12912 UN 24SEP10 7760 Cotton Picker Round Module Calibration Instructions Make sure the accumulator and bale chamber are empty before harvesting Push START button Harvest a yield sample of one to four round modules Stop harvesting before completing the last full module Press STOP button to end procedure Empty accumulator and perform a manual wrap Enter scale weight for sample just harvested Use weight of round module or truck load for calibration weight Nh Be aS 65 58 062111 PN 219 CZ76372 0000182 19 24SEP10 4 5 Doc
15. Select ELEVATOR GRAIN MOISTURE button to save CZ76372 000017F 19 24SEP10 2 4 65 50 062111 PN 211 Documentation Moisture Alarm This screen is used to determine the set points minimum and maximum for activation of the moisture alarm Select MOISTURE ALARM button on SETUP MOIS TURE screen and SETUP MOISTURE ALARM screen will appear Select MINIMUM MOISTURE button and using numeric keypad enter a new minimum setting Select MAXIMUM MOISTURE button and using numeric keypad enter a new maximum setting Select MOISTURE ALARM button to toggle ON OFF Saul Moisture Alarm 3 4 Minimum Moisture Alarm Gi Maximum Moisture Le Alarm Gei DA el Moisture Alarm d SES e SETUP DDOE PC12906 UN 24SEP10 Y EI m Moisture a Moisture Alarm CZ76372 000017F 19 24SEP10 3 4 Moisture Curve Three moisture curve choices are e Enter New Curve This would be used when a new curve has been developed for a new crop e Update Curve This would be used when a better curve has been developed for a current crop e Restore Curve Defaults This would be used when to reinstate the original curve Refer to MOISTURE CURVE CALIBRATION CODES later in this section for the latest available codes This screen is used to enter new moisture curves that may be provided by the factory Use the following to enter a new curve as directed 1 Select MOIST
16. UN O5AUG05 EQUIPMENT softkey CZ76372 0000143 19 27SEP10 2 6 100 2 062111 PN 296 GreenSeeker 10 Select NEW in Profile drop down box then enter 7 desired Profile name Com Port Settings 11 Assign Com Port to number 2 GreenSeeker 12 Select N Sensing in Port Type drop down box Profile 13 Select Greenseeker NA in Controller Protocol drop down box 14 Then press ACCEPT button to continue Com Port Controller Greenseeker NA Protocol oO d 2 i 7 4 Ka g Cancel 5 a COM Port Settings CZ76372 0000143 19 27SEP10 3 6 15 Select MENU button gt gt GREENSTAR 3 PRO EE button gt gt DOCUMENTATION softkey gt gt PRODUCT APPLICATION tab MENU button PC12685 UN 14JUL10 GREENSTAR 3 PRO button PC8678 UN 05AUG05 DOCUMENTATION softkey Continued on next page CZ76372 0000143 19 27SEP10 4 6 1 00 3 062111 PN 297 GreenSeeker GreenStar 2 Pro Documentation Single Product Dolomite 28 Prescription Prescription Rate 0 00 gal fac Target Application Rate 40 08 Method gal ac o D D Actual E Rate 10 00 dereen EA gaVac Advanced Settings O A 16 Select auto generated product application tab 17 Select Rx button to indicate prescription Continued on next page CZ76372 0000143 19 27SEP10 5 6 1 00 4 062111 PN 298 GreenSeeker Prescription Date Created Pro
17. oO S d Z oo Z Select an area from above 7 total gal 7 S 3 48pm 5 3 Sera Ce A ts 3 Layout Manager Option F Example of Layout Option F cayour enger P 0 0 tatal ac 0 028 ra 0 0Z H geg ach 0 00 i wn gac e s e S Z oO 8 x n z T 2 oO Zz Select an area from abave 7 total gat o 8 2 g S Y E S 5 a a Layout Manager Option G Example of Layout Option G Continued on next page CZ76372 0000160 19 29SEP10 4 5 40 3 062111 PN 35 Layout Manager cayout manager Select an area from above gt PC9040 UN 17APRO06 0 0 0 048 0 0Z H 0 002 oO 0 08 total gat Ka Layout Manager Option H Layout maneger Select an area from above Layout Manager Option e PC9042 UN 17APR06 Select an area from above PC9044 UN 17APR06 Se 0 9 Ps E Se 0 0 0 08 ol 0 08 totel get 0 0 total ac 0 05 zen mith 0 0 0 0 08 oO OO total gat 1 0 Cin so Steur Sunsitivtty Layout Manager Option J IMPORTANT When setting up the display with vehicle key in the accessory position power on engine off turn key to OFF position for 20 seconds BEFORE starting the vehicle This will ensure the setup data is saved to the internal memory prior to operating If the vehicle is running during setup and programming turn the vehicle off with key Example of Layout Option J in the OFF
18. Increase or decrease the prescription rate by 15 All rates in the prescription are adjusted by 15 Select ENTER button Prescription Overview Background Layer Map Setting Tab The operator can select the prescription map as the background layer in the map settings page when a prescription is being applied Aerial images can also be used as a background layer As applied data will show over the prescription layer as it is recorded To select the prescription as a background layer Select GREENSTAR 3 PRO gt MAPPING gt MAP SETTINGS Then choose from the from the BACKGROUND drop down menu For more information on Maps refer to the Maps section of this operator s manual CZ76372 00002B4 19 30MAR11 2 3 In the Look Ahead input box A enter the number of seconds to look ahead for prescription rate changes This is an adjustment to compensate for the delay between the control unit making the rate change and the solution pump responding This should be between 0 and 4 seconds Default is 0 0 seconds NOTE Text B will be displayed and the accept button will become inactive when prescription base units do not match i e liquid units vs weight units or gallons vs pounds Correcting the base unit measurement mismatch will allow the prescription to be applied To convert prescription shapefiles select Shapefile from the drop down menu and select the enter button This will take you to the Shapefile Con
19. n bel targeted rate as performed on the first 1 1 38500 F A User 1 Rate for All Drive B Target Rate x Selections checkbox Spe Pe ae CH a CH Rote Seeds ac a Use 1 Rate for All x AL de 5 GI 5 28500 3 36000 Ei 4 S a CZ76372 0000121 19 28SEP10 14 17 PC10857UT UN 31MAR10 Advanced Settings Optional The advanced settings softkey allows the user to provide sl E more information about the operation that is going to be recorded This information will be available in APEX for Select Advanced Settings A A Advanced Settings button Continued on next page CZ76372 0000121 19 28SEP10 15 17 65 1 0 062111 PN 171 Documentation Select Application Method A Select Tillage Practice B Advanced Settings Conventional Till b Tillage Practice v Seed Height Depth 2 2 in 4 Cancel Broadcast Seeding Tillage Practices B PC10857UU UN 31MAR10 PC10857UV UN 31MAR10 PC10857UW UN 31MAR10 CZ76372 0000121 19 28SEP10 16 17 Enter seed height depth PC10857UX UN 31MAR10 Seed Height Depth 2 2 in CZ76372 0000121 19 28SEP10 17 17 65 11 062111 PN 172 Documentation Using Documentation with Seeder Air Carts NOTE Before setting up Documentations ensure SeedStar Air Cart is setup See SeedStar Air E Cart Operator s Manual for procedures Prescription When u
20. w ao N 7 z T Es Ka 1 3 Ki R N 5 a COM Port Settings Page 1 Continued on next page CZ76372 000015E 19 27SEP10 2 6 1 05 1 062111 PN 300 Central Insecticide System 1 Select the Implement Type and Implement Name from the drop downs Com Port Settings 2 Select Product App in the Operation drop down 3 Select John Deere in the Control Manufacturer drop down 4 Select CIS in the Model drop down Press the NEXT PAGE button to go to next step Implement Name Product App Control Manufacturer 4 Cancel PC12916 UN 27SEP10 COM Port Settings Page 2 CZ76372 000015E 19 27SEP10 3 6 A controller summary page is shown Press accept button S to save settings and return to the Equipment Page Com Port Settings After completing setup the GS3 will attempt to connect to the CIS controller Material Class Controller Manufacture ohn Deere cis SS a Lu o N d E 7 gt gt 3 3 Accept a p 5 a COM Port Settings Page 3 Continued on next page CZ76372 000015E 19 27SEP10 4 6 1 05 2 062111 PN 301 Central Insecticide System Select MENU gt gt GREENSTAR 3 PRO gt gt Peco ee DOCUMENTATION DOCUMENTATION softkey CZ76372 000015E 19 27SEP10 5 6 teen Star Documentation A Planting Seeding Product Application Type Single Product EN Vv Add Product Prescription pearl I gal ac
21. 65 29 Calibration Manual Calibration ccsccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 65 59 Adjust Manual 65 49 Quick CGaltbratton 65 57 COUN ere G5 5Q ECOL CIN EE 65 55 EE 65 56 _ Standard Calibration EE 65 58 Quick Calibration ccccccccecccccceccececcceccececeeeeeees 65 57 Country SetNg sisirin 35 7 Row Compensation c cccccccscscseesesesesseeseseeees 65 57 Coverage Map Sear Sets hate e ha ee 50 9 Standard Calbratlon a 65 58 Creating an AB Cume 50 43 Dual Beam Radar Sens 60 9 Crop Growth Giage ccccccccseccsecsecsetscteeteeeeeenes 45 14 EE E 45 14 Performance Monitor 60 8 Curve Sensitivity SE 50 68 Radar Calibration EE eee lath 60 8 Curve ANA CK iter nthe toe eects EE 50 42 EaneelBgtton eent dude EE 15 3 Curve Track Mode Secondary Navigation PF AG EE EE E 15 4 AB ENEE EE EE canteen tgacen tenors 50 6 Capturing ZGcreenshoite 15 4 Adaptive EE 50 5 Central Injection Gvstem 105 1 Challenge Code 35 1 D Checkbox FOCUS Colon Zeg ebe Sage 35 5 Data Management 120 1 ele dl Lu el 35 5 Date SYNC With Cap 35 4 Setting Forimat c 4 0 225 ne ee tdi eee 35 7 ele ee LEE 50 50 Deactivating AutoTrac Circle Track Mode 50 5 Combines nnee 50 74 kat bonnier a aa 50 50 CoJo he ee A E T 50 73 petenzen 50 50 Sugar Cane Harvester eee eee 50 76 DOTS 1 EE 50 48 ratoksi hn eege teak 50 72 Continued on next page Index 2 BNS Index Page Page Deactivation Message Optreeg Eer 65 67 Oe Ne TEE 50
22. A Softkey G CZ76372 00000B0 19 15JUL10 3 7 60 10 062111 PN 154 Performance Monitor 4 Select VTi 001Implement in the drop down menu Mich implemen Irmpkemerg 4 gt Implemere Impremen Implemerk Implemere Implement PC9126 UN 17APRO6 VTi 001Implement CZ76372 00000B0 19 15JUL10 4 7 MAGLIO Ch Olen Ask get fe Aleve za 5 Scroll down until you see Address 60 PC9127 UN 17APRO6 Address 60 Continued on next page CZ76372 00000B0 19 15JUL10 5 7 60 11 PN 165 Performance Monitor 6 Address 60 should display 57 42 if radar is feeding from the iTC GPS receiver If this value is 57 42 you are directly feeding GPS radar signal Ground based radars will display approximately the same values when connected If zero is displayed no radar signal is being seen GPS nor Ground Based Des Kan Cooter Ova oct Arche zen REN inner gaben GU Friemen KL Networe imponert Devre VTioo Agress 0 Adoress Type PC9128 UN 17APRO6 Display 57 42 CZ76372 00000B0 19 15JUL10 6 7 If operating a CAN Based vehicle and actual speed not 0 000 is displayed in on the radar input screen the vehicle IS seeing a direct radar signal either GPS or Ground Based Radar depending on the position of the radar signal wire connection located behind the command center Certain CAN Based vehicles will need CCU and TECU vehicle addr
23. A bei Es K zZ A amp Ar 3 d Zz t D S N T a el o Fach g Q N H T k Z H gt n T _ g Zz a Sg g Jas S ES E a gt d p d st ED N N N E te S Si D Seas 2 oO o S Fo 5 Kal ZS N JS56696 00004D6 19 070CT08 1 1 145 1 062111 PN 359 John Deere Service Literature Available 145 2 PN 360 John Deere Service Keeps You On The Job John Deere Parts We help minimize downtime by putting genuine John Deere parts in your hands in a hurry That s why we maintain a large and varied inventory to stay a jump ahead of your needs TS100 UN 23AUG88 DX IBC A 19 04JUN90 1 1 The Right Tools Precision tools and testing equipment enable our Service Department to locate and correct troubles quickly to save you time and money TS101 UN 23AUG88 DX IBC B 19 04JUN90 1 1 Well Trained Technicians School is never out for John Deere service technicians Training schools are held regularly to be sure our personnel know your equipment and how to maintain it Result Experience you can count on TS102 UN 23AUG88 DX IBC C 19 04JUN90 1 1 Prompt Service Our goal is to provide prompt efficient care when you want it and where you want it We can make repairs at your place or at ours depending on the circumstances see us depend on us JO
24. B a Ni O S Wa r S a a Smoothing Tight Turns OFF Smoothing Tight Turns ON A Previous Pass B Next Pass Smoothing Tight C Next Pass Smoothing Tight D In Ground Turn Radius Turns Off Turns On With Smoothing Tight Turns ON the path is generated based on user s turn radius CZ76372 00001A4 19 040CT10 6 20 Clear Adaptive Curves Data Gi ET Settings GreenStar 3 Pro GUIDANCE gt gt GUIDANCE SETTINGS tab gt gt CURVE TRACK SETTINGS CHANGE button Cana Tak Clear Adaptive Curves Data lIf Curve Track data has been recorded previously for this field and operator does not want to use it or the internal memory is full due to stored Curve Track data the Curve Track data can be removed from the memory Smooth E Turns d A Curve Track Settings E Clear Adaptive Curves Data 0 gt imptement B Curve Track Recording F Repeat Mode In Ground Turn 30 000 C Smooth Tight Turns G Accept Radius D Implement In Ground Turn ft e Radius Clear Adaptive 5 Curves Data ei T Fa F repeat Mode E 8 N amp 5 a Continued on next page CZ76372 00001A4 19 040CT10 7 20 50 28 062111 PN 95 Guidance To removed Curve Track data from the internal memory GUIDANCE SETTINGS tab gt gt TRACKING MODE drop down box gt gt ADAPTIVE CURVES gt gt CURVE TRACK SETTINGS CHANGE button gt gt CLEAR DATA button There are two options for clearing Curve Track data e F
25. CZ76372 00002B8 19 30MAR11 2 8 Remove Varieties lt Add Edit Variety Once the variety has been entered it cannot be deleted or edited using the GreenStar display However it is possible to remove a variety from view on the display Choose the variety you wish to remove from view From the variety drop down menu select the entry with the dashes Variety Select Accept Although the variety is removed from view it may still be chosen at a later date for documentation Lot Number Indicates T required field Z 7 e 4 S Cancel 5 a Continued on next page CZ76372 00002B8 19 30MAR11 3 8 65 1 3 062111 PN 174 Documentation Assign Variety to Tank For tanks configured for seeding the operator may assign a variety to each tank of the aircart Select Assign Variety to Tank Choose the variety that is to be assigned Select Accept PC10857VC UN 31MAR10 Assign Variety to Tank PC10857VD UN 31MAR10 Assign Variety to Tank Select lie variely i E CZ76372 00002B8 19 30MAR11 4 8 Population Weight Acre If using a John Deere Aircart this number is set using that monitor This is also required when any compatible controller is connected If using a non John Deere Aircart that does not have a controller reporting to that display the target rate button is active on the GS3 display PC10857VE UN 31MAR10 GI seeds ac Target Rate button Select Target Rate butt
26. EMU ee ee 60 1 60 2 Alerts Se oes at ect Oe AU 130 5 Physical With 45 11 EEN 60 14 Table EE 45 11 Resetting Deg creche Sasetege Steg 130 5 Pinout Resetting Totals GreenStar Component AE 135 2 Performance Monitor 60 14 GSD RCD Dee ENEE dE de E Reece E E de 135 2 Residue Management ERIC E e eege 65 29 SIE TEE 65 5 Resources Conditions Swath UE 75 10 ST oj EE 45 14 Platform Core Software Softkey eeler 130 18 Cliente etcetera 45 14 Platform Belt Pickup ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetees 65 31 Crop Growth Stage 45 14 Point Flags 2c c24 tet te fesse asaini rene i asosiasi ahi 45 30 EE t Eegeregie on sce the Se No oon 45 14 Power Light PGA WEE 45 14 DIS PIA PERE E ET eee te Arete terete 15 2 PILING ee 45 14 POQWOMEU Pisict ate iesk gate tecnt eege ged Veit 30 1 lLic nse n ena ee ee es 45 14 Pre Season Checklist e 45 14 Guidance ee ENEE eu 130 6 SkWCOnditiOn sic eee set ees i 45 14 eTe To l a EE 130 5 Soil Moisture 45 14 Continued on next page Index 6 062111 PN 6 Index Page Page Soil Temperature s nsessneeeeeeeeee eeren nerenr eerren 45 14 GreenStar 3 GE 45 2 RE EE 45 14 RS232 Receivers eseesseeeeseeeserenesererrreeserreeee 110 2 Temperature ceeeeeeeeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 45 14 BEIE EE 65 27 Wind Direction 00 cccccecceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 45 14 Harvest Monttor 65 30 65 32 Wind Gpeed 45 14 MOIST EE 65 50 Resume Switch 50 57 With Harvest D
27. Enabling The System for a Seeding Operation ALL of the following are required for Swath Control to function e The implement must be lowered into the ground e Section switches are on e Master Implement switch must be on e Swath Control Master and at least one Operation checked e Vehicle speed must be greater than 0 km h 0 mph for all planting and seeding operations e Vehicle is within 7 64 km 4 75 miles of the field reference point Refer to Limitations of Swath Control section for more information about reference points Enabling the System for a Product Application Operation ALL of the following are required for Swath Control to function e Section Switches are on e Master Implement Switch is on e Swath Control Master and at least one Operation checked e Speed is greater than 0 8 km h 0 5 mph e Vehicle is within 7 64 km 4 75 miles of the field reference point Refer to Limitations of Swath Control section for more information about reference points NOTE If IBS Index Boom Section or a boom section switch has turned off a section swath control does not turn it on If Swath Control has turned off a section IBS does not turn it back on Enabling the System for Non Deere ISO Implements Europe Only e Swath Control check box is checked e Implement is set up correctly according to the implement manufactures Operator Manual CZ76372 00002D0 19 28APR11 1 1 75 9 062111 PN 250
28. Managing User Access Managing User Access Theory of Operation 25 1 Display Navigation Power Up raient tan dete na eet ede 30 1 Display Setup Display Software Activations ssssseeseeeeeeee 35 1 Page Obtaining Activation Code amp Activating Software In Display ccceeeeeeeeeeeees 35 1 Managing Activations eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 35 2 Display Display Soft key E 35 3 Display Brightness Control 35 6 Settings Soft key CG 35 7 Diagnostics Soft key Ui 35 8 Calculator due deit 35 9 Layout Manager Layout Manager 40 1 Configure Multiple RUN pages 40 5 GreenStar General License Agreement nsseeeeeeeeeeeneeeneneeeerneeeeene 45 1 GREENSTAR 3 PRO button 45 1 Setup Wizard ea 45 2 EQUIPMENT softkey 45 3 MACHINE and IMPLEMENT tabs 45 4 Machine Getup ne 45 5 Implement Setup nsnsnsnnnnnennnnnneeneeennnnnenreeeeeenne 45 8 Resource Conditions Softkey ccee 45 14 Fieldsin a E 45 14 Field Locators Aire ee aer eed ee ee 45 15 Delete and Rename Client Farm and Field 45 15 Mapping Goftkey 45 16 MAPS tab sees dete siete EE 45 16 Boundaries Tab 45 21 Delete and Rename Boundaries 0000000000 45 23 Driven Headland Offset Boundary 00 45 24 Top And Bottom Offsets Boundary 45 26 Constant Offset Boundary ceeee 45 29 FLAGS taD ot rerai era ceeds 45 30 Guidance Read This Manual
29. O Carrier Add Product Water 0 00 Add Product Prescription Application Broadcast Method Height Depth t n 8 0 PC13222 UN 30MAR11 E Add Product F Carrier G Advanced Settings e Selecting a desired Product Application Type C e Defining the ingredients by pressing Add Product buttons E Up to 6 defined ingredients per tank mix are supported e Specify the carrier by pressing the Carrier button F Advanced Settings Button G allows operator to input the Application Method and the Height Depth e H the tank mix being used was created in the GS3 display PRODUCT APPLICATION will appear on the product tab A Continued on next page CZ76372 00002BA 19 30MAR11 2 4 65 23 062111 PN 184 Documentation Define the ingredients by pressing Add Product button on GreenStar 3 Pro Documentation screen Product Application A Product Application D Rate Units Pen B Product Type E Rate SE oi nsecticide C Product Name Hedi Lorsban Product Name E geg Rate Units PC13223 UN 30MAR11 Product Application CZ76372 00002BA 19 30MAR11 3 4 Specify the carrier by pressing the Carrier button on the GreenStar 3 Pro Documentation screen Carrier A Carrier C Base Solution Rate i i 6 Wat Se ki ni ada Base Solution Rate Rate Units Die PC13224 UN 30MAR11 Carrier CZ76372 00002BA 19
30. Press the Enter key to create the report If you have a lot of data in the memory generating the report takes longer particularly if you are performing an operation at the same time While the report is being created you can view other screens normally The display lets you know when the report is complete PC12838 UN 30AUG10 Continued on next page CZ76372 000015B 19 040CT10 2 3 70 1 1 062111 PN 240 Totals When you return to the report screen you see the results of your custom filter This screen is like the current totals screen with the exception that the left hand box now shows the custom fitter that was used The results on the custom filter report include the current totals for the operation that you are performing if it matches the filter that you specified The current totals are included as of the time that the report was created If you would like to refresh the screen to show more recent data you can press the Refresh filter button at the top of the screen A You can change the custom filter by pressing the Modify Custom Filter button which brings up the custom filter Wet Vieki buic 195 5 Ory Viets 193 3 bute Average Moisture pers 15 89 Wet Weight tb 5684 tw 101 5 Dry Weight db 5619 tu 100 3 Wet Throughput buh 2867 Average Productivity acm 14 66 A Worked gt ga Ube dialog box again e Area Remaining oO ot You can al
31. Target Application Method Rate gal ac HeightDepth 0 0 in BC Documentation PC12918 UN 27SEP10 A Seeding tab A is auto generated when a John Deere with the CIS controller Specify all required information planter is on the CAN bus A Product Application tab B for both tabs is also auto generated when connection is established CZ76372 000015E 19 27SEP10 6 6 105 3 062111 PN 302 Connecting RS 232 GPS Receivers Connecting RS 232 GPS Receivers NOTE AutoTrac requires CAN GPS messages e Parity none from a StarFire receiver e Stop 1 e Flow Control none Non John Deere GPS receivers that output correct NMEA 1 or 5 Hz output rate Recommend operation at 5 Hz 0183 standard messages can be used for documentation Guidance requires 5 Hz and manual guidance on GreenStar application It is o e f critical that receiver is setup to output following messages Without these messages receiver will not function with GreenStar application s GGA e GSA A harness and installation instructions are available to e RMC setup at 19200 baud This is fixed and connect DB9 port of receiver to correct pins of display Non adjustable connector See a John Deere dealer for more information e Data Bits 8 OUO6050 0000CE1 19 21JUL10 1 1 Gs PN 303 Connecting RS 232 GPS Receivers RS232 Harness kit The RS232 Harness kit PF90363 can be utilized to aid installation when connectin
32. Target rate has changed Alarm for manual controller Alarm when Raven is communicating everything but an actual rate Raven controller not communicating actual rate Verify Raven controller settings and connections to the display Special handling will be needed for each controller to monitor the health of the connection Communication problem with controller Check connections to controller CZ76372 00001B8 19 040CT10 1 1 130 20 062111 PN 338 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics GreenStar Diagnostics Required Items for Documentation The following items are required for documentation to function e Client Farm and Field e Task e Operation e Operation Details e Product Type Name e Target Rate Rate Units e Recording Source Implement Width Offsets e Controller Setup when using 3rd Party controllers NOTE 3rd Party controllers are controllers using RS232 connection Field Doc Connect and ISOBUS compliant controllers supporting Task Controller functionality Required Items for Guidance The following items are required for guidance to function e Tracking mode set to Straight Track Curve Track Circle Track only available with optional PivotPro module or Row Finder e Track spacing See equipment section of GreenStar Basics Pro General Setup e Track 0 Except for Curve Track and Row Finder e GPS signal StarFire signal required CZ76372 0000144 19 26AUG10 1
33. The system can be configured to operate in three modes e Minimize Skip e Minimize Overlap e Percent Overlap Minimize Skip ensures product coverage up to field boundaries interior boundaries and as applied area reducing skips Minimize Skip can result in over application and is 100 overlap Minimize Overlap ensures that product coverage does not extend over or out of field boundaries It also ensures that product coverage does not extend into an interior boundary This setting could cause skips along field boundaries or interior boundaries depending on the angle a boundary is crossed Minimize Overlap can result in under application and is 0 overlap Percent Overlap allows settings from 0 125 Overlap NOTE To achieve increasing amounts of overlap utilize the Percent Overlap between 100 125 This will allow the operator to achieve desired results and prevent skips by creating intentional overlap It is not recommended to utilize the Turn on and Turn off times to achieve intentional overlap this can cause additional system complications A Exterior Boundaries D lInterior Boundaries Percent Drop Down Menu Input Box B Exterior Boundaries E Coverage Drop Down Menu Percent Input Box F Coverage Percent Input C lInterior Boundaries Box Drop Down Menu Overlap Settings xterior Boundaries Minimize Skip A v interior Boundaries Minimize Overlap c ha xterior Boundaries Overlap A v Interior
34. Wheel Slip CZ76372 00000BE 19 15JUL10 3 11 Fuel Per Hour If available from the vehicle network the operator is able to view the instantaneous fuel flow in gal h or liters h The output value is a computation that factors desired fuel quantity not measured current engine speed cylinder size of the engine and fuel density This will then give the operator an idea of what range to expect for consumption PC9053 UN 17APR06 0 0 D H a Fuel Per Hour Continued on next page CZ76372 00000BE 19 15JUL10 4 11 60 2 062111 PN 146 Performance Monitor Fuel Per Area The current fuel per area measurement gal area or liters area will be shown on the screen The value is based on current fuel usage implement header width and speed The area counter is enabled when the arrow is in the down position The figure below shows the fuel per area icon PC9054 UN 17APR06 O OPZ Fuel Per Area CZ76372 00000BE 19 15JUL10 5 11 Instantaneous Productivity Instantaneous Productivity is calculated from the vehicle speed and implement boom header width and is expressed in terms of area hour If recording is off the area hour value will be zero The figure below shows the instantaneous productivity icon PC9055 UN 17APR06 OO GHz Instantaneous Productivity CZ76372 00000BE 19 15JUL10 6 11 Area Counter The operator is able to select an area counter The coun
35. When the component is reconnected to the GS3 display the Profile is automatically recalled and loaded A Profile C Enter button B Com Port D Abort button ZX1043700 UN 03DEC09 CZ76372 0000054 19 09JUL10 1 1 90 8 Spe PN 290 YARA N Sensor YARA N Sensor PC8663 UN 05AUG05 NOTE The YARA N Sensor is for use in Europe NOTE The GreenSeeker activation enables the YARA N Sensor module PC12685 UN 14JUL10 IMPORTANT FieldDoc Connect Cable must be wired for COM Port 2 at the GreenStar 3 display If no implement controller is connected to the GS3 Display the YARA N Sensor cannot GreenStar be selected as a prescription 1 Connect the implement controller to the GS3 Display GREENSTAR 3 PRO button 2 Attach YARA N Sensor hardware according to the PC8676 UN 05AUG05 YARA N Sensor manual 3 Connect the YARA N Sensor display to the GreenStar RS232 cab connector MENU button 4 Calibrate Setup YARA N Sensor System according to the YARA N Sensor manual button gt gt RESOURCE CONDITIONS softkey gt gt RESOURCES tab 6 Fill in Client Farm Field and Task information to enable documentation CZ76372 000015F 19 27SEP10 1 6 7 Select MENU button gt gt GREENSTAR 3 PRO button P08663 UN 05AUG05 gt gt EQUIPMENT softkey gt gt MACHINE tab Fill in the machine information 8 Press COM Port button MENU button PC12685 UN 14JUL10
36. cece ecceececeeeseeeeeeneeeneeees 65 33 Cancel Button 15 4 SETUP YIELD CALIBRATION Enter Button eet 15 4 Calibration Factor Up Down Arrows c cccccccsesesscecesesesesescsteceseseseseees 15 4 Adjust Manually Seeding Lett ee bette di tek di ete 65 59 Pre Season Checker 130 5 Shift Track EEN 50 4 Self Propelled Forage Harvester Noo 010010 t 0 epee 50 16 AutoTrac Settings SE EE ee 50 15 Activating System 50 75 Shortcut Buttons ccc ccecceessteeeeeeessessseeeeeeeseees 15 3 Deactivating System 50 75 Sky Condition 0 0 0 0 cece ceeececeeeeessseeeeeeeesesssneeeeeseeeees 45 14 Enabling System cccccccesssssssseeseeseseseseseses 50 75 Smooth Tight Turns Serial Number Adaptive Curve Track Mode nssnssnnnnnneneeaneeneeea 50 27 IEN 35 14 Softkey Set Track O GE 50 5 Auxiliary Controls ENEE 85 7 Settings Diagnostics 35 8 EE 100 1 Display E 35 3 EE cic na cd ety calc ee 65 27 Documentation 65 2 Performance Monitor 60 4 EGUIPIMGM ee See Siet 45 3 e EE 35 7 Hitch TYpe cies fst ee ee 45 4 Swath Control 75 10 Machine gt 45 4 Setup MOG sgiir toiii sitai iiinis i iki aiina 45 4 Adaptive Curve Track Mode ccccceeeseseseeeeees 50 32 Recording Gource 45 4 PTC ta te EE 50 55 GreenStar 3 GS3 Pro oe eee 45 1 er 45 21 Mapping E 45 21 Circle Track Made cecsincisnsesicesvrvestdnstvedeiessendetevins 50 48 Settings Softkey EE 35 7 Com HO a ooccccccccccccccccceccccccccececccceeeeccecccscceceecescceece 65 31 le CEET 70 1
37. he Imports the planter data He Exports to the same USB drive using a different Profile name 2011 5 1 4730 Sprayer Now there are now 3 Profiles in the GS3_2630 folder on the USB drive Operator 2 then Imports the Profile 2011 5 1 Planting He verifies the Machine and Implement settings for his sprayer and sprays the flagged areas in the field Operator 2 then Exports the data to the same Profile name 2011 5 1 Planting This allows the Export to go faster and no data is lost Question At this point will the As applied rate maps from the first fields that Operator 2 was spraying be in the Profile 2011 5 1 Planting on the USB drive Answer Yes because when Operator 2 Imported 2011 5 1 Planting the As applied maps on the display were NOT overwritten When he Exported in Step 4 all of the As applied maps in the display were saved to the Profile 2011 5 1 Planting on the USB drive See the Data Type Details table to understand what data is overwritten during Import and Export Operator 2 then Imports his previous Profile 2011 5 1 4730 Sprayer back into his display so that he has the setup data and maps from the fields he was previously spraying Later the Farm Manager unloads the data from the USB drive to Apex Apex automatically finds setup information and data from all 3 Profiles When files have duplicate names the files that were most recently changed will be Unloaded to Apex CZ76372 00002DB 19
38. select the line for Header Type eve Setup in Harvest Doc GE Type Do ae e es Yield Calibration CLR serue Record Stop Height 2 Tere eor oe e SETUP a dor Setup ie Continued on next page CZ76372 00002BC 19 30MAR11 4 12 65 39 062111 PN 200 Documentation SETUP Header Type You can then change the Header Type or Header Width if needed Changes made here will override automatic selection that was based on crop and variety Header Width m D a efefefalsy Sg E B s D LJ pl i D a Pace w fe g amp Haake z 5 WE O 15 42 D e SETUP S an Harvest Mon tH gt Continued on next page CZ76372 00002BC 19 30MAR11 5 12 65 40 062111 PN 201 Documentation Select MENU gt gt GS3 PRO gt gt EQUIPMENT gt gt ra a MACHINE When a moisture sensor is connected to the CAN bus the GS3 will automatically detect Combine as machine type Menu button PC12685 UN 14JUL10 G omom GREENSTAR 3 PRO button PC8677 UN 05AUG05 GreenStar 2 Pro Equipment 2 O 3 Es H g z Turning Sensitivity 7 TS N kal N O a Equipment Page Continued on next page CZ76372 00002BC 19 30MAR11 6 12 65 4 1 062111 PN 202 Documentation Select HEADER The GS3 will read the header with from HMON and show it as the implement width GreenStar 2 Pro Equipme
39. test a file using the Shapefile Converter before field application NOTE The GS3 can support up to 125 shapefiles per USB drive Continued on next page PC12853 UN 31AUG10 E A Desktop Software other than Apex B USB Flash Drive C GS3 Display D GreenStar Prescription Application NOTE The Shapefile Converter can ONLY be used for prescription shapefiles NOTE An Rx folder must be created on the USB flash drive All prescription shapefiles must be saved to this folder This is the location the GS3 will be referencing to import the prescription shapefiles NOTE There will need to be two folders on the USB drive The Rx folder will contain the shape files and the GRx folder will contain the converted files that the GS3 will use CZ76372 0000329 19 14JUN11 1 6 65 62 062111 PN 223 Documentation Shapefile Conversion Home Page NOTE Shapefiles must be in the Rx folder on the USB Drive 1 Select the Shapefile you would like to convert from the drop down menu 2 Enter a Name name automatically populates and can be edited 3 Select the Column select the column that contains the product rate IMPORTANT Selecting the wrong column results in under or over application of product NOTE The unit system setting English or Metric on the GS3 display must match the shapefile unit system 4 Select the Product Type chemical fertilizer or
40. 1 Repeat Mode Repeat mode defaulting off if curves are not present in field 1 Repeat Mode ON a Manual Record Alert e Yes Turn repeat mode off begin recording e No Don t suppress subsequent alerts b Recording tied to AutoTrac Alert e Yes Turn repeat mode off begin recording e No Suppress subsequent alerts until power cycle cold or warm boot or enter a new field c Recording tied to Documentation Alert e Yes Turn repeat mode off begin recording e No Suppress subsequent alerts until power cycle cold or warm boot or enter a new field d Check field selection has changed e Yes Check that there are curve segments in this field Yes No Action No Default Repeat Off no alert 2 Repeat Mode OFF Check field selection has changed a Yes Correct Check that curve segments e Yes Alert e No No Action b No No Action NS43404 0000161 19 20JUL10 1 1 130 21 062111 PN 339 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Guidance Alarms Message Description SSU Communication Error No communication with vehicle steering controller SSU Check vehicle for diagnostic codes and contact your John Deere Dealer Turn Predictor Turned On Turn predictor is turned ON Use the check box to turn it OFF AutoTrac Deactivated AutoTrac system deactivates when operator is out of seat for more than 5 seconds AutoTrac The op
41. 1 Interior Headland ccceeccceececccceeeseeeeeeceececenees 45 22 Setting review ee eeeccceccceessssseeeeeesseestseeeeeeessseeaaes 90 6 Mapping Softkey ccccccssssseeeeeeessteeeeeeseseseees 45 21 BST 0 eee 90 2 90 4 Offsets Comar Order Number 35 1 Constant Ee ee ere ae 45 29 Combine Creating cccccccsececessseceesseeceeseeceessseeeeessaes 45 29 GreenStar 3 GS3 DIIVON ooo eee e cece EE A E AE E 45 24 SOUP EE 65 37 Creating EE 45 24 Combines Headland Zeene ebe 45 29 Activating Autolrarc 50 74 Greating iii ee ei ee 45 29 Deactivating Autofrac 50 74 Top and Bottom 00 cccccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 45 26 Enabling AUtoTrac eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaee 50 74 Cea a icc kien etch A cee 45 27 Constant Offset Boundaries cccceeceereeereeeees 45 29 Passable Interior BOUNCALY cccccceseceeseeees 45 21 E Cl EE 45 29 el octets heii erie antec E Heder dene eee 45 21 Controller Elle 35 4 Alan S ee ees 130 12 ln TEE 35 6 Task Gopntrelleg 2720 80 3 Bus Status aaaaenneeeeeeeeeeeeseereeneeeeerrrreserrrnrrreeerrne 130 4 Controllers e deeg EE ee 65 5 Button Non Deere nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 15 1 65 66 HResourcesiCond tions 45 14 RS 232 Receivers eseeeseeseeeeerreerrrrnsrrreesren 110 2 Volume 35 4 Corm leegen siet neet Sate E eelst 65 31 Cotton Cc Calibrations ceip iii ei ais 65 56 Gin Turnout Percent
42. 100 in Recommended Tracking Lead Compensation Machine Type Lead Compensation Sprayer 183 cm 72 in Combines 183 cm 72 in Row Crop Tractor 71 cm 28 in AWD Tractor 203 cm 80 in Track Tractors 127 cm 50 in 0QU06050 00021E5 19 14NOVO06 1 1 Vehicle Heading Arrow Place a check in Vehicle Heading Arrow check box D to display an arrow on the Guidance View page indicating heading direction after a line acquisition occurs Vehicle Heading Arrow provides indication of vehicle position in relation to the AutoTrac line C AutoTrac Deactivation Message D Vehicle Heading Arrow A Turning View B tTurn Predictor General Settings Oa V Tamming Visu Turn Predictor AutoTrac Deactivation Message SMV Vehicle Heading Arrow H E Guidance General Settings Page 1 Continued on next page PC12223 UN 31AUG09 JS56696 00006DA 19 31AUG09 1 2 50 13 062111 PN 80 Guidance BESSER amp Turn None 30 000 ft Vehicle Heading Arrow A View tab E Vehicle Heading Arrow B Guidance Settings tab F AutoTrac Guidance Path C Shift Track Settings tab G Shift Track Left D iTEC Pro tab H Shift Track Center When Heading Error is less than 0 5 degrees Vehicle Heading Arrow E turns green When Heading Error is greater than 0 5 degrees Vehicle Heading Arrow E turns yellow V
43. 120 4 Example 3 Transferring Guidance Lines 120 4 Example 4 Importing Global Prescriptions and Ghapeiles 120 5 Example 5 Modifying a Profile 120 5 Transferring Data between Two Displays 120 5 Delete Data Options nnnnnssnnnnnneeeeennneeeeeeeeee 120 5 Data Type Details 0 ee ceeceeeeceeeereeeeeeeeees 120 6 USB Troubleshooting Tips 120 6 Alarm GreenStar Setup Data Invalid 120 7 Alarm GreenStar Setup Data Corrupt 120 8 Updating Software Downloading Software Updates 125 1 Determining Software Version on Display 125 1 Updating Display and System Components 125 2 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Message Center 130 1 Viewing Basic Diagnostic Readings 130 5 Resetting Display 130 5 Pre Season Checklist for Geecdimg 130 5 Pre Season Checklist for Guidance 130 6 Pre Season Swath Control for Planters Checklist 22 22 2200 cceect sete a 130 6 Frequently Asked Questions 0snsneseeeenne 130 7 Reprogramming Error Codes nanssoaaaaaaeano 130 10 Alarm Gcreens 130 11 Task Controller Alarms sesnnseeenneeeenee eenen 130 12 Diagnostic Adresses 130 15 Diagnostic Trouble Codes ccceee 130 17 Trouble Code Pop Up Boxes Platform Core Software 130 18 Trouble Code Pop Up Boxes Docu mentation Goftware 130 20 GreenStar Diagnostics cceeeeeeeee 130 21 Repeat Mod
44. 30MAR11 4 4 65 24 062111 PN 185 Documentation GreenStar 2 Pro Documentation Viewing Locked Tank Mixes Insecticide If you created a locked tank mix A in Apex It is possible ea es to view the contents of the locked tank mix Press soft Product Application Typ Tank Mix Name A Lock Tank Mix B Locked Tank Mix softkey B Add Ee Add Beie Carrier z Water 15 00 wee ERS 0 o Prescription gaVac Target Application Rate Method galfac Height Depth 0 0 tin wm J Ler LS PC10857QU UN 31MAR10 Product Type Insecticide Product Name Lorsban Rate Units 150 00 Rate floz ac PC10857QV UN 14SEP09 CZ76372 000008B 19 09JUL10 1 1 65 25 BE Documentation Harvest Documentation NOTE Totals listed under TOTALS button are only calculated when documentation is turned on When using Harvest Doc on self propelled harvesting equipment Combine or Self Propelled Forage Harvester the operator should only choose one documentation tab HARVEST otherwise there will be no recording of data In case there is an OTHER tab on the GS3 Pro Documentation page this needs to be removed by selecting the OTHER tab and selecting REMOVE button See DOCUMENTATION softkey in this section to turn documentation on To turn documentation off for guidance only go to RESOURCES CONDITIONS softkey gt RESOURCES tab gt TASK Change TASK to DOCUMENTATIO
45. 4 130 24 Kolpe BNET tect oe i eh 110 2 Deleting Data Diy BOX EE 65 18 Adaptive Curve Track Mode 50 28 GreenGeeker 100 2 Desktop Software sssesseeeesneerenesernssrrnerrrrssrn ne 65 28 BEM ETE TA 65 26 Device Inte een 130 4 NO GPS Mode 65 1 Device Source Addresses eerren 135 1 Onl Otte sie ee a et 65 1 65 26 Diagnostic Addresses eneee 130 3 Operations ze co ecche coe ou E ae edb S 65 4 Diagnostic HReadmgs 50 69 TEE 65 5 Diagnostics HReourements cc cceeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeetaeeeeeeestaneeees 130 21 lei 130 15 Dead at eege eege ee 65 18 AUIO frabi rires eriei 130 22 Documentation softkeys ccccceeeeeeeeetesteeeeeees 65 2 BUS Statussecsccciencte tied cei vctieniva a e EE 130 4 Documentation Software Device No ann aa aaa eee a 130 4 Trouble Codes ceeeeeeseceeeeeseessteeeeeeeeesssneeeeeenss 130 20 EIERE 15 2 Drive Circle Documentation 130 21 Track 0 Setup Documentation Software Circle Track Mode nsnnnnnonoonnnnnneenneennnnneennnenenne 50 48 Trouble Codes 130 20 Driven Boundam eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 45 24 EE 130 22 Creating EE 45 24 Greenstar eie tea et en 130221 Bi e EE 65 18 GreenStar 3 GE 130 21 Dual Beam Radar Gensor eee 60 9 EI 130 21 Message Center 130 1 E Platform Core Software Trouble Codes r eener a a 130 18 Enabling AutoTrac Repeat HEEN 130 21 Sugar CaneHanvester llana nananana nannu annua 50 76 Softkey E e EE 50 71 SSW fea aee EE 130 22 Enabling System BET deu e EE 13
46. 5 GreenStar 3 Pro Guidance A View B Guidance Settings C ShiftTrack Settings D Record Stop button 3 VIEW tab Press RECORD button Continued on next page CZ76372 00001A4 19 040CT10 3 20 50 26 062111 PN 93 Guidance 4 Ared light by RECORD button indicates path is being recorded Drive vehicle along desired path 6 Turn vehicle at the end of first pass and the curve path will generate the next pass Saving Curve Track Data The stored Curve Track data is assigned to a Client Farm Field name that is setup in the RESOURCES CONDITIONS softkey gt gt RESOURCES tab NOTE Setup of Client Farm and Field is not required for Curve Track operation but is required for the track to be saved and repeated The recorded Curve Track data is saved to the USB drive This data can be transferred into APEX and then saved to the USB drive or additional USB drives for use in future field applications The USB drive can also be taken from one 2630 to another and recalled for use IMPORTANT If it is desired to have repeatability with saved Curve Track data it is required that the initial Curve Track data and subsequent trips across the field be made using StarFire RTK Real PC12634 UN O9JUN10 Ge Curve Track Record Button Time Kinematics accuracy RTK base station should be operating in Absolute Base mode Recalling Saved Curve Data NOTE Recalled Curve Track data is available for the same width imp
47. 52 80 42 24 12 4 70 40 42 24 12 5 88 00 42 24 12 10 176 00 42 24 14 1 20 53 49 28 14 2 41 07 49 28 14 3 61 60 49 28 14 4 82 13 49 28 14 5 102 67 49 28 14 10 205 33 49 28 16 1 23 47 56 32 16 2 46 93 56 32 16 3 70 40 56 32 16 4 93 87 56 32 16 5 117 33 56 32 16 10 234 67 56 32 18 1 26 40 63 36 Continued on next page CZ76372 00002F7 19 28APR11 1 2 75 17 062111 PN 258 Swath Control Physical machine reaction Distance traveled at given Distance traveled per GPS Constant Ground Speed delay time speed and time update mph seconds feet inches 18 2 52 80 63 36 18 3 79 20 63 36 18 4 105 60 63 36 18 5 132 00 63 36 18 10 264 00 63 36 20 1 29 33 70 40 20 2 58 67 70 40 20 3 88 00 70 40 20 4 117 33 70 40 20 5 146 67 70 40 20 10 293 33 70 40 CZ76372 00002F7 19 28APR11 2 2 75 18 062111 PN 259 ISO Implements Implement Detected Warning AWARNING SCHER Implement Detected Implement Detected Improper operation can cause unintended implement movement Improper operation can cause unintended implement movement To avoid death or serious injury to a bystander understand how this display operates the functions of the implement Read and understand the implement Operator Manual To avoid death or serious injury to a bystander understand how this display operates the functions of the implemen
48. 72917443 Point A Lon 93 95402310 Track Spacing E 0 USE Desired Heading CZ76372 00001A3 19 010CT10 7 10 4 PC9537 UN 270CT06 Set Track 0 50 22 062111 PN 89 Guidance AME Set Track 0 1 Drive to desired location in the field Current TrackO Method 2 Press SET A button Tillage Gi P 3 Drive vehicle in desired direction across field NOTE A distance of 15 m 45 ft or longer has to be driven before point B can be defined This method calculates point B from the last five data points desst Sm ak iS on taken from the 15 m 45 ft driven and runs a best fit eee ET ET line through the points to determine a heading See a ye 4 The B point will automatically be saved after traveling 15 m 45 ft 5 Press ENTER button O A Current Track 0 D Remove B Method E Track Spacing Ei C New F Set A d Set Track 0 CZ76372 00001A3 19 010CT10 8 10 Lat Lon Set Track 0 NOTE The Latitude and Longitude coordinates have to be entered in decimal degrees SE 1 Enter latitude and longitude for point A 2 Enter latitude and longitude for point B 3 Press ENTER button Heading 270 7540 Point A Lat 41 72917443 A Current Track 0 F Point A Lat Point A Lon 93 95402310 B Method G Point B Lat C New H Point A Lon an En oo D Remove I Point B Lon E Track Spacing ints Point E 1 72917443 1 72917487 Lat Lat
49. 9 13 Editing Map Legend The Map Legend displays the values of the map colors 1 Select the Edit button to change the range of the legend for maps that have color scales 2 Enter the preferred maximum A and minimum B values in the window that appears PC10857RJ UN 010CT09 The Legend will then be divided into five colors automatically Continued on next page CZ76372 000014E 19 28APR11 10 13 45 18 062111 PN 55 GreenStar General Coverage Map Toggle button The map can be toggled between the Coverage Map and the current operation map PC10857RL UN 010CT09 CZ76372 000014E 19 28APR11 11 13 Map Settings button A the map view This button is used to set up Foreground maps overlay on top of background maps Background Layer Options B choose available layer to show as the background of the map view e Prescription Maps e Arial Images Foreground Layer Options C choose between Coverage Only map or As Applied if available e As applied seed rate map e As applied spray rate map e As applied spread rate map The As Applied coverage map is used to show where and how much product has been applied in the field e As harvested yield map e As harvested moisture map e Tillage depth map e Coverage Only map The Coverage Only map is used to show where the machine has been in the field This is the same coverage map that is displ
50. Apex No No Yes Aerial Images Grid Apex Display and Apex No No Yes aes j JDShape Display Display and Apex No No Yes SW Surveys Grid Display Display and Apex No No Yes ISO File Server Anything Controllers Controllers No No No Incorrect Setup data version causes Incompatible Setup Data alarm on display Overwritten when importing GRx or Shapefiles Data is stored on USB drive and not imported to display CZ76372 00002E1 19 19APR11 1 1 USB Troubleshooting Tips The USB connectors on the side of the display are intended to only work with the USB drives not smart phones or other devices If a USB drive is inserted and nothing happens e Wait 10 seconds because large USB drives may take time to be recognized e Use the other USB connector e Format the USB drive FAT or FAT32 format e Use a different USB drive CZ76372 000028C 19 19APR11 1 1 120 6 062111 PN 314 Data Management Alarm GreenStar Setup Data Invalid To Import data to the display from Apex desktop software the software versions on each must be compatible The compatible software versions are listed in the Software Update release notes When the display software needs to be updated to be compatible with the Apex software version the following warning will appear D GS3 GreenStar Setup Data Invalid The display software version is older than the setup data version A backup
51. AutoTrac deactivated C amp CE The consumer and commercial equipment division of John Deere C amp F The construction and forestry division of John Deere CAN Controller Area Network CCC Customer Contact Center CCD Chrysler Collision Detection Later named SBI when it became a commercially available system CE Conformit Europ ne European mark signifying compliance of directives Circle Track Only available with optional PivotPro module Uses a center pivot center point location to define concentric circles tracks Configured er Status of pie Valid AutoTrac Activation Tracking Mode has been determined and a valid Track 0 has een established Correct StarFire signal level for AutoTrac Activation is selected Vehicle conditions met DGPS Differential GPS A system of increasing the accuracy of GPS using a separately broadcast correction signal Display General term which refers to both Original GreenStar Display and GreenStar 3 Display DOP Dilution of Precision A term used to quantify the accuracy of a GPS fix DRC Dry Rate Controller DTAC Dealer Technical Assistance Center DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code ECU Electronic Control Unit A CPU based device that monitors and or controls a vehicle function ECUs are typically networked together using the CAN EGNOS European Geostationary Navigation Overlay Service The European DGPS
52. Calibrations e eet e ested ct at ee ce a oe 35 8 StarFire iT Ges ESO E EE eet kes 100 1 EE 35 8 Start Up EE 30 1 Track Starting SPACING E 50 20 Harvest Monttor 65 30 Track 0 Status Pie Adaptive curves e LEE 50 5 50 55 Repeat mode Steering Be Tele Le 130 21 lo Le EE 50 4 50 56 Troubleshooting sssseeeeeesnnnnnnennnnnnnn nennen 130 21 EU 50 5 50 58 Repeat mode Le e EE 50 58 BIL le 130 21 Steering Response Rate cccccccsssseeeeesssstteeees 50 67 Troubleshootpng A 130 21 Straight Track Mode sesneeessnseeseenesersnrssrrrnssrrrnesee 50 5 Set B Later site oe ee Se he 50 22 SOUP EE 50 20 Track 0 Setup Track Spacing niis aisiari htni 50 20 Adaptive Curve Track Mode ccccccccssssseeees 50 25 Sugar Cane Harvester Circle Track Mode Activating Auto Trace 50 76 Center Point 50 50 Deactivating Auto Trace 50 76 Drive CitCle irena uiii naii aie 50 49 Enabling AutoTrac 0seeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 50 76 Row Finder Mode 50 18 SUMMER 20282 ieee sete EE 45 1 Straight Track Mode 50 19 Swath Control Track Gpacing nnter sanee 45 11 Enabling EEN 75 9 Tracking Metric Quick Geet 75 15 sl 50 9 SAE Quick Sheet cccccccceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeteees 75 17 Tracking mode SettingS 2 75 10 Adaptive curves Syne With Cabo ccosccemecseee ie be ccoee ete eh ere i uae 35 4 Repeat mode System Voltage Diagnostics 130 21 Advanced Performance Monitor 60 17 Troubleshooting eeeeeceeeeee
53. Connector Pin Blue Pin 23 Rx Green Pin 22 Tx White Pin 25 CTS Red Pin 24 RTS Black Pin 2 Ground To Setup RS232 Serial Port 2 on a GS3 Display RS232 Wire Display Connector Pin Blue Pin 15 Rx Green Pin 26 Tx White Pin 17 CTS Red Pin 16 RTS Black Pin 4 Ground 1 Remove the square connector from the back of the GS3 display and from all power sources on the vehicle 2 The square AMP 26 pin display connector has a built in pin locking mechanism a Locate the large single white locking tab b Using a flat screwdriver depress this tab It will depress approximately 3 mm 1 8 in c Two tabs on the opposing side will become exposed once the single large tab is depressed d Once these two white tabs are exposed the connector pins are unlocked Use the chart at the beginning of this instruction to determine the pin locations for the desired Serial Port you will utilize for example Serial Port 1 uses pin locations 2 22 23 24 amp 25 Pin location numbers are stamped into the black housing on the back of the connector 4 Remove the white plugs for the correct pins you will add the RS232 wires to The white plugs will pull out easily with small needle nosed pliers Continued on next page CZ76372 0000142 19 23AUG10 1 2 110 2 062111 PN 304 Connecting RS 232 GPS Receivers 5 Insert harness wires into correct pin
54. Coverage Only and As Applied coverage maps CZ76372 000019E 19 29SEP10 1 1 Accuracy The overall Swath Control system accuracy is dependent upon many variables Swath Control System Accuracy GPS Signal Accuracy Machine and Implement Setup Display Setup Field Conditions Product Rate It is important to e Ensure Machine and Implement are set up properly according to manufacturer s operators manual e Ensure the implements wear parts are in good working condition and correctly spaced e Understand how field conditions and applied product rate affect machine dynamics e Ensure GPS Receiver went through a warmup period upon start up to ensure Swath Control performance As the GPS Accuracy increases SF1 SF2 and RTK Swath Control reaction accuracy will also increase GPS shading such as trees or buildings affects Swath Control accuracy e Ensure Swath Control settings Machine and Implement dimensions are set up properly in the display CZ76372 00002F3 19 28APR11 1 1 75 1 062111 PN 242 Swath Control Limitations of Swath Control There are some limitations of Swath Control to be aware of GPS Accuracy can cause map and boundary shifts The boundary and coverage map location are based off of an initial reference point and all other mapped points within the coverage map are positioned relative to this reference point On start up the system looks to see if ther
55. DEACTIVE by following methods PC8987 UN 29NOV05 PC8989 UN 29NOV05 B AutoTrac Row Guidance Button A Clutch Engage Switch e Deactivating header e Turning steering wheel more than 30 degrees e Switching OFF main clutch e Field Road switch is switched to road mode e Slowing to speeds less than 0 5 km h 0 3 mph e Exceeding forward speed of 22 km h 13 2 mph or reverse speed exceeds 10 km h 6 mph e Reverse operation for longer than 45 seconds e Degradation of differential correction signal from higher to lower accuracy level for longer than three minutes s Toggle STEER ON OFF button until STEER OFF is displayed in GUIDANCE VIEW tab e Operator out of seat for more than seven seconds e Track number is changed CZ76372 00001AD 19 010CT10 1 1 50 75 062111 PN 142 Guidance AutoTrac Sugar Cane Harvester Enabling System To enable the system all the following criteria must be met e Vehicle has an Auto Trac capable steering controller SSU e Auto Trac license activated 26 digit activation code e Tracking has been set up see section SetUp Tracking e Tracking guidance is ON e GPS signal status is present SF2 or RTK e Park Brake is turned off e Steer Button set to on Activating System PC10471 UN 31AUG07 CAUTION While AutoTrac is activated operator is responsible for steering at end of path and collision avoidance Do not attempt to tu
56. Display Emulator OGM GS3 Oxd2 Documentation TSK GS3 Oxfc KeyCard App KCA Mobile Processor 0xD2 Original GreenStar Display 0x80 StarFire Receiver 0x1C 0x 1C 0x9C TCM 0x92 Harvest Monitor for Combines 0xD3 Gen II Moisture Sensor Combine Yield Monitor Gen 0xD3 Moisture Sensor Harvest Monitor for Cotton 0xD3 Cotton Mass Flow Sensor 0xB1 0xB8 SPFH Monitor 0OxBO AirCart Controller 0xC4 Planter Controller SMVR 0xCO Planter Controller VRF OxCE Sprayer Controller Liquid OxE1 Sprayer Controller Dry OxCE SSU 0x13 CZ76372 0000131 19 13AUG10 1 1 135 1 062111 PN 343 Specifications GreenStar Sytem Component Pinout Circuit ID Function Wire Color 070 Ground Black 182 Constant Power Red 12vdc 209 Any White 211 Any Brown 904 Implement Can Hi Yellow 905 Implement Can Lo Dk Green 914 Vehicle Can Hi Yellow 915 Vehicle Can Lo Dk Green 922 Switched Power Red 12vdc 924 CCD Yellow 925 CCD Dk Green 998 Audio Mute Gray 999 Support Wire White dustcaps 992 Constant Power Red 12vdc OQUO06050 0000E50 19 01SEP09 1 1 26 pin Display V1 Pinout Pin Circuit ID Function Wire Color Cornerpost Display Connector Pin 1 922 Switched Power 12vdc Red U 2 070 RS232 Gnd Black 3 209 Implement Switch White M
57. Display has a 15 hour demo activation from the factory See Display Setup gt Display Software Activations section in this Operators Manual for details Machine and Implement Offsets are critical for Swath Control to function properly It is highly recommended to physically measure the machine and implement offsets The entire distance from the GPS receiver to the point that product is applied has to be accounted for in the machine and implement dimensions Correct dimensions will ensure optimal Swath Control performance Reference the Machine Setup and Implement Setup sections in this OM for complete details on how to correctly measure the dimensions CZ76372 00002CB 19 28APR11 1 1 Swath Control button Settings in the Swath Control button are used to fine tune Swath Control for optimal performance PC8663 UN O5AUG05 MENU button PC12685 UN 14JUL10 GREENSTAR 3 button PC8905 UN 18JANO6 SWATH CONTROL button CZ76372 00002F5 19 28APR11 1 1 75 3 062111 PN 244 Swath Control Summary See Maps Tab in GreenStar General section of this operator s manual for details on buttons contained inside the Map view Along with the map the Summary screen also displays coverage map legend E as applied rates for different operations F Swath Control Master On Off G and Section Status bar H A Summary Tab B View by Operation Tab C Rates and Section
58. Documentation Software Client Farm Field Task 65 3 lee 35 1 Machine Implement mite leet sae ee tt Bae Og ne 65 3 Challenge COG Ge eit Ee EE 35 1 GreenSecker Acwise fe cute ss ees 100 2 Compatibility i schehsccectaseet Ah tabs Beek Ie ADL Aa debeaah ss 75 9 Continued on next page Index 7 062111 PN 7 Page Page Desktop Software ccccccceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeteees 65 28 Time Documentation Software Setting Format Ae 35 7 Trouble Codes 130 20 Toatal Area GIECN Stal ess fepi he etch atta ees Voce ees eats Vasa 15 1 Performance Monitor ssssseeseesseenesrressrrnesrrreee 60 13 Platform Core Software Top and Bottom Boundaries AA 45 26 Trouble Codes 130 18 Creating EE 45 27 Serial Number 35 1 Total Distance E ei EE 15 1 Performance Monitor 60 14 Soil Total Engine Hours le 45 14 Performance Monitor 60 14 Temperature 45 14 Total Fuel Used Soil Moisture 45 14 Performance Monitor ssssseeeesseeeeeeeressrrneerreee 60 13 Soil Temperature eeen 45 14 Total Idle Time Sprayers Performance Monitor 60 14 Activating Auto Trace 50 73 TOtalS sde Ee ae aa he testel a ieee dee 70 1 Deactivating Auto Trace 50 73 ele i Avance Act aati nea Ac ne 70 2 Enabling Auto Trace 50 73 Performance Monitor 60 12 swath Control ees 75 10 dl Te DEE 60 14 BS 6 A ce ee 75 9 SOPK CY a occccsccvececaesescicteseccienesaucteesat sence dencuct reste 70 1 Spread Stars cc ens cece wee tate een 65 18 Touchscreen LANES ege ee 50 16
59. Heading Error B Tracking Error Le e EC W EE AE Line Sensitivity Line Sensitivity Tracking Too Low Tracking Too High PC11476 UN 15NOV08 Line Sensitivity Tracking PC8993 UN O9MARO6 PC8994 UN 07MARO6 Continued on next page CZ76372 00001A8 19 010CT10 19 25 50 66 062111 PN 133 Guidance Heading Lead Determines the impact of yaw rate vehicle rate of turn on tracking performance This can be thought of as a look ahead parameter Large adjustments may result in poor performance Higher settings Results in more aggressive response to vehicle twist Lower Settings Results in less aggressive response to vehicle twist Heading Lead Determines the Impact of yaw rate vehicle rate of tum on tracking performance Heading lead acts as a look ahead parameter and can be used to minimize oversteering Large adjustments may result In poor performance Higher Settings Result In more aggressive response to yaw rate Lower Settings Result In less aggressive response to yaw rate Kal S O S FA T D 2 Heading Lead CZ76372 00001A8 19 010CT10 20 25 Steering Response Rate Steering Response Rate Determines the maximum speed the wheels turn to make Adjusts tn REENEN geg H H i usts e rate of vehicle steering in order to corrections Higher gains will turn the wheels faster maintain tracking performence increasing iaa steering responsiveness generall
60. Manufacturing unit John Deere Intelligent Solutions Group Ag Management Solutions S a E amp 2 ka S O x lt a CZ76372 0000048 19 20JUL10 1 1 1 35 3 062111 PN 345 Glossary Glossary of Terms Glossary of Terms Term Meaning AB Curves Uses a manually driven curved path with two end points beginning and end to generate parallel passes Accuracy Bar Step Size Used to set the value of offtrack distance each arrow on the Path Accuracy Indicator represents Activated 4 4 Status of pie with A Resume switch has been selected and AutoTrac is steering the vehicle Adaptive Curves Uses a manually driven initial pass then guides off of previous pass The abbreviation for agriculture Ag The agricultural equipment division of John Deere AGC Automatic Gain Control AMS Ag Management Solutions Apex Desktop software for field mapping The successor to JD Office Adjustable Seed Rate Controller Legacy variable rate seeding controller for planters One of the SeedStar ASRC generation 1 controllers Also known as Variable Rate Variable Drive VRD or VR Companion to the Seed Monitor AT AutoTrac ATU Universal AutoTrac A guidance system for vehicles that do not support AutoTrac directly AutoTrac Assisted steering system based on satellite guidance that automatically steers the tractor through the field AutoTrac Deactivation Message Shows operator why
61. PC12314 UN O50CT09 OQUO6050 0000DCD 19 050CT09 1 1 10 1 062111 PN 11 Safety Signs Auxiliary Control Safety Signs Aw ARNING uxiliary Control Detected Improper operation can cause unintended implement movement Auxiliary Control Detected CAUTION Auxiliary Control Detected To avoid the risk of death or serious injury to a bystander ensure Users know which function is mapped to each control Controls are properly labeled Improper operation can cause unintended implement movement To avoid the risk of death or serious injury to a bystander ensure e Users know which function is mapped to each control e Controls are properly labeled ZX1042319 UN 04DEC08 Disable This message occurs when the system detects an V Auxiliary Control Press Enter key F to navigate to the home page Go to the Auxiliary Controls page by pressing the Controls key G to review or change the Auxiliary Control assignments If Enable is selected all Auxiliary Controls will be enabled If Disable is selected default all Auxiliary Controls will be disabled CZ76372 0000282 19 12JAN11 1 4 Auxiliary Control Configuration Changed S S AWARNING o SE g Auxiliary Control configuration caution Auxiliary Control configuration changed Go to the Auxiliary changed Go to the Auxiliary Controls page Controls page to review ck to r
62. Path Accuracy Indicator e Off track error e Track number and direction e AutoTrac deactivation messages e Turn predictor or Headland Alert e Guidance Icon e Shift Track buttons e AutoTrac Status Pie e Steer on off button e GPS indicator e Set Track 0 set circle record set AB curve e Track 0 name e Track spacing e Steering Sensitivity Path Accuracy Indicator ls a visual indicator of off track error The indicator consists of eight arrows on each side of the off track error box The arrows will light up indicating the direction the vehicle must be steered Continued on next page I Shift Track Buttons J Steering Sensitivity K GPS Indicator L Set AB Curve button M AutoTrac Status N Steer On Off O Track Number to get back on the A B line Each arrow represents a distance This distance is defined in the GUIDANCE SETTINGS tab under Accuracy Bar Step Size Example The bar step size has been set to 10 cm 4 in This means that each arrow that lights up represents 10 cm 4 in of off track error If two arrows are lit up on the left side of the Path Accuracy Indicator it would represent the vehicle being 20 cm 8 in to the right of the desired A B line Thus the operator must steer the vehicle 20 cm 8 in to the left to get to the desired A B line Off track error Total off track error is numerically displayed in the box Off track error will be displayed in inches up to 99 cm 35 in of o
63. R Pause Recording AB Curve Track Mode 50 44 Radar Adaptive Curve Track Mode EE 50 37 Calibration E 60 8 Performance Manager ANID AMON EE 60 10 Advanced Performance Monitor APM 60 15 GE 65 66 Performance Monitor OUP OORT eet EE elect eas Metra es 65 66 Advanced Performance Monitor LAPMI 60 1 RECN SOU EE 110 1 Additional Functions 00 ccc cceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 60 17 Rear Hitch Position Averaage Fuel Per tes ee 60 13 Advanced Performance Monitor ccceeee 60 17 Average Fuel Economy 60 13 Record and Repeat Average Operating Speed EE 60 13 Adaptive Curve Track Mode 50 34 Average Productivity eccentricities 60 13 eegene ege geet 65 32 laien EE 60 8 Advanced Performance Monitor APM dE EEN 60 6 Radar Valdaton EEN 60 10 lt Collon ania hah caleba da eal 65 55 Recording EE atria inte EE Ee ENEE 60 5 Performance Monitor 60 5 Resetting Totals ease tet cia iets eaten e S 60 14 EE 45 4 Settings EE 60 4 Recording Turning Domte 50 10 El 60 27 Region ccs Egeter a EE ART 35 7 WOTAWATO EE ENEE 60 13 Repeat mode Total Distance c essccseiescscotscestseissteriedsenseestasatine 60 14 DIAGNOSES deg 130 21 Total Engine Hour 60 14 Troubleshooting 2 2c ktee eat ek de ee 130 21 Total Fuel USO aerae r ee a eA 60 13 Reprogramming Error Codes ccccccccccccccccccccececeee 130 10 Total Idle LIED edu EE 60 14 GEET eebe 15 4 Bei CEE on EAA E 60 12 Resetting Universal Performance Monitor Display
64. S MANUALS providing safety operating maintenance and service information These manuals and safety signs on your machine may also be available in other languages OPERATOR S VIDEO TAPES showing highlights of safety operating maintenance and service information These tapes may be available in multiple languages and formats TECHNICAL MANUALS outlining service information for your machine Included are specifications illustrated assembly and disassembly procedures hydraulic oil flow diagrams and wiring diagrams Some products have separate manuals for repair and diagnostic information Some components such as engines are available in separate component technical manuals FUNDAMENTAL MANUALS detailing basic information regardless of manufacturer Agricultural Primer series covers technology in farming and ranching featuring subjects like computers the Internet and precision farming Farm Business Management series examines real world problems and offers practical solutions in the areas of marketing financing equipment selection and compliance Fundamentals of Services manuals show you how to repair and maintain off road equipment Fundamentals of Machine Operation manuals explain machine capacities and adjustments how to improve machine performance and how to eliminate unnecessary field operations S SEN S D Be Zei of e E Be TWEPRECISION FARMING GUIDE FOR sanicutrunsts KR ae
65. Series Sprayers Resume Switch Press the Resume Switch to move AutoTrac from the ENABLED stage to the ACTIVATED stage Pictures show where Resume Switch can be found on tractors sprayers and combines Combines use button 2 or 3 on multi function handle A Resume Switch bei CH E Q O 2 gt wo N O O a Combines Continued on next page CZ76372 00001A8 19 010CT10 7 25 50 57 062111 PN 124 Guidance Steering Sensitivity To adjust steering sensitivity select the input box and enter the desired steering sensitivity value via numeric keypad and select the enter button The sensitivity can also be adjusted up or down by selecting the or buttons on either side of the steer sensitivity input box NOTE Valid range for steer sensitivity is 50 200 with 200 being the most aggressive setting User Adjustable Steering Sensitivity steering sensitivity is aggressiveness of AutoTrac steering system A high steering sensitivity setting is more aggressive to allow system to handle tough manual steering conditions PC8852 UN 300CT05 Steer Sensitivity such as integral implements with a heavy draft load A low steering sensitivity setting is less aggressive to allow system to handle lighter draft loads and higher speeds CZ76372 00001A8 19 010CT10 8 25 O PC8848 UN 300CT05 Figure A A Default Gain B Entered Steering Gain The
66. Swath Control Understanding Swath Control Turn On and Turn Off Settings NOTE The Turn on and Turn off times in the examples in this section are not true for every machine It is important that you determine the Turn on and Turn off times for your particular machine and implement Swath Control operates based on the drop point and turn on and off time of the primary function Seeding Tools Planters average 6 12 km h 4 7 mph while planting and have minimal machine electrical clutch reaction delay times under 0 8 seconds usually The largest delay time is usually from the time the seed leaves the meter disk travels in the seed tube and reaches the soil At a 10 km h 6 mph planting speed you travel 2 8 m 8 8 ft in one second That s 280 mm 10 5 in of travel distance every one tenth of a second Example Entire seed delay time from the switch being selected in the cab the clutch stops the seed meter stops and all the seed has reached the soil time elapsed 0 8 seconds You can see that changing 0 3 0 8 seconds on the look ahead time can dramatically change the location of your seed placement when turning on or turning off On average most row crop planters generally set a turn off time to 0 3 seconds and a turn on time between 0 5 1 0 seconds On average most air carts set a turn off time at 0 6 seconds and a turn on time at 1 0 second Minimize Skip 100 overlap on ranked tools seeding tools wit
67. The figure below shows the implement width icon Recording Sources for UPM APM Below The display will allow the operator to choose from an input list which source or function will indicate that recording is PC9096 UN 17APR06 Implement Header Width on or off The PM will use this status to know when to engage the various measurements and this value will be in sync with the GreenStar Application CZ76372 00000BE 19 15JUL10 11 11 Recording Sources for UPM The display will allow the operator to choose from an input list which source or function will indicate that recording is on or off The PM will use this status to know when to engage the various measurements and this value will be in sync with the GreenStar Application PC9058 UN 17APR06 Se 4 gt Manual Manual When this item is selected the operator can manually trigger and stop the recording button located to the left of the recording source list This choice is always available CZ76372 00000BF 19 15JUL10 1 8 Rear Hitch PC9059 UN 17APR06 This choice is only available if the vehicle is equipped with a rear hitch CCD based vehicles with UPM Rear Hitch Recording is non adjustable In work recording on below 70 and out of work recording off above the 70 down threshold PBe Rear Hitch 4 gt CZ76372 00000BF 19 15JUL10 2 8 Front PTO This item is only available in the list if the vehicle is equipped
68. Track Spacing B Method F SetA C New G Set B D Remove H Set B Later Set B Later function allows the user to navigate away from the Set Track 0 page while creating an AB Line first by setting the A point on the Set Track 0 page and then choosing Set B Later Once Set B Later button has been selected the operator may navigate to Guidance View PC12226 UN 04SEP09 Idd ge BESSE T PC12227 UN 04SEP09 Guidance View Page I Set Track 0 J View tab K Guidance Settings tab L Shift Track Settings tab M iTEC Pro tab page to view progress as well as coverage while setting Track 0 When the operator is ready to Set B to complete the AB Line select the Set B button on the Guidance View page CZ76372 00001A3 19 010CT10 6 10 A Heading 1 Drive to desired location in the field 2 Press SET A button 3 Select the HEADING input box and enter a heading with the numeric keypad NOTE 0 000 indicates North 90 000 East 180 000 South and 270 000 West Save value by pressing ENTER button on keypad NOTE The ENTER button will be disabled until both the Set A and Set B points have been defined 4 Press ENTER button A Current Track 0 E Track Spacing B Method F SetA C New G Desired Heading D Remove Continued on next page Set Track 0 Method A Heading a Current Track0 Tillage PR v move Heading Point A Lat 270 7540 41
69. Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Message Description Prescription Error Controller is setup to accept prescriptions No controller prescription has been selected Prescription Error Prescription rate is out of controller range Controller Unit of Measure Error Controller will only operate when using metric units Controller Unit of Measure Error Controller will only operate when using English US units Controller Unit of Measure Error Controller will only operate when using metric or English US units Controller Operation Error Invalid operation selected for controller Prescription Warning Out of field prescription rate is now being applied Prescription Warning Loss of GPS signal has occurred Loss of GPS prescription rate is now being applied Prescription Warning Controller does not support selected prescription Alarms CZ76372 00001B9 19 040CT10 2 2 Trouble Code Pop Up Boxes Guidance Software FAULT CONDITION FAULT DESCRIPTION ALARM TEXT Issued once at power up the first time an SSU is detected when an AutoTrac key is activated Any guidance mode with AutoTrac key and AT capable SSU The operator is responsible for collision avoidance Turn AutoTrac OFF before entering roadways Loss of SSU Communication for more than 1 second No communication with vehicle steering controller SSU Check vehicle for diagnostic codes and contact your John D
70. UN O5AUG05 MENU button PC12685 UN 14JUL10 GREENSTAR 3 PRO button PC8679 UN O5AUG05 TOTALS button e Farm A group of fields that are located near each other e Field An area of land which is physically defined by roads creeks or other things e Load Sub unit of what is harvested in each field It could be a grain tank a truck load or the entire field e Area Remaining The Area Remaining is derived by taking the initial acres and subtracting what has already been harvested Needs a boundary or acres entered into desktop software to be functional e Time to Finish Time to finish is derived by taking the area remaining and dividing by the average productivity Time for turning stopping to unload etc will not be taken into account Needs a boundary or acres entered into desktop software to be functional CZ76372 0000098 19 O9JUL10 1 1 70 1 062111 PN 230 Totals Harvest Totals Totals Totals for Harvest Totals screen allows operators to view a variety of operational information Harvest Combine Harvest Cotton Brand Brand Variety Variety Area Area Yield dry Yield avg Seed Yield wet Max Lint Yield Dry Mass Totals Seed Wet Mass Min Lint Yield Moisture Yield avg Lint Length of Time Length of Time Estimated Time to Finish Estimated Time to Finish Area Remaining Area Remaining
71. UPM on the armrest display Therefore the values will be identical on both displays NOTE Resetting UPM Totals on one display will also reset UPM Totals on the other display CZ76372 0000172 19 16SEP10 1 2 e APM will be denoted in the display menu with the APM Fr ie UN 17APR06 Performance Monitor Icon D FO APM Performance Monitor Icon CZ76372 0000172 19 16SEP10 2 2 Performance Monitor Setup to allow user to choose from either automatically or Dual Display Setup manually engaging the area counter With both 2630 and GS3 Command Center installed UPM data and recording source will be synchronized For MANUAL example changing recording source to GreenStar on e Implement Switch GS3 Command Center will change 2630 UPM recording e AUTO source to GreenStar as well Note that data sync will exhibit some noticeable delay The three default control sources are Depending on vehicle configurations other possible control sources include not limited to This function allows users to choose the control source that engages the area and distance counters associated GreenStar with implement working status It presents multiple e Front Hitch choices of control source based on vehicle configurations Rear Hitch OQU06050 0001298 19 20JUL10 1 1 60 1 062111 PN 145 Performance Monitor UPM UNIVERSAL PERFORMANCE MONITOR Functionality NOTE GPS radar speed will be shown und
72. VIEW tab toggle STEER ON OFF button until STEER OFF is displayed CZ76372 00001AB 19 010CT10 1 2 50 73 062111 PN 140 Guidance AutoTrac system can be made DEACTIVE by following methods e Turning steering wheel e By placing multi function lever in neutral e Slowing to speeds less than 0 5 km h 0 3 mph e Exceeding speed of 37 km h 23 mph e In reverse longer than 45 seconds e Shifting speed to 4th range on 4700 Series Sprayers e Shifting to transport mode on 4900 Series Sprayers e Shifting speed to 4th range on 5430i Sprayers e Activating 4 wheel steering mode on 5430i Sprayers Toggle STEER ON OFF button until STEER OFF is displayed in GUIDANCE VIEW tab e Operator out of seat for more than 7 seconds CZ76372 00001AB 19 010CT10 2 2 AutoTrac Combines Enabling System Press STEER ON OFF button to toggle between enable disable AutoTrac To enable system all of the following criteria must be met e AutoTrac activation is detected e Track 0 has been setup e Tracking mode selected e SSU is in normal operating mode e TCM must be installed and turned on e Header On Activating System KEE While AutoTrac is activated operator is responsible for steering at end of path and collision avoidance Do not attempt to turn on Activate AutoTrac system while transporting on a roadway After system has been ENABLED operator must manually change system to ACTIVATE
73. a compatible desktop application to save new setup information to the same backup Profile on the USB drive The display should now be able to use the coverage maps and guidance lines in that backup Profile GS3 SE GreenStar Setup Data Corrupt The setup data is corrupt A backup profile will be automatically saved and default setup data loaded Import a valid profile PC13255 UN 19APR11 Accept CZ76372 00002E6 19 19APR11 1 1 Setup Data Corrupt 120 8 062111 PN 316 Updating Software Downloading Software Updates Software updates are periodically released for GreenStar displays and other GreenStar system components to provide enhancements and performance improvements These updates are managed by a desktop application called GreenStar LiveUpdate which can be downloaded from www StellarSupport com Once installed on your computer GreenStar LiveUpdate will download the most recent update copy that update to your USB drive and notify you when future updates are available Software updates for GreenStar system components such as StarFire Receivers AutoTrac Universal GreenStar Rate Controller etc are also downloaded via LiveUpdate and copied to the USB drive along with the display update These components can be updated via the display if they are connected to the display when the USB drive is inserted CZ76372 000028D 19 12JAN11 1 1 Determining Software Version on Displ
74. above are met the application will count record how much time is spent at idle CZ76372 00000C3 19 15JUL10 9 12 Total Distance The total distance counter will accumulate any time the tractor is moving regardless of recording status or speed input The distance counter that appears on the main screen is the same counter that appears on the totals screen PC9094 UN 17APR06 0 0 U Total Distance CZ76372 00000C3 19 15JUL10 10 12 Resetting Totals Many of the counters totals can be reset by the operator 0 0 H This capability will be accomplished via two different reset Wis h 3 buttons Alarms will display to confirm the actions before 3 the totals are reset I NOTE When operating with APM you must HOLD DOWN gt 0 d the reset button for 3 seconds to clear out the totals 3 LR Reset Area Totals this will reset all values on the totals Reset Area Totals page except distance CZ76372 00000C3 19 15JUL10 11 12 Reset Distance only resets the distance counter o o tt T Reset Distance CZ76372 00000C3 19 15JUL10 12 12 60 14 062111 PN 158 Performance Monitor ADVANCED PERFORMANCE MONITOR APM This section covers only those additional functions that become available when operating APM The APM is only available on CAN electronic based John Deere vehicles with a TECU controller which include the following Tractors 8030 s 7030 s 7020 s 602
75. and Field 1 Select RESOURCE and CONDITIONS button Continued on next page PC8676 UN O5AUG05 RESOURCE CONDITIONS button PC8677 UN 05AUG05 EQUIPMENT button PC8678 UN 05AUG05 DOCUMENTATION button PC8704 UN 17AUG05 PRESCRIPTIONS button Select or Enter Client Farm Field and Task Select EQUIPMENT button Setup recording source and implement width Select DOCUMENTATION button oa Fw bh Choose an operation type Example seeding or product application Select PRESCRIPTIONS button 8 Select the PRESCRIPTION from the PRESCRIPTION drop down box N Prescription Multiplier IMPORTANT If using John Deere sprayer rate knob must be set to AUX If using John Deere AirCart or Planter set desktop software as Active Rate If using a 3rd Party control unit see the operator manual of the control unit CZ76372 00002B4 19 30MAR11 1 3 65 60 062111 PN 221 Documentation NOTE 3rd Party control units are control units using RS232 connection Field Doc Connect and ISOBUS compliant control units supporting Task Controller functionality If applying multiple prescriptions operator must choose a prescription for each operation Example air cart with a prescription for each tank If applying the same product from two of more tanks operator needs a prescription for each tank Prescription Override or Multiplier Select a rate to override the prescription
76. by pressing the Controls key G to review or change the Auxiliary Control assignments Awarnine Auxiliary Control enabled V Improper operation can cause unintended implement movement To avoid the risk of death or serious injury to a bystander ensure Users know which function is mapped to each control Controls are properly labeled ZX1042322 UN 04DEC08 i CZ76372 0000282 19 12JAN11 3 4 Auxiliary Control Enabled A ATON Auxiliary Control enabled Some requested assignments are not complete Improper operation can cause unintended implement movement To avoid the risk of death or serious injury to a bystander ensure s Users know which function is mapped to each control e Controls are properly labeled This message occurs when Auxiliary Control has been enabled manually however not all assignments have been completed successfully Press Enter key F to navigate to the home page Go to the Auxiliary Controls page by pressing the Controls key G to review or change the Auxiliary Control assignments IMPORTANT If the Enter key F is selected the implement only follows the assignments which have been completed successfully however AWARNING Auxiliary Control enabled Some requested assignments are not complete Improper operation can cause unintended implement movement To avoid the risk of death or serious injury to a bystande
77. change e Load Name Can be anything operator wants it to be Examples are Tank Truck Field Basket or Module e Load Number Increment or Decrement to next load e Load Destination e Gin Turnout Cotton Only Select letter button next to LOAD NAME to input desired name Select LOAD DESTINATION button PC10857VL UN 01APR10 Select desired destination of load NOTE Load name and destination can be saved from Apex or other compatible desktop software Apex is not available in all EAME countries Defining Gin Turnout Enter the Lint that is estimated for each field The default is 33 CZ76372 00002BB 19 30MAR11 5 5 65 29 062111 PN 190 Documentation Harvest Monitor Setup Select MENU gt gt ORIGINAL GREENSTAR MONITOR button Harvest Monitor is only available through the ORIGINAL GREENSTAR MONITOR application on the GS3 display Once in the Original GreenStar Monitor application operator interface will function the same as the Original GreenStar Display NOTE The Original GreenStar Monitor is only viewable as a full screen NOTE For all 9x70 combines Harvest Monitor is located within the Command Center See Combine Operator s Manual for more information IMPORTANT If dual monitors are being used with an Original GreenStar Display on the system along with a GS3 display Harvest Monitor will automatically function on the Original GreenStar Display and
78. compatible The configuration of the connected implement isn t compatible for the documentation urposes because the following information isn t Geen 3 Task Controller This alarm screen will be displayed whenever an e e implement is detected which is not compatible with Field Configuration of connected Doc because some information is missing from the ISO Implement not compatible implement which is required for automatically setup of Field Doc for documentation purposes The missed Wd Blanca Bergen lata ap ens ihe oth information is displayed in the message box of the alarm following information aren t available screen Please contact your John Deere Dealer or the 3 manufacturer of the implement Keen telen S N Ka l esch Configuration of Connected Implement Not Compatible CZ76372 00002B6 19 30MAR11 6 6 130 14 062111 PN 332 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Diagnostic Addresses MESSAGE CENTER button gt DIAGNOSTIC ADDRESSES button gt DEVICE drop down box gt VT 001 Implement PC8655 UN O05AUG05 Message Center MESSAGE CENTER button PC8668 UN O5AUG05 DIAGNOSTIC ADDRESSES button Address Number Address Name 000 Initial Address 001 Recall Diagnostic Trouble Code DTCs 002 System Beep 1 003 System Beep 2 008 Unswitched Power Supply Voltage 009 Swit
79. display backlighting can be in The Display Main page layout will change slightly al based on the display s mode e Standalone Display backlight is controlled independently e Sync with Cab Display backlight can be controlled in Mode Spio wan Con sync with the master backlight switch of a compatible S vehicle system In certain John Deere cabs the display will also be capable of controlling the cab backlighting EP SE Rea g ai when adjustments are made e Sync with Cab disabled lIt behaves like Standalone Mode but status description changes to reflect the Sync Ee KI E with Cab capabilities are available PC12698 UN 20JUL10 Display Main Page Synchronization with Cab Enabled Bf Mode Syne with Cab Disabled a EA o S g Ier g E 7 E IS Color E N Se S Display Main Page Synchronization with Cab Disabled BE aan Mode Standalone E A 3 7 Volume d EI ww g zZ 7 eM O O E 9 mm Sa S Display Main Page Standalone Mode No Network Continued on next page CZ76372 00001B0 19 040CT10 1 2 3 5 6 062111 PN 29 Display Setup The Advance Display Settings button found on Display Advanced Backlighting Main page will open the Advanced Backlighting Settings Settings page The Advanced Backlighting Settings page allows the operator to enable synchronization with cab backlighting using a check box
80. done through Harvest Monitor calibrating yield moisture selecting the size and type of header etc Menu 1 Select Menu PC12866 UN 16SEP10 2 Select Original GreenStar Monitor 3 Slect Setup Harvest Monitor Original GreenStar Monitor ORIGINAL GREENSTAR MONITOR button CZ76372 000016E 19 16SEP10 1 1 062111 70 2 PN 231 Totals Set Up Totals on Home Page 1 Select Menus gt Layout Manager 2 Totals can be displayed at various locations on the screen but are configurable only on a half screen A or on the softkey region B To learn more about setting up different areas of the screen see the Layout Manager section in this operator s manual 3 Select the GreenStar 3 Pro button and find Totals S section a 4 Select Totals section and then select the Enter button to complete setup Q 5 In the example shown here the flags screen go into S the blue region and the yield map into the red region S A Half Screen B Softkey Region CZ76372 000009A 19 09JUL10 1 1 Configuring Totals 1 Select the Configure button A Configure Button S q d inst dry inst N buc w busc J 181 2 14 37 k 182 5 7 avg dry avg avg wat ii busc e bume gt 19 11 748 N t 122505 8 tact ub 2 Continued on next page OQUO06050 0001076 19 06APRO9 1 4 70 3 062111 PN 232 Totals Totals Screen Layout Operation Type Dry Weight Ave
81. e Sto D sihil Gk p operation if poor visibility conditions impair your Do not attempt to turn on Activate AutoTrac system ability to operate the machine or identify people or while transporting on a roadway obstacles in machine path The AutoTrac system is intended to aid operator in e Consider field conditions visibility and vehicle performing field operations more efficiently Operator is configuration when selecting vehicle speed For always responsible for machine path To prevent injury example use duals when using AutoTrac at high to operator and bystanders speeds on tractors e Remain alert and pay attention to surrounding environment CZ76372 0000281 19 11JAN11 1 1 05 3 PN 9 Safety Use Seat Belt Properly Use a seat belt when you operate with a roll over protective structure ROPS or cab to minimize chance of injury from an accident such as an overturn Do not use a seat belt if operating without a ROPS or cab Replace entire seat belt if mounting hardware buckle belt or retractor show signs of damage Inspect seat belt and mounting hardware at least once a year Look for signs of loose hardware or belt damage such as cuts fraying extreme or unusual wear discoloration or abrasion Replace only with replacement parts approved for your machine See your John Deere dealer TS205 UN 23AUG88 DX ROPS1 19 290CT07 1 1 Read Operator Manuals for ISOBUS Implements In a
82. e Type e Name Automatically Generated Operations Some operations are automatically created when the display is connected to certain machines and a client farm field and task are defined Example When a SeedStar Gen II planter is connected to the display and a client farm field and task are defined a seeding operation is automatically created The details of the operation will still need to be defined page CZ76372 0000177 19 23SEP10 1 2 65 4 062111 PN 165 Documentation Limited Availability of Operations Some operations WILL NOT be available when display is attached to certain machines and implements Example When Harvest Monitor from a John Deere 50 60 or 70 Series Combine NA or 9000i series Europe is connected to the display only the harvest operation will be available CZ76372 0000177 19 23SEP10 2 2 Controllers When connected to controllers below recording on off will be controlled automatically e John Deere 1990 CCS e John Deere Harvest Monitor e John Deere SeedStar for Air Carts e John Deere SeedStar Monitors or Variable Rate Drive for Planters e John Deere SprayStar Gen A e Raven 440 450 460 660 e SideKick e GreenSeeker e Rawson Accu Rate and Accu Plant e New Leader Mark III Mark IV e Dickey john Seed Manager e Vanguard PIC Seed Monitor e John Deere 800i Series sprayer e ISOBUS Task Controller compliant implements Once setup properly the onl
83. e Understand how field soil conditions affect system loose soil requires more steering than firm soil but firm soil can cause uneven draft loads CZ76372 00001A7 19 010CT10 2 2 AutoTrac Tractors Enabling System The following criteria must be met for AutoTrac to be enabled e Vehicle has an AutoTrac capable steering controller SSU e Hydraulic oil temp is above 20 C 68 F e AutoTrac license activated 26 digit Activation Code e Track 0 has been set up e GPS signal status is present e TCM turned on Activating System Bi Chuticn While AutoTrac is activated operator is responsible for steering at end of path and collision avoidance Do not attempt to turn on Activate AutoTrac system while transporting on a roadway After system has been ENABLED operator must manually change system to ACTIVATED status when steering assistance is desired NOTE Activating AutoTrac will activate automatic power shift if it has been set In 8020T and 9020T tractors automatic power shift APS must be set up after enabling AutoTrac If AutoTrac is enabled after automatic power shift has been set APS must be reset APS can be set either before or after enabling AutoTrac in 8010T tractors PC8629 UN 03AUG05 PC8868 UN 02NOV05 A Resume Switch NOTE Resume switch location may vary depending on vehicle type model and year Press resume switch A to activate AutoTrac This will initiate assisted s
84. eee 50 9 Documentation 65 1 Turn Pele eieene eege etesieseegt 50 9 50 10 Igel acces nck catia Ee we neha aly 50 4 Turning VIGW gerett aaneeteadeeeate 50 9 RS 232 Receivers cccccccseseesesesessesceseseteteteneees 110 1 Vehicle Heading Arrow ceteris 50 13 SEI 110 2 GUIDANCE SETTINGS tab Settings ege e cao tit ee Ate hear ne et ad 100 1 Ulli 50 10 Tractor GUIDANCE softkey Re E 60 9 GUIDANCE SETTINGS tab GreenSeeker EE 100 2 ll leie 50 10 Documentation 100 2 Prescriptions cccccccccessesccsseessesseseesteseesees 95 4 100 5 H BSS Uo era ere 100 2 GreenStar Half Gcreen 40 1 Component Pinot 135 2 Harvest BE Te le DL 130 21 Calibrations a 65 46 e TEE 15 1 Cut Width see aceite ete 65 35 GreenStar 3 GS3 Documentation 65 26 Activations EE 45 1 Harvest Screen 65 27 Advanced Getup 45 2 Header Cut WAT e Seka ee hee Re es ee eee 65 35 SOlUP cee hee te ee ae ce ee 65 31 Blo le LEE 130 21 Low Flow Compensation ene 65 48 GreenSeeker Setup ssssesesseeessirnrresrirnesrenene 100 2 SEWN EE 65 27 Implement Gen 45 8 e ee gesch Ace e area a aei T 65 27 Machine Setup ccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesneeeeeesaees 45 5 H ager enccctccdcsiceccdtteneacdcaiceaedaadcteenacdeavsacadcbacenceed 65 31 Memory Tab 45 1 Totale age dE ENEE dee EEN 70 2 PIO A E i ce ee 45 1 65 37 Harvest Monitor EE 45 1 Documentation 65 30 Rate Controller 75 9 Flow Chart Setup E e E EE 65 52 Combines ege ee 65 37 Moisture RS232 Receiv
85. flags for tracking CZ76372 000018C 19 040CT10 1 1 1 30 5 062111 PN 323 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Pre Season Checklist for Guidance In the Office Review all current Operator s Manuals Quick Reference Guides Installation Instructions and Product Updates Read and perform all implement calibration procedures for your machine s In Apex NOTE Apex is not available in all EAME countries Ensure all farm and field names are entered and accurate Import A B lines from Original GreenStar System or GS3 Tie Global A B lines to client farm and field In the Machine Adjust backlighting and contrast on the GS3 display Turn tracking to desired mode Straight Curve Track RowFinder Unsure machine has latest SSU Software Set offsets Set steer sensitivity In the Field Check StarFire receiver for GPS Signal NOTE When checking for GPS signal move machine to open view of sky and turn key to second position If receiver has been stored for longer than six months it may take the receiver one to two hours to lock on to a GPS and or differential signal CZ76372 00000B3 19 09JUL10 1 1 Pre Season Swath Control for Planters Checklist 1 2 Weeks Prior to Planting NOTE Apex is not available in all EAME countries Become familiar with the product The following resources are ava
86. ft Area Counter Si oa h Use radar as speed source LI Le We o Time Since Last Reset 5 Service Interval 5 e E Zero Slip Calibrate Radar d 12 54pm ES Ell gt 0 Q S lt S eE UPM Setting Screen Performance Honi tor Settings af Z ft Area Counter J CH scv I gt Source ven Losch Se h Time Since Last Reset S a Service Interval J zZ T 9 103mM Kol E S E ab T a APM Setting Screen CZ76372 00000BE 19 15JUL10 9 11 NOTE If the vehicle that you are operating does not have radar make sure that the radar check box is not checked or inconsistent readings and alarms will be displayed Radar Connection The operator is able to select unselect a check box if the radar is directly connected to the display or not This connection check box will NOT display when operating Continued on next page PC9095 UN 17APR06 Radar connected to display BW Radar Connection APM as it will automatically default to the radar feed via the connection behind the command center CZ76372 00000BE 19 15JUL10 10 11 60 4 062111 PN 148 Performance Monitor Implement Header Width The operator is able to enter and view the width of the implement header This value will remain in sync with the Field Doc application implement width This parameter will be used by the PM for area and productivity calculations
87. functions by selecting the respective input controls for the referring assignment See Auxiliary Controls Learn Mode hereafter CZ76372 0000295 19 12JAN11 4 5 85 18 062111 PN 281 Auxiliary Controls Enabled Disabled Learn Mode Auxiliary Controls Learn Mode C Disabled A Status Selection B Enabled Auxiliary Controls Learn Mode The status selection drop down list A allows the operator to enable B or disable C the Auxiliary Control functions and to place the system under learn mode D e f the Learn Mode is selected and the operator leaves the Auxiliary Controls page without any action the Auxiliary Controls status enable disable will remain as set prior to entering the Learn Mode e If an assignment has been completed successfully in the Learn Mode the cursor colored rectangle switches to the next possible assignment During the assignment process the implement does NOT follow any functions which have been assigned before As long as the Learn Mode is selected Auxiliary Controls is in a pending status neither enabled nor disabled D Learn Mode e If Auxiliary Controls was in Enabled status before selecting the Learn Mode all additional assignments can be used as soon as they have been completed successfully If Auxiliary Controls was in Disabled status before selecting the Learn Mode the system has to be enabled again befo
88. ground speed adjustment wait 10 to 20 seconds and observe effect of moving indicator before making another adjustment 3 Begin harvesting and adjust ground speed until moving indicator stabilizes in target range 4 HARVESTED WEIGHT cell should increase while harvesting 5 Harvest known amount of grain grain tank full truck load wagon load etc 6 When known load is completed stop machine and allow all harvested grain to enter grain tank NOTE Message with the following information may appear Comp Flow Too High Repeat Comp Run If this message appears it will not be possible to enter scale weight Repeat optional Low Flow Compensation procedure paying special attention to keep moving indicator in target range A 7 Select START STOP button again to stop calibration Display will change to YIELD CALIBRATION IS STOPPED Continued on next page Saul Yield Calibration Calibration Standard Mode Yield Calibration is Stopped Harvested Weight lb O van um BEN Weight lb Flow Comp Number PAGE SETUP INFO E EEEE Es z PC12880 UN 24SEP10 Harvest Mon Low Flow Comp Cal IMPORTANT Be sure to empty grain tank completely and make sure all grain is on one vehicle wagon or truck Gei Have known amount of grain in truck or wagon weighed While waiting for scale ticket to return you may continue by selecting RUN button When scale ticket returns to combin
89. hours you will see the John Deere logo as well as a progress indicator at startup Q want to use a prescription in my new GreenStar 3 system and want to be able to see the as applied map over the top of my anhydrous prescription layer How do set this up A Save the prescription to your USB drive in Apex or other compatible desktop software Select GS3 button A and select Map Settings at the bottom of the page Select the prescription as the background layer Choose Product Rate 1 that comes from your approved controller as the foreground layer Then configure your homepage with the desired information Q What causes the StarFire receiver signal strength bar on my GS3 homepage to turn orange and display an alert symbol A If the number of satellites in a solution drops to six or below you are receiving a marginal signal which results in an orange bar and an alert sign If there are less than five satellites in a solution the bar will be red indicating no GPS signal For the bar to be green there must be at least seven satellites in a solution Q Why do get message saying Recording is Not Allowed when try to turn GS3 Recording on even though my signal strength is good g y g g g CZ76372 00002FA 19 28APR11 1 3 130 7 062111 PN 325 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics A This is a common error if multiple recording operations have been selected Go to the GS3 menu and select GreenStar 3
90. in rows versus the three decimal places allowed when entered by feet Select ft rows button to change to rows Press the AB Curve record button to start recording Drive the initial pass Press the AB Curve record button to stop recording RR GE Press the Enter button CZ76372 00001A5 19 010CT10 4 13 50 43 062111 PN 110 Guidance NOTE If GPS signal is lost while recording recording is stopped and the AB curve that was recorded to that point will be saved If the AB Curve is not what the operator intended it may be deleted by using the REMOVE button CZ76372 00001A5 19 010CT10 5 13 Pause Recording Feature This feature allows the user to PAUSE the recording of a vehicle s path When recording is UN PAUSED curve track will resume recording and connect the space between where it was PAUSED and UN PAUSED with a straight line This can be helpful when there is a long straight section of path or when navigating around obstacles NOTE The longest bridge segment line segment created between PAUSED and UN PAUSED that can be created is a distance of 0 5 miles 2 640ft If the distance between the points is greater than 0 8 km 0 5 miles 2 640 ft the line segment will not connect resulting in a gap in the path PC12637 UN O9JUN10 EON AB Curves Pause button Operating Pause Recording When the pause button is selected Paused is displayed below the RECORD button To
91. key is turned off 90 seconds Any time the GS3 display looses unswitched power it will go through a longer startup sequence In addition yield or moisture maps will need to be reselected after power up CZ76372 00002BB 19 30MAR11 1 5 Changing Harvest Settings MENU button gt GREENSTAR 3 PRO button gt DOCUMENTATION button gt HARVEST tab NOTE Operations can be set up using desktop software and saved to a USB drive NOTE Ensure that the first Operations tab is set to Harvest Three other operations are available for selection but not needed Change Harvest Settings Crop Type Com Brand DeKalb Variaty DKC61 21 Keswine Management nop ind Spread nad Name Load Destination 7 Losd Number x Select CHANGE HARVEST SETTINGS button A E S T Auto Increment Load Z A CHANGE HARVEST Wumbar v i SETTINGS button S Operation oO a Continued on next page CZ76372 00002BB 19 30MAR11 2 5 65 27 062111 PN 188 Documentation The Harvest Settings screen allows operator to define e Crop Type e Brand e Variety e Variety Locator e Residue Management Excluding Cotton Variety Locator Check the Variety Locator box in Harvest Settings to Sdt have the GS3 automatically change to the variety that was recorded while planting This will record the variety Variety Keier ites net that is coming into the center of the header verify correct KS d lateral and i
92. map but the product application is physically correct the turn on off times and overlap settings may not be set correctly Reference the Turn On Off settings and Overlap settings sections for adjustments Prescriptions When utilizing prescriptions Swath Control commands sections off in zero rate prescription areas CZ76372 00002F4 19 29APR11 1 1 75 2 062111 PN 243 Swath Control Required Setup IMPORTANT Some operators connect two separate fields into one using a land bridge between them Product may still be applied over this strip of land if Swath Control is left on To prevent unexpected coverage always turn Swath Control or the master switch OFF while transporting between fields NOTE Documentation is recommended but not required when operating Swath Control If a client farm field are selected only the coverage or as applied map for that field are displayed When using Headland Control a Client Farm Field Field boundary and Exterior Headland must be defined The following items are optional when operating Swath Control e Client Farm and Field if not selected all coverage maps are saved to undefined Client Farm and Field and data is not able to be saved to desktop software e Documenting field operational data e Field Boundaries e As applied Map e Prescription e Setup data from desktop software Activation The 2630 Display requires a Swath Control Activation Every
93. nex ances 50 32 Sugar Cane Harvester Smooth Tight Tue 50 27 Activating Guystem EE 50 76 Track EE 50 25 Deactivating System En 50 76 Adaptive curves Enabling System 2 ccccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 50 76 Repeat mode Tractors EE 130 21 Activating Guetem EE 50 71 Troubleshootitig lt it c ichen vartsteecgucateatees 130 21 Deactivating Gystem essences 50 72 Addresses Enabling System c ccccescesessseseeseseeeseteseeees 50 71 KE 130 15 Turn Predictor EE 50 10 Advanced Performance Monitor STETE Seege lobes eeh ee Ree 50 76 Engine Coolant Temperature s seeseeeeeeeeeeeeieee 60 17 AutoTrac Combines Engine Oil PreSSUre c csescssseesesssessessesseeeeeeee 60 17 Enabling System c ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseees 50 74 ell 60 17 AutoTrac Controller Rear Hitch Posten 60 417 Performance System Meltaeg Seeerei Ee 60 17 ODptiMIZING 2 dict ae tact hers Aca 50 65 Transmission Oil Temperature eee 60 17 AutoTrac Sprayers Advanced Performance Monitor Enabling System snsaseseseseseriririrertrenteernrree ene 50 73 EE E cae eee Soe 60 1 60 15 Auxiliary Controls Additional Eunchons oooccccceoccoccooeceocceeececccecce 60 17 Al E 85 3 E EE 60 6 Assignment Error Messages 85 12 Advanced Setting 50 65 GOnMICtS ne 4202 boc hth eh ool nate oreh ale ail abo woe 85 15 Acquire Sensitivity 2 c ccs lt cosctcossscssaetcsgesocsstliecte 50 68 Disabled Functions EE 85 15 Heading Tree ee 50 67 Implement F
94. not appear on menu Once in Original GreenStar Monitor application operator interface will function the same as the Original GreenStar Display See vehicle or implement Operator s Manual for more information CZ76372 00000AD 19 09JUL10 1 1 062111 55 1 PN 144 Performance Monitor PC12867 UN 16SEP10 Performance Monitor The GS3 2630 display comes standard with Universal Performance Monitor UPM which provides productivity information such as vehicle speeds acre counters and fuel efficiency data The information available to be displayed in UPM depends on the vehicle on which the display is installed There may be slight differences between the values from UPM and the vehicle monitor UPM Performance Monitor Icon due to rounding of decimals within UPM calculations Performance Monitor 30 Series Tractors e Universal Performance Monitor will be denoted in the On 30 series John Deere tractors the GS3 2630 display display menu with the UPM Performance Monitor Icon will disable UPM and show Advanced Performance Monitor APM from the tractor TECU APM is a feature of the tractor and is similar to UPM Read your tractor Operator s Manual for information on APM Dual Display Operation The GS3 2630 display maybe installed on the corner post of a John Deere vehicle that also has a display on the armrest running UPM In this case the values displayed by UPM on the corner post display will be sent from
95. number of rates supported in a prescription The number of rates will be reduced Continued on next page Maximum Number of Rates Screen PC12749 UN 27AUG10 CZ76372 0000329 19 14JUN11 5 6 65 64 062111 PN 225 Documentation Shapefile Conversion Summary Page Once shapefile conversion is complete this screen appears A preview map of the prescription is displayed Select the Enlarge Map button to see a more detailed view Verify that the information is correct before accepting Operator must accept to save the converted shapefile IMPORTANT If the ENTER button is grayed out the product type or rate units were entered incorrectly and do not match the rate units in the original prescriptions Select the Cancel Button to return to the Shapefile Conversion Homepage to enter the correct product type or rate units NOTE An area of the prescription that has been assigned a zero rate will now appear black on your prescription map in the GS3 Shapefile Conversion The shapefile conversion succeeded Total Area 152 96 ac 2876 6 gal 226 0 Minimum Rate 0 0 Average Rate 18 8 Total Product Maximum Rate gal ac gal ac gal ac Enlarge Map Please check the results and A o eco ge cmeeeline Cancel H Shapefile Conversion Page PC13626 UN 14JUN11 gt Accept CZ76372 0000329 19 14JUN11 6 6 65 65 062111 PN 226 Documentation
96. on Home Page sessseeeseeeeeene 70 3 Configuring Totals cccsssececsessssteeeeeeeeeeeeees 70 3 Viewing Current Harvest Data 70 6 Crop Deason ee 70 6 Overlap Control 70 7 Recording Load Data 70 7 Adding to an Existing Load 70 9 Additional Load Tips 70 9 Viewing Current Totals Reports ccceeeees 70 9 Viewing Filtered Totals Reports ssssssneeeeeenn 70 11 Swath Control Theory of Operation 75 1 Gompatibility c0c sc2h ccebc02 Zeg gegen d e 75 1 Stelle EE 75 1 Coverage Map 75 1 eeler 75 1 Limitations of Swath Control 75 2 Required Getup ee 75 3 Swath Control button 75 3 lun TEE TEE 75 4 Section Status Bar 75 4 View by Operation 75 5 Rates and Sections ssneeeeeeeeeeeeeee eeren reser 75 5 du E 75 6 Overlap Settings cccccccccccssssseceessssssteeeeeeeees 75 7 Turn on and Turn off Settings cccseeeees 75 8 Continued on next page 062111 PN 2 Contents Enabling eege EN Understanding Swath Control Turn On and Turn Off Settings cccceeeeeeeeeee Diagnostic Readings Swath Control Settings Quick Sheet Metric Swath Control Settings Quick Sheet SAE ISO Implements Implement Detected Warning sssssssseseeeev Operating ISO Implement ISO Implemente SOPtKOYS ere NEEN dee Remove Controlers eeren Auxiliary Controls Auxiliary Control Safety Signs 06008 Auxiliary Control Alerte Au
97. operator Auxiliary Controls Disabled Functions hereafter to enable B or disable C the Auxiliary Control functions and to enable the learn mode D Selecting the Learn Mode allows the operator to map All active assignments are shown with a constant status the functions by selecting the respective input controls for indicator E In case of a conflict the status indicator E the referring assignment See Auxiliary Controls Learn switches from green to red color Mode hereafter NOTE If disabled is selected Auxiliary Controls will be disabled and all mappings will show up with a dashed Continued on next page CZ76372 0000295 19 12JAN11 3 5 85 17 PN 280 Auxiliary Controls Input Device Input Unmapped Unmapped C Disabled D Learn Mode A Status Selection B Enabled Auxiliary Controls Disabled Functions The status selection drop down list A allows the operator to enable B or disable C the Auxiliary Control functions and to enable the learn mode D If Auxiliary Controls is Disabled all assignments are shown with a dashed status indicator E In case of a Continued on next page E d sr a Auxiliary Controls Disabled Functions E Status Indicator Dashed Function t Implement fo 2ZX1042160 UN 04DEC08 conflict the status indicator E switches from green to red color Selecting the Learn Mode allows the operator to map the
98. position and wait 30 seconds before restarting This ensures that all data is saved to the internal memory PC11398 UN 140CT08 PC11397 UN 140CT08 PC11399 UN 140CT08 DO NOT turn the key to the start position directly from the accessory position The reduction in voltage during the starting phase could result in a loss of all setup data CZ76372 0000160 19 29SEP10 5 5 40 4 062111 PN 36 Layout Manager Configure Multiple RUN pages Layout manager Page 1 A Include page in Home v Page Collection Select an area from above 2 gt A A lInclude page in Home Page Collection checkbox B Page Number list box Multiple RUN pages allow the user to monitor the status of multiple applications in an easy way without navigating through several pages The operator can configure five RUN pages on the HOME page To set up Multiple RUN pages 1 In Layout Manager select page number using the list box B 2 Configured the page with the applications to be displayed PC10358 UN 30SEP07 3 include in Home Page Collection Select an area from above Le PC10359 UN 30SEP07 Put check in Include page in Home Page Collection checkbox To view Multiple RUN pages click the HOME button on the menu bar of the display Each time the HOME button is clicked the screen will advance to the next RUN page When the last RUN page is being displayed on the s
99. problem persists please contact your John Deere Dealer GPS Alarms For GreenStar Basic Deluxe 200 GPS communications failure No communication with GPS receiver Check connections at GPS receiver No GPS Tracking Disabled No GPS position available Verify GPS receiver has clear view of sky No Diff Tracking Disabled No GPS differential correction available Verify GPS receiver has clear view of sky 2D GPS in use 2D GPS in use Verify GPS receiver has clear view of sky Continued on next page CZ76372 0000296 19 12JAN11 1 2 130 18 062111 PN 336 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics FAULT CONDITION FAULT DESCRIPTION ALARM TEXT Tracking Inaccurate The GPS receiver must be set to report at the 5Hz Rate Confirm settings on receiver The GPS receiver must be set to report at the 5Hz message output rate Confirm settings on GPS receiver and change output to 5Hz For 3rd Party Controllers NOTE 3rd Party controllers are controllers using RS232 connection Field Doc Connect and ISOBUS compliant controllers supporting Task Controller functionality Language Loading Errors CRC bad missing a colon bad prep header etc Language load detected corrupt file Reload software to USB drive Hardware compat version mismatch Invalid hardware for language file Reload software to USB drive Software version mismatch Language file incompatible
100. signal Enabled 3 4 Status of pie Steer Icon has been selected and Steer On is displayed FD Field Doc FD MBA Field Doc Map Based Application Field Doc A suite of applications on the MP and RCD that record the inputs on a field The Field Doc applications are capable of recording map based variable rate inputs FlexBox One of a family of next generation controller systems used throughout the Ag division GAI GPS Accuracy Indicator GPS Global Positioning System GSD GreenStar Display GSD2630 One of the RCD GreenStar displays A 10 4 VGA color touchscreen in a metallic silver housing Guidance Off For use when only documentation is needed GVC Global Vehicle Communications Harvest Doc A suite of applications on the MP and RCD that record the crop yield on a field The Harvest Doc applications are capable of recording map based crop yields HDOP Horizontal Dilution Of Precision Installed 1 4 of Status pie AutoTrac SSU and all other hardware necessary for use are installed Continued on next page CZ76372 00001BB 19 040CT10 1 3 140 1 062111 PN 346 Glossary Glossary of Terms Term Meaning ISO International Standards Organization KeyCard PCMCIA card that holds and activates all AMS software on the Mobile Processor L Band Frequency band containing the StarFire correction signals transmitted from the Inmarsat satellites L1 One of the frequencies used by th
101. steering sensitivity is only applied after machine is within 0 5 M 1 6 ft of track FIGURE A Therefore adjusting steering sensitivity does not change line acquisition performance The steering sensitivity is momentarily reduced if tractor front wheel and heading oscillations become too large Continued on next page C Track PC8849 UN 300CT05 Figure B D 2 5 seconds This event may be observed when implement is raised at start or end of row transitions If this event is observed while implement is activated sensitivity level is too high see Steering Sensitivity CZ76372 00001A8 19 010CT10 9 25 50 58 062111 PN 125 Guidance Adjusting Steering Sensitivity Level The steering sensitivity must be adjusted to accommodate field conditions and tractor implement configuration Steering sensitivity should always be evaluated when implement is activated In general soft soil requires a higher steering sensitivity level than firm ground and an PC8850 UN 300CT05 Figure A A 10 second B 1 second Too Low If steering sensitivity is too low a slow wandering track error pattern can be observed on display This track error pattern takes approximately 10 seconds to go from side to side as is shown in FIGURE A If excessive track error is occurring increase steering sensitivity by small increments until desired accuracy is achieved NOTE It is normal to see a momentary track
102. that is too close to the other while defining an AB Line can occur using A B and Lat Long methods A and B points of the AB Line are too close Must have 10 m 30 ft between point A and B Perform operation again The user defines a circle with the center point at a distance greater than 1 mile from the vehicle location This alarm can also occur if the user selects a circle with a center point that is far away The distance from the vehicle to the center point is greater than 1 mile Select another center point or drive another circle A timeout user has not reached the minimum AutoB distance within 45 sec occurs during AB Line definition using the AutoB method A timeout occurred during AB Line definition Redefine the AB Line The user attempts to change the tracking mode while recording in Curve Track Curve Track recording in progress Cannot perform operation until Curve Track recording is turned off Press clear all shifts button Clearing all shifts will restore original guidance track locations for the current field Are you sure you want to proceed Incompatible AutoTrac SSU Software AutoTrac Deactivated SSU exit code AutoTrac has detected an compatible SSU Vehicle Controller version Contact your John Deere Dealer to obtain the latest software updates for your SSU in order to operate AutoTrac NS43404 000015F 19 20JUL10 1 1 1 30 23 062111 PN 341 Troubleshooting a
103. time the grain tank auger cue tee Com Bend Ploneer When Auto Incrementing is selected the Save Load Variety 24R46 button is disabled Residue Management a s Auto Increment Load Number Losd Name re Check Box Load Destination E i Arcto tnoremert Load A 5 CZ76372 0000159 19 040CT10 4 4 70 8 062111 PN 237 Adding to an Existing Load The Load Number can be changed back to a number that has already been recorded using the and buttons This is useful if Auto Incrementing is turned on and it is necessary to stop or swing the auger in before the bin is emptied The Load Data screen on the home page always shows the totals since the last time the load was saved If the load number is changed to an existing load the totals that have already been saved are not reflected on the screen To see these values use the J button to view the reports w 1029 1 ary tw PC108571Q UN 25MAR09 OUO6050 000107C 19 11MAY09 1 1 Additional Load Tips A load does not have to be a combine bin load If your operation is more concerned with truck loads you can track the crop in each truck by using one number until the truck is emptied The Load Name and Load Destination fields do not have to have the name and destination in them If tracking where the crop is going is important to you and you do not care about how it gets there use the Load Name field for the destina
104. to an offset receiver To enter machine offsets e Select input box e Enter amount of offset in cm in using numeric keypad and select enter button e Select the receiver toggle button to move the offset to the right or left of cab center If no receiver offset is required then RECEIVER OFFSET input box should read 0 Machine offsets e A Lateral Distance from center line of machine to GPS receiver e B In line distance from non steering axle to GPS Receiver e C In line distance from non steering axle to connection point The connection point is where the tractor connects to the implement drawbar hitch except on 2 pt pivoting implements large planter In this case measure the distance back to the pivot point immediately behind the hitch e D Vertical distance from GPS receiver to the ground NOTE Offset D is for use with Surface Water Pro Machine Offsets Non Steering Location Rear Axle e ai Lateral distance from center line of machine to GPS receiver In line distance from non steering de machine turning point for track tractor to GPS receiver In line distance from non steering de machine turning point for track tractor to implement connection point Vertical distance fromthe GPS receiver to the ground Note Only used with Surface Vater Pro applications gt Accept PC13269 UN 28APR11 Machine Offsets D Vertical distance from GPS receiver to the ground E O
105. to the NOR flash See your John Deere dealer 523771 3 CCD Line Voltage Too High The voltage on the CCD_HIGH line of the CCD network is above the nominal Cycle power on the display If this diagnostic code shows up again check the harness wiring The voltage level on the CCD_HIGH line of the CCD network is below the nominal 523771 3 CCD Line Voltage Too Low Cycle power on the display If this diagnostic code shows up again check the battery and harness wiring 523772 4 CCD Line Voltage Too High The voltage on the CCD_Low line of the CCD network is above the nominal Cycle power on the display If this diagnostic code shows up again check the harness wiring The voltage level on the CCD_Low line of the CCD network is below the nominal 523772 4 CCD Line Voltage Too Low Cycle power on the display If this diagnostic code shows up again check the battery and harness wiring The voltage on the CAN_HIGH line of the Vehicle Bus Tractor Bus is above the 523773 3 Vehicle CAN Line Voltage Too High nominal Cycle power on the display If this diagnostic code shows up again check the harness wiring The voltage level on the CAN_HIGH line of the Vehicle CAN Bus Tractor CAN Bus 523773 4 Vehicle CAN Line Voltage Too Low is below the nominal Cycle power on the display If this diagnostic code shows up again check the battery and harness wiring The voltage on the CAN_LOW line of the Vehicle Bus Tractor Bus is above the 523774 3 Vehicle CAN Line Vo
106. turned on To turn documentation off for guidance only go to RESOURCES CONDITIONS softkey gt gt RESOURCES tab gt gt TASK Change TASK to DOCUMENTATION OFF All guidance screens and features are functional but no documentation data is recorded See DOCUMENTATION softkey in this section to turn on documentation CZ76372 000017A 19 23SEP10 1 1 How Documentation Organizes Data PC8867 UN 02NOV05 A FARM NAME B Field 1 and Field 2 C Task 1 and Task 2 D Operation 1 4 Data Organization Product type product name rate depth height seed type or crop variety define each operation GreenStar Basics and Pro documentation system YPS p ER p organizes operation data as shown in chart Each farm For example can have multiple fields with each field there are multiple tasks and each task can have multiple operations A task is any trip over field to perform a specific function Each Operation Product Application defined task can contain up to four operation choices Available operation types are defined later in this section Task Pre emerge Spraying OQU06050 00022BF 19 20NOV06 1 1 062111 65 1 PN 162 Documentation DOCUMENTATION softkey IMPORTANT When setting up the display with vehicle key in the accessory position power on engine off turn key to OFF position for 20 seconds BEFORE starting the vehicle Setup data is saved to the internal memory before operating whic
107. un pause select the PAUSE button again CZ76372 00001A5 19 010CT10 6 13 Recording a Straight Path within a Curved Path Straight Path starts from Field Edge 1 Drive the vehicle to the designated starting spot in the field Turn curve track recording on and press the PAUSE button 2 Paused is displayed below the button 3 Start driving the first pass When the spot in the field is reached where the pass starts to curve select the pause button again and curve track will start recording again 4 Drive to the end of the first pass 5 The straight path B will be created when the recording is un paused A Recording Turned ON then PAUSED B Bridge segment is generated to connect points C Recording UN PAUSED Continued on next page Straight Path starting from the Field s Edge PC9297 UN 29JUL06 CZ76372 00001A5 19 010CT10 7 13 50 44 062111 PN 111 Guidance Recording a Straight Path within a Curved Path Straight Path is between Two Curves 1 Drive the vehicle to the designated starting spot in the field and turn curve track recording on Start driving the curve path When you want to start creating a straight path select the pause button 4 Recording indicator will turn black Paused is displayed below the button Drive the straight path When you are at the point where the straight path should end select the pause button again and curve tra
108. up on the other side of the obstacle and the line will appear once the previous pass is located again e AutoTrac can be activated while PAUSED to get the vehicle lined up on the path before UN PAUSED curve track recording IMPORTANT Curve track recording MUST be UN PAUSED once the obstacle is navigated so curve track continues to record the driven path to be able to propagate the next pass A Recording PAUSED B Bridge segment is generated to connect two points C Tractor path not recorded while paused PC9284 UN 29JUL06 PC9285 UN O8AUG06 D Recording UN PAUSED E Path recorded without the tractors deviated path CZ76372 00001A4 19 040CT10 20 20 50 39 062111 PN 106 Guidance AB Curve Mode Theory of Operation a PC9030C UN 270CT06 A Start Recording of AB Curve B Stop Recording of AB Curve Track 0 Track 0 AB Curves allows an operator to drive a curved line in the field with two end points beginning and end and the passes parallel to the track in either direction will be generated based on the original driven track Each pass is generated from the original driven pass to ensure that steering errors are not propagated through the entire field The passes are not identical copies of the original pass The curvature of the pass changes to maintain pass to pass error Once the AB curve Track 0 is recorded 5 tracks will be generated Track 0 and 2 passes o
109. whether the camera is mirrored and whether the video application is mirrored PC13250 UN 15APR11 Adjust Video Settings A Mirror Image Toggle B Decrease Contrast C Increase Contrast CZ76372 00002D6 19 15APR11 1 1 115 3 062111 PN 308 Data Management Theory of Operation Data and setup information can be transferred to and from another GS3 2630 display or compatible desktop software using a USB flash drive It is also important to backup your data to a USB flash drive periodically NOTE Apex v2 7 or newer and several 3rd party desktop applications are compatible with the display Data and setup information are imported or exported as a Data Profile Only Global prescription maps and shapefile prescriptions can be imported individually Multiple Profiles from one or more displays can be stored on one USB flash drive IF they are given different names See the Data Type Details table to understand the types of data included in setup information versus maps and Documentation The internal memory is intended to have enough capacity to store all the data from a machine per season e g planting or harvest A message will appear when 90 of the memory is used Data should be Exported and deleted before memory used exceeds 90 To view the Memory space remaining go to Menu gt gt GS3 GS3 softkey Memory tab Bar graph represents percent of total memory used including sys
110. will show a location 33 cm 13 in or less to its actual position 95 of the time and 16 cm 6 5 in or less 68 of the time The signal accuracy that the customer is using helps determine the accuracy they can expect Steering Kit Type Steering Kit Type refers to which type of AutoTrac vehicle kit ATU or integrated AutoTrac steering kit is being used on the machine While performance can be similar between a properly set up ATU kit and an integrated kit testing has shown that total system error may be greater with the ATU kit than with the integrated kit Customers may notice delayed line acquisition and higher off track errors with the ATU kit AutoTrac universal kit on 2WD machines may also have less accuracy due to less steering authority on the front end For maximum accuracy both the integrated kit and the ATU kit need to have sensitivities properly set up and monitored for field conditions Vehicle Setup Proper setup of vehicles is crucial to the performance of AutoTrac This includes making sure the vehicle is ballasted by increasing weight on the steering axle up to but not exceeding the weight capacity of the tires to improve steering authority Please note that if additional attachments such as side or front mounted saddle tanks are installed ballast can be affected Additional attachments need be taken into account when selecting proper ballasting Along with increased ballast it is important to remember AutoTrac pe
111. 0 12 AutoTrac Combines cccccccccececececcccccccececeecececes 50 74 Touchscreen 00 cece ceec cc eecceeccceeceeceeceuecesaeseueeeseeseneeees 35 8 AutoTrac Sprayers EN SI ts ted tet CPs fede Sees 50 73 Trouble Codes cceesssecceceessseeeeeeesesessseeeeeeeeees 130 3 Engine Coolant Temperature Dickey John PAIA EAA E ee ee 65 66 Advanced Performance Monitor 60 17 Direct GPS Engine Oil Pressure TPAGIOR Se EA A Bechet A eh et A ees 60 9 Advanced Performance Monitor eee0e 60 17 Display sites bis dE EE dE E detente cadens sete aaa ardas aE iS 15 2 Engine Speed Brightness SE EE Ee 35 6 Advanced Performance Monitor ecceeee 60 17 CIS ANIING D 15 2 Enter BuO See eer 15 3 ole Test Zenteren EE ees 35 8 Secondary Navigation EN 15 4 Control Equipment KEREN estate ee ak hse tee EEN 45 3 Enter Button edel staves hii ae SE ech 15 3 Hitch Type ccceceesesesseeesceseseeveseevevesseseveneeeanes 45 4 Neng BUUDD ent ian 15 3 W hdc ite ed ch beaded 45 4 Shortcut Buttons 15 3 WEE 45 4 AUIMB WRC e oct etree he ct TNA 15 3 Recording SOU lCOn et cee a n Ee EENEG 45 4 Mounting EE 15 3 Error Codes Navigation Settee td eect eee AE EE es 15 3 30 1 Reprogramming Phi ho Bb ah Abie had Noe WY dee Wales 130 10 DE eet Gesten Ee 15 2 Exterior de UE 15 2 E EE a Maden cheated en seit dels 45 21 KE 130 5 Headland e ai 45 22 Secondary Navigation 15 4 Serial Number 35 1 F SOUEN A E E ca Dasa aha Lene bh 2 ad 3
112. 0 7 Coverage Maps 50 9 e lun el EE 45 14 Full Screen Mapping ssseesneeesseeeeenneerereernessnrneseen 50 8 Measurements l Setting Units of Meaeure 35 7 Memory Space saonneeeneeeesesseneserersetrnseenrsrrnsrrnnsene 45 14 Impassable Interior Boundarg 45 21 Memory Tab Implement GreenStar 3 GS3 See ee de EE EEN 45 1 Implement WidthScc2 ftressssssrcatal Rar eardasate a 45 44 Men ere enee ege ainidi naii iaioe 15 5 a 80 1 Men Blose setae Ee t ee dE 15 3 TE 45 8 Message Center EE 15 5 130 1 e EE 45 10 ICONS ENEE 130 2 Physical Wd 45 11 Metric Physical Width Table 0 0 c c0cccccceeseseseseseseeeeees 45 11 Setting Units of Meaeure nene 35 7 Track Spacing EECHER 45 11 Model E 45 4 Input a 9 eee 30 1 Moisture Interior Headland leier Sege si Meccan eee 45 22 Alarm Setup EENS 65 51 ISO Otter Ae sde eo et 65 50 Compliant Correction Getup 65 49 re 85 7 Curve Implement IS fei dein CEET 85 7 Setup S ee TAEI EEEE Seege 65 51 Implements aeaea nE e E EE 10 1 80 1 Ee KEE 15 1 N L Navigation Display due 2 81 aes eek 15 3 30 1 Language New Leader ittini hd detects ace te 65 66 SST E 35 7 Non Deere Controlers 15 1 65 66 Layout Manager Ebest vs SRE EM net fon cae a Sy EE 40 1 Numeric Format 35 7 Configure Multiple RUN Pages s es 40 5 O Options Arwen ok eit et ene eee cette 40 3 Lead Compensation sssssnnnnnesnnnnaeeeeeeeeene ene 50 9 50 13 Off track Emor 50 3 RE 45 14 Offsets Eine FLAGS gue cuccedeseeveucectev
113. 0 Implement Please celeste the deika e ex orma 4 implemen elow a Example John Deere Sprayer with ISO Network Address i B S 0x81 John Deere Sprayer 81x J e FA Se ei 3 Continued on next page Too Many Implements Connected CZ76372 00002B6 19 30MAR11 2 6 130 12 062111 PN 330 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Alarm Task Controller Invalid Implement Configuration The task controller detected an unsupported electronics configuration on this implement It will be ignored for this operation This alarm screen will be displayed whenever an ISO implement is detected which has member controllers The John Deere Task controller does only support ISO implements with a master controller and no member controllers Task Controller Invalid Implement configuration The Task Controller detected an unsupported electronics configuration on this implement It will be ignored for this operation CZ76372 00002B6 19 30MAR11 3 6 PC9747 UN 24SEP09 Invalid Implement Configuration Alarm Task Controller Invalid System Configuration The John Deere task controller detected an other conflicting task controller in the system Disconnect the other device for further operation This alarm screen will be displayed whenever another ISO Task Controller is found on the ISOBUS Disconnecting of the other Task Controllers is required because an ISO implement can only work with one Task C
114. 0 s Combines 9060 s 9050 s If the GS3 display is connected to one of the vehicles above the UPM automatically becomes disabled and will not be a selectable option in the menu The APM application contains all functions of the UPM plus an additional 7 functions When the GS3 Display is connected to John Deere CAN electronic based vehicles the following real time functions become available e Wheel and Radar or GPS Speed e Wheel Slip e Instantaneous Productivity PC9134 UN 17APRO06 APM Icon e Area Counter e Distance Counter e Engine Speed RPM s e Rear Hitch Position e System Voltage e Engine Coolant Temp e Engine Oil Pressure e Hydraulic Oil Temp e Transmission Oil Temp Optional items based on vehicle platform and configuration are e PTO Status Front amp Rear Fuel per Hour e Fuel per Area e Radar Connection and Calibration CZ76372 00000B1 19 15JUL10 1 3 Cato manager Select an area from above PC9034 UN 17APRO6 Z EY Layout Option A The APM is only available in layout manager option A as seen in the example image below APM will not function in any other screen layouts currently Continued on next page eriormance Nomitor Se aon 2 g i h q 2 al BZ s galfac 0 0 Y acih 31 a lol lo N d G e ap gt PC9135 UN 18APRO6 162 2 Ss e Run Screen for APM in Layout A CZ7
115. 042324 UN 04DEC08 bs 4 a Unmapped V Unmapped je Auxiliary Controls A Input Device Selection C Implement Function E Implement Type B Input Selection D Status Indicator green mapped red un mapped To assign one of an input device s input controls to one of an implement s functions perform the following steps B 6 Select an item from this list to select the specific input down arrow buttons located on the left hand side to map to the currently selected implement Function of the screen or by pressing directly on the desired C implement function touchscreen functionality Functions which are in use are grayed out but can 2 The row that contains the currently selected implement be selected function will be indicated by a cursor colored rectangle IMPORTANT The input device selection list only shows inputs which are compatible to the implement functions 5 Another list control will appear in the Input column 1 Select an implement function C by using the up and 3 Select the list control under the Input Device column A in the currently selected row 4 Choose an Input Device A by selecting one of the 7 A status indicator D will appear to indicate if the input items listed in this control device s input B control was successfully mapped to the implement Function C or not Continued on next page OUCC002 00029E9 19 04DEC08 2 5 062111 85 9 PN
116. 1 Controller timed out reprogramming session NOR flash reprogramming There was an error with trying to reprogram the NOR flash boot application image 62 problem Unknown controller A PF controller returned a response that the display did not know how to interpret 63 response Reprogramming session Generic notification that some part of the reprogramming session failed Another error will be 81 failed reported in addition to this one to indicate the specific failure mode This table contains the error codes that GS3 reprogramming software could report if a reprogramming session fails In the case of an error reprogramming will post an alarm indicating the failure and an error code and text of the problem will be placed in the message center CZ76372 00001B6 19 040CT10 1 1 130 10 062111 PN 328 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Alarm Screens SPN FMI Applicable Failure Mode Recommended Solutions The voltage level of the switched power is greater than the nominal Turn off the 158 3 Ge EE Supply Voltage Too ignition key then turn it back on If this diagnostic code shows up again check power 9 supply wiring Please contact your John Deere dealer The switched power voltage is below the nominal Turn off the ignition key and turn it 158 4 VTI Switched Supply Voltage Too Low back on If this diagnostic code shows up again check the b
117. 10CT09 G E CZ76372 000014E 19 28APR11 6 13 Map View Options Moving Overhead View e The vehicle is fixed and stays centered on the map while the map moves e The direction of the vehicle travel is toward the top of the page Continued on next page Moving Overhead View PC10857RE UN 010OCT09 CZ76372 000014E 19 28APR11 7 13 45 17 062111 PN 54 GreenStar General Perspective View e Functions similar to Moving Map View PC10857RD UN 010CT09 Perspective View CZ76372 000014E 19 28APR11 8 13 Fixed Overhead View e The vehicle moves back and forth while the map is fixed e North is always at the top of the page Recording Start or Stop button Map recording can be turned on and off manually or automatically Go to the Equipment Softkey to select the recording source MENU gt gt GREENSTAR 3 PRO button gt gt EQUIPMENT soft key gt gt MACHINE tab gt gt RECORDING SOURCE drop down box This button is used to start and stop recording when the recording source is set to Manual When an automatic recording source is selected in Equipment setup this button will be disabled When the red circle is blinking coverage recording is on See EQUIPMENT softkey in the GreenStar General section for more details on automatic sources that can be used to turn recording on off PC10857RF UN 010CT09 Fixed Overhead View CZ76372 000014E 19 28APR11
118. 111 PN 206 Documentation Harvest Monitor Yield Calibration Calibration General Calibration Information Screen SETUP YIELD CALIBRATION Select SETUP gt gt HARVEST MONITOR gt gt YIELD CALIBRATION Mass flow sensor must be calibrated in order to achieve accurate grain weight measurements Standard Calibration procedure must be performed in every crop that is harvested In addition optional Low Flow Compensation procedure may be performed to obtain an improved level of accuracy in situations where there are large variations in grain flow rate The following paragraphs describe different screens that are used in calibration procedure Calibration In Progress or System Not Calibrated Cell This section displays if mass flow sensor has been calibrated to desired crop If system has not be calibrated a message displaying System NOT Calibrated will be displayed If standard calibration has been performed a bar graph indicating flow rate sensor has been accurately calibrated If a standard and low flow calibration has been completed bar graph will expand to show an increased area of accuracy Calibration Mode Cell This screen indicates whether Standard Calibration procedures or optional Low Flow procedure is to be performed Select CALIBRATION MODE button to switch between STANDARD CALIBRATION and optional LOW FLOW CALIBRATION Yield Calibration Cell This screen allows calibration proce
119. 19APR11 1 1 120 3 062111 PN 311 Data Management Example 2 Backup Documentation Data A farmer has purchased a GS3 2630 display to replace his GS2 2600 display He plans to use the GS3 2630 in both his planter and combine He wants to backup his data from the display frequently and plans to give the data to his crop consultant at the end of planting and harvest He does not plan to Import any data to his display during the season Below is one method to properly manage the data Prior to the season 1 The Farmer unloads the data from his GS2 2600 compact flash card to Apex 2 He saves all necessary setup information and guidance lines for planting from Apex to a USB drive naming the Profile Planting 2011 3 He Imports the Profile Planting 2011 into his new GS3 2630 During to the Planting Season 1 Atthe end of each day during planting the farmer Exports data to the same profile Planting 2011 NOTE Export takes less time when exporting repeatedly to the same Profile because the As applied and Yield map log files that are already in the Profile on the USB drive are not exported again In this case the farmer is NOT importing data so he is NOT managing multiple Profiles and the risk of overwriting setup information or data unintentionally is low After the Planting Season 1 The Farmer gives the USB drive to his crop consultant who copies the Profile Planting 2011 and give
120. 2 6 back on the USB drive e Q With multiple iTEC Pro sequences how should A Yes with a feature within adaptive curves called keep these organized Repeat Mode which allows you to repeat over previously recorded adaptive curve lines This is located by going A It is important to properly name the sequences to GS3 Pro Guidance B Guidance Settings Tab and Raise and lower will likely be different for the interior selecting the Change button next to the label Curve passable and headland boundaries as well as for Track Settings In here there will a check box to turn different implements and tasks on Repeat Mode Q Why does my AutoTrac Universal ATU deactivate e Q How do remove unused iTEC Pro sequences for no apparent reason A Sequences are stored in the internal memory and A When the ATU deactivates a Stop Code is generated cannot be deleted Individual sequences cannot be and indicates why AutoTrac deactivated On an Original removed but sequences can have the functions edited GreenStar Display you will find the Stop Code by going or removed to INFO gt AUTOTRAC On a GS3 the stop code will be displayed in the top left corner of the GS3 Pro Guidance Screen or in GS3 Pro AutoTrac Universal Diagnostics Explanation of the stop code can be found in ATU Quick Reference Guide NOTE If contents of the display are deleted iTEC sequences will also be deleted e Q What if make a mistake naming an iTEC
121. 24SEP10 Calibration Factor Calibration Factor 2 Using numeric keypad input calibration factor F D 3 Select CALIBRATION FACTOR button to enter a new value Displayed Calibration Factor 950 Weight of grain shown on display 27 643 Ib Net weight of grain from scale ticket 27 022 Displayed Calibration Factor 950 X Weight of grain shown on display 27 643 Ib Net weight of grain from scale ticket 27 022 Ib New Calibration Factor 971 New Calibration Factor 971 CZ76372 0000180 19 24SEP10 4 4 Harvest Monitor Moisture Correction Setup Moisture Correction IMPORTANT Changing moisture correction in the Moisture Correction cell will not change the data already saved After changes are made all harvest information collected from that point will reflect the changes SETUP MOISTURE screens are used to setup moisture correction moisture alarm on off and moisture curves Screen SETUP MOISTURE Select SETUP gt gt HARVEST MONITOR gt gt MOISTURE Moisture correction screen is used to set moisture correction to match reading from a customer or elevator certified moisture sensor as shown on RUN PAGE 1 screen Continued on next page 42 SETUP Moisture TT Moisture D Correction 0 0 ele Moisture Alarm D ON D Ce 9 Moisture Curve gt e e Moisture E Calibration D Sample Rate per Minute PAGE Ge Gi L vz Jeng INFO J Harvest Mon a Moisture Sensor etsls
122. 2630 GreenStar Display OPERATOR S MANUAL 2630 GreenStar Display OMPFP11075 ISSUE EI ENGLISH CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constituents are known to the State of California to cause cancer birth defects and other reproductive harm If this product contains a gasoline engine A WARNING The engine exhaust from this product contains chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer birth defects or other reproductive harm The State of California requires the above two warnings Additional Proposition 65 Warnings can be found in this manual John Deere Ag Management Solutions This manual replaces OMPFP10724 DCY OMPFP11075 Introduction www StellarSupport com NOTE Product functionality may not be fully represented in this document due to product changes occurring after the time of printing Read the latest Operator s Manual and Quick Reference Guide prior to operation To obtain a copy see your dealer or visit www StellarSupport com OQUO6050 0000FB1 19 10AUG10 1 1 Read This Manual used on vehicles equipped with a cab l id ty Before operating display software familiarize yourself ee e oe with components and procedures required for safe e Original GreenStar Display and Mobile and proper operation Processor e GreenStar Displays IMPORTANT The following GreenStar components e AutoTrac Universal Steering Kit are no
123. 272 Auxiliary Controls e A green status indicator D indicates that the 8 Repeat steps 1 to 7 to map as many controls as is mapping is completed successfully needed e A red status indicator D indicates that the mapping was not successful In this case check the assignments and change as necessary OUCC002 00029E9 19 04DEC08 3 5 Display Auxiliarv Controls Status Device Function implement S Unmapped V Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped ZX1042156 UN 04DEC08 Auxiliary Controls A lInput Device Selection B Input Selection C Unmapped Biber fe existing assignment perform the 3 Select one of the list controls from the selected row RIESS Steps Either the Input Device A or Input B lists will 1 Select an existing assignment by using the up and suffice down arrow buttons located on the left hand side 4 From the selected list choose the Unmapped item of the screen or by pressing directly on the desired i C assignment touchscreen functionality 5 The assignment arrow will be removed and the 2 The row that contains the currently selected controls will be set to Unmapped C assignment will be indicated by a cursor colored rectangle Continued on next page OUCC002 00029E9 19 04DEC08 4 5 85 10 SE Auxiliary Controls Auxiliary Controls A View Selection C Mapped E Conflicts B AIl D Unmapp
124. 39 Totals GreenStar 2 Pro Reports ard Totais Viewing Filtered Totals Reports cy Wet Yieta The GreenStar 3 Pro field documentation system also wao 153 12 allows you to view totals for other operations or to view E Ory Yield 149 15 the accumulated data for several fields or even several berate years This allows you to have some of the power of the ee ee Ae Apex desktop system in the cab ee ST NOTE Apex is not available in all EAME countries o SS 366 00 The filtered totals reports can only operate on data ey that is present on the display If the display has Wet Throughout 4094 been cleared or if another profile has been loaded yi that data is not available for reporting Average oarre 7 15 a The filtered totals are seen by selecting the View Custom ginenen Z l iac Filter button A at the bottom of the totals screen veer Time Worked 00 20 This will bring up the Custom Filter dialog box Time Remaining SS A View Custom Filter button vie Se 0 000 PC12837 UN 30AUG10 CZ76372 000015B 19 040CT10 1 3 The Custom Filter allows you to choose the criteria for the data that you want to see You must select are Operation Type first as this causes some of the data filters to Opomtion Type change For harvest operations the Crop and Variety are required but you can select All for the Variety All of the other fields can either be left as All or specific values can be chosen
125. 4 70 5 062111 PN 234 Viewing Current Harvest Data Once the Home Page has been created and configured it can be used to show the operation current data This data can be toggled between the current Field data and the current Load data by pressing the button A When looking at the field data it is possible to view either the totals for all varieties or toggle to view the last variety harvested This is done by pressing button B It is only possible to view data for a variety that has already been harvested If there is variety in the field that has not been harvested it does not appear in the rotation A Field Load Toggle Button B One All Varieties Toggle Button 1638 inst A ai 1029 1 ary ow PC108571J UN 25MARO9 OU06050 0001078 19 25MARO9 1 1 Crop Season GreenStar 3 Pro field documentation tracks the crop season for each operation A This allows you to report on everything that you did for a crop even if some of the operations occurred in the previous year Common examples of this are fall tillage operations and winter grain crops The Crop Season is selected on the Client Farm Field page from the drop down This value is automatically set to the current calendar year unless the operator changes it A Crop Season PC12832 UN 30AUG10 CZ76372 0000157 19 30AUG10 1 1 70 6 062111 PN 235 Totals Overlap Control
126. 4 Analog Signal Ground 5 Analog Signal Input 6 925 CCD Drk Green J 7 924 CCD Yellow K 8 182 Constant Power 12vdc Red R 9 998 Audio Mute Output Gray H 10 Unused 11 211 Radar Input Brown L 12 915 Vehicle CAN LO Drk Green S 13 914 Vehicle CAN HI Yellow T 14 070 Ground Black V 15 RS232 Port1 Rx 16 RS232 Port1 RTS 17 RS232 Port1 CTS 18 904 Implement CAN HI P 19 905 Implement CAN LO N 20 Digital Output 21 Digital Input 22 907 RS232 PortO Tx 23 909 RS232 Port0 Rx 24 906 RS232 PortO RTS 25 908 RS232 PortO CTS 26 RS232 Port1 Tx CZ76372 00000BB 19 16JUL10 1 1 135 2 062111 PN 344 Specifications EC Declaration of Conformity Deere amp Company Moline Illinois U S A The person named below declares that Product GreenStar 3 Display 2630 Fulfills all relevant provisions and essential requirements of the following directives Directive Number Certification Method Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 2004 108 EC Self certified per Annex II of the Directive Name and address of the person in the European Community authorized to compile the technical construction file Henning Oppermann Deere amp Company European Office John Deere Strasse 70 Mannheim Germany D68163 EUConformity johndeere com Place of declaration Urbandale lowa U S A Name Hans Juergen Nissen Date of declaration 19 July 2010 Title Engineering Manager
127. 4 virtual soft keys per softkey mask The display provides a means for the operator to navigate and select all defined softkeys depending on the controller and available functions of the ISOBUS implement Using less than 11 softkeys there is no change With minimum of 11 softkeys the 64 virtual softkeys are available Softkey E and Softkey J Depending on the controller and available functions of the ISOBUS implement the user can navigate to the next previous set of softkeys by using the arrow softkeys E and J Softkey Mask PC13265 UN 28APR11 CZ76372 00002EF 19 29APR11 1 1 80 3 062111 PN 262 ISO Implements Meccage Canter Dates Caan p Remove Controllers The delete controller function erases the object pool that Select he typa of data you wish to delete is loaded on the display from the implement controller controners This forces the implement controller to send its data to the display again after a restart This is useful if there was a problem with a controller loading on the display Select MENU gt MESSAGE CENTER gt CLEANUP Check the box for the data to be removed and then press Delete Selected Data PC13267 UN 28APR11 Data Cleanup CZ76372 00002F1 19 28APR11 1 1 80 4 062111 PN 263 Auxiliary Controls Auxiliary Control Safety Signs Aw ARNING uxiliary Control Detected Improper operation can cause unintended implement moveme
128. 5 3 Software ARNON deer eo ee SE e TE 4 eetcda ct terse clear tee thete nae eared ate 65 3 GE e E 135 1 Display Reset Button 15 4 Flags Documentation Area Eeer 45 30 Clg e EENG 65 12 Line Flags mites MARA at EE EEN 45 30 Continued on next page Index 3 062111 PN 3 Page Page Point Ee E 45 30 Guidance FLAGS tab tice ete E ibe aaa ee toh ie 45 30 Adaptive curves Flow Chart Repeat mode Harvest Monitor DIAGMOSUGCS iss oats a vactent sts cascada ER 130 21 COMO EE 65 52 Troubleshooting eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeentteeeeeeeees 130 21 Focus Colot ise 0cc cfd ee ee a eee ee 35 5 Alarm e eat ae eet ea eee 130 22 Formatting Guidance Jon Seet dere ete ee aF 50 4 BE VE 35 7 Guidance Mode 50 9 Measurements Ave 35 7 Pre Season Checklist ccccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 130 6 RL 35 7 HReourements 130 21 Frequently Asked Questions ccceeeeeeeeeee 130 7 Settings Full Screen cernere reiii eiai 40 1 Accuracy Bar Step Gtze nenene 50 9 Full Screen Mapping 50 8 Adaptive Curve Track Mode 50 25 AutoTrac Deactivation Message eeeeeeeeeeeeee 50 9 G Guidance Mode eeeeeeeeeeeeerreerieerrerrrerrre 50 9 Lead Compensation cccssceeeeeeeeeeee 50 9 50 13 SGA coca Ste E art BaD Se are eats 110 1 Set Track Q E 50 3 EI 140 1 Shift Track osaan iena a aE EEA EES 50 15 EI de cecitencesoet tee eke teecon 140 1 Softkey and seci acc snamncranrnerennoniseneaereues 50 2 50 9 GPS Tracking TONES 2 0000 ef Eet ee
129. 6 062111 PN 160 Performance Monitor Additional Functions Available in APM Mode 1 UN T8A8R08 Engine Speed O E ine i nimin Y Speed of the engine in RPM Engine Speed OQU06050 0002313 19 0O70CT08 1 6 Engine Coolant Temperature TS Temperature of the engine coolant in C or F Engine Coolant Temperature OQU06050 0002313 19 070CT08 2 6 Engine Oil Pressure POY Iie SUN BARROS Pressure of engine oil in KPA or PSI Engine Oil Pressure OQU06050 0002313 19 0O70CT08 3 6 PC9144 UN 18APRO06 System Voltage APM Battery system voltage 4 4 O H a V System Voltage 4 OQU06050 0002313 19 070CT08 4 6 Transmission Oil Temperature PESAS E The temperature of the transmission oil displayed in degrees C or degrees F Transmission Oil Temperature OQU06050 0002313 19 0O70CT08 5 6 Rear Hitch Position SE APM Displays the current rear hitch position and position a limits 1 4 2 A e Rear Hitch Position OU06050 0002313 19 0O70CT08 6 6 60 1 7 062111 PN 161 Documentation No GPS Documentation If GPS is lost or there is no receiver a grower can still document and accumulate information or Totals The software used an alternative speed source wheel speed OQUO6050 0000E54 19 01SEP09 1 1 Turning Documentation On and Off NOTE Totals listed under TOTALS button are only calculated when documentation is
130. 6372 00000B1 19 15JUL10 2 3 60 15 062111 PN 159 Performance Monitor Drop down menus for APM selectable functions NOTE 8030 s and 7030 s will NOT display TIME TILL EMPTY in the GS3 display even though it is available in the tractor command center Totals and Settings Screens will remain identical in both the APM and UPM applications In Work Out of Work Status Indicator The arrow will change based on the recording source e UP Arrow displayed when NOT working e DOWN Arrow displayed when working Status Recording for SCV Flow on CAN Based Vehicles For SCV recording on CAN Based vehicles the SCV will only change recording status if the SCV paddle goes through a detent click not by canceling flow If detent flow is set to some time less than C continuous e Retract detent completed changes the status to in work e If set to 5 seconds state changes after 5 seconds of flow not at start of flow e Extend detent initiated changes the status to not in work If detent flow is set to continuous e Retract detent initiated changes the status to in work PC9136 UN 18APRO6 PC9137 UN 18APR06 PC9138 UN 18APR06 PC9139 UN 18APRO6 Out of Work PC9140 UN 18APRO6 In Work e Extend detent initiated changes the status to not in work Each SCV remembers its status through power cycles CZ76372 00000B1 19 15JUL10 3 3 60 1
131. 64 UN 17APR06 AUTO AUTO Ah h CZ76372 00000C0 19 15JUL10 5 6 SCV I VI The user can assign any SCV to turn the recording source on These selections will only show up if the vehicle has the corresponding SCV s Selective Control Valves for the Hydraulics PC9071 UN 17APRO06 SCV SCV I VI 4 gt CZ76372 00000C0 19 15JUL10 6 6 Performance Monitor Service Intervals The operator is able to view and change the Service Intervals Field When the operator changes the Service Interval the Hours Since Last Service value will remain unchanged If the operator sets the interval to zero the Service Interval function will be disabled The valid range is 0 990 hours When Service Interval Hours Since Service is less than 20 hours to next service the operator will see an alarm saying The vehicle is due for service in XX hours After the alarm is cleared by the operator it PC9099 UN 17APR06 Dec Rz Service Interval Service Interval will not display again until the next power cycle The first figure below shows the service interval input field while the second figure shows the alarm box when the vehicle needs to be serviced CZ76372 00000C1 19 15JUL10 1 2 Hours Since Last Service The operator is able to manually reset the hours since service value at which time an alarm will display confirming that the total should be reset The first figure below sh
132. 75 Guidance Coverage Maps Select the foreground drop down box and choose coverage or as applied if available for the type of coverage layer to display on the perspective view and maps screens See Equipment softkey to select recording softkey A B lines can be displayed on the maps by checking A B Lines checkbox C A Background B Foreground C Guidance Lines D Grid E Drainage Maps F Depression Map G Prescription Legend H Grid Size I Survey Points J GPS Accuracy K GPS Diagnostics L Clear Field Map Date This Field Only M Clear Field Map Date All Farms and Fields N Accept Button Background SY i Foreground F Coverage Only Guidance Lines Grid Grid Size 30 000 ft G Prescription Legend Survey Points A 2 Depression Map O GPS Accuracy o Mona C Beer El cya Clear Field Map Feet Map Settings PC12579 UN 27APR10 CZ76372 0000069 19 09JUL10 2 2 GUIDANCE SETTINGS tab The GUIDANCE SETTINGS tab allows setup of the following e Guidance Mode allows operator to select between Guidance Off For use when only documentation is needed Row Finder Used in standing row crop applications to mark end of a pass and guide operator to next pass Straight Track Uses straight line parallel passes Adaptive Curves Uses a manually driven initial pass then guides off of previous pass AB Curves uses a manually driven
133. 833 UN 30AUG10 A Overlap Control Check Box help ensure there is no area outside of the field is included in the yield calculation if a section of the head or platform extends over the boundary Similarly an interior boundary allows you to drive across a waterway and help ensure that each section is off while crossing e H a boundary is unloaded into desktop software it can either be set up on the display in the field or in the desktop software and saved to the USB drive If interior boundaries are used those fields must also have an exterior boundary e If data is not unloaded into desktop software and interior boundary can be created on the display without having an exterior boundary CZ76372 0000158 19 29SEP10 4 Recording Load Data Loads are a powerful feature of the GreenStar 3 Pro field documentation system They allow the user to capture data for specific parts of a field This can be used to track the crop that is sent to various destinations such as bins or an elevator They can also be used to trace scale tickets back to the field Load Name Truck A Load Destination Load Number 3 Load PC10857IM UN 25MARO9 Continued on next page CZ76372 0000159 19 040CT10 1 4 70 7 062111 PN 236 Totals Loads are identified by their name and number and by the crop type and crop season The destination can have more than one load with the same load name P
134. AR 3 PRO gt DOCUMENTATION gt NEW tab Four operations per task are allowed for all tasks other than Harvest The Harvest task only allows the Harvest operation Listed are available operations and details that can be set up within those operations Tillage e Type e Depth Planting and Seeding e Seed Type e Seed Brand e Varieties e Target Rates e Rate Units e Application Method e Depth e Tillage Practice e Lot Number e Product Details For Europe Only Rate comes from control unit on selected control units Product Application e Product s Product Rate e Carrier Carrier Rate e Tank Mix Name Optional e Application Method e Height e Product Details For Europe Only Rate comes from control unit on selected control units Harvest e Crop Type e Seed Brand e Variety e Load Name e Load Number e Load Destination e Residue management NOTE If using Harvest Doc or Harvest Monitor in a 70 Series combine all Harvest Monitor functions are accessed through the armrest CommandCenter Please consult the 70 Series Operator Manual for more detailed information on using the CommandCenter Water Management e Type NOTE See your SurfaceWater Pro Operator s Manual for more information Other Continued on ne PC8663 UN O5AUG05 MENU button PC12685 UN 14JUL10 GREENSTAR 3 PRO button PC8678 UN O5AUG05 DOCUMENTATION button PC12874 UN 23SEP10
135. AutoTrac Universal Quick Reference Guide that came with your AutoTrac Universal System or print it off from the www StellarSupport com website It defines these and other terms Steer speed is how fast the ATU wheel turns Acquire sensitivity is how aggressively the unit drives to the line Line Sensitivity Tracking is used to keep the lateral error low If your machine gets offline up to a foot the Tracking Sensitivity may be set too low Line Sensitivity Heading adjusts how much the unit corrects for heading error If you see a lot of left and right steering the Heading Sensitivity may be set too high Each sensitivity has an optimum value that works best for the specific vehicle platform you are using Refer to www StellarSupport com for recommended starting points for your vehicle platform Q would like to use the coverage map feature in GreenStar 3 How do properly set this up A Select GS3 button A and select Map Settings Then select the drop down menu for Foreground and select Coverage This selection will paint the map a light blue color If you are seeding or applying chemical you can select either Seed Rate 1 or Product Rate 1 as Foreground Either of these selections will color the map based on a legend that corresponds with the amount of seed or product applied Q My GreenStar 3 does not recognize setup data saved from Apex or other compatible desktop software What do need to do to get this working pro
136. Boundaries Overlap c v gt Accept PC13240 UN 14APR11 PC13241 UN 14APR11 CZ76372 00002C6 19 14APR11 1 1 75 7 062111 PN 248 Swath Control Turn on and Turn off Settings A Turn on time sec defaults to 1 but can be changed between 0 3 15 in increments of 0 1 seconds B Turn off time sec defaults to 0 6 but can be changed between 0 3 15 in increments of 0 1 seconds The operator can adjust the Turn on and Turn off settings to fit a specific machine The Turn on and Turn off settings are to compensate for average physical machine reaction time Electrical amp Mechanical for applying product Keep in mind that the reaction time does NOT increase as ground speed increases The physical reaction time remains constant for that machine configuration The machine travels more or less distance while the reaction is taking place at different ground speeds NOTE It is not recommended to utilize the Turn on and Turn off times to achieve intentional overlap this can cause additional system complications To achieve increasing amounts of overlap utilize the Percent Overlap between 100 125 This will allow the operator to achieve desired results and prevent skips by creating intentional overlap The best method to determine the correct Turn on and Turn off times is to turn on or off a section manually Measure the time from when the switch is actuated to when pr
137. C10857IN UN 25MAR09 Example Crop Type Corn Crop Season 2008 Load Name Trxk4 Load Number 17 CZ76372 0000159 19 040CT10 2 4 The operator can set the Load Name Number and Destination at any time before the load is saved The Load Name A and Load Destination B are selected Load Name Truck D A from the drop down lists New names and destinations S can be created at any time They can also be saved Pond Destira tor E from Apex or other compatible desktop software The cme g Load Number C is selected using the and buttons to ES increase or decrease the number The number can also ch Wd 1 d s be selected and changed from 1 9999 2 rere 5 Load totals continue to accumulate until the operator z presses the Save Load button D When the load is saved the accumulated total is stored to the internal memory and the Load Number automatically increases by A Load Name C Load Number one The load data can be viewed on the display or saved B Load Destination D Save Load to a USB drive to be used by Apex or another compatible desktop program NOTE Apex is not available in all EAME countries CZ76372 0000159 19 040CT10 3 4 NOTE Auto increment is available only on combines ee en The operator can select the Auto Increment Load Number check box A on the Harvest operation setup screen If Guana ti S this box is selected the system automatically increases ee Number by one every
138. Circle 6 Set Track Spacing e Lat Lon Track spacing can be defined two different ways Drive Circle SS track spacing button from Set Circle dialog 1 Drive machine to desired starting location in field Enter implement width 2 Press record button and Recording Circle will display Enter desired track spacing 3 Drive desired Seet Drive desired circle Continued on next page CZ76372 00001A9 19 010CT10 2 4 50 49 SS Guidance NOTE It is required to drive over 10 of the circle before you can calculate the center The more of the circle you drive the more accurate the circle center will be It is recommended to drive the entire circle for optimum circle center calculation Press the record button again to stop recording The recording button can be pressed once the text End Circle is displayed It is recommended to drive and record as much of the circle as possible The more of the center pivot circle driven the more accurate the center point is calculated From this circle center concentric circles are displayed based on track spacing 5 Lat Lon 1 Select the LATITUDE LAT input box and enter the center point latitude coordinates Select the LONGITUDE LON input box and enter the center point longitude coordinates Press Enter button NOTE The Latitude and Longitude coordinates have to be entered in decimal degrees 3 Press ENTER button This enters the circle center and sh
139. Communications channel failure with RTC or power to RTC is lost MM97743 0000288 19 21JUL10 1 1 130 17 062111 PN 335 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Trouble Code Pop Up Boxes Platform Core Software FAULT CONDITION FAULT DESCRIPTION ALARM TEXT CAN bus inbound communications overload CAN bus communications overload Reset the display or turn the power off and then back on When an implement s object pool is rejected by the VT There is a technical problem preventing proper operation of the display with the following implement Please contact implement manufacturer with this information A valid USB drive is inserted that contains bad setup data The setup data on the USB drive is invalid Please resave the setup data to the drive from your computer A valid USB drive is inserted that contains bad setup data that cannot be read by this version of the display software The setup data on the USB drive cannot be read by the display Please update your display software A USB drive is inserted that cannot be used by the display The USB drive is not compatible with the display Please use a different drive If the user is in the middle of setting up a new operation and they switch to the homepage the apps on the homepage would be disabled in that case Similarly if the user was changing the status of a job the apps on the homepage would be dis
140. Curve Track mode resulting in slow wandering S ing about the desired line and often tracks to the outside of the desired path g Aggressive Curve Track Performance AutoTrac exhibits rapid and high frequency corrections in Curve Track mode resulting in a tight S ing pattern or tracking to the inside of the desired path Access the Advanced Settings page on GS3 ATI Advanced Settings Parameters a Line Sensitivity Heading Determines how aggressively AutoTrac responds to heading error Higher Settings Result in more aggressive response to vehicle heading error Lower settings Result in less aggressive response to vehicle heading error Range 50 to 200 b Line Sensitivity Tracking Lateral Gain Determines how aggressively AutoTrac responds to off track lateral error Higher settings Result in more aggressive response to vehicle off track error Lower settings Result in less aggressive response to vehicle off track error Range 50 to 200 c Heading Lead Determines the impact of yaw rate vehicle rate of turn on tracking performance Heading lead acts as a look ahead parameter and can be used to minimize over steering Large adjustments may result in poor performance Higher settings Result in more aggressive response to yaw rate Lower settings Result in less aggressive response to yaw rate Range 50 to 130 d Steering Response Rate Adjusts the rate of vehicle steering in order to maintain tracking
141. D status when steering assistance is desired Press button 2 or 3 on multi function handle to activate AutoTrac This will initiate assisted steering In order to activate system following criteria must be met e Road Transport Switch is in field position e Header is engaged e Multi function handle is forward e Vehicle speed is less than 22 km h 13 6 mph e Vehicle heading is within 45 of desired track e Off track error is within 40 of track spacing e Operator is seated e TCM is on Deactivating System oTo Always turn off Deactivate and Disable AutoTrac system before entering a roadway PC7925 UN 140CT03 To turn off AutoTrac from GUIDANCE VIEW tab toggle STEER ON OFF button until STEER OFF is displayed AutoTrac system can be made DEACTIVE by following methods e Disengaging header e Turning steering wheel e Slowing to speeds less than 0 5 km h 0 3 mph e Exceeding speed of 22 km h 13 6 mph s Toggle STEER ON OFF button until STEER OFF is displayed in GUIDANCE VIEW tab e Operator out of seat for more than 5 seconds e Track number is changed e In reverse longer than 45 seconds CZ76372 00001AC 19 010CT10 1 1 50 74 062111 PN 141 Guidance AutoTrac Self Propelled Forage Harvesters Enabling System Press STEER ON OFF button to toggle between enable disable AutoTrac To enable system all of the following criteria must be met e AutoTrac activation
142. Documentation and Iel Coverage Totals AU UN IMPORTANT Each time a component is disconnected from the machine it is necessary to deactivate the relevant Profile and each associated COM Port On Forage Harvester or Combine equipped with an integrated printer do not manually deactivate the printer profile To deactivate a profile access the COM port setup page Select MENU button gt GREENSTAR 3 PRO button gt EQUIPMENT softkey H Machine tab A Select the desired machine type model name and connection Type then press COM Port button B COM Port settings page appears see COM Port Settings 000 WITT ZX1043696 UN 03DEC09 5 e CZ76372 0000147 19 25AUG10 1 1 90 7 PN 289 COM Port Assignment Com Port Settings Use tnis screen to deactivate a profile for a specific x machine Com Port Settings IMPORTANT If two Com Port B are associated to a profile individually deactivate each COM Port The following procedure stands for one COM Port deactivation Repeat procedure for each COM Port To deactivate a profile A for a specific machine proceed as follows 1 Select MACHINE tab then the desired Machine Type 2 Select in the profile A drop down box 3 Select Com Port B number to deactivate 4 Then press ENTER button C to deactivate profile or CANCEL button D to cancel procedure The COM Port Profile is now deactivated for a specific machine
143. ENU Softkey PC12685 UN 14JUL10 ER cms GREENSTAR 3 PRO button PC8677 UN O5AUG05 EQUIPMENT Softkey Continued on next page CZ76372 000013B 19 14JUN11 1 4 45 5 062111 PN 42 GreenStar General Machine Tab Recording Source Documentation and Coverage O Rieza Memory Used PC13268 UN 28APR11 Machine Tab A Machine Tab E Machine Model Drop Down B Implement 1 Tab Menu C Implement 2 Tab F Machine Name Drop Down D Machine Type Drop Down Menu Menu G Connection Type Drop Down Menu H Machine Turn Radius Input Box NOTE All items and changes will be saved under the current machine name NOTE Offsets are provided by some ISO implements and some Deere tractors Some list boxes may be grayed out when the machine is automatically recognized The Machine and Implement tabs are required to be populated with equipment information such as e Type e Model e Name e Offsets Continued on next page I Turning Sensitivity Input Box M COM Port Button J Change Offsets Button N Fuel Button Business K Recording Source Drop Down Pack Europe Only Menu L Record Pause Button Machine Type Vehicle type being used e g Tractor Combine Sprayer Machine Model Model number of the vehicle being used For John Deere vehicles model numbers will be available from the drop down list Machine Name The name is used to further clarify wh
144. F0 19 28APR11 7 8 Data Cleanup PC8663 UN O05AUG05 DATA CLEANUP will only be available when an ISO Implement is connected DATA CLEANUP is used to remove ISO Implement data MENU button PC12868 UN 16SEP10 from the display The information will be reloaded after the display restarts This is useful if there was a problem with a controller loading on the display See the ISO Implements section of this Operator s Manual for more Message information Center MESSAGE CENTER button With Info Icon PC13266 UN 28APR11 DATA CLEANUP button CZ76372 00002F0 19 28APR11 8 8 062111 130 4 PN 322 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Viewing Basic Diagnostic Readings 1 Select Menu button Basic display diagnostics such as operating voltage 2 Select Display and CAN bus status can be found on the Diagnostics i Readings Page 3 Select Diagnostics soft key This information maybe requested by your John Deere 4 System diagnostics are located on Display Settings dealer to aid diagnostics Readings page OUO6050 000129B 19 19JUL10 1 1 Resetting Display IMPORTANT All setup data entered since power up could be lost when using reset button GE Should display fail to respond to operator inputs system can be reset by selecting and holding the reset button for 3 seconds until the light on the front of the display starts blinking This will reboot system and restart all applicati
145. Found This field has Adaptive Curves previously recorded Press Yes to enter Repeat Mode to guide from previously recorded curves This disables recording and guides the vehicle off of previously recorded passes Press No to continue creating additional Adaptive Curves recording must be turned on Curve Data Found PC12924 UN 27SEP10 CZ76372 00001A4 19 040CT10 13 20 50 33 062111 PN 100 Guidance Record and Repeat This feature allows the operator to recall saved Adaptive Curve Track data paths for a field and guide on the recorded passes without recording again NOTE Track spacing must be the same for all passes The operator can also manually drive an entire field or defined pattern with record button on and then repeat the recorded paths Example e Record each pass in a field that had drip tape installed without an automatic guidance system with varying guess rows e Follow beds from previous season to record all passes in field IMPORTANT RTK Absolute Base Mode is required in high accuracy applications when repeatability is needed Only RTK Absolute Base Mode provides consistent repeatability and accuracy in Curve Track Using Record and Repeat e RESOURCES CONDITIONS softkey gt gt RESOURCES tab Select the Client Farm Field name to which the stored Curve Track data was assigned e GUIDANCE SETTINGS tab gt gt TRACKING MODE drop down box gt gt ADAP
146. HN DEERE SERVICE SUPERIORITY We ll be around when you need us TS103 UN 23AUG88 DX IBC D 19 04JUN90 1 1 IBC 1 062111 PN 361 John Deere Service Keeps You On The Job IBC 2 062111 PN 362 John Deere Service Keeps You On The Job IBC 3 062111 PN 363
147. IGHT button to enter new value 9 Select SCALE WEIGHT button to change weight CALIBRATION FACTOR will change automatically value when grain weight is entered 10 Using numeric keypad input NET WEIGHT OF GRAIN from scale ticket Continued on next page CZ76372 0000180 19 24SEP10 2 4 65 47 PN 208 Documentation Low Flow Compensation Procedure Optional NOTE DO NOT perform a manual adjustment of calibration factor if you intend on using Low Flow Compensation procedure The following procedure should be performed only after Standard Calibration procedure has been performed for this crop and condition While procedure is optional it will produce accurate results only if it is followed carefully The procedure should be performed at approximately one half to two thirds of ground speed at which Standard Calibration procedure for this crop and condition was run and in an area that is reasonably level and uniform in yield Screen SETUP YIELD CALIBRATION Select SETUP gt gt HARVEST MONITOR gt gt YIELD CALIBRATION IMPORTANT Be sure combine grain tank and unloading auger are empty Be sure wagon or truck hauling grain away from combine is empty 1 Select CALIBRATION MODE button and select LOW FLOW 2 Select START STOP button and display will change to YIELD CALIBRATION IS RUNNING NOTE There is a delay after changing ground speed before moving indicator responds Therefore after making a
148. Incompatible hardware display Make sure you have the correct image for the display hardware The reprogramming ManifestFile sdm file has been corrupted Make sure the file matches the 48 Update file invalid original image User removed the USB flash drive during a reprogramming session Repeat the reprogramming 51 User aborted process with the drive inserted the entire session 55 Controller flash erase failed A PF controller could not erase its flash memory A PF controller received a record that was missing a colon Customer could try reprogramming the 56 Message missing colon controller again in case of a bus error A PF controller received a record that was too long Customer could try reprogramming the controller 57 Record too long again in case of a bus error A PF controller received a record that was not the expected length Customer could try 58 Invalid record length reprogramming the controller again in case of a bus error A PF controller received a record that was out of the expected sequence Customer could try 59 Sequence error reprogramming the controller again in case of a bus error Controller received odd A PF controller received a record that had an invalid address Customer could try reprogramming the 60 address controller again in case of a bus error A PF controller stopped responding to the display during a reprogramming session Check connection to the controller may require a power cycle If communication is resumed repeat the 6
149. Kai CH o 3 95402310 3 95406773 O Lon Lon E l 5 Z ka 4 S OQ O a Set Track 0 Continued on next page CZ76372 00001A3 19 010CT10 9 10 50 2 3 062111 PN 90 Guidance Lat Lon Heading NOTE The Latitude and Longitude coordinates must be entered in decimal degrees Drive to desired location in the field Enter Latitude coordinate for point A Enter Longitude coordinate for point A Enter desired heading NOTE 0 000 indicates North 90 000 East 180 000 South and 270 000 West ON ss 5 Press enter button A Current Track 0 E Track Spacing Set Track 0 Method Lat Lon Heading a B v Current Track 0 Tillage Gi Heading 270 7540 Point A Lat 41 72917443 Point A Lon 93 95402310 Track Spacing t Point A 1 72917443 Lat B Method F Point A Lat Desired 70 7540 S C New G Point A Lon ea 3 D Remove H Desired Heading Value Lon gees g i 4 gt H 4 2 S T Set Track 0 CZ76372 00001A3 19 010CT10 10 10 Adaptive Curve Mode Theory of Operation or 5 EE S a Se e are 3 SE Pad eee J SE D N EE SEH T A PC9029 UN 17APR06 Curve Track allows the operator to record a manually driven curved path Once the first curved pass has been recorded and machine is turned around the operator can Parallel Track or activate AutoTrac once the propagated path appears The vehicle will be guided along subsequent passes based off of the
150. Line Viithin 40 Tracking Vudth GREENSTAR 3 PRO gt gt DIAGNOSTIC softkey gt gt AutoTrac e A View Dropdown Box e J Pivot Pro License Indicates weather or not the e B Last Exit Code Issued Indicates why AutoTrac display has a valid Pivot Pro License deactivated or will not activate e K AB Line Defined Indicates if a valid AB Track 0 e C Time of Last Exit Code Time and date of when is defined and selected for the current tracking mode last exit code occurred e L Free of SSU Trouble Codes Indicates if SSU e D SSU Capabilities Curve Reverse Steer has any active trouble codes which might not allow Sensitivity Indicates if the vehicle steering controller AutoTrac to activate is capable of operating in Curve Track Reverse or if e M Valid Implement Guidance Configuration If Steer Sensitivity is tunable from display Yes or No will implement guidance is in use indicates whether certain be displayed indicating if that feature is available or not settings and constraints have been met e E AutoTrac License Indicates whether or not the e N Steer On Off Button Indicates if steer on off display has a valid AutoTrac License and which it is button is in the on or off state SF1 or SF2 e O Vehicle Gear Selected Show which gear the e F GPS Valid Indicates if valid GPS is received vehicle is currently in e G Differential Correction Indicates if receiving e P Speed Within Range Indicate
151. M operator to drive and be guided along a variety of field patterns o 5 e Simple Curve IS e S Curve e Boxed e Race Track e Spiral e Circle Shift Track Operation The use of shift track is not recommended when using Curve Track Shift track will not compensate for inherent A Simple Curve GPS drift in Curve Track mode peered Spira Continued on next page PC9032 UN 17APRO6 D S Curve E Race Track F Circle CZ76372 00001A4 19 040CT10 16 20 50 36 062111 PN 103 Guidance Pause Recording Feature TI gt gt DDD DD D GE Track Recording Paused Steer Sensitivity CO EEK BLS Paused 30 000 ft Steer Off Curve Track Pause Recording Feature PC12589 UN 29APR10 A View C ShiftTrack Settings E Pause Button B Guidance Settings D Curve Track Recording Paused The PAUSE button E is located next to the curve track created is a distance of 0 8 km 0 5 miles 2 640ft recording button If the distance between the points is greater than This feature allows the user to PAUSE the recording of a vehicle s path When recording is UN PAUSED curve track will resume recording and connect the space ing P R hotweenwhera i was PAUSED andUN PAUSED wih EE Ee 0 8 km 0 5 miles 2 640 ft the line segment will not connect resulting in a gap in the path a straight line This can be helpful when there is a When the pause button is sele
152. N 180 Documentation Pressing the Product Setup button shown on previous page will bring up the Product Application screen This screen allows the operator to change Product Type or Product Name Rate Units are set on lb ac and cannot be changed when using a dry box Pressing the Enter button E will save changes and return operator to the GreenStar 3 Pro Documentation screen Pressing the Cancel button D will return the operator to the GreenStar 3 Pro Documentation screen without making any changes D Cancel button E Enter button A Product Type B Product Name Product Application Z nse gt Rate Units C Rate Units A 4 i S Product Application screen CZ76372 0000292 19 30MAR11 3 3 Product Application Product Details Europe Product Application OG Only Fs The Product Details function allows documentation and proauct type 4 communication of related information between desktop c software and GS3 for products like chemicals fertilizer Product Details are only available for the Operations Planting Seeding and Product Application Product SES Application is supported by sprayer and spreader NOTE The GreenStar Seeder Sprayer Spreader Pro Universal activation enables the Product Details function Product Details 5 isn t available in all countries S E 1 If Product Details button A is grayed out define i Product Type B and Product Name C first T 2 Pres
153. N OFF This allows all guidance screens and features to be functional while recording no documentation data GreeaStar 2 Pro Documentation PC12824 UN 27AUG10 GreenStar 3 Pro Documentation CZ76372 0000154 19 23SEP10 1 1 65 26 062111 PN 187 Documentation Harvest Documentation Setup MENU button gt GREENSTAR 3 PRO button gt DOCUMENTATION button gt HARVEST tab This screen allows operator to setup and change following items Grain Cotton Crop Type Crop Type Seed Brand Seed Brand Variety Variety Load Type Load Type Load Number Load Number Load Alarm On Off Load Cart Load Cart Load Destination Module ID Residue management Gin Turnout HARVEST tab required NOTE Client Farms Fields Task have to be setup under RESOURCE CONDITIONS button before the Resource Condition icon is shown and harvest operation can be accessed Tank and Basket Loads will only increase if the current load has been selected for more than 60 seconds This will prevent a new load from being created when for example a truck is being topped off Save to a USB drive before starting Harvest otherwise it can be setup in cab as a new names PC8663 UN O5AUG05 MENU button PC12685 UN 14JUL10 GREENSTAR 3 PRO button PC8678 UN O5AUG05 DOCUMENTATION button NOTE Combines loose unswitched power shortly after the
154. NOTE If six varieties have already been entered entering See 8 a seventh variety will replace the first variety entered z This process will repeat for each new variety past six A Brand C Color B Variety D Lot Number CZ76372 0000121 19 28SEP10 3 17 Removing Varieties 2 S Add Edit Variety Once a variety has been entered it cannot be deleted or edited using the GreenStar Display However it is possible to remove a variety from view on the display Choose the variety you wish to remove from view From the variety drop down A select the entry with the dashes Select Accept A Variety drop down menu Lot Number E S 4 S Cancel 5 a Continued on next page CZ76372 0000121 19 28SEP10 4 17 65 7 062111 PN 168 Documentation Assign Varieties to Rows The operator may assign a variety to any number of row units in any configuration up to six varieties may be chosen to document for any one planter Select Assign Variety to Rows Choose the variety that is to be assigned NOTE Assigning varieties to rows will begin with Row Unit 1 on the left and continue in order to end of the planter on the right As with any implement right and left are determined as sitting in the seat direction of travel when the implement is working Choose the End Row NOTE The end row is the row in which the variety chosen is to stop The row entered is included Assign Multiple Varieties If multiple varieties are to be assig
155. NOTE When using Overlap Control header width is divided into sections automatically with a maximum of eight sections and a minimum section width of 1 5 m Overlap Control automatically adjusts the width of the header as the harvester moves over areas that have already been harvested This feature improves the accuracy of the area and yield data Platform Platform Width Less than 6 1 m 20 ft 6 1 7 3 m 20 24 ft 7 6 8 8 m 25 29 ft 9 1 10 4 m 30 34 ft 10 7 11 9 m 35 39 ft 12 m 40 ft and greater Number of Sections INIO on kl wo Row Crop Head Row Spacing Rows per Section 38 cm 15 in 4 51 cm 20 in 3 76 cm 30 in 2 Overlap Control is turned on by checking the box on the Header setup screen When it is turned on the manual controls for changing the header width are disabled Overlap Control ensures that harvested area does not extend over or out of field boundaries or extend into an interior boundary e Exterior boundary only one exterior boundary can be defined for a field e Interior boundaries multiple interior boundaries can be defined and named for a field Boundaries though optional can be helpful when using Overlap Control For example an exterior boundary can GreenStar 2 Pro Equipment tmpterment Type Ti baren ia Yv a Name Physical Width HA Imptersent wieth HA Tech PC12
156. ONFIGURED 2 4 of pie Valid AutoTrac Activation Tracking Mode has been determined and a valid Track 0 has been established Correct StarFire signal level for AutoTrac Activation is selected Vehicle conditions met e ENABLED 3 4 of pie Steer Icon has been pressed and Steer On is displayed e ACTIVATED 4 4 of pie with A Resume switch has been pressed and AutoTrac is steering the vehicle See AutoTrac Status Pie in this section for more information Steering Sensitivity Allows AutoTrac users to adjust the vehicles steering sensitivity To adjust steering sensitivity select the input box and enter the desired steering sensitivity value via numeric keypad and select the enter button Set Track 0 button Allows the operator to set Track 0 in the following modes using the following methods PC8832 UN 250CT05 D Stage 1 INSTALLED PC8833 UN 250CT05 wo Stage 2 CONFIGURED PC8834 UN 250CT05 Stage 3 ENABLED PC8835 UN 250CT05 oO Stage 4 ACTIVATED CZ76372 00001A0 19 30SEP10 3 9 Straight Track Mode e Set Track 0 button PC12934 UN 30SEP10 Set Track 0 Set Track 0 Button CZ76372 00001A0 19 30SEP10 4 9 Circle Track Mode only available with Pivot Pro Module e Set Circle Button PC12935 UN 30SEP10 Set Circle Set Circle Button CZ76372 00001A0 19 30SEP10 5 9 Adaptive Curves Mode e Record button Continu
157. PC8663 UN O5AUG05 MENU button PC11392 UN 140CT08 PC11393 UN 140CT08 DISPLAY softkey CZ76372 0000059 19 20JUL10 2 6 BRIGHTNESS button can be changed by selecting PLUS or MINUS button PC11440 UN 280CT08 Sl mac BRIGHTNESS button CZ76372 0000059 19 20JUL10 3 6 NOTE Sync with Cab feature only functions on selected vehicles Sync with Cab check box when activated allows the GreenStar display to control the brightness of other displays within the vehicle cab Deselecting the check box will allow only display lighting to change with no effect on other cab displays and lights If deactivated PC8686 UN O9AUG05 V Sync With Cab Check box the brightness controls will only influence the GreenStar display CZ76372 0000059 19 20JUL10 4 6 Volume can be changed by selecting either or button Continued on next page PC11438 UN 240CT08 ge RI VOLUME button CZ76372 0000059 19 20JUL10 5 6 35 4 062111 PN 27 Display Setup NOTE Highlight color is defaulted to red at initial power up of display Highlight Focus Color can be changed by selecting desired color red blue green PC8686 UN O9AUG05 V Highlight Focus Color CZ76372 0000059 19 20JUL10 6 6 35 5 062111 PN 28 Display Setup normprary romere o Display Brightness Control There are three modes that the
158. PM Below The display EF will allow the operator to choose from an input list which source or function will indicate that recording is on or off Manual The PM will use this status to know when to engage the various measurements and this value will be in sync with the GreenStar Application Manual When this item is selected the operator can manually trigger and stop the recording button located to the left of the recording source list This choice is always available CZ76372 00000C0 19 15JUL10 1 6 Rear Hitch This choice is only available if the vehicle is equipped with a rear hitch APM Hitch Recording is an adjustable height setting in the command center PC9067 UN 17APR06 HCU Rear Hitch h CZ76372 00000C0 19 15JUL10 2 6 Rear PTO This item is only available in the list if the vehicle is equipped with a Rear PTO Continued on next page PC9068 UN 17APR06 RPTO Rear PTO 4 gt CZ76372 00000C0 19 15JUL10 3 6 60 6 062111 PN 150 Performance Monitor Implement Switch This item is always available and functions based on the position of the implement switch PC9069 UN 17APR06 4 gt Implement Switch CZ76372 00000C0 19 15JUL10 4 6 AUTO If a John Deere implement is connected to the system that is broadcasting its work status this item will be selected in this list and then the rest of the list will be disabled PC90
159. PN 319 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Message Center Icons PC8582 UN 01NOV05 PC8648 UN 01NOV05 These icons are used throughout Message Center Uy 4 CANCEL CLEAR PC8649 UN 01NOV05 PC8650 UN 01NOV05 ENTER GOTO PC8651 UN 01NOV05 PC8652 UN 01NOV05 NEXT CAL RETURN CZ76372 00002F0 19 28APR11 3 8 COMPONENTS AND SOFTWARE VERSIONS button PERGERET UNT eee will allow users to view all components on the network and the software versions loaded to them You may also use the reprogram device button to reprogram a specific controller if necessary MENU button PC12868 UN 16SEP10 Message Center MESSAGE CENTER button With Info Icon PC8665 UN 05AUG05 COMPONENTS AND SOFTWARE VERSIONS button Continued on next page CZ76372 00002F0 19 28APR11 4 8 1 30 2 062111 PN 320 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Diagnostic Addresses Bees Ee NOTE Diagnostic addresses are available to access specific diagnostic information This information can assist the John Deere Dealer in diagnosing problems Different device controllers can be Seel iN EE selected from drop down box as shown Select DIAGNOSTIC ADDRESSES button The number of devices available will depend upon machine Message configuration The list of addresses can be scrolled up or Center down with rotary thumb wheel Selecting an address will show data for that address MESSAGE CENTER button Wit
160. Press SETUP gt gt HARVEST MONITOR gt gt YIELD CALIBRATION Mass flow sensors must be calibrated in order to achieve accurate cotton weights Calibration should be performed when necessary as condition and maturity of crop change or at least once a season Quick Calibration Easiest calibration procedure when there is no scale available for weighing harvest samples Standard Calibration Used when actual weights can be obtained from a scale for harvest samples Manual Calibration Only used if previous procedures do not work because calibration is off by more than 50 Before performing manual calibration check to make sure all components in yield monitoring system are Continued on next page installed and performing correctly and that sensors are unobstructed Post Calibration Done with desktop software There is no post calibration procedure to be performed in field or on display This is recommended method for best results Desktop software allows post calibration using weight of crop from whole field or weight of crop from each module depending on level of detail wanted Are you a customer that is using Harvest Monitor Cotton for the sole purpose of seeing your yield as you go across the field If you believe it is important for the Harvest Monitor Cotton system to be as accurate as possible at all times in the field on display in cab the following recommendation can help you achieve this expectation Mass flow sen
161. Pro Select button I to enter the GS3 Documentation screen and make sure there are no duplicate operation tabs displayed at the top of the screen If there are duplicates select the operation that does not belong and select the Remove button Q get the error message Implement Recording not allowed on my GreenStar 3 Display What should do about it A Check Diagnostics page C from the GreenStar 3 Pro Menu and change the view box from Deere GPS to Recording This should tell you what recording was stopped and you can make the necessary adjustments Q When spray or plant using both the Original and GS3 Displays get error message ID 234 or Display address claim conflict What does this mean and what should do A Both displays are trying to run as the primary display If the GS3 is the actual primary display power down and unplug it then power up again with only the Original GreenStar Display plugged in Go to SETUP gt ORIGINAL GREENSTAR MONITOR gt DISPLAY ADDRESS and set it as the primary Now plug in the GS3 Display with the power still running on the Original display If you have two Original GreenStar displays hook them up to the primary connections and turn on the power Go to SETUP gt ORIGINAL GREENSTAR MONITOR and select line D so it shows as primary Turn off the power unhook the primary processor and display and hookup the secondary display to the auxiliary connections Power up and go to SET
162. Profile A drop down box then enter the desired Profile name 2 Assign a Com Port B number to this Profile 1 or 2 S Q 3 Define the Port Type C EH T gt j e In Cab Printer see User Define Printer Layout d section 15 S e N Sensing YARA N sensor e Inoculant Dosing S e Field Doc Connect see Com Port Settings 3rd Party Control Units section e Serial Port that is GPS reciever or any other CH compatible components to connect 4 Define the Controller Protocol D if applicable 5 The press ENTER button to save profile or CANCEL S button to cancel procedure All COM PORT assignments for a specific machine can be reviewed from the GreenStar 3 Pro Diagnostic Reading S page S To review the Com Port Settings select MENU button gt GREENSTAR 3 PRO button gt DIAGNOSTIC softkey C The Diagnostic Readings page appears see Com Port A Profile D Controller Protocol Setting Review B Com Port E Enter Button C Port Type F Abort Button CZ76372 000019C 19 29SEP10 1 1 90 3 062111 PN 285 COM Port Assignment COM Port Settings 3rd Party Control Units Com Port Settings 1990 1990 36ft Implement Name P oo dn CH D EE A Profile D Next Page Button B Com Port E Abort Button C Port Type F Implement Type IMPORTANT When connecting with a Rawson control unit turn main switch to OFF before leaving vehicle or performing maintenance NOTE 3rd Party contro
163. S with enhanced accuracy 4 inches pass to pass at 20 Set Track 0 Allows the operator to set initial track which all subsequent tracks are created from Seed Monitor Legacy seeding monitor controller One of the SeedStar Generation 1 controllers Companion SM to the ASRC SNR Signal to Noise Ratio SPFH Self Propelled Forage Harvester A machine to harvest crops such as hay or corn for use as animal forage ssu Steering System Unit The controller on the vehicle that transforms errors in position or heading to commands for the steering actors The AMS GPS receiver system This consists of a multichannel receiver that operates on the L1 and L2 bands an antenna a sealed housing and a terrain compensation unit on later versions All versions of the StarFire receiver can receive the GPS L1 amp L2 signals the WAAS differential correction signal and the SF1 and SF2 correction signals All versions produce a 5Hz CAN bus output and a NMEA 0182 standard StarFire output on the RS 232 interface The Navcom differential satellite correction signal Navcom tracks the GPS satellites using a global network of base stations The data from these stations is processed and correction terms are generated to compensate for satellite position and clock errors There are two classes of StarFire correction service SF1 provides a two sigma pass to pass accuracy of fourteen inches and SF2 provides four inch accuracy Shift Track Used to adjust position of machin
164. Settings Current Date 059 Settings Current Time 060 Radar Calibration Constant 061 UIM Accept Global Messages 062 Access Manager Password 72 Configurable Vehicle Bus Function Instance 227 Boot Block Program Part Number Software 228 Boot Block Program Version Number Software 231 Board Service Package Part Number Software 232 Board Service Package Version Number Software 233 Platform Virtual Terminal Part Number Software 234 Platform Virtual Terminal Version Number Software 235 Device Part Number Hardware 236 Device Serial Number Hardware 237 Software Assembly Part Number 238 Software Assembly Version Number MM97743 0000289 19 21JUL10 2 2 130 16 062111 PN 334 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics MM97743 0000289 19 2TJUL10 3 2 Diagnostic Trouble Codes DTC Name DTC Description 158 03 VTI Switched Supply Voltage High The voltage level of the switched power is greater than 32 0V 158 04 VTI Switched Supply Voltage Low The voltage level of the switched power is less than 8 5V 168 03 VTI Unswitched Supply Voltage High The voltage level of the unswitched power supply is greater than 32 0V 168 04 VTI Unswitched Supply Voltage Low The voltage level of the unswitched power supply is less than 8 5v 609 12 CAN Micro communications failure Permanent channel down condition detected on SPI comm lines 442 00 Display Unit Temperature High Th
165. TINGS tab gt gt TRACKING MODE Tracking Mode without a Pivot Pro activation To AutoTrac in Circle Track mode requires both Ee an AutoTrac and Pivot Pro activation Pivot Pro Circle Center and Track Spacing must be set for operation activation is North American Only of this mode Continued on next page CZ76372 00001A9 19 010CT10 1 4 50 48 062111 PN 115 Guidance IIe SEEEEEER Turn None Steer Sensitivity 30 000 ft Steer Off PC12594 UN 29APR10 GreenStar 3 Pro Guidance A View B Guidance Settings C ShiftTrack Settings D Set Circle button 1 Press SET CIRCLE button D NOTE A higher degree of precision can be achieved 2 Select NEW button below the CURRENT CIRCLE for track spacing when track spacing is entered drop down box in by rows instead of feet More decimal places are used in the track spacing calculation when Enter name using the alpha numeric keypad entered in by rows versus the three decimal 4 Select ENTER button places allowed when entered by feet Select ft rows button to change to rows 5 Select method to define Circle Center from METHOD drop down box e Set track spacing from EQUIPMENT softkey gt gt f IMPLEMENT 1 tab gt gt CHANGES WIDTH See e Drive Circle EQUIPMENT softkey section e Lat Lon D i 7 Use one of the following methods to define the circle Methods of defining Circle center are explained later center in this section e Drive
166. TIVE CURVES gt gt CURVE TRACK SETTINGS gt gt CHANGE e EQUIPMENT softkey gt gt IMPLEMENT tab gt gt enter implement width track spacing Drive into field where first pass is located When the path the machine is to guide off of is highlighted press resume switch AutoTrac only and machine will Continued on next page Curve Track Settings eS Curve Track Recording gt smooth Tight Turns gt Implement In Ground Turn Radius ft Clear Adaptive Curves Data Eis Repeat Mode 0 000 A Curve Track Settings B Curve Track Recording C Smooth Tight Turns D Implement In Ground Turn Radius F Repeat Mode G Accept automatically steer on that pass In Parallel Tracking manual guidance the operator will be guided off of the highlighted pass IMPORTANT Do not turn the Record button on Record and Repeat does not require the Record button be on unless the operator is redefining a path PC12626 UN 02JUN10 E Clear Adaptive Curves Data CZ76372 00001A4 19 040CT10 14 20 50 34 062111 PN 101 Guidance Guiding around Obstacles in Field PC9029 UN 17APRO6 A Turned Recording OFF B Turned Recording ON When operating Curve Track in a field and an obstacle is encountered such as a well head telephone pole or power line the operator must drive around these obstacles Recording ON If recording is left on while driving a
167. TOP When yield calibration is stopped START arrow is shown When yield calibration is running STOP arrow is shown STOP arrow CALIBRATION IS RUNNING Push button to STOP CALIBRATION START arrow CALIBRATION IS STOPPED Push button to START CALIBRATION 1 Press START button Quick Cal NOTE Pay close attention to area next to button C When the black arrow states start that means you have to press the button to start calibration Area left of the arrow States if calibration is running or stopped 2 Harvest a yield sample 3 Press STOP button 4 Enter yield estimate for sample just harvested Continued on next page CZ76372 0000182 19 24SEP10 3 5 062111 PN 218 65 57 Documentation Standard Calibration Screen SETUP STANDARD CAL Press SETUP gt gt HARVEST MONITOR gt gt YIELD CALIBRATION gt gt STANDARD CALIBRATION NOTE Always read the text to the left of the START STOP arrow This explains the current status of calibration Arrow changes back and forth between START and STOP When yield calibration is stopped START arrow is shown When yield calibration is running STOP arrow is shown STOP arrow CALIBRATION IS RUNNING Push button to STOP CALIBRATION START arrow CALIBRATION IS STOPPED Push button to START CALIBRATION 1 Press START button NOTE If Quick Calibration Procedure is started on prior page weight will count up on SETUP
168. Test PC8663 UN O5AUG05 MENU button PC11392 UN 140CT08 C Display DISPLAY button PC8683 UN 05AUG05 DIAGNOSTICS softkey Under the Test button select the Touchscreen Test This test will allow the user to identify a pixel problem on the screen 1 As you touch the screen a sighting target will show up on the area touched 2 Continue to touch the screen around the area of suspected pixel malfunction and see if the sighting target appears If sighting target does not appear contact your John Deere Dealer ABOUT tab This tab is basic display background information OU06050 00022AE 19 25NOV08 1 1 35 8 062111 PN 31 Display Setup Calculator Calculator The display has a standard calculator that can perform addition subtraction multiplication and division Select Menu gt Calculator ma U ARES SAS Sine gaunu PC13244 UN 15APR11 Calculator CZ76372 00002D2 19 15APR11 1 1 35 9 PN 32 Layout Manager Layout Manager The Layout Manager provides the operator the ability to display user defined screens in the home page layout Once these screens are configured the display will return to the configuration anytime the Home softkey is pressed NOTE Original GreenStar Monitor Mode is only available in layout manager option A and F Advanced Performance Monitor or ISOBUS is only available in layout manager op
169. UG09 CZ76372 0000179 19 22SEP10 3 3 65 21 062111 PN 182 Documentation PC8663 UN O5AUG05 Tank Mixes Press Menu button gt gt GreenStar 3 Pro button gt gt DOCUMENTATION softkey MENU button PC12685 UN 14JUL10 GREENSTAR 3 PRO button PC8678 UN O5AUG05 DOCUMENTATION softkey Continued on next page CZ76372 00002BA 19 30MAR11 1 4 65 22 062111 PN 183 Documentation Q Product Application Lorsban Add Product 0 00 oz ac Add Product Add Product Prescription Rate gaVac Target Rate gaVac Actual Rate gal ac Disable Operation C Product Application Type D Tank Mix Name Advanced Settings GreenStar 3 Pro Documentation A Product Name tab B New The operator can define and document tank mixes during product application operations They can be created and stored using desktop software or while in the cab If a tank mix is created with desktop software and imported to documentation via the USB drive it can be selected in the Tank Mix Name D drop down box under Custom Tank mixes created with desktop software can be modified with the GS3 display but not permanently NOTE Preferred Partner software may not support this function For further details refer to your Desktop Software User s Guide A tank mix can be created on the GS3 display by Tank Mix Name lt Custom gt
170. UP gt ORIGINAL GREENSTAR MONITOR and select line D to set to Aux 1 Now power down and hook up the processor primary display and secondary display to the correct connections Finally power up once more You may have to run Standard Run Page Layout from the Setup menu after you are set up Q lost the StarFire iTC button from the GS3 Main Menu How can get it back A Go to MENU gt MESSAGE CENTER gt button A highlight GPS Receiver select Reprogram Device and select current software 3 70E Contact your dealer if problem persists Q Why did my AutoTrac options disappear from my GS3 Display A First check the GPS status to see if you are receiving signal and ensure the Terrain Compensation Module is on and calibrated You can also check the button F from the GreenStar 3 Pro Menu to see if the AutoTrac line shows as active If not call 1 888 953 3373 to activate it Continued on next page e Q used Swath Control on my GS3 System on a field that want to reapply but the system shows the field as already covered and won t allow me to spray it again A You need to create a new task so that same field will appear as a completely separate layer The GS3 coverage map will then be blank and you ll be allowed to spray the field again Q What is Shading A Shading occurs when obstacles such as trees buildings or other solid objects block all or part of a satellite s signal GPS satellites emit two fre
171. URE CURVE button on SETUP H Mon MOISTURE MOISTURE CURVE NOTE If needed select page button until desired crop appears 2 Select desired crop to be updated NOTE To view current moisture curve go to INFO Harvest Monitor section 3 Select CROP button to toggle between ENTER NEW CURVE UPDATE CURVE or RESTORE CURVE DEFAULTS If ENTER NEW CURVE is selected select letter button next to a blank cell and using numeric keypad enter the new moisture curve number c Alfalfa Canola Edible Beans Poo BEBO Flax Grass Seeds Moisture 1535 a Moisture Curves d SES 5 Select SAVE THIS CURVE button NOTE To update an existing curve toggle to UPDATE CURVE on SETUP MOISTURE CURVE screen 6 Select letter button next to blank cell and using numeric keypad enter update 7 Select SAVE THIS CURVE button 8 To restore default curves select CROP button to toggle to RESTORE CURVE DEFAULTS 9 Select SAVE THIS CURVE button to restore default curves for the selected crop PC10343 UN 29SEP07 CZ76372 000017F 19 24SEP10 4 4 65 51 062111 PN 212 Documentation Harvest Monitor Cotton Setup Press MENU button gt gt ORIGINAL GREENSTAR MONITOR button Harvest Monitor is only available through the ORIGINAL GREENSTAR MONITOR application on the GS3 display Once in the Original GreenStar Monitor application operator interface will fu
172. USB drive in the tractor for the consultants He instructs the consultants to save the prescription Shapefiles to that USB drive That way the Shapefiles from all 3 consultants will be on the USB drive and they will all be Imported to the display If the consultants were to Import their Rx files directly into the display the Rx files from the last consultant would be deleted The farmer imports the Rx files to the display CZ76372 00002DE 19 19APR11 1 1 Example 5 Modifying a Profile An operator begins planting a field and then determines that he wants to use a different Prescription Rx map He has the new Rx map in Apex but he is using Swath Control and wants to continue using the same coverage and Swath Control maps to complete the field Below is one method to properly manage the data 1 The operator Exports Data naming the Profile 2011 5 3 Planter 24 row The operator then saves the Rx map from Apex to the same Profile 2011 5 3 Planter 24 row The coverage and Swath Control maps remain in that Profile on the USB drive The operator then Imports the same Profile 2011 5 3 Planter 24 row back into his display IMPORTANT The operator did NOT continue planting during the time that he Exported and Imported data If he had then the data he recorded during that time would have been lost during the Import CZ76372 00002E4 19 19APR11 1 1 Transferring Data between Two Displays Apex or a compatible 3rd
173. Unmapped From the Auxiliary Controls page the operator can select the mapped C and unmapped D functions and conflicts B from the drop down list of view selection A All conflicts are grouped together in the conflicts filter and marked with yellow square and numbers E All conflicts with the same number are related to each other The conflict square icon E will appear on all related assignments even if they have been completed successfully or not Continued on next page E Conflict Number F Input Function Implement 2ZX1042159 UN 04DEC08 G Assignment Lock Icon In this example see illustration functions 2 and 3 have been requested to be assigned to the same input F although this input is set with a single assignment icon In addition the third function STOP is set with an assignment lock icon G and cannot be set manually To resolve the conflict the second function MUST be remapped CZ76372 0000295 19 12JAN11 2 5 85 16 062111 PN 279 Auxiliary Controls Function Implement See un A E Auxiliary Controls Enabled Functions 2X1042162 UN 04DEC08 A Status Selection C Disabled E Status Indicator Constant B Enabled D Learn Mode Auxiliary Controls Enabled Functions Status indicator independent from if an assignment e has been completed successfully or not See The status selection drop down list A allows the
174. UtoTrac Getup 50 55 AutoTrac System Accuracy cccceeceeeees 50 70 AutoTrac Tractors ccccccceeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeeesneeeees 50 71 AutoTrac Gpravers 50 73 AutoTrac Combines cccceeseeeeeeeeeeetees 50 74 AutoTrac Self Propelled Forage Harvesters 50 75 AutoTrac Sugar Cane Harvester nn0001114 50 76 AutoTrac Universal 50 76 Original GreenStar Monitor Compatible Gvsiems 55 1 Operating Original GreenStar Monitor 55 1 Performance Monitor Performance Monitor 60 1 Performance Monitor Getup 60 1 UPM UNIVERSAL PERFORMANCE MONITOR Functionality ceeee 60 2 Recording Sources for UDNM 60 5 Recording Sources for ADM 60 6 Performance Monitor 60 7 PERFORMANCE MONITOR CALIBRATIONS 60 8 Configuring Tractor For DIRECT GPS or Ground Based Radar Feed CAN Based Vehicles ON 60 9 Dual Beam Radar Sensor Only Automatic Calibration ceceeee 60 9 Calibrating Dual Beam Radar 60 10 RADAR CONNECTION SIGNAL VALIDATION UPM MODE ONLY 60 10 PERFORMANCE MONITOR TOTALS SCREEN WEE 60 12 ADVANCED PERFORMANCE MONITOR APMI 60 15 Additional Functions Available in APM Mode 60 17 Documentation No GPS Documentation 65 1 Turning Documentation On and On 65 1 How Documentation Organizes Data 65 1 DOCUMENTATION softkey 65 2 Field and Task Notes nnnnnnnnneeennnnenneeeeeeeeeenene 65 3 Operations eenneeeseeeeeeeeene
175. When backlight ei is synchronized with cab the operator can adjust the balance between the cab s backlight and the display s backlight using the sliding scale Enable Synchronization q with Cab Backlighting ge 2 8 Balance Adjust the balance of the display s backlight relative to the cab s backlight gt g PC10364 UN 30SEP07 Advanced Backlighting Settings Button PC10363 UN 30SEP07 CZ76372 00001B0 19 040CT10 2 2 SETTINGS softkey The Settings screen contains three tabs ES REGIONAL tab Country Language Numeric Format and Units can be selected Use drop down boxes and select desired MENU button measurements to be displayed on screen PENSE SUN IOC 108 IMPORTANT If language file does not load properly when changing the language reload software to USB drive and update display C Display TIME AND DATE tab NOTE If vehicle loses battery power or if display is disconnected from vehicle Time and Date DISPLAY button Settings will have to be reset PC8690 UN 09AUG05 Date and time can be changed as well as time format GPS Sync can be selected to automatically set the time using the time data coming from GPS receiver When this is selected user should choose proper time offset which adjusted the GPS time data to correspond to your time zone to ensure correct local time Time Sync will not occur until GPS signal is acquired SETTINGS softkey UNITS OF MEASURE tab Users ca
176. X WW RECEIVER 19 24AUG10 1 1 05 4 062111 PN 10 Safety Signs Implement Detected Warning CHE Implement Detected Improper operation can cause unintended implement movement To avoid death or serious injury to a bystander understand how this display operates the functions of the implement Read and understand the implement Operator Manual This message occurs when the system detects an ISOBUS implement For more information see READ OPERATOR MANUALS FOR ISOBUS IMPLEMENTS in the Safety section AWARNING Implement Detected Improper operation can cause unintended implement movement To avoid death or serious injury to a bystander understand how this display operates the functions of the implement Read and understand the implement Operator Manual OQUO06050 0000E6B 19 O6OCT08 1 1 PC10339 UN 23SEP07 Automatic Guidance System Detected ae Automatic Guidance System Detected Activating a guidance system on roadways may cause loss of vehicle control To avoid death or serious injury disable the guidance system before entering roadways This message occurs during startup on vehicles with an Automatic Guidance System installed D A WARNING Automatic Guidance System Detected Activating a guidance system on roadways may cause loss of vehicle control To avoid death or serious injury disable the guidance system before entering roadways
177. abled In both of these cases there is no error There is an alarm or pop up within the GreenStar 3 application that requires your attention Memory 90 Full Clear maps or export data to USB drive and then delete Documentation data Memory Full Clear maps or export data to USB drive and then delete Documentation data VI Implement is removed Communication lost with ISO implement If implement was not disconnected check connections and cycle power Internal Memory Full From VI Object Pools Internal memory dedicated to ISO implements is full Remove implements to free memory space Internal Memory Full From Documentation and Curved Track data Internal memory is full New software found for display New software found for display This alarm will re appear at every power cycle or if USB drive is re inserted The following VI s are no longer communicating with the display Check the indicated device s and CAN bus wiring Some device s are no longer communicating with the display Check the CAN Bus wiring CAN bus inbound communications overload CAN Bus communications overload Reset the display or turn the power off and then back on A failure has been detected in the display s internal memory Reprogramming An error occurred during reprogramming Perform reprogramming process again If problem reoccurs contact your John Deere dealer Legacy device reprogramming error De
178. acy Q Should Leave Optimize Shading on All the Time A Under most circumstances Optimize Shading should be turned off It should only be used in situations where the operator would like to continue running AutoTrac if a reduction in signal quality is expected and optimum AutoTrac accuracy is crucial Optimize Shading should be turned off if during a critical operation whereby it would be preferable for AutoTrac to deactivate during signal degradation than to continue running AutoTrac with reduced accuracy CZ76372 00002FA 19 28APR11 2 3 130 8 062111 PN 326 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics e Q Does Optimize Shading Affect Documentation Coverage Mapping or Swath Control A Currently we cannot edit the names of sequences after they have been accepted If you make a mistake A Having Optimize Shading checked will have no in renaming the sequence e g 1770 Exterior Raise vs effect on Documentation Coverage or Swath Control 1770 Extrior Raise there are a few options if degraded signal due to shading is encountered Documentation Coverage and Swath Control require a a Continue to setup the sequence ignoring the error minimum of only 3D RTG to operate b Create a new sequence with the correct name c Start over with a blank USB drive In this instance it e Q Can run over my previously recorded adaptive will be necessary to get all desired setup data from at curve lines least Apex version
179. adlands or other previous coverage with Swath Control do the following checks 1 Verify that you are running the most current version of GS3 Display software This will ensure that the most recent software features and enhancements can be utilized 2 Verify driving habits Operators slowing down when entering the headlands and rapidly accelerating when exiting the headlands increases the severity of small gaps in the coverage map Swath Control looks at the machine s speed and the Turn on and off times to determine when to start and stop applying and painting the coverage map If the machine changes speed during this time period the map and product application may not start or stop at the correct time It is very important that speed remains constant when entering and exiting headlands Turning around in the headland at 8 mph with a Turn on time of 2 seconds the machine travels approximately 23 5 ft at 8 mph in 2 seconds If the operator accelerates during this time the machine covers this distance in less than 2 seconds This causes delayed product application and mapping resulting in a gap The type of end turns driven can affect Swath Control as well The software can predict the future position of the boom relatively well during 180 degree turns but not during light bulb turns If light bulb turns are made skips in the coverage map may be more severe when exiting the headlands 3 If there are still gaps in the coverage
180. ailable Boundary Types Exterior The perimeter of the field Passable Interior The perimeter of an area inside the field which is not farmed but can be crossed with the vehicle and implement e g waterway Impassable Interior The perimeter of an area inside the field which is not farmed and cannot be crossed with the vehicle and implement Boundary type can be changed to Headland when either an Exterior or Interior boundary has been created If one of these is created the boundary type list will change xterior Headland Continued on next page Boundary Types PC12925 UN 27SEP10 CZ76372 000018F 19 28APR11 2 3 45 21 062111 PN 58 GreenStar General GreenStar 2 Pro Mapping Boundaries with Driven Exterior Headland Boundary A Maps Tab E Farm Drop Down Menu B Boundaries Tab F Field Drop Down Menu C Flags Tab G Type Drop Down Menu H Headland Group Drop Down Menu D Client Drop Down Menu Exterior Headland The end rows along the sides of the field where the end turns occur NOTE For Exterior Headland if the Headland Indicator box is checked the display will count down the distance to the next headland on the Guidance map Interior Headland The end rows or turn rows around an Impassable Interior Boundary Headland Group A combination of one or more related headland boundaries Different operations may use different headland groups For in
181. ake sure the matching shp shx and dbf files are on the flash drive Include matching shx and dbf files or the system cannot convert the shapefile Make sure that files are in the Rx folder on the USB flash drive e Shapefile error Shapefile format is not compatible e Database file error incorrect version dBase file version number incorrect e Database file error file format incorrect dBase file format is incorrect e Index file error shp file header does not match dbf file header e Projection file error Validate the shapefile is formatted in WGS84 projection e Unknown error The file could not be validated s If you get any of these messages select ENTER button to go back to the Shapefile Conversion Page NOTE If engine is shut off during the shapefile conversion process shapefile must be reconverted Shapefile Conversion The shapefile conversion failed A file is missing or corrupt Make sure shp shx dbf files are on the card Shapefile Failed Screen PC12748 UN 27AUG10 CZ76372 0000329 19 14JUN11 4 6 Shapefile Conversion Maximum Number of Rates If more than 254 rates are present in the shapefile this message appears If this message is displayed the GS3 automatically reduces the number of rates by minimizing the differences between the shapefile and the generated prescription Shapefile Conversion The number of rates in the shapefile exceeds the maximum
182. aligns with the GPS Accuracy Indicator bar graph under the StarFire receiver icon Both the map and bar graph will turn orange when GAI lt 9 See your StarFire manual for more information on the GPS Accuracy Indicator GPS Accuracy Indicator GAI Overlapping coverage will paint the normal dark blue color whether or the overlapping coverage was recorded with reduced GPS accuracy Greenstr Zo mpg PC12740 UN 25AUG10 Display GPS Accuracy on Coverage Map PC10857RQ UN 010CT09 30 SH sro BN GPS ACCURACY box CZ76372 000014E 19 28APR11 13 13 45 20 062111 PN 57 GreenStar General Boundaries Tab Select MENU gt GREENSTAR 3 PRO gt MAPPING gt BOUNDARIES tab The BOUNDARIES tab allows you to record exterior field boundaries as well as interior and headland boundaries Boundaries calculate acreage and are saved on the USB drive to be unloaded in John Deere s APEX or other compatible desktop software For best accuracy exterior boundaries should be driven NOTE Apex is not available in all EAME countries NOTE Client Farm and Field can also be created on boundaries tab by selecting NEW from the drop down menus PC8663 UN O5AUG05 PC12685 UN 14JUL10 GEES PC8672 UN O5AUG05 MENU Softkey GreenStar GREENSTAR 3 PRO button H MAPPING Softkey PC12933 UN 30SEP10 mae Boundaries tab CZ76372 000018F 19 28APR11 1 3 Av
183. als GreenStar 3 Pro Reports and Totals Continued on next page DIS Average Productivity tach 10 64 Area Worked eo CH Totals Wet Yield bume gt 45 1 Dry Yield bumcy 45 1 Average Moisture Me 10 91 Wet Weight Pay 25198 bu 420 0 Dry Weight 27 25198 bu 420 0 Wet Throughput bwh 480 Area Remaining Time Remaining th Fuel Usage gan 2 9 Date Range 02 05 7009 92 05 2009 PC12831 UN 27AUG10 CZ76372 00002BC 19 30MAR11 9 12 65 43 062111 PN 204 Documentation On screen mapping functions are handled through EE the Mapping Icon These include coverage yield and moisture maps Select MENU gt gt GS3 PRO gt gt MAPPING gt gt MAP SETTINGS gt gt FOREGROUND MAP drop down list Mapping button 2 O 3 lt Ka 7 E 5 o t N N O a Continued on next page CZ76372 00002BC 19 30MAR11 10 12 65 44 062111 PN 205 Documentation Home Page Layout functions are handled through the PE 12809 SUN LGSER 10 layout manager Here you have the ability to set up your Run page the way you prefer Select MENU gt gt LAYOUT MANAGER Layout Manager Layout Manager r 7 E a ae 9 N 2 5 S S D CZ76372 00002BC 19 30MAR11 11 12 We would suggest using the following layout on combines bei i a a T E 7 a S 8 5 A CZ76372 00002BC 19 30MAR11 12 12 65 45 062
184. alues or text To change a value highlight Input box and press ENTER button To cancel out of an input box press CANCEL button to keep the original value A numeric keypad will appear allowing selection of each digit PC8847 UN 300CT05 Display uses a pop up keyboard to enter values CZ76372 0000298 19 12JAN11 2 4 Check Box A check box is a square with a border A check mark in the box indicates that the box is activated To activate a check box highlight empty check box and press ENTER button A check will appear inside box activating item To deactivate a check box highlight check box and press ENTER button to remove the check PC8686 UN O09AUG05 V CZ76372 0000298 19 12JAN11 3 4 Button A button is an icon or text with a border Activating a button will perform that icon s function To activate a function highlight the button and press enter PC8649 UN 01NOV05 PC8650 UN 01NOV05 GOTO CZ76372 0000298 19 12JAN11 4 4 30 2 062111 PN 23 Display Setup Display Software Activations The display comes preloaded and activated with GreenStar Basics Software which includes e Guidance Parallel Tracking Documentation Harvest Doc Map Based Prescriptions Field Doc including Field Doc Sprayer Field Doc Planter Field Doc Air Cart and Field Doc Connect Software activations are required to operate AutoTrac and can be purchased
185. an be used as a recording source on certain vehicles only SeedStar is a trademark of Deere amp Company SprayStar is a trademark of Deere amp Company Raven is a trademark of Raven GreenSeeker is a trademark of NTech Industries Inc Rawson is a trademark of Rawson Accu Rate is a trademark of Rawson Accu Plant is a trademark of Rawson New Leader is a trademark of New Leader Dickey John is a trademark of Dickey John Vanguard is a trademark of Vanguard AUTO sis SA ef EZE s6 II ITI LL PC8770 UN 110CT05 Recording Source A Manual Recording On Off G Implement Switch Closed B Automatic from controller H SCV 1 C Rear PTO I SCV 2 D 3 point Hitch J SCV 3 E Front PTO K SCV 4 F Implement Switch Open IMPLEMENT tabs allow setup of the following Implement Type Used to select machine type Implement Model Used to distinguish between different models Implement Name Used to distinguish between multiple machines of the same model e Implement Offsets Used to eliminate skips or overlaps due to an off center or drafting implement Implement Widths For more information see MACHINE AND IMPLEMENT SETUP section CZ76372 00002A0 19 30MAR11 1 1 45 4 062111 PN 41 GreenStar General PC8663 UN O5AUG05 Machine Setup MENU gt gt GREENSTAR 3 PRO gt gt EQUIPMENT allows access to MACHINE and IMPLEMENT setup screens M
186. ate If the value exceeds 9999 9 the counter will reset to zero NOTE The Implement Width does not change with Overlap Control like in GreenStar Totals so PC9086 UN 17APR06 Le 0 0 7 E Total Area the area value may be different from the value in GreenStar Totals CZ76372 00000C3 19 15JUL10 2 12 Average Productivity Average productivity is calculated from the total area and total time accumulated while the vehicle is moving and recording since last reset PC9087 UN 17APR06 0 0 Average Productivity CZ76372 00000C3 19 15JUL10 3 12 Average Fuel Per Area Average fuel per area is calculated from the total fuel used and total area accumulated since last reset PC9088 UN 17APR06 O OZ Average Fuel Per Area CZ76372 00000C3 19 15JUL10 4 12 Average Fuel Economy PM will use the absolute fuel consumption and an internal timer that is incremented as soon as the engine is running since last reset to compute the average fuel per hour PC9089 UN 17APR06 0 0 DH CZ76372 00000C3 19 15JUL10 5 12 Total Fuel Used If available from the vehicle the operator will be able to view total fuel used in liters or gallons since last reset The value can be manually reset by the operator PC9090 UN 17APR06 O O P Total Fuel Used CZ76372 00000C3 19 15JUL10 6 12 Average Operating Speed The PM will maintain a value that represents the average o
187. ate and record is reached and machine is turned around Once all subsequent passes machine is turned around system will begin searching through recorded line segments to Recording only needs to be turned off if machine is driven determine path to guide on System locates a line outside of normal field pattern i e refill sprayer planter segment that is parallel and within 1 2 to 1 1 2 or if customer does not want to record turns at end of field track spacings The predicted path will appear or in headlands Turning recording on off must be done from which the operator can navigate from manually Recording can be left on when turning at end of each pass if desired Continued on next page CZ76372 00001A4 19 040CT10 11 20 50 32 PN 99 Guidance Shift Track will only shift the recorded line segments in one direction based off of the orientation of the line segment you are currently on CZ76372 00001A4 19 040CT10 12 20 Curve Data Found This field has Adaptive Curves Previously recorded Press Yes to enter Repeat Mode to guide from previously recorded curves This disables recording and guides the vehicle off of previously recorded passes Press No to continue creating additional Adaptive Curves recording must be turned on NOTE The Curve Data Found message is displayed when the operator changes fields and existing curve data is found for that field Continued on next page SE GS3 Curve Data
188. ation Select MENU gt gt GS3 PRO gt gt DOCUMENTATION gt gt EN HARVEST A Harvest tab will be displayed in Documentation IMPORTANT Crop type and variety are mandatory settings for documentation and moisture curve selection Press the Change Harvest Settings button to enter crop type and variety among other things Harvest Documentation button Variety Variety Locator found For this Field Variely Change Audible Tone Chop and Spread Residue Marre mel 4 Cancel Continued on next page Harvest Settings Wariety Locator file is not Accept PC13228 UN 30MAR11 PC10857VK UN 01APR10 CZ76372 00002BC 19 30MAR11 2 12 65 38 062111 PN 199 Documentation Select MENU gt gt ORIGINAL GREENSTAR MONITOR ra a gt gt HARVEST MONITOR With crop type and variety selected in HDOC Moisture Curve and Header Type settings are made in HMON P A Menu button SE See Setup HMON Moisture Moisture 5612866 un tesEP10 ORIGINAL GREENSTAR MONITOR button F Ee Euro Spr p a eee 4 O Euro 6 7 F SETUP D Moisture tH 2 CZ76372 00002BC 19 30MAR11 3 12 For Corresponding header type see Setup HMON e g Bay Harv Mon DEFI Mon platform when barley is selected E E Setup in Harvest Dac If a change is needed with the header type or header with Id Setup in Harvest Dor k
189. ation Enable Operation CZ76372 00002B7 19 30MAR11 2 2 Using Documentation with Planters NOTE If you are connected to a John Deere SeedStar Planter a Planting Seeding tab is automatically created If you are not connected to a John Deere SeedStar planter make sure you have selected the correct planter and number of rows on the equipment button Continued on next page PC10857TZ UN 30MAR10 Planting Seeding i Planting Seeding Tab CZ76372 0000121 19 28SEP10 1 17 65 5 062111 PN 166 Documentation A seea Type Prescription Implement Name RS Add E Dkcs55 07 F M ssign Variety to Rows A Choose Seed Type F Variety 3 B Displays Prescription if G Variety 4 Prescription is being used H Variety 5 C Implement Name I Variety 6 D Variety 1 E Variety 2 J Input Population on NON SeedStar2 NOTE Before setting Documentation make sure the planter is fully set up and connected to the tractor See your planter operator s manual for procedure Seed Type Selection Select seed type from drop down box A When choosing the seed type from the drop down if the list is too long the user may uncheck and retire seed types using APEX to simplify future seed selection Continued on next page 1770NT 24R30 2 pt seeds ac 33500 33500 Variety PC10857UA UN 11MAY10 K Displays Populations Drive P Remove Tab Sectio
190. attery Please contact your John Deere dealer The voltage level of from the battery power supply is greater than the nominal Cycle 168 3 Unswitched Supply Voltage Too High power on the display If this diagnostic code shows up again check wiring Please contact your John Deere dealer The voltage level from the battery is lower than the nominal Cycle power on the 168 4 Unswitched Supply Voltage Too Low display If this diagnostic code shows up again check battery power and recharge it as needed Please contact your John Deere dealer 1386 Display Unit Temperature Too High The LCD backlight was not turned off when the temperature was above the highest limit Please contact your John Deere dealer 1386 1 Display Unit Temperature Too Low The LCD backlight was not turned off when the unit temperature was below the lowest limit Contact you John Deere Dealer 3597 2 Regulate Voltage 5 0 v Abnormal The 5 0 v regulated power is out of range Click Cancel if it occurs occasionally If it occurs continually contact your John Deere Dealer The 1 5 v regulated power is out of range Click Cancel if it occurs occasionally If 3598 2 Regulated Voltage 1 5 v Abnormal it occurs continually contact your John Deere Dealer 3599 2 Regulated Voltage 3 3 v Abnormal The 3 3 v regulated power is out of range Click Cancel if it occurs occasionally If it occurs continually contact your John Deere Dealer 523310 12 Non olane Memory Read Write Failed to read write from
191. ay Menu Display Display Diagnostics Readings Tab Read the Application Software Build or ON Copyright 2000 2010 Deere amp Company Al Rights Reserved THIS SOFTWARE OR DATA IS THE PROPERTY OF DEERE amp COMPANY ALL USE AND OR REPRODUCTION NOT SPECIFICALLY AUTHORIZED BY DEERE amp COMPANY IS PROHIBITED LZMA SOK Copyright C 1999 2007 Igor Pavtev All Rights Reserved Warning This computer program is protected by copyright Ley and iter natsonat treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of thes program or ary portion of it may result in severe civil and crieninad peruttios and will be prosecuted to the reem exdent possible under the law Display GSI 29 Application Software Build 30305 Pe Front Se me PC12688 UN 16JUL10 Software Version CZ76372 00000CD 19 16JUL10 1 1 125 1 062111 PN 317 Updating Software Updating Display and System Components 1 PON Download and copy the software update files to a USB drive using GreenStar LiveUpdate NOTE It is recommended to clean all files off the USB drive before copying the software update files to it Do NOT have software update files for a different display model on the USB drive Turn the machine ignition to the run position Insert the USB drive into the display A USB Device Detected message will appear if the display recognizes the USB drive Read and Accept it The display will check
192. ayed on guidance pages NOTE If Coverage Only map is selected the legend of the map view will read Coverage only and the Coverage Map toggle button will be disabled Guidance Lines D Check this box if you would like your Guidance Lines to show on your map view Prescription Legend E Check this box if you would like your Prescription Legend to show on the map view page NOTE An area of the prescription that has been assigned a zero rate will now appear black on your prescription map in the GS3 Grid F Check this box if you would like a grid pattern to show up in your map view Grid Size G Enter the size you want the grid to represent on the map view Drainage Map H Check this box if you would like to view your Drainage Map Surface Water Pro Pro Plus Only Continued on next page Map Settings 7 Foreground Coverage Only s ouameetines Prescription Legend i Grid Size 30 000 OEV sE Drainage Map mA O zca a a Field Map Coverage EEEN Dei RA Survey Points S Depression Map PC12932 UN 30SEP10 PC10857RW UN 280CT09 Map Settings Map Settings Button A Survey Points I Check this box if you would like to view your Survey Points Surface Water Pro Pro Plus Only Depression Map J Check this box if you would like to view your Depression Map Surface Water Pro Pro Plus Only Clear Field Map Data Clear Cove
193. ble Sometimes the settings that maximize AutoTrac performance are very close to making the operator feel uncomfortable General Tuning Instructions Adjustment Recommendations Continued on next page CZ76372 00001A8 19 010CT10 11 25 50 60 062111 PN 127 Guidance e Steering Sensitivity Set at 100 before making other adjustments after that make adjustments in increments of 10 e Line Sensitivity Tracking Adjust in increments of 20 e Line Sensitivity Heading Adjust in increments 10 e Heading Lead Adjust in increments 10 Steering Response Rate Adjust in increments 10 e Acquire Sensitivity Adjust in increments 20 e Curve Sensitivity Adjust in increments 20 One Value at a Time Attempt to adjust the settings in the problem field conditions while AutoTrac is active 1 Start with the factory default settings The Steering Sensitivity value will correlate to the value on the Guidance View Tap Attempt to use a value for this setting that is similar to the conditions in which you are running 70 for concrete 100 most conditions 120 for soft ground This number may still need to be modified beyond the suggested settings 2 While AutoTrac is active in the problem conditions speeds ground tire setup etc increase reduce the Line Sensitivity Heading by a factor of 10 3 If the change in Line Sensitivity Heading is ineffective at addressing the issue reset the Line Sensitiv
194. cally recognized Continued on next page CF86321 000001F 19 12APR11 2 6 45 9 062111 PN 46 GreenStar General Implement Offsets Used to define the actual implement position relative to the tractor This is important for ensuring the implement is lined up to the field at the end of turns and in determining where the implement is for the Minimize Skips and Minimize Overlaps feature see Change Settings on Machine tab A In line distance from connection point to front of implement On pull type implements think of this as the tongue For more precision it is actually the dimension from the pinbolt to the front side of where the work gets done front ranks of field cultivator seed drop point on a planter For planters with a 2 pt mount measure from where the planter pivots just behind the 2 pt B Working Length of the implement On ground engagement tools this is the distance from the front rank of sweeps or points to the rear rank On a standard planter or pull type sprayer this dimension would be 0 the seed is dropped at the same point on every row and the sprayer has nozzles at the same point along the boom Dimension A would then need to extend to the location of the seed drop point or sprayer boom On a spreader A B is the drop point of the product Refer to manufacturer s implement OM for this value C Lateral distance from connection point to control point of implement This is the lateral distance
195. ccessed with the mapping softkey MENU button PC12685 UN 14JUL10 e On screen Maps e Boundaries e Flags Several map type choices are provided in Map Settings GREENSTAR 3 PRO button PC8672 UN O5AUG05 MAPPING softkey CZ76372 0000064 19 09JUL10 1 1 Greenstar Z Pro Mapping MAPS tab View and setup on screen maps by selecting the Maps tab Legend Wheat Hrd Rd Sprei CO S Q O 5 zZ 7 Oo a S S 5 a CZ76372 000014E 19 28APR11 1 13 Pan buttons Move the map left right up and down POITIER UN O10 C108 Continued on next page CZ76372 000014E 19 28APR11 2 13 45 16 PN 53 GreenStar General Zoom buttons Zoom the map larger and smaller PC10857RM UN 010CT09 D CZ76372 000014E 19 28APR11 3 13 Toggle Map Size Toggle map to a full screen view PC10857RO UN 010CT09 CZ76372 000014E 19 28APR11 4 13 Reset Zoom Center Map This button is used to re center the machine icon on the map view page after zooming in and out or panning with the arrow buttons up down left and right PC10857RP UN 010CT09 CZ76372 000014E 19 28APR11 5 13 Map View Toggle The map can be toggled between three views by selecting the Map View Toggle button When the button is pressed the icon will change to one of the 3 icons shown in this section However the button will always remain in the same location PC10857RN UN 0
196. cess to be started CZ76372 0000297 19 12JAN11 1 1 062111 15 5 PN 18 Installation Installation in Most GreenStar Ready Machines A Corner Post Mounts B Wing Nuts 2 Used C Vehicle Display Connector D Connector on Display 1 Turn OFF vehicle 2 Attach bracket to corner post mounts A 3 Attach display to bracket using the wing nuts B provided with display 4 Attach harness to the corner post connector C and the lower connector on the back of the display D 5 Position the display so that it is comfortable to reach and does not obstruct your view IMPORTANT Display must be connected to SWITCHED and CONSTANT power This allows the display to shutdown properly and save data When the key is switched off a Saving Settings message should appear on the screen NOTE Bracket and harness are sold separately Uses the same brackets and harnesses as GS2 displays OQU06050 000128E 19 19JUL10 1 1 Installation in a John Deere Vehicle with an ISOBUS Display One John Deere ISOBUS display may be installed on the corner post of a John Deere vehicle that has an ISOBUS compatible display installed on the armrest such as an 8R Command Center Examples of John Deere ISOBUS displays that can be installed on the corner post include GS2 1800 GS2 2100 GS2 2600 and GS3 2630 Some applications will automatically be turned OFF on the armrest display because they cannot run on two display
197. ched Power Supply Voltage 010 Unit Internal Temperature 011 Vehicle CAN Bus Status 012 Vehicle CAN CAN HIGH Voltage 013 Vehicle CAN CAN LOW Voltage 015 Implement CAN Bus Status 016 Implement CAN CAN HIGH Voltage 017 Implement CAN CAN LOW Voltage 018 Flash Wear Count 019 Hours of Operation 023 Radar Input Status 024 Implement Switch Status 028 CCD Bus Bus Status 029 CCD Bus Positive Voltage 030 CCD Bus Negative Voltage 031 Bezel Key Status 032 Real Time Clock RTC 033 Maximum Sleep Time 034 Boot Hold Switch 035 USB Flash Drive Status 036 Max Warm Boots Allowed 038 Synchronize Brightness 039 Daytime Luminance 040 Daytime Luminance Balance Ratio 041 Nighttime Luminance 042 Nighttime Luminance Balance Ratio 043 Internal Speaker Volume 045 Settings Country Code Continued on next page MM97743 0000289 19 21JUL10 1 2 130 15 062111 PN 333 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Address Number Address Name 046 Settings Language Code 047 Settings Numeric Format 048 Settings Date Format 049 Settings Time Format 050 Settings Units of Distance 051 Settings Units of Area 052 Settings Units of Volume 053 Settings Units of Mass 054 Settings Units of Temperature 055 Settings Units of Pressure 056 Settings Units of Force 057 Settings GPS Time Sync 058
198. ck Shift track can be used to compensate for GPS drift Drift is inherent to any satellite based differentially corrected GPS system Shift Track shifts track 0 and all AB lines associated with this track right or left the pre specified distance An operator may also re center displayed line on Guidance icon To move line to left select SHIFT LEFT button To move line to right select SHIFT RIGHT button Each time button is pressed line will move the amount defined in the SHIFT PC8706 UN 22AUG05 Shift Left PC8707 UN 22AUG05 ole Re Center PC8708 UN 22AUG05 Shift Right TRACK SETTINGS tab The amount is displayed under the Shift Track buttons To re center line on vehicle s current location select RE CENTER button IMPORTANT When using SF2 or SF1 Differential Correction or when using RTK Quick Survey Mode the track may drift over time or at power cycles Shift Track can be used to compensate for GPS drift NOTE RTK Absolute Base Mode is highly recommended in high accuracy applications when repeatability is needed Only RTK Absolute Base Mode provides consistent repeatability and accuracy OQU06050 00021E6 19 31AUG09 1 1 50 15 062111 PN 82 Guidance Shift Track Accumulator GreenStar Guidance Show Shift Track Totals No Shifts 0 0 in on Map S 8 T 5 E Shift Track Settings A View tab D iTEC Pro G Large Shifts B Guidance Se
199. ck will start recording again 7 The straight path B will be created when the recording is un paused ON EEN zi a Straight Path between Two Curves A Recording PAUSED B Bridge segment is generated to connect points ee IT d e Sieger TAS PC9298 UN 29JUL06 C Recording UN PAUSED CZ76372 00001A5 19 010CT10 8 13 Saving AB Curves Data The stored AB Curve Track data is assigned to a Client Farm Field name that is setup in the RESOURCES CONDITIONS softkey gt gt RESOURCES tab NOTE Setup of Client Farm and Field is not required for Curve Track operation but is required for the track to be saved and repeated The recorded AB Curve Track data is saved to the USB drive This data can be transferred into desktop software and saved to the USB drive or additional USB drives for use in future field applications The USB drive can also be taken from one GS3 display to another and recall the AB Curve Track data for use Recalling Saved AB Curve Data IMPORTANT Make sure the USB drive contains the Curve Track data for this field e RESOURCES CONDITIONS softkey gt gt RESOURCES tab Select the Client Farm Field name to which the stored Curve Track data was assigned e GUIDANCE SETTINGS tab gt gt TRACKING drop down box gt gt AB CURVE TRACK 1 Select the AB Curve Name from the Current AB Curve drop down box 2 Press Enter button Continued on next page Set AB Curve C
200. cking for best results Increase or decrease settings to change aggressiveness as desired If system is not responsive enough increase sensitivity settings If desired performance is not achieved see TROUBLESHOOTING section for more detail Line Sensitivity Heading Determines how aggressively AutoTrac responds to heading errors Higher settings Result in more aggressive response to vehicle heading error Lower settings Result in less aggressive response to vehicle heading error Line Sensitivity Heading Determines how aggressively AutoTrac responds to heading error Higher Settings Result In more aggressive response to vehicle heading error Lower Settings Result In less aggressive response to vehicle heading error PC11477 UN 15NOV08 Line Sensitivity Heading Continued on next page CZ76372 00001A8 19 010CT10 18 25 50 65 062111 PN 132 Guidance Line Sensitivity Tracking Line Sensitivity Tracking Determines how aggressively AutoTrac responds to off track lateral error Determines how aggressively AutoTrac responds to off track lateral error Higher settings Results in more aggressive response to Higher Settings Result In more aggressive vehicle off track error response to vehicle off track error Lower Settings Results in less aggressive response to Lower Settings Result In less aggressive vehicle off track error response to vehicle off track error A
201. creen clicking the HOME button will bring up the first RUN page OU06050 0000E57 19 310CT07 1 1 40 5 062111 PN 37 GreenStar General License Agreement The first time you access the GreenStar tab on the display menu a license agreement will appear If you are the purchaser of the display read the agreement fully check the box next to I am the purchaser of this display and Accept agreement if you agree to the terms The License Agreement can be obtained from your local John Deere dealer or can be viewed at www StellarSupport com Greenstar Software License Agreement PIS OFTWARE LICENSE AGREEWENT FOR JOHN DESPRE DISPLAY MPORTANT REAC CAREFULLY Th s sctware license agreerrent ic a legal sort act between you and tae licensor licensor identilied kelow and overns your use ol Johr Deere display un te ithe display By clididng toe Accept Eutton be ow or by ct woting croctheny se using he d splay you are accepting arc agveeirc co tae terns cftri license ccreement wits recpect io the sottwcre ithe sotware taat has keen pic inscalled gt r yourdisplay at ag ee tast tris sofware license ieee rt nclading the waranty d sclsimers lim taticns of liability end crvinat on pravis ons beckw is Finding upo i you snd upcn any corr pany nwoose sche you usc the soHwacas acl asthe cnpoyces cfeny such compar y collectively refe vedio ss you inthis sottwarc Jonas gione fyou do net agice fo
202. cted Paused is displayed long straight section of path or when navigating around below the RECORD button To un pause select the obstacles PAUSE button again NOTE The longest bridge segment line segment created between PAUSED and UN PAUSED that can be Continued on next page CZ76372 00001A4 19 040CT10 17 20 50 37 062111 PN 104 Guidance Recording a Straight Path within a Curved Path Straight Path starts from Field Edge 1 Drive the vehicle to the designated starting spot in the T B field Turn curve track recording on and press the PAUSE button 1 P 2 Paused is displayed below the button ye oe 3 Start driving the first pass When the spot in the field 2 is reached where the pass starts to curve select the pause button again and curve track will start recording again 4 Drive to the end of the first pass 5 The straight path B will be created when the recording is un paused Straight Path starting from the Field s Edge PC9297 UN 29JUL06 A Recording Turned ON then C Recording UN PAUSED PAUSED B Bridge segment is generated to connect points CZ76372 00001A4 19 040CT10 18 20 Recording a Straight Path within a Curved Path Straight Path is between Two Curves 1 Drive the vehicle to the designated starting spot in the if field and turn curve track recording on 2 Start driving the curve path i EN as Y 3 When you want to start creating a stra
203. curved path with two end points beginning and end to generate parallel passes Circle Track only available with optional PivotPro module Uses a center pivot center point location to define concentric circles tracks Tracking Tones can be turned on and off and be set to alert operator at a specified off track distance To change distance at which tracking tones are activated select input field and enter a value between 10 60 m 4 24 in Tracking tones can be used as an audible indication of steering direction If track is right of machine two low beeps will sound if left of machine a single high beep will sound Alarm will repeat twice a second until off track error between machine and desired track is less than value entered Turning View can assist operators to guide vehicle from one pass to the next by showing an overhead view of the field instead of the perspective view while turning around This feature can be turned on or off by selecting or deselecting TURNING VIEW check box Turn Predictor alerts operator by predicting the end of pass This feature can be turned on or off by selecting or deselecting Turn Predictor check box e AutoTrac Deactivation Message shows operator why AutoTrac deactivated e Lead Compensation shows how far down current track guidance looks to for such things as turns Used with Parallel Tracking only e Accuracy Bar Step Size used to set the value of off track dista
204. d Legend 0 OF 1 On 2 Outside Exterior Boundary 3 Inside Interior Boundary 4 Over Previous Coverage Oo 5 Prescription Rate Bellow Minimum 6 Speed Rate Below Minimum 7 Undefined GreenStar Rate Controller Yes Yes 1 000 Yes a PC13511 UN 27APR11 GreenStar Diagnostic Readings 2 2 e A View drop down box Indicates the type of diagnostics information currently being viewed e B Operation Drop down box Indicates the operation for the diagnostic information currently being viewed e C Controller Indicates the controller responsible for selected Operation e D Swath Control Capable Indicates if the Controller is a Swath Control Capable Controller e E Swath Control Enabled Indicates the status of the selected Operation Swath Control checkbox Yes Enabled No Disabled e F Operation Turn on Time sec Indicates the turn on time for the selected operation e G Operation Turn off Time sec Indicates the turn off time for the selected operation H Primary Swath Controller Indicates if the selected is the primary operation I No of Sections Indicates the number of sections for the selected operation J Section Control Command Indicates the current command for each section K Section Command Legend Defines the numbers in the Section Control Command Section 0 Off 1 On 2 Outside Exterior Boundary 3 Insi
205. d as Current Track Otherwise set Current Track to guidance line that will be used first 6 In Swap to Track selection choose second guidance line that will be used in field NOTE Only existing guidance lines for the current field will be displayed Change tracking mode to Straight Track AB Curve or Circle Track to create a new guidance line Once created return to Swap Track to use new guidance line with other existing lines NOTE Guidance lines are arranged in order of mode Straight Curve then circle and then alphabetically within each of the modes NOTE Changes to the Current Track and the associated information are not made until the Accept button is pressed 7 Select Accept button A Current Track selection B Swap to Track selection C Accept button Continued on next page Setup Swap Tracks Set up the two tracks to switch between Current Track straightNS Oi a E Track zs Accept Cancel Setup Swap Tracks PC13629 UN 15JUN11 CZ76372 000032A 19 17JUN11 3 4 50 53 062111 PN 120 Guidance 8 The Current Track is displayed at the bottom of the View tab and the Swap to Track is displayed within the Swap Track Toggle button Select the Swap Track Toggle button to switch between the two guidance lines Changing Swap to Track While operating with the Current Track the operator can select the Swap Track Setup button and change the Swap to Trac
206. ddition to GreenStar Applications this display can be used as a display device for any implement that meets ISO 11783 standard This includes capability to control ISOBUS implements When used in this manner information and implement control functions placed on the display are provided by the implement and are the responsibility of the implement manufacturer Some of these implement functions could provide a hazard either to the Operator or a bystander Read the operator manual provided by the implement manufacturer and observe all safety messages in manual and on implement prior to use NOTE ISOBUS refers to the ISO Standard 11783 DX WW ISOBUS 19 19AUGO09 1 1 Handle Electronic Components and Brackets Safely Falling while installing or removing electronic components mounted on equipment can cause serious injury Use a ladder or platform to easily reach each mounting location Use sturdy and secure footholds and handholds Do not install or remove components in wet or icy conditions If installing or servicing a RTK base station on a tower or other tall structure use a certified climber If installing or servicing a global positioning receiver mast used on an implement use proper lifting techniques and wear proper protective equipment The mast is heavy and can be awkward to handle Two people are required when mounting locations are not accessible from the ground or from a service platform TS249 UN 23AUG88 D
207. de Interior Boundary 4 Over Previous Coverage 5 Prescription Rate Bellow Minimum 6 Speed Rate Below Minimum 7 Undefined BA31779 0000170 19 28APR11 2 2 75 14 062111 PN 255 Swath Control Swath Control Settings Quick Sheet Metric Physical machine reaction Distance traveled at given Distance traveled per GPS Constant Ground Speed delay time speed and time update km h seconds meters meters 3 1 0 83 0 17 3 2 1 67 0 17 3 3 2 50 0 17 3 4 3 33 0 17 3 5 4 17 0 17 3 10 8 33 0 17 6 1 1 67 0 33 6 2 3 33 0 33 6 3 5 00 0 33 6 4 6 67 0 33 6 5 8 33 0 33 6 10 16 67 0 33 9 1 2 50 0 50 9 2 5 00 0 50 9 3 7 50 0 50 9 4 10 00 0 50 9 5 12 50 0 50 9 10 25 00 0 50 12 1 3 33 0 67 12 2 6 67 0 67 12 3 10 00 0 67 12 4 13 33 0 67 12 5 16 67 0 67 12 10 33 33 0 67 15 1 4 17 0 83 15 2 8 33 0 83 15 3 12 50 0 83 15 4 16 67 0 83 15 5 20 83 0 83 15 10 41 67 0 83 18 1 5 00 1 00 18 2 10 00 1 00 18 3 15 00 1 00 18 4 20 00 1 00 18 5 25 00 1 00 18 10 50 00 1 00 21 1 5 83 1 17 21 2 11 67 1 17 21 3 17 50 1 17 21 4 23 33 1 17 21 5 29 17 1 17 21 10 58 33 1 17 24 1 6 67 1 33 24 2 13 33 1 33 24 3 20 00 1 33 24 4 26 67 1 33 24 5 33 33 1 33 24 10 66 67 1 33 27 1 7 50 1 50 Continued on next page CZ76372 00002F6 19 28APR11 1 2
208. ding If operator would like to record new paths i e Planting Repeat Mode should be unchecked Off If operator would like to follow existing paths i e Spraying Harvesting the Repeat Mode button should be checked On e The repeat mode feature decouples the recording button from the selection of path follow or path project mode e The operator shall select Repeat Mode as OFF path project mode when recording a path for the first time e Repeat Mode shall be selected ON path follow mode when following previously recorded paths Continued on next page Curve Track Settings eS Curve Track Recording gt smooth Tight Turn gt Implement In Ground Turn Radius ft Clear Adaptive Curves Data Eis Repeat Mode 30 000 PC12626 UN 02JUN10 A Curve Track Settings B Curve Track Recording C Smooth Tight Turns D Implement In Ground Turn Radius E Clear Adaptive Curves Data F Repeat Mode G Accept e This function affects the search algorithm Repeat Mode Off is 0 5 1 5 Track Spacing Repeat Mode On is 0 5 Track Spacing e The default is OFF If Repeat Mode is ON the recording button is disabled CZ76372 00001A4 19 040CT10 9 20 50 30 062111 PN 97 Guidance Repeat Mode Enabled D GS3 Adaptive curves repeat mode is enabled Do you want to turn it off Repeat Mode Enabled Press Yes to turn repeat mode off and begin reco
209. duct Type Rate Units Look Ahead sec Prescription Multiplier 400 Out of Field Loss of GPS Prescription Rate 0 00 gaVac 4 18 Select GreenSeeker from Prescription drop down list PC12919 UN 27SEP10 Prescription The GS3 is now ready to receive target rates from 19 Select the ENTER button to accept the prescription GreenSeeker 20 Setup is complete CZ76372 0000143 19 27SEP10 6 6 1 00 5 062111 PN 299 Central Insecticide System PC8663 UN O5AUG05 Central Insecticide System Select MENU gt gt GREENSTAR 3 PRO gt gt EQUIPMENT Make sure that the Machine Type is set to Tractor Then press the COM Port button MENU Softkey PC12685 UN 14JUL10 GREENSTAR 3 PRO button PC8677 UN O5AUG05 EQUIPMENT softkey CZ76372 000015E 19 27SEP10 1 6 IMPORTANT Connect the CIS controller to the a GS3 display before setting up a profile Once Com Port Settings setup is finished the system attempts to connect to the controller If controller is not connected an error message Communication Profile EE Error is then displayed 1 Select NEW in the Profile drop down box then enter eg the desired Profile name 2 Assign the appropriate Com Port number to this Profile Field Doc Connect WR 1 or 2 gies aco v 3 Select Field Doc Connect in the Port Type drop down box 4 Then press NEXT PAGE button to continue E h a a
210. duct boxes When no products are specified in an application No products are specified please select a product An alarm shall be issued if there is a prescription selected in Field Doc but not selected in the planter sprayer setup Prescription available but not selected Go to implement setup to select the prescription as the rate An alarm will be issued if Field Doc has a prescription selected but the planter sprayer is outside the field boundary for the prescription Default Rx Rate Used Machine outside the field boundary for the prescription Default Prescription rate being used At power up An alarm will be issued if a prescription is being used and the prescription multiplier for an operation is not set to 100 Prescription Multiplier not 100 Implement width set to zero Implement width is set to zero Implement width is required to record data Anywhere User selects the DOCUMENTATION button before filling out CFFT You must choose a Client Farm Field Task from the Resources button Communication lost with a connected controller Communication lost with controller If controller was not disconnected check connections and cycle power If controller was disconnected please review operations selected Field Doc didn t get some periodic messages Communication lost with controller If controller was not disconnected check connections and cycle power If controller was disconn
211. dure to be started or stopped Harvested Weight Cell This screen indicates approximate weight of grain that has been harvested during calibration process Scale Weight Cell This screen allows scale weight to be entered after a calibration run is complete during calibration run indicates approximate weight of grain that has been harvested Calibration Factor Cell Value shown here allows mass flow sensor to read accurately This value will be updated automatically by han Continued next Saul Yield Calibration System NOT Calibrated Calibration Sc Mode Low Flow Yield Calibration i is Stopped Harvested Weight lb O See e Weight lb Calibration Factor PAGE SETUP ag INFO DEE Dt Es z PC12879 UN 24SEP10 Harvest Mon Standard Calibration Calibration procedure This value can also be adjusted manually IMPORTANT Before calibrating be sure that combine grain tank and unloading auger tube are empty Be sure that wagon or truck hauling grain away from combine is empty NOTE Message with the following information may appear on screen Low Cal Flow Comp NOT required If this message appears flow rate during calibration was very low Therefore it is neither necessary nor possible to perform optional Low Flow Compensation procedure Standard Calibration procedure is sufficient Yield monitor system can be accurate only if operator follows correct calibrat
212. dvanced Setup feature the operator can start and run their desired operation and also know where to go to change settings The Advanced Setup feature can also be used to change individual settings as the operator progresses through their day to day operations While using Advanced Setup select which functionality to configure e Resources e Machine e Implement e Documentation e Guidance e Boundaries e iTEC Pro e Swath Control Implement Guidance Select any combination of functions to configure If a function is dependent on other functions the system automatically selects the required functions The operator is not able to deselect those functions If the operator selected the Boundaries function the Resources function would be automatically selected to force the operator to select a Client Farm and Field The functions that the operator selects determine which pages are included in Advanced Setup Only screens associated with functions selected are included For each function there is a list of required fields that must be complete and valid before the system works Red asterisks indicate required fields Based on the functions the operator has selected for setup the GS3 applications determine which fields are required for ee 11 2 What settings do you want to change Bi z Resources FA iTEC Pro E Vide Machine A Swath Control Pro C C H enslansant Implement P Guidance Documentation MW Wate
213. e na nnneaa000eese0eneeennneeeeeeeeeneeeene 130 21 Guidance Alams eeren reenen 130 22 Trouble Code Pop Up Boxes Guid ance Software sseesesesseeeeesenrsenrssree eee 130 23 AutoTrac Deactivation Messages 130 24 Specifications Device Name Source Address and File Directory kk 135 1 GreenStar Sytem Component Pinout 135 2 26 pin Display V1 Pinout eeeee 135 2 EC Declaration of Conformity 00 135 3 Glossary Glossary Of TIems ereer ereenn 140 1 062111 PN 3 Contents 062111 PN 4 Safety Recognize Safety Information This is a safety alert symbol When you see this symbol on your machine or in this manual be alert to the potential for personal injury Follow recommended precautions and safe operating practices T81389 UN O7DEC88 DX ALERT 19 29SEP98 1 1 Understand Signal Words ADANGER A signal word DANGER WARNING or CAUTION is used with the safety alert symbol DANGER identifies the most serious hazards DANGER or WARNING safety signs are located near specific hazards General precautions are listed on A WARNING CAUTION safety signs CAUTION also calls attention to safety messages in this manual A CAUTION TS187 19 30SEP88 DX SIGNAL 19 O3MAR93 1 1 Follow Safety Instructions Carefully read all safety messages in this manual and on your machine safety signs Keep safe
214. e go to YIELD CALIBRATION screen 0 Select SCALE WEIGHT button to change weight value 1 Using numeric keypad input net weight of grain from scale ticket IMPORTANT Calibration procedures will not change data already saved After changes are made all harvest information collected from that point on will reflect changes NOTE If scale ticket weight is more than 50 higher or lower than displayed weight system will NOT allow entry of scale weight 12 Select SCALE WEIGHT button to enter new value FLOW COMP NUMBER will change automatically when grain weight is entered CZ76372 0000180 19 24SEP10 3 4 65 48 062111 PN 209 Documentation Manually Adjusting Calibration Factor Screen SETUP YIELD CALIBRATION Select SETUP gt gt HARVEST MONITOR gt gt YIELD CALIBRATION NOTE Do not perform a manual adjustment of Calibration Factor if you intend on using Low Flow Compensation procedure If scale weight is more than 50 higher or lower than displayed weight system will not allow entry of scale weight A new calibration factor can also be entered manually To calculate calibration factor divide weight shown on display by new weight on scale ticket Multiply result by displayed calibration factor see example below This is the new calibration factor To manually enter a calibration factor 1 Select CALIBRATION FACTOR button to change calibration factor PC12881 UN
215. e 2630 display Press the DISPLAY RESET button A for approximately one second A successful screen capture is indicated by the front LED power light changing to color red and back to green again Screenshots captured on the display will be stored on the display s internal memory until they are transferred to a USB flash drive NOTE To transfer screenshots to a USB flash drive please see DATA TRANSFER OPTIONS and EXPORTING DATA FROM THE DISPLAY sections in this manual A Display Reset A 4 o SS Ww Display Secondary Navigation PC13808 UN 13JUN11 JS56696 0000A28 19 13JUN11 1 1 15 4 062111 PN 17 Getting Started Screen Layout PC8577 UN 02NOV05 Screen Layout A Home C Message Center E Application Info Area B Menu D softkeys NOTE Display screen illustrated on following pages are e Menu selection allows operator to view a list of provided for reference only Actual screens may available applications appear differently due to connection of optional e Message Center selection allows operator to view devices and or software versions alarm messages and diagnostic information See SETUP MESSAGE CENTER in Display Message Home A Menu B and Message Center C selections Center section will be available on most screens f Selecting one of the softkeys D will cause a new page e Home selection allows operator to view Home Page to appear or a pro
216. e GPS satellites L2 One of the frequencies used by the GPS satellites L5 A new frequency available in Block III GPS satellites for additional accuracy LCD Liquid Crystal Display a low power flat panel display Lead Compensation Shows how far down current track guidance looks to for such things as turns Used with Parallel Tracking only LED Light Emitting Diode MP Mobile Processor NA North America NMEA National Marine Electronics Association NMEA 0183 The standard for GPS data transmission between the receiver and any downstream processor PDOP Position Dilution of Precision Performance Monitor Means of displaying status information gathered from the cab of John Deere equipment This includes fuel consumption and equipment performance PF Precision Farming PLD Programmable Logic Device RCD Reconfigurable Display successor to the GreenStar Display RS232 A serial communication interface specification with bandwidth up to 115k bits per second at up to 50 feet RTK Real Time Kinematic A local ground based differential correction technique involving a fixed receiver calculating position offset vectors Row Finder Used in standing row crop applications to mark end of a pass and guide operator to next pass SF StarFire SF1 StarFire differential GPS with standard accuracy 14 inches pass to pass at 20 SF2 StarFire differential GP
217. e is an existing coverage map for the current field If there is existing coverage for the current field Swath Control uses the original reference point from that existing coverage map If there is no existing coverage for the current field then the system looks to see if there is a boundary for the current field If there is a boundary for the current field Swath Control utilizes the center of the field boundary as the reference point If there is no boundary for the current field the reference point is created with the first recorded point for the current field Poor GPS accuracy can affect boundaries and coverage maps It is critical to have good GPS accuracy when using Swath Control If the reference point for a Swath Control boundary or coverage map is created with poor GPS boundary and coverage map issues gaps overlaps shifts occur as GPS accuracy increases over time The same issue could be seen during field operation when shading low satellite availability or loss of signal are experienced To minimize a map or boundary shift good GPS accuracy is needed especially when establishing the reference point Having Optimize Shading checked helps prevent errors due to the drastic change in signal level Coverage Map and actual product application shows small gaps the full width of the boom or implement If the coverage map and actual product application shows small gaps the full width of the boom or implement when exiting the he
218. e left center or right of set track Shift track can be used to compensate for GPS drift Drift is inherent to any satellitebased differentially corrected GPS system Straight Track Uses straight line parallel passes TCM Terrain Compensation Module formerly known as the IMU Corrects GPS data for Roll angle and yaw angle errors TECU Tractor ECU This is defined in ISO 11783 Part 9 Tracking Tones Can be set to alert operator at a specified offtrack distance Turn Predictor Alerts operator by predicting the end of pass This feature can be turned on or off by selecting or deselecting Turn Predictor check box Turning View Can assist operators to guide vehicle from one pass to the next by showing an overhead view of the field USB Universal Serial Bus VDOP Vertical Dilution Of Precision VR Variable Rate Controller Another term for the ASRC One of the SeedStar Generation 1 controllers Continued on next page CZ76372 00001BB 19 040CT10 2 3 140 2 sE 062111 347 Glossary Glossary of Terms Term Meaning VRF Variable Rate Fertilizer Controller Planter controller used to control the variable application of liquid fertilizer VT Virtual Terminal WAAS Wide Area Augmentation Service Wedge Box One of a family of general and special purpose controllers used throughout the Ag division WW Worldwide CZ76372 00001BB 19 040CT10 3 3
219. e reene reesen e senesrnrneen ene 65 4 Copntrollers ee 65 5 Remove Disable and Enable Operations 65 5 Using Documentation with Planters 65 5 Using Documentation with Seeder Air Carts 65 12 Page Seeding Product Details Europe Only 65 15 Using Documentation with a Dry Boxvlpreadztar eeens 65 18 Product Application Product Details Europe Onlly ccccccsssssseeeeeeees 65 20 Tank Mixes een 65 22 Viewing Locked Tank Mixes n 65 25 Harvest Documentation eeeeeeeeeteeees 65 26 Harvest Documentation Setup 0 0 65 27 Harvest Monitor Geiup 65 30 Harvest Machine Setup ssssessseeseeesseeereee 65 34 Quick Setup for Combines 65 37 Harvest Monitor Yield Calibration 0002 65 46 Harvest Monitor Moisture Correction 65 49 Harvest Monitor Cotton Setup 65 52 Harvest Monitor Cotton Calibration 65 56 Tillage Operation cccccccecccesssseeesssssteeeeeeees 65 59 Map Based Prescrottons 65 60 Shapefile Converter 65 62 Connecting 3rd Party Controllers 00 0000ae 65 66 Simultaneous Documentation Pre scriptions with John Deere and 3rd Party Controllers csccceeeeeeeeeees 65 67 Other Operation 65 67 Surface Water Management 65 68 Surface Water Management 65 68 Totals TOTALS button 70 1 Harvest Totals ceceessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeenneeeees 70 2 General Overview 70 2 Set Up Totals
220. e system allows the operator to drive vehicle with the aid of GPS When combined with an optional AutoTrac activation and vehicle steering kit system can automatically guide machine though the field Documentation can be used to record data tied to GPS coordinates On some machines rates yield implement width or other information is recorded from the vehicle CAN Bus The displays can also be connected to certain 3rd Party control units to record rate information This data is collected on the display memory and can be unloaded using a USB drive into desktop software to produce maps and reports of field activities NOTE 3rd Party control units are control units using RS232 connection Field Doc Connect and ISOBUS compliant control units supporting Task Controller functionality On screen mapping uses GPS and a recording source to create real time maps of field activities Operators are able to see the areas or the as applied maps of the field they have covered Original GreenStar Monitor function can be used to operate selected John Deere implements as they would normally be used with the original GreenStar display The 2630 is also mounted in tandem with an original GreenStar display The 2630 display has an integrated performance monitor that can be used to record area and other data based on implement width and ground speed Display can also be used for machines and systems that conform to implementation level 2 of Inte
221. e system has been turned ON in the display e Guidance Track 0 has been defined e AutoTrac Activation detected e StarFire signal is present e SSU has no active faults pertaining to the steering function e Hydraulic oil warmer than minimum temperature PC8833 UN 250CT05 Stage 2 CONFIGURED e Speed is less than maximum e TCM message is currently available and valid e In proper operating gear CZ76372 00001A8 19 010CT10 3 25 Steer On Off Press the steer on off button to move AutoTrac from the CONFIGURED stage to the ENABLED stage PC8836 UN 250CT05 Ei Steer On Off CZ76372 00001A8 19 010CT10 4 25 Stage 3 ENABLED 3 4 of pie Steer Icon has been pressed All conditions are met for AutoTrac to operate and system is ready to be activated e Select Steer On Off button once to turn Steer On PC8834 UN 250CT05 wv Stage 3 ENABLED CZ76372 00001A8 19 010CT10 5 25 Stage 4 ACTIVATED 4 4 of pie with A Resume switch has been pressed and AutoTrac is steering the vehicle e Press Resume Switch AutoTrac has been activated Continued on next page PC8835 UN 250CT05 d Stage 4 ACTIVATED CZ76372 00001A8 19 010CT10 6 25 50 56 062111 PN 123 Guidance PC8629 UN 03AUG05 Tractors PC8868 UN O02NOV05 N63532 UN 07AUG03 4700 and 4710 Sprayers PC7989 UN 04NOV03 4720 4920 and 30
222. e unit temperature read from the internal analog digital convertor is greater than 80 C at which the LCD backlight shall be turned off 442 01 Display Unit Temperature Low The unit temperature read from the internal analog digital convertor is less than 30 C at which the LCD backlight shall be turned off 523310 12 NOR Flash Memory Read Write Failure Possible sources of this error 1 The Manufacturing Info Block in NOR flash has an invalid CRC and thus cannot be read 2 The Manufacturing Info Block in NOR flash could not be written to successfully Currently only the Current Vehicle Model Serial Number number fields can be modified by the user through the VTi OBD interface 523771 03 CCD High Line Voltage High The voltage level on the CCD line of the CCD Bus is greater than 3 2V 523771 04 CCD High Line Voltage Low The voltage level on the CCD line of the CCD Bus is less than 1 4V If both the CCD and CCD lines are reporting less than 0 5V it is assumed the CCD bus is not in use on this vehicle and this DTC will be disabled 523772 03 CCD Low Line Voltage High The voltage level on the CCD line of the CCD Bus is greater than 3 2V 523772 04 CCD Low Line Voltage Low The voltage level on the CCD line of the CCD Bus is less than 1 4V If both the CCD and CCD lines are reporting less than 0 5V it is assumed the CCD bus is not in use on this vehicle and this DTC will be disabled 524050 12 Real Time Clock RTC
223. e vehicle is operating also affects the performance of the AutoTrac system For example loose soil conditions can reduce the effectiveness of the steering system because traction is lost Firm soil conditions can cause uneven loads in high draft applications Differential Lock can provide some compensation to lost traction and uneven loads or terrain depending on the situation and operation being performed However it must be used at the operator s discretion and only if the operator feels it is beneficial to the particular operation Slope of the land can also play a key factor in performance because the machine or implement may slide down a slope while trying to operate AutoTrac resulting in a motion called crabbing Currently AutoTrac does not compensate for crabbing along a slope There are many factors affecting accuracy and performance of the GreenStar AutoTrac system It is imperative to understand these factors and what can and cannot be adjusted to achieve optimal performance For more information on expected accuracy please visit the accuracy calculator on www StellarSupport com Points To Remember It is very important to remember e Receiver has to go through a warm up period upon start up e Vehicle is setup properly ballasted according to vehicle operator manual etc e Implement is setup to run properly wear parts such as shanks shovels and sweeps are in good working condition and correctly spaced
224. eadings do not agree with combine moisture readings Do not use this procedure if crop moisture levels are above 16 For crops above 16 enter moisture correction manually 1 Collect 1 L 1 qt grain sample from the grain tank and place in a sealed container and have tested by elevator IMPORTANT To finish this procedure the combine engine must be turned OFF Continued on next page Saul Moisture Correction Crop d MOISTURE CORRECTION MOISTURE CORRECTION R bar SEET as ETE Moisture Correction Fixed Moisture Value Advanced Moisture Correction PAGE SETUP INFO Kb E Es z e PC12883 UN 24SEP10 pe s Moisture N on SETUP MOISTURE CORRECTION screen Select ELEVATOR GRAIN MOISTURE button on SETUP ADVANCED CORRECTION screen Ve gt Using numeric keypad enter value from elevator a value o To start sampling select START button NOTE Screen will prompt operator to POUR SAMPLE IN MOISTURE SENSOR Make sure moisture sample chamber is fully filled and is free of air pockets Air pockets will cause inaccurate moisture readings 7 Pour sample into moisture sensor 8 Screen will display CALIBRATION IN PROGRESS 9 MEASURED MOISTURE IS cell will display the moisture of the sample in the moisture sensor 10 Select ACCEPT button to save this value or select DECLINE button to decline this value Select ADVANCE MOISTURE CORRECTION button
225. ected please review operations selected Prescription available but not selected Check setup on the implement to ensure prescription is selected as the rate Air Cart Setup Air cart is on the bus 1st tank has been defined with an operation Second tank is created with the same operation type as the first tank You are creating another seeding application operation Would you like this to be the same as the Front Middle Rear Tank seeding application operation Air Cart Setup User selects enter for the previous message Please enter the tank ratios for each tank if applicable Air Cart Setup User enters tank ratios that do not add to 100 Tank ratios must add to 100 SeedStar selects Rx but Documentation doesn t have Rx selected No prescription file for selected field Verify field and operation are correct Verify prescription was saved on USB drive Resave prescription to drive if necessary Tank Mix Screen User attempts to add a second ingredient in a tank mix without a carrier or base solution rate You must enter a carrier and base solution rate before building a tank mix Incorrect model is possibly selected The RS232 controller model selected is incorrect Please verify and reenter manufacturer and model number Recording is not currently allowed Recording is not currently allowed Verify settings on RS232 controller Alarm for manual controller when target rate changes
226. ed To filter the current list of Mappings 4 Choose the Unmapped item D to see only the 1 Select the View list control A implement functions that have not yet been Mapped to input controls on an input device 2 Choose the Al item B to see all Mapped C and Ee Unmapped D implement functions and Conflicts 5 Choose the Conflicts item E to see only the E This is the default selection implement function assignments in conflict to each other See Auxiliary Controls Conflicts and Disable 3 Choose the Mapped item C to see only the Functions in this Section Mapped implement functions OUCC002 00029E9 19 04DEC08 5 5 85 11 m Auxiliary Controls Auxiliary Controls Assignment Error Messages While assigning functions some assignment error messages may appear When an auxiliary function is not responding to an assignment request the error message A appears Auxiliary function is not responding Check assignment on Auxiliary Controls page The related assignment B is displayed Press key E to reach the Auxiliary Controls page or enter key F to return to the previous screen IMPORTANT It is recommended to press key E to reach the Auxiliary Controls page and check the auxiliary function assignment NOTE The failed assignment is indicated by the missing status indicator while the input device and input are displayed pe XXXX Auxiliary Contro
227. ed on next page CZ76372 00001A0 19 30SEP10 6 9 PC12634 UN O9JUN10 Ge Adaptive Curves Record Button 50 5 062111 PN 72 Guidance AB Curves Mode PC12936 UN 30SEP10 e Record button Set AB Curve Set AB Curve Button CZ76372 00001A0 19 30SEP10 7 9 Row Finder Mode PC12937 UN 30SEP10 e Set Row Button Set Row Set Row Button Continued on next page CZ76372 00001A0 19 30SEP10 8 9 50 6 062111 PN 73 Guidance Moving Map view and Perspective View The display can now toggle between the Moving Map view and the Perspective View Use buttons A and B to move from one screen to the other A Toggles Screen to Moving B Toggles Screen to Map View Perspective View Moving Map View PC12743 UN 27AUG10 PC12744 UN 27AUG10 CZ76372 0000150 19 27AUG10 1 1 50 7 062111 PN 74 Guidance Full Screen Mapping PC9344 UN 210CT07 PC9345 UN 210CT07 Perspective View Moving Map View GREENSTAR 3 PRO gt gt MAPPING softkey The display can now show the mapping view from one edge of the screen to the other The toggle button switches between Perspective View Moving Map View and Fixed Field View O E Q O z 5 oO ks bal Q oO a Fixed Field View PC9347 UN O6SEP06 Toggle Button Continued on next page CZ76372 0000069 19 09JUL10 1 2 50 8 062111 PN
228. ed tractor It is important to do this step first otherwise you run the risk of CZ76372 00001A8 19 010CT10 10 25 50 59 062111 PN 126 Guidance masking actual machine faults and wasting your time tuning a system that cannot be tuned Characterize the current AutoTrac problem There are various types of issues this software may be able to resolve First the specific type of problem needs to be identified from the possible items below a Excessive Wheel Motion Overall AutoTrac performance is acceptable but the operator is concerned about how quickly the wheels are twitching back and forth b Aggressive S ing Motion Continual back and forth motion as observed by the operator looking out over the front nose of the tractor Although a lot of motion is observed the off track error shown on the display distance away from AB line is often relatively small c Lazy S ing Motion Performance of AutoTrac seems very sluggish when trying to stay on the line and slowly wanders from side to side d Lazy Line Acquisition AutoTrac appears sluggish during line acquisition and the tractor remains off to one side of the line for a long time before getting lined up e Aggressive Line Acquisition AutoTrac overshoots the line and continues to overcompensate during acquisition Results in high frequency tight S ing pattern during acquisitions f Lazy Curve Track Performance AutoTrac is sluggish in
229. eeeeeeeecucrideeees 45 30 Boundaries Line Sensitivity Heading ssesssesesseenesnenesrreeereeeee 50 65 Constant ve ue ENEE eu nen 45 29 Line Sensitivity Tracking ccccccsssscceceeesssssteeeees 50 66 Creating E 45 29 Load Type EE pace coc bases cect een cacseelecateceds tnd 65 29 BI VC RE 45 24 Low Flow Compensaton 65 48 Creating EE 45 24 Headland TE 45 29 M Creating ices tee hate et eet eee ides 45 29 Top and Bottom cccccccccccccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 45 26 E isthe meiotic toate we 45 4 E fetes tte weet atthe Petal Se tate tr 45 27 oy bene ee ee ee een eee Ser 65 34 Continued on next page Index 5 er PN 5 Page Page Jul E 45 10 Prescription Malle est wee es a ek 45 7 Multiplier ze Seite Soh hh Deeg 65 61 Operational Summary 45 1 OVGm Ide seeciee sailed eee 65 61 Per Le 45 14 Prescriptions ea aa a a a EEn 65 60 Original GreenStar Background Layer 65 61 Harvest ii a 65 30 Controllers eee 65 67 Original GreenStar Monitor 55 1 GreenSeeker i e ceececeeeccceeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 95 4 100 5 Selaa oa E A E EEE 65 30 ER 65 60 Harvest Monttor 65 52 Q P Quarter Screens 2 2 sccc ceseceeeeeeeecteeenee tecteeeteeedenees 40 1 Page Laetitia 40 1 Quick Calibration Parallel Tracking ccceeeeeeeeseeenneeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeaae 50 1 COUON nace ee ee a te EE 65 57 Passable Interior Boundary ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeees 45 21 Path Accuracy Indicator 50 3
230. eeeeetteeeeeeees 130 21 Tractor T Direct GPRS EE 60 9 Tractors Re EVIC 65 22 Activating Auto Trace 50 71 Teas EE 45 14 Deactivating Auto Trace 50 72 Notos see ont a tae ND gare OO NE arene eT Te 65 3 Enabling AUtoTrac ue 50 71 Task Controller 80 3 Transmission Oil Temperature Alarma de ee So ie deca eth oe alo ee 130 12 Advanced Performance Monitor cee 60 17 UECHT 45 144 Trouble Codes iss csecsnciviaenncenicctie trectecladi navn enecente ences 130 3 breet e Bache ier e E 15 3 Pop Up Boxes Documentation Software 130 20 Continued on next page Index 8 062111 PN 8 Index Page Page Platform Core Goftware 130 18 COON RE 65 52 Troubleshooting Auto Tac es Ae tue ok ek ok eee 130 22 BUS Gtatus ccccccccceccccccccesceeseeeeeeeeseeseeuaneeess 130 4 Device e EE 130 4 Diagnostic Addresses eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee een 130 15 BIS e FEN A E et es ee ota e te 15 2 Documentation 130 21 Documentation Software Trouble Codes aeii 130 20 GPS ok ete eee eet eae te he ok ate Ba 130 22 Message Center 130 1 Platform Core Software Trouble Codes 130 18 Repeat mode REENEN 130 21 LR DEEN 130 22 Task Controller 130 12 TOUCNSCIEEN 0 ceccccceeeeccceeeeeeeeeeeeececeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeees 35 8 leefeg EE 130 3 Tuning Recommendations cceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeee 50 59 Tum Predictor ccccccccccceeececceeceeceeeeeceeeeeeeeesaeeeeeaees 50 4 Auto Re TEE 50 10 Turning Machine Turn Radius 45 7 SeNSitivit
231. eere Dealer Within 5 seconds away of a gap in Curved Track data Gap in Guidance Path Within 5 seconds away from a curve of more than 30 between consecutive segments Approaching Sharp Curve The operator leaves the seat for more than 7 seconds while in a tracking mode that supports Turn Predictor and TP is off valid SSU AT licence and seat switch Turn predictor is turned ON Uncheck the box to turn it OFF SF1 AT Key with SF2 corrections turned on AutoTrac SF1 license cannot operate while SF2 corrections are turned on Turn SF2 corrections off to operate AutoTrac SF1 AT Key with old SF1 StarFire software AutoTrac SF1 license cannot operate with current StarFire software Update StarFire software to operate AutoTrac The user attempts to switch to a tracking mode for which there is no valid license available No License available for the selected tracking mode Defaulting to previous tracking mode The user attempts to perform an operation that requires a GPS signal presses SetA SetB Curve Track recording or Circle Track recording buttons No communication with GPS receiver Check connection at GPS receiver and perform operation again The GPS signal is lost during definition of a circle using the driving method Communication with GPS receiver was lost during circle definition Redefine the circle once GPS communication has been re established The user inputs an A or B point
232. ehicle Heading Arrow provides an indication to vehicle s position in relation to the guidance path M during a line PC12580 UN 27APR10 I Shift Track Right M AutoTrac Enable J Steer Sensitivity N iTEC Pro Status Pie K Set AB Curve O iTEC Pro Diagnostics L AutoTrac Status Pie acquisition This feature helps ensure vehicle is square to the line before beginning a pass Once the vehicle has acquired the line and traveled in a forward direction for 10 seconds at more than 3 2 km h 2 mph the Vehicle Heading Arrow disappears JS56696 00006DA 19 31AUG09 2 2 062111 50 14 PN 81 Guidance SHIFT TRACK SETTINGS tab SHIFT TRACK SETTING tab allows setup of the following e Shift On Off shift track feature can be turned on off by selecting or deselecting SHIFTS ON OFF e Small Shifts Settings Range 1 30 cm 0 4 12 in Small shifts are active while AutoTrac is active e Large Shifts Settings Range 30 406 cm 12 160 in NOTE Large Shifts are disabled when AutoTrac is active or when operating in Curve Track mode e Clear All Shifts Used to clear all shifts for entire field restoring original position of Track 0 and consequently adjusting position of all tracks in field NOTE AutoTrac has to be deactivated to use this feature Available in Straight Track mode only Shift Track Shift track is used to adjust position of machine left center or right of set tra
233. enu Menu Box C Flags Tab F Field Name Drop Down Menu H Headland Group Name K Headland Settings Button Drop Down Menu I Creation Method Drop Down Menu Creating Top and Bottom Headlands 3 Enter the name of the headland boundary in the 1 Create or select an exterior boundary HEADLAND GROUP drop down box Several headland boundaries may be saved per field for 2 Choose Exterior Headland from the TYPE drop down different implement widths that may be used box Example Planting headland group would be 24 4 m NOTE This option is not available to interior headlands 80 ft for a 16R30 if two passes are being made Continued on next page JS56696 0000499 19 280CT08 2 3 45 27 062111 PN 64 GreenStar General 4 Select HEADLAND SETTINGS to make adjustments i 3 to the Row Heading Offset X and Offset Y These are Headland Settings the default settings for the approximate heading of the rows in the field and the width of headlands on the X and Y ends of the field The heading that is entered does not need to be the exact heading In the example if the heading for the AutoTrac A B line is 85 degrees entering 90 degrees creates headlands on the east and west ends of the field During tillage work if the work is being done at 30 degrees from east and west entering 120 degrees will give headlands on all sides of the field In this case Constant Offset headlands could also be used Efforts have been made
234. er starting e Vehicle is setup properly ballasted according to vehicle operator manual etc e Implement is setup to run properly wear parts such as shanks shovels and sweeps are in good working condition and correctly spaced e Understand how field soil conditions affect system loose soil requires more steering than firm soil but firm soil can cause uneven draft loads Status Pie IMPORTANT Although AutoTrac system can be activated when SF2 or SF1 if using AutoTrac SF1 activation correction signal is confirmed system accuracy may continue to increase after powering up system AutoTrac SF2 activation will operate on SF1 SF2 or RTK signal AutoTrac SF1 activation will operate on SEI signal only NOTE The status pie and steer icon will not be displayed if no SSU or AutoTrac Activation is detected AutoTrac icon has four stages as shown in the AutoTrac Status Pie e INSTALLED CONFIGURED e ENABLED CZ76372 00001A8 19 010CT10 1 25 50 55 062111 PN 122 Guidance e ACTIVATED Stage 1 INSTALLED 1 4 of pie SSU and all other hardware necessary for use are installed e SSU is detected PC8832 UN 250CT05 Stage 1 INSTALLED CZ76372 00001A8 19 010CT10 2 25 Stage 2 CONFIGURED 2 4 of pie Tracking Mode has been determined A valid Track 0 has been established Correct StarFire signal level for AutoTrac activation is selected Vehicle conditions met e Guidanc
235. er the regular radar speed icon in APM No GPS option will display as the radar feed is designated by the radar wire feed connection behind the command center described later in this section Vehicle Speed The operator will be able to view the vehicle speed and can select radar speed if available GPS speed if available or transmission wheel speed The display readout will switch when below 0 3 kph to 0 29 and back to 1 1 when above 1 0 kph The figures below show the vehicle speed icons PC9047 UN 17APR06 0 0 Wheel PC9048 UN 17APR06 0 0 Radar PC9049 UN 17APR06 0 0 GPS CZ76372 00000BE 19 15JUL10 1 11 Front and Rear PTO RPM The user is able to view both the front and rear PTO RPM if available The data will be displayed and rounded to the nearest 10th s digit This option is only available if the vehicle has the front and or rear PTO option The figures below show the PTO icons PC9050 UN 17APR06 O 72 Front PTO PC9051 UN 17APR06 FAm a o i Rear PTO CZ76372 00000BE 19 15JUL10 2 11 Wheel Slip The operator is able to view the current wheel slip of the vehicle Note that this feature will only be available if a radar sensor is installed It will be displayed as a percentage calculated as the difference between the wheel speed and radar speed divided by the wheel speed The figure below shows the wheel slip icon PC9052 UN 17APR06 O
236. erator is responsible for collision avoidance Turn AutoTrac OFF before entering roadways No Setup Data Please import a new data Profile Export data to a USB drive first if you want to keep old data AutoTrac SSU Software Incompatible See your John Deere Dealer for SSU update Communication Error Communication problem with controller Check connections to controller Mobile Processor Detected Mobile Processor Detected on CAN Bus GreenStar Application is disabled Remove mobile processor and cycle power to enable GreenStar application GPS Communication Problem No communication with GPS receiver Check connections at GPS receiver Tracking Inaccurate The GPS receiver must be set to report at the 5Hz message output rate Confirm settings on GPS receiver and change output to 5Hz Invalid Boundary An invalid boundary has been recorded You may continue recording or clear the current boundary and start recording again Activation Error Invalid activation code Please reenter activation code Invalid Filter All the fields that are required to be filled out based on the Totals Type Selected have not been filled out Flags of Same Selection Selected the Flags of same name and mode Name Already Exists The name you have entered already exists in this list Please enter a new name GPS Communication Problem No communication with GPS receiver Check connection at GPS recei
237. error when encountering a large rut furrow or implement load change Proper steering sensitivity adjustment will help minimize track error Too High Setting steering sensitivity to highest level will not result in maximum tracking accuracy If steering sensitivity is too high excessive front wheel motion will be observed which reduces accuracy and causes unnecessary front axle component wear At extreme high levels machine motion will become large enough to cause steering sensitivity to be momentarily changed to default level Wheel motion to watch for when determining if aggressiveness is too high occurs at an interval of approximately 1 second from side to side as shown in FIGURE B If excessive wheel motion is observed lower steering sensitivity by small increments until desired performance is achieved Optimizing AutoTrac Controller Performance When operating in curves start with the curve sensitivity equal to the optimized acquire sensitivity These default settings are a good starting point for most conditions Each setting can be adjusted to try and optimize performance Operator may need to readjust line sensitivity heading and line sensitivity tracking for best results Increase or decrease settings to change aggressiveness as desired If system is not responsive enough increase sensitivity settings If desired Continued on next page integral implement requires a higher steering sensitivity than a similar drawn imp
238. ers ssneessseeeeseeeererrrreerrrrserrrn 110 2 Correchon nene 65 50 Swath Control Original GreenStar Monitor ceeeeeeee 65 52 Metric Quick Gheei 75 15 Row Compensation SAE Quick Gheet eeen esnerserereeene 75 17 LE e nte E 65 57 VIEW better nore iad ete 45 1 SOlUP re ee Aare tat 65 32 E EE 110 1 Header GSD RCD Pinout ccccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 135 2 COMM siesta Be se ea ae es 65 31 Offset eip a desta 65 34 Platform Belt PDickup 65 31 ee EE 65 31 Continued on next page Index 4 ad PN 4 Page Page e EE 65 31 Machine Model 45 6 Wits EE 65 34 Machine Name 45 6 Heading Error Meter 50 63 Machine Tab En 45 4 Heading bead eier Geste ugeet eege En 50 67 Machine Turn Radius 45 7 Headland Machine Tvpe Abee En 45 6 Boundary LE 45 7 Constant Offset Boundary eeeeeee 45 29 RSS U EE 45 5 Greating NEE 45 29 Turning Gensftivitv eeren rrer r eeren 45 7 E pelt o PERTE E PO EEE ea EE 45 22 Map Headland Boundary cccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 45 21 Prescriptions ccecccceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 65 60 Headland Warming 50 4 Softkey Highlight Area FAQS wsci c ccieeteeetsneeee chitin eaten ccna 45 30 Golf geed Ae Een 35 5 Line Flags EE 45 30 Wei HEET ec ees 35 5 studio CEET 45 30 ee ak 45 4 Mapping Goftkey 45 21 l nster ase Rae Acetic Meet deg deeg 15 5 Maps Hours Since Last Service ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 6
239. eset slip value by driving the vehicle on a hard level surface at a constant speed of 8 km h 5 mph Select and hold slip switch for a minimum of 3 seconds to zero out slip It is recommended to have an implement connected to the vehicle but not engaged in the ground no load CZ76372 00000C2 19 15JUL10 1 2 Radar Calibration The operator is able to calibrate the radar through a series of steps illustrated in the following figures e The operator initiates the calibration procedure by selecting the calibrate radar button e Measure out a 123 m 400 ft course and select Start Calibration at the beginning of the course e Drive the course and then hit stop at the end of the course NOTE The radar cannot be calibrated unless on a CCD Based vehicle The only exception to this is if you directly hook the radar to the display via the Greenstar harness direct radar PC9119 UN 17APR06 Radar Calibration button connection then radar calibration is possible on a CAN Based vehicle See notes below for configuring radar on a CAN based tractor See CAN Based vehicle list in APM section If the calibration was not successful the operator will be taken back to the first calibration screen CZ76372 00000C2 19 15JUL10 2 2 60 8 062111 PN 152 Performance Monitor Configuring Tractor For DIRECT GPS or Ground Based Radar Feed CAN Based Vehicles ONLY NOTE If you have any question
240. ess configuration changes to enable radar PC9129 UN 17APRO06 operation Please see your John Deere Dealer for service support CZ76372 00000B0 19 15JUL10 7 7 PERFORMANCE MONITOR TOTALS SCREEN Zeefzerga e Mentor Totris 17 9 Gia 0 0 46 0 0 BY Za vn geac gt 0 0 0 BE 957 2 D 10 1193mM PC9130 UN 18APR06 0 9 80 ofz UPM Totals Screen The totals screen of the PM application contains three sections the first contains the averages for many of the instantaneous functions from the main page the second contains the total distance and a reset button and the Continued on next page Perrormance Nonitor Totals 161 1 S 53 588 3 948 16 980 E OH Ilezee 0 S 165 3 B GE 5 148 1E Les APM Totals Screen third contains the record button All of the items will be stored in memory so the values will be retained between vehicle power cycles Totals and Settings Screens will remain identical in both the APM and UPM applications CZ76372 00000C3 19 15JUL10 1 12 60 12 062111 PN 156 Performance Monitor Total Area This is the area covered by the implement since the last time this counter was reset The area is calculated from the implement header width speed source priority is GPS speed radar speed wheel speed and the Recording Source set in Performance Monitor If Recording is off area will not accumul
241. ete entries From the list select lt List Cleanup gt To rename an entry select the Rename button and type Headtando1 the new name with the keyboard To delete entries place checks next to the entries that C Apesna need to be removed Then select the Delete Selected Data button C Spray Headlands NOTE Greyed out items can not be deleted because C they may be related to other data or were ele ERE created using desktop software S 3 T F 7 Cancel Data 2 Data Cleanup CZ76372 00002E7 19 19APR11 1 1 45 23 062111 PN 60 GreenStar General Driven Headland Offset Driven Headland Bounda ef Different Size Boundaries B puejpeay Headland 5 3 Exterior Boundary 2 Impassable d Driven Headland Boundary Different Size Boundaries A Driven Boundary Different C Exterior Headland E Interior Headland Size Boundaries D lInterior Boundary F Field B Exterior Boundary Impassable Impassable Creating a Driven Boundary 4 Select DRIVEN from the creation method drop down 1 Select MAPPING softkey gt gt BOUNDARIES tab menu for Exterior Headlands or place a check in the DRIVE BOUNDARY check box for Interior Headlands 2 Select the Client Farm and Field from the drop down menus 5 Enter the distance from the GPS receiver to the edge of the field This can be done during the first pass 3 Choose TYPE of boundary you want to drive from the around the field and then the distance wo
242. eview configuration configuration Improper operation can cause unintended improper operation can cause unintended implement movement implement movement To avoid the risk of death or To avoid the risk of death or serious injury serious injury to a bystander S to a bystander ensure ensure Q i A Users know which function is T e Users know which function is mapped mapped to each control Z to each control Controls are properly labeled d s Controls are properly labeled S Ka p O A OK x This message occurs when the system detects an lt lt ESS N Auxiliary Control and that configuration has been modified during run time e g additional input and or implement ai added Press Ae Os koy F to adle to oe Controls key G to review or change the Auxiliary Control page Go to the Auxiliary Controls page by pressing the assignments Continued on next page CZ76372 0000282 19 12JAN11 2 4 1 0 2 062111 PN 12 Safety Signs Auxiliary Control Enabled AASTON Auxiliary Control enabled Improper operation can cause unintended implement movement To avoid the risk of death or serious injury to a bystander ensure e Users know which function is mapped to each control e Controls are properly labeled This message occurs when the operator enables the Auxiliary Control manually Press Enter key F to navigate to the home page Go to the Auxiliary Controls page
243. ff track error If off track error exceeds 99 cm 35 in the distance displayed will change to meters feet Track number Represents the track number the vehicle is guiding off of It also tells which direction the track is located from the original Track 0 set for the field CZ76372 00001A0 19 30SEP10 1 9 50 3 062111 PN 70 Guidance AutoTrac deactivation message Each time AutoTrac is deactivated text is displayed indicating the reason why AutoTrac deactivated in the upper left corner of the perspective view Messages are also displayed as to why AutoTrac did not activate The deactivation messages display for 3 seconds and then disappear These messages can be turned off and on from the Guidance Settings tab Deactivation Message Description Steering wheel moved Operator turned steering wheel Speed too slow Vehicle speed is below minimum required speed Speed too fast Vehicle speed is above maximum allowed speed Invalid gear Vehicle operating in an invalid gear Track number changed Track number changed Invalid GPS signal SF1 SF2 or RTK signal was lost SSU fault See John Deere dealer Invalid display messages Check display settings Invalid display settings Check guidance settings and Track 0 setup No AutoTrac Activation No AutoTrac Activation on GS3 Heading error too large Vehicle is at an angle greater than 45 deg
244. ffset Toggle Button F Non Steering Axle Location Drop Down Menu A Lateral distance from center line of machine to GPS receiver B In line distance from non steering axle to GPS receiver C In line distance from non steering axle to connection point CZ76372 000013B 19 14JUN11 4 4 45 7 062111 PN 44 GreenStar General PC8663 UN O5AUG05 Implement Setup Implement 1 Tab MENU gt GREENSTAR 3 PRO gt EQUIPMENT gt IMPLEMENT tab MENU button PC12685 UN 14JUL10 ESB owes GREENSTAR 3 PRO button PC8677 UN O5AUG05 EQUIPMENT button Continued on next page CF86321 000001F 19 12APR11 1 6 45 8 062111 PN 45 GreenStar General Physical Width ft Implement Vddth ft Track Spacing e a ft ES T 5 a 2 Implement Tab A Machine Tab D Implement 3 Tab G Implement Name Drop Down B Implement 1 Tab E Implement Type Drop Down Menu C Implement 2 Tab Menu H Change Offsets Button F Implement Model Drop Down I Change Widths Buttons Menu Select the Change Offsets button H Verify Enter implement Type Model and Name in NOTE All items and changes will be saved under drop down menus the current implement name Implement name allows user to save implement d dimensions NOTE Offsets are provided by some ISO implements and some Deere tractors Some list boxes may be grayed out when the implement is automati
245. from the center of the tractor to the center of the implement which will be 0 0 for most common implements This dimension is used to alert the operator to potential collisions This is critical for proper end turn performance and may need to be adjusted NOTE Examples of equipment that will not be centered include mower conditioners and most split row planters with an even number of 38 cm 15 in rows e g 24R15 or 32R15 unless you have an adjustable hitch crossbar D In line distance from connection point to control point of implement In many cases this distance will be from the connection point to the carrying wheels For proper turns measure this distance with implement at the height it typically will be at while turning NOTE These dimensions may need to be adjusted for fine tuning performance in the field NOTE For 3 pt mounted implements dimension D does not need to be entered AtB Documentation Swath Control location when in use S Lateral distance from connection point to control point of 2 implement In line distance from connection point to control point of E implement In line distance from connection point to connection point for 2nd implement Value only needed if second implement is used Q Implement Offsets A In line distance from E In line distance from connection point to front of connection point to implement connection point for B In line distance from front second implement Value
246. from you local John Deere Dealer Items REQUIRED to Activate AutoTrac 1 Display Serial Number Found in display 2 Display Challenge Code Found in display 3 Comar order number from dealer once order is placed 4 Visit StellarSupport Deere com to obtain a 26 digit activation code Current Purchased Software Activation options are as follows e GEI AutoTrac 33 cm 13 in at receiver e GEZ AutoTrac 10 cm 4 in at receiver e GEI to SF2 AutoTrac upgrade e Pivot Pro AutoTrac Circle operation for center pivots requires an AutoTrac activation first e Swath Control The display software activations Pro Modules are 26 digit pin numbers that are separate from the StarFire 24 digit GPS activation number The display software is only activated once for the life of the display and requires no other fees CZ76372 0000299 19 28APR11 1 1 Obtaining Activation Code amp Activating Software In Display NOTE The display Serial Number and Challenge Code are found at MENU button gt GREENSTAR 3 PRO button gt GS3 button gt ACTIVATIONS tab Get the 6 digit Comar order number from your dealer for the GS3 Pro package you have purchased AutoTrac PivotPro Swath Control Get the serial number and challenge code from the display Go to www StellarSupport com and select ACTIVATIONS AND SUBSCRIPTIONS Select GREENSTAR 3 gt ACTIVATE AUTOTRAC then follow the GreenStar 3 Software Activat
247. g 900000 o00000 900000 ooooool 90900090 900000 ooooool ooooool ooooool e io RK ei ba e B b YM o o o o o FIRST ROW Select SELECTED ROW SPACING button to toggle from one row spacing to next Select ROW SPACING button to enter distance between rows Example You have a 9996 cotton picker which is setup to pick 6 rows of 30 in cotton To setup up the right spacing in the Display for area to be calculated properly you will need to enter the following e Enter 6 for the number of rows e Next enter 30 in for each selected row spacing e To enter row spacing you will need to toggle between selected rows Left of first Row should a row spacing of 15 in Between first and second row should a row spacing of 30 in Between second and third row should a row spacing of 30 in Continued on next page PC8135 UN 12MAR04 spacing of 30 in Between fourth and fifth row should a row spacing of 30 in Between fifth and sixth row should a row spacing of 30 in Right of last row should a row spacing of 15 in e Total width should now show 15 ft NOTE Picker setup for skip row cotton will vary from above example 4 Verify TOTAL WIDTH is shown correctly after entering all row spacings 5 To make a row inactive select ROW SELECT button until number of desired row appears boxed in Select ROWS ACTIVE button to toggle selected row between ON OFF When a row is inact
248. g cut width is no longer available to a full cut and G increase the crop width This adjustment allows on the Run Page of Harvest Monitor using for the correct number of acres to be calculated based on the Original GreenStar monitor CZ76372 0000183 19 24SEP10 3 3 65 36 062111 PN 197 Documentation PC8663 UN O5AUG05 Quick Setup for Combines Harvest Monitor HMON stand alone is not available on the GS3 you will have to run documentation When you install your GS3 on a combine you have to set Menu button up Client Farm Field and Task CFFT in Resources A P9128685 UN 14001 10 Conditions and then Crop and Variety in Documentation The corresponding moisture curve and the header type in HMON will be selected automatically If these are not selected in GS3 Pro HMON won t select a moisture curve and will show Corn Head as default header type on every start up Please use the following guidelines to set up your HMON GS3 for harvesting HMON on GS3 will be E EEN displayed in Original GreenStar Monitor GREENSTAR 3 PRO button NOTE Harvest Monitor is in the CommandCenter on 70 Series Combines Select MENU gt gt GS3 PRO gt gt RESOURCES amp CONDITIONS Setup Client Farm Field and Task CFFT Documentation Off Task PC13227 UN 30MAR11 Resources Conditions Page Continued on next page CZ76372 00002BC 19 30MAR11 1 12 65 37 nen Document
249. g the 1 4 operation turn on times e F Master Turn Off Time sec Indicates the turn off time which is the largest among the 1 4 operation turn off times e G Master Swath Control Enabled Indicates a status of the Master Swath Control checkbox Defining field center System is defining center point Yes Enabled No defined field boundary or previous coverage No Disabled Loading boundaries System is loading field e H No of Boundaries Indicates the number of boundaries Operating System is being operated Suspended No GPS System does not have GPS signal e C License Indicates if there is an active Swath Control license on the display boundaries usable by Swath Control for the current field e 1 Distance from Reference Point ft Indicates the distance the machine is from field reference e J Memory Usage Indicates the of memory used Continued on next page BA31779 0000170 19 28APR11 1 2 75 13 PN 254 Swath Control GreenStar Diagnostic Readings Read the latest Operator Manual prior to operation To obtain a copy see your dealer or visit wanav StellarSupport com View Swath Control Oz wv Product Application Operation Swath Control Capable Swath Control Enabled peration Turn On Time sec O Hine Turn Off Time sec Primary Swath Controller no of Sections Q section Control Command 6666 Section Comman
250. g third party controllers or a GPS receiver to the GS3 display This kit comes with Instructions Null Modem Gender Changer and Harness The harness is approximately 1829 mm 6 ft long and consists of a DB9 connector at one end and 5 wires with female AMP pins attached at the other These AMP pins will be inserted into the square 26 pin connector that attaches to the back of GS3 displays from harnesses PF80687 and PF80688 If both a 3rd party controller and receiver will be connected to the GS3 simultaneously two PF90363 kits may be required The Original GreenStar Field Doc Connect harness is only compatible with GS3 through the harness When using the original FDConnect harness you must choose Com port 1 in documentation setup Documentation with third party controllers The list of GS3 supported controllers are the same as with Original GreenStar Display and is available at your local John Deere dealer Two serial ports are available in the GS3 display Port 1 and Port 2 Connect DB9 connector to controller Gender Changer and Null Modem are required when connecting to Rawson and New Leader controllers Properly configure the controller to talk to GS3 Raven Controller under the data menu key verify that bAUD 9600 triG 1 Unit sec dLOG ON Rawson or New Leader Controller verify that the settings under the Controller button of the GS3 display match the information on the controller i e Mid Point on the GS3 D
251. h Info Icon PC8668 UN O5AUG05 MENU button DIAGNOSTIC ADDRESSES button CZ76372 00002F0 19 28APR11 5 8 Trouble Codes PC8663 UN O5AUG05 Select TROUBLE CODES button a list of controllers will appear and controllers with diagnostic codes are indicated MENU button PC12868 UN 16SEP10 Individual controllers can be accessed by navigating with rotary thumb wheel and selected by selecting ENTER button to view codes for that controller Message Center Codes can also be displayed for all controllers by selecting SHOW ALL button with rotary thumb wheel and selecting MESSAGE CENTER button With Info Icon ENTER button Codes can be relayed to a John Deere PC8669 UN 05AUGOS dealer to assist in diagnosing machine problems TROUBLE CODES button Continued on next page CZ76372 00002F0 19 28APR11 6 8 130 3 SE Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Device Info and Bus Status PCB OS UNE U9AUGOS When DEVICE INFO button is selected controllers communicating on CANBUS communication system will be indicated Message counts indicate quantity of communications from controller When BUS STATUS GE EE MENU button button is selected status of various communication networks will be indicated Message Center MESSAGE CENTER button With Info Icon PC8670 UN 05AUG05 Electronic CONTROL UNIT INFORMATION button PC8671 UN 05AUG05 BUS INFORMATION button CZ76372 00002
252. h multiple ranks Set swath settings for minimize Skip 100 overlap Swath Control maps to the rear rank on the tool so the Turn on time must be increased to account for rank spacing See figure at the end of this section A y The goal is to compensate for Rank Delay spacing by entering ranked turn on for the Turn on setting Turn on Rank Delay Ranked Turn On Maintain a constant turn around speed to keep the Turn On time accurate Examine and adjust the settings before planting NOTE Ranked Delay is a time not a distance and is affected by speed Sprayers At 24 km h 16 mph in a self propelled sprayer if the average physical reaction time of the system turn off command at the multifunction control handle the boom valve reacts and turns off liquid flows out of the boom freely until the check valve pressure is met is 2 5 seconds The liquid continues to fall to the crop canopy past the 2 5 seconds so the physical overall operational reaction time could be approximately 3 0 seconds in total To determine the Turn on time for a sprayer press the master on switch and measure the amount of time until you start to see product hit the crop To determine your Turn off time shut the master off switch and measure the amount of time until you see product stop flowing As a rule of thumb it takes a liquid handling system longer to react when turning on than when turning off due to liquid pressure differentials
253. h protects it from being lost If the vehicle is running during setup and programming turn off the vehicle with key in the OFF position and wait 30 seconds before restarting All data is saved to the internal memory preventing it from being lost DO NOT turn the key to the start position directly from the accessory position The reduction in voltage during the starting phase could result in a loss of all setup data The documentation screen allows the setup of operations and specific details that are associated with those operations Select RESOURCE CONDITIONS softkey Select or Enter Client Farm Field and Task Select EQUIPMENT softkey Setup recording source and implement width Select DOCUMENTATION softkey Choose the type of operation and the details of each operation oa FON The name of the operation appears on the documentation tabs PC8663 UN O5AUG05 PC12685 UN 14JUL10 MENU button PC8676 UN O5AUG05 RESOURCES CONDITIONS softkey PC8677 UN O5AUG05 PC8678 UN O5AUG05 Continued on next page GREENSTAR 3 PRO button EQUIPMENT softkey DOCUMENTATION softkey CZ76372 0000328 19 14JUN11 1 2 65 2 062111 PN 163 Documentation Client Farm Field and Task Setup NOTE See GreenStar General setup RE SOURCES CONDITIONS softkey for more informa tion on setting up Client Farm Field and Task If Client Farm Field or Task are n
254. he RESOURCES softkey PC8676 UN O5AUG05 PC8677 UN O05AUG05 PC8872 UN 17NOV05 4 Select manufacturer model and Comm Port RESOURCES softkey EQUIPMENT button PC8649 UN 01NOV05 ENTER button Press the EQUIPMENT button Press the COM PORT button Communication Status will show active when data is being sent on selected Communication Port and inactive when controller is disconnected or not communicating Press NEXT button If using a Rawson or New Leader Controller operator must also enter Mid point and Step Size Press ENTER button to finish CZ76372 00002B5 19 30MAR11 1 1 65 66 062111 PN 227 Documentation Simultaneous Documentation Prescriptions with John Deere and 3rd Party Controllers NOTE 3rd Party controllers are controllers using RS232 connection Field Doc Connect and ISOBUS compliant controllers supporting Task Controller functionality The GS3 display can simultaneously run documentation prescriptions for John Deere and 3rd Party controllers An example of this is the display recording seed and fertilizer rates from an air cart while also recording anhydrous ammonia rates from a 3rd Party controller Set up the Air Cart or Planter according to instructions in the GS3 operator s manual Under EQUIPMENT softkey MACHINE tab choose the COM Port button to set up the 3rd Party controller Refer to Field Doc Connect list for approved con
255. he Profile 2011 5 3 Planter 12 row He needs to enter the Machine and Implement settings for his planter because they were not entered previously into that Profile He then selects the Guidance line Planter N S 2011 and any other necessary setup information Question At this point are any of the guidance lines that Operator 2 created previously still on his display Answer No those lines were overwritten when he Imported the Profile from Operator 1 but they are saved on the USB drive in Profile 2011 5 3 Planter 24 row Two days later Operator 2 wants to save a backup of the data on his display He Exports data to the same USB giving the Profile a different name that he can remember 2011 5 5 Planter 24 row to clearly indicate where the data is from and ensure that no data is overwritten CZ76372 00002DD 19 19APR11 1 1 120 4 062111 PN 312 Data Management Example 4 Importing Global Prescriptions and Shapefiles A farmer is using a GS3 2630 display for planting He has 3 different crop consultants bringing him prescription Shapefiles at different dates throughout planting season Below is one method to properly manage the data NOTE The Import Global Prescriptions and Shapefile Data option only imports Global and Shapefile prescriptions It deletes all Global and Shapefile prescriptions that are already on the display but it does NOT overwrite any other data 1 The farmer leaves a
256. he desired button The currently selected Operation button will be highlighted Along with the Operation button the implement sections for the current operation will be noted with a triangle G in the Section Status bar ctual SZ If the legend F has been selected to display rates the g legend will be changed to a button Select it to change the Sg 1 high and low values for the legend range A Summary Tab E Operation Selection S B View by Operation Tab buttons C Rates and Sections Tab F Rate Legend o o enee ek by O tion tab D Settings Tab G Section Status bar TE UP eran ta CZ76372 00002C8 19 14APR11 1 1 Rates and Sections The Rates and Sections tab displays each operation with the same name E that is displayed on the Documentation tabs Along with the operation name Actual and Target rates F and then the operation Sections G are shown A Summary Tab E Operation Name Operation 2 Ac wget B View by Operation Tab F Actual and Target Rates fertilizer1 C Rates and Sections Tab G Operation Sections Operation 3 woe 3 Op ug get N e 100 amp 100 S 2 Rate and Sections tab CZ76372 00002C9 19 28APR11 1 1 75 5 062111 PN 246 Swath Control Settings Swath Control Settings allow the operator to fine tune the settings to optimize Swath Control performance Enable Disable Enable Swath Control by placing a check in the Swath Control Ma
257. hey will select River Farm gt East Field from the RESOURCES tab and select PASS 1 from the CURRENT CIRCLE drop down box and the Circle Center information that was setup during planting will be recalled Repeat the same steps for subsequent return trips to that field Operating Circle Track When operating Circle Track it is not necessary to drive tracks in a specific order Depending on your zoom level all tracks that can be displayed will show up on the screen with the closest Track designated by a thicker line The track number is displayed below the path accuracy indicator and is automatically updated by system as a new track is approached Track number changes when machine is half way between two tracks Off Track error distance is shown in the path accuracy indicator This number shows how far from closest track machine is Error number will count up until machine reaches point halfway between two tracks After reaching mid point error number will count down as machine approaches next track Distance to end of pass utilizing Turn Predictor is shown in the top right portion of the guidance view Distance will count down to predicted turn and tones will sound when machine is 10 seconds from intersecting turn point and again when predicted turn point has been reached NOTE Track spacing may require adjustment due to operator and or GPS error EXAMPLE An operator may want to enter a slightly smaller implement width to account for
258. ich machine is being used For instance if there are two 8430 s in your operation the machine names may be John and Deere or 8430 1 and 8430 2 or simply 1 and 2 However settings pertaining to the tractor such as turning radius turn sensitivity dimensions etc are stored to the name CZ76372 000013B 19 14JUN11 2 4 45 6 062111 PN 43 GreenStar General NOTE Machine Turn Radius and Turning Sensitivity are for use with iTEC Pro only Machine Turn Radius How sharp the machine can turn without an implement attached and without applying brake pressure The turn radius is half the diameter as measured at the center of the rear axle of a row crop tractor and the pivot point on tracks and 4WD tractors Example 8030 wheel tractors have a minimum turn radius of 6 1 6 7 m 20 22 ft Choose a number to start with and change as needed for accuracy Turning Sensitivity AutoTrac gain setting when the vehicle is in an automated turn This is adjustable by the operator to improve performance default 70 Verify proper dimensions correspond to the Machine selected NOTE Not all recording sources are available for all machines R Machine Turn Radius PC9890 UN 05FEB07 Machine Turn Radius CZ76372 000013B 19 14JUN11 3 4 Machine Offsets Press CHANGE OFFSETS button on Machine Setup screen Offsets are used to eliminate skips or overlaps due
259. ied or not Delete Data Set 1 Select Type A 2 Choose 3 Press Accept button Product Details Entry Genetically Modified A A type v Cancel Variety 1 7N Name v gt Accept ermination Rate enetically Modified Priming Information housand Corn Weight PC12873 UN 22SEP10 PC12872 UN 22SEP10 CZ76372 0000178 19 22SEP10 3 3 65 17 062111 PN 178 Documentation Using Documentation with a Dry Si Box SpreadStar MENU button gt gt GREENSTAR 3 PRO button gt gt DOCUMENTATION softkey EU DUNSA PC12685 UN 14JUL10 This screen allows operator to setup and change product application when GS3 system is connected to a dry box Client Farm Field and Task information must be setup to run documentation for the dry box GreenStar GREENSTAR 3 PRO button PC8678 UN 05AUG05 DOCUMENTATION softkey Continued on next page CZ76372 0000292 19 30MAR11 1 3 062111 65 18 PN 179 Documentation Product Application tabs are automatically generated when GS3 system is hooked up to dry box controllers The first Product Application tab A is used to set up Bin 1 The second Product Application tab B is used to set up Bin 2 If the machine is equipped with only one bin the second tab will not show up Button C allows the operator to document additional product Button D selects between a si
260. ield Units Area Units g Hectares ACRE RUN Pages Printer Installed NO Yes PC12877 UN 24SEP10 Setup Harvest Monitor Page 2 CZ76372 000017E 19 24SEP10 4 5 65 32 062111 PN 193 Documentation Yield Units DOEN Sat viei units ISS EI NOTE See Standard Weights Chart section for standard weights of corps 34 BUSHELS To select units of measure for yield readings select se YIELD UNITS button and SETUP YIELD UNITS PAGE Barrels 2 screen will appear Select desired unit Tele Sacks DES Hundred Wt H PL race keng cl A m Kilograms PC12878 UN 24SEP10 Harvest Mon Yield Units CZ76372 000017E 19 24SEP10 5 5 65 33 PN 194 Documentation Harvest Machine Setup Defining Machine Select Main Menu gt GreenStar 3 gt EQUIPMENT softkey gt MACHINE tab gt Machine list box NOTE Select COMBINE COTTON PICKER or COTTON STRIPPER if not detected automatically Define make and model in list boxes below machine Not required Refer to Machine And Implement Setup section for information on machine offsets Defining Header Width and Header Offset Select HEADER tab gt HEADER list box NOTE Select Header Type if not detected automatically Enter header make and model Not required Header Width is set up in Harvest Monitor See Section on Harvest Monitor Setup or the 70 Series combine Operator Manual for procedures Verify tha
261. ield of view Keep the camera properly serviced e Keep the camera lens clean The video function allows the operator to view video from one camera at a time to observe areas around the machine that are difficult to see CZ76372 00002D4 19 15APR11 1 1 Installing Video e Pin 14 Video 1 Ground e Pin 20 Video 2 Signal The Ee supports 3rd party cameras with the following pin 21 Video 2 GC signal formats e Pin 22 Video 3 Signal e NTSC North America e Pin 11 Video 3 Ground e Pal Europe NOTE These instructions do NOT cover camera and An adapter harness is available from several camera harness installation Please read the instructions suppliers that connects to the 26 pin video connector on that come with your camera the back of the display 8 7 NOTE A quality ground is essential to picture clarity The video pins on the 26 pin video connector V2 are e Pin 8 Video 1 Signal CZ76372 0000280 19 19APR11 1 1 Video Settings PC12724 UN 16AUG10 Select MENU gt VIDEO gt SETTINGS Video Menu Button Continued on next page CZ76372 00002D7 19 15APR11 1 3 115 1 062111 PN 306 Video Naming input Naming Each of the three camera inputs can be given a unique name so the operator can easily recognize each video care source Select the text box corresponding with the video d schon input and enter the name Each text box is limited to 7 characters T Z be S Naming Setti
262. ight path select P R T sg vn the pause button 2 4 Recording indicator will turn black Paused is E displayed below the button Drive the straight path When you are at the point where the straight path should end select the pause button again and curve track will start recording again Straight Path between Two Curves 7 The straight path B will be created when the recording is un paused A Recording PAUSED C Recording UN PAUSED B Bridge segment is generated to connect points PC9298 UN 29JUL06 ERD Continued on next page CZ76372 00001A4 19 040CT10 19 20 50 38 062111 PN 105 Guidance Guiding around Obstacles in Field Recording PAUSED If recording is PAUSED when the obstacle is approached and steered around and then recording is UN PAUSED once the obstacle has been navigated around a straight line segment will be connected between the points where curve track recording was PAUSED and where it was UN PAUSED The next pass will be propagated without a deviation or a gap around the obstacle as occurs when recording is left on or turned off when going around an obstacle Additionally if the vehicle is navigating on the curve path when curve track is PAUSED the curve path will e Remain displayed on the screen to aid in getting lined up once you drive around the obstacle If the path disappears from the display due to exceeding the 40 track spacing rule manually line the vehicle
263. ignment Setup COM Port GreenStar Equipment a Mapping Offsets im 0 0 in Recording Source EE ies Radius Sensitivity Documentation and Coverage To access the COM port setup page select MENU button gt GREENSTAR 3 PRO button gt EQUIPMENT softkey H gt MACHINE tab A Select the desired Machine Type Model Name and Connection Type then press COM port button B COM port settings page appears see COM Port Settings A Machine Tab B COM Port Button ZX1043696 UN 03DEC09 CZ76372 0000145 19 25AUG10 1 1 90 2 062111 PN 284 COM Port Assignment Com Port Settings Use this screen to select an existing or create a profile Two profiles can be stored per specific machine that is Com Port Settings Combine Tractor Forage Harvester Sprayer and more When a machine is selected in the Machine lmplement Setup tab GreenStar 3 Pro Equipment screen the Ss Yara N Ge associated profile is automatically recalled and loaded Gi dra IMPORTANT Connect the component to the GS3 display before setting up a profile Once setup Com Forn ft is finished the system attempts to connect to the relevant component If component is not Port T connected an error message Communication Se Error is then displayed Controller IN Sensing LH Ee To create a profile A for a specific machine proceed as Protocol v follows 1 Select NEW in the
264. ilable on www stellarSuport com Familiarize yourself with the GS3 by utilizing the online GS3 simulator Read the Swath Control section of the GS3 Basics Operators Manual Read the GreenStar Rate Controller Operators Manual Read the Swath Control Settings Quick Sheet Make sure all software is updated to most recent versions GS3 version 2 01222 or higher GreenStar Rate Controller version 2 01k or higher Apex 2 0 Production version or higher Record exterior and interior boundaries if needed Apex Setup Input setup data into Apex new varieties crops farm names etc Save setup data to your USB drive Insert USB drive into GS3 import setup data and verify import was successful Day of Planting GreenStar Rate Controller setup Machine setup Section setup Swath Control setup Clear any preexisting coverage maps for field if needed Define minimize skips minimize overlap or percent overlap for exterior interior and coverage areas Setturn on off times GS3 Documentation setup Resources Conditions clent farm field and task Equipment machine and offsets Operation seed type brand variety rate etc Prescriptions choose prescription if needed Verify sections Verify offsets Enable Swath Control place check mark in box Enable all sections through the GS3 or turn on section switches using the s
265. in order to operate AB Curve Guidance PC12590 UN 29APR10 Continued on next page CZ76372 00001A5 19 010CT10 3 13 50 42 062111 PN 109 Guidance Creating an AB Curve Guidance Settings Implement Guidance Mode General Settings Ce Curve Track Settings PC12591 UN 29APR10 GreenStar 3 Pro Guidance A View B Guidance Settings C ShiftTrack Settings D Tracking Mode Creating AB Curves NOTE Track 0 and AB Curve are two terms used interchangeably we will use term Track 0 Track 0 is the reference point from which subsequent curve passes in the field are based Use the following procedure to setup Track 0 and Track Spacing NOTE Multiple AB Curves may be recorded per field They will need to be named and recorded separately 1 Guidance View tab gt gt Set AB Curve button lower left corner Press NEW button below the Current AB Curve drop down box Enter a name for Track 0 using the alpha numeric keypad Press Enter button 5 5 Set Track Spacing Continued on next page E Implement Guidance Mode F General Settings button G Curve Track Settings button a Press the track spacing entry box b Enter implement width c Enter desired track spacing NOTE A higher degree of precision can be achieved for track spacing when track spacing is entered in by rows instead of feet More decimal places are used in the track spacing calculation when entered
266. ine A Desired Track Broken B Actual Track Solid Line Line Continued on next page Line Sensitivities Too Low Line Sensitivities Too High PC8999 UN 08MAR06 D CZ76372 00001A8 19 010CT10 14 25 PC8794 UN 08MARO6 PC8795 UN O08MAR06 50 62 062111 PN 129 Guidance Heading Error Meter The Heading Error Meter is designed to aid in tuning Advanced AutoTrac Settings Ideally heading error should be within than 1 degree The arched bar graph value will live update with minimum and maximum heading error changes over the last 10 seconds The Heading Error Meter value indicator will be red when heading error is greater than 0 5 degrees or less than 0 5 degrees The indicator will be green if the heading error is greater than 0 5 degrees and less than 0 5 degrees NOTE Heading Error Meter is also available when using AutoTrac Universal Continued on next page Advanced AutoTrac Settings Lateral and Heading Error Heading Error Meter PC12225 UN 01SEP09 CZ76372 00001A8 19 010CT10 15 25 50 63 062111 PN 130 Guidance Advanced AutoTrac Screens Guidance Settings Implement Guidance Mode General Settings z9 iGuide Settings change AutoTrac Controller H Oo x a E amp 2 T 3 a 5 a A View C Shift Track Settings E Implement Guidance Mode G iGuide Settings Button B Guidance Setti
267. information in the internal memory of the display with the setup information in the Data Profile that is selected from the USB drive Only Prescription files can be imported individually to the display See the Data Type Details table to understand what data will be overwritten during Import IMPORTANT Large data sets may take several minutes to transfer Power loss or removing the USB drive during data transfer may cause data loss 1 Turn off all types of Recording and stop the vehicle 2 Insert USB drive 3 A Data Transfer page will appear within about 10 seconds 4 Select Import Data Select the Profile Name on the USB drive to be imported 6 Select Begin Transfer 7 When the data transfer is finished a Data Transfer is Complete message will appear Import Data Setup Information and Maps in the internal memory will be replaced by the selected Profile Documentation Data included in the internal memory will have new files added from the selected Profile not overwritten Do you want to proceed PC13257 UN 19APR11 Import Data Warning CZ76372 000028A 19 19APR11 1 1 120 2 062111 PN 310 Data Management Importing Global or Shapefile Prescriptions On a Desktop Computer 2 Insert a USB drive e Global Prescriptions GRx files a Create a folder named GRx in the root of the USB 4 drive b Copy the GRx files into this folder e Shapefile Prescriptions a Crea
268. ing calculation when 6 Select method to define Track 0 from METHOD entered in by rows versus the three decimal drop down box places allowed when entered by feet Select ft rows button to change to rows eA B Continued on next page CZ76372 00001A3 19 010CT10 3 10 50 20 062111 PN 87 Guidance e Set track spacing from EQUIPMENT softkey gt gt IMPLEMENT 1 tab gt gt See EQUIPMENT softkey section 8 Select one of the following methods from the METHOD drop down box to create the A B line A B e A Heading e Auto B e Lat Lon e Lan on Heading CZ76372 00001A3 19 010CT10 4 10 A B 1 Drive to desired location in the field 2 Press SET A button 3 Drive vehicle to desired point B NOTE It is required to drive a longer distance than 3 m 10 ft to set point B 4 Press SET B button 5 Press ENTER button A Current Track 0 E Track Spacing B Method F Set A C New G Set B D Remove H Set B Later Set Track 0 GERS Point A Lat Point A Lon E v 0 0000 41 48546604 30 49276624 Track Spacing m E Set Track 0 Continued on next page PC12226 UN 04SEP09 CZ76372 00001A3 19 010CT10 5 10 50 21 062111 PN 88 Guidance Set B Later Current TrackO GERS Heading Point A Lat Point A Lon Method 0 0000 41 48546604 30 49276624 Track Spacing ft Set Track 0 A Current Track 0 E
269. ing is found in the display settings on the armrest display NOTE The corner post display must always have Implement Bus communication turned ON for GreenStar applications to work properly OQU06050 0001290 19 20JUL10 1 1 View Multiple Display Settings 1 Menu 2 Display 3 Display Diagnostics softkey 4 Multiple Displays tab View the Multiple Displays setting page to determine current display mode and the on off status for GreenStar Apps Original GreenStar Monitor and Implement Bus VT Multiple Displays Display Mode Single GreenStar On Original GreenStar Monitor On Implement Bus On Function Instance GreenStar Original GreenStar Monitor Implement Bus 2 2 2 Vehicle Bus Multiple Display Settings PC12928 UN 28SEP10 CZ76372 0000175 19 28SEP10 1 1 20 2 062111 PN 20 Managing User Access Managing User Access Theory of Operation ost Display Operation ees ee is Ges SEN G The GS3 2630 display maybe installed on the corner a MOST any IUNGUONLON INE QISp Ay UNCMONS Canine post of a John Deere vehicle that also has a display on aN the Se Se the e the armrest running Access Manager In this case the an i EE Ze CHE anges dee unei GC Access Manager settings and Mode are NOT transferred StS ones TOL pe aon NOUS a pase wold e automatically between the displays and must be set on to enter Owner Mode and access those functions The current pass
270. ion Check assignment on mapping screen The related assignment B is displayed Press key E to reach the Auxiliary Controls page or enter key F to return to the previous screen IMPORTANT It is recommended to press key E to reach the Auxiliary Controls page and check the auxiliary input assignment NOTE The rejected assignment is indicated by the missing status indicator while the input device and input are displayed ps XXXX Auxiliary Controls Assignment Error ai Assignment not accepted by auxiliary function Check assignment on Auxiliary Controls page SS me IL amp LP 8 19am Auxiliary Assignment Negative Response ZX1042165 UN 04DEC08 A Assignment Error B Assignment E Auxiliary Controls Page Access Key F Enter Key OUCC002 00029ED 19 04DEC08 3 4 When the selected auxiliary input does not match the implement functions while the learn mode is active thus the assignment was not successful the error message A appears The requested auxiliary input does not meet the implement function requirements The assignment cannot be made Press enter key F to reach the Auxiliary Controls page and check the auxiliary input assignment A Assignment Error F Enter Key A XXXX Auxiliary Controis Assignment Error Ai The requested auxiliary inpul does not meet the implemem function requirements The assignment cannot be made 2ZX1042529 UN 04DEC08 Auxiliary As
271. ion procedures The following procedures should be performed at maximum ground speed which operator expects to run in this crop and condition and in an area that is reasonably level and of uniform yield Select CALIBRATION MODE button to select desired calibration Select START STOP button Display will change to YIELD CALIBRATION IS RUNNING Begin harvesting Weight displayed in HARVESTED WEIGHT cell should increase while harvesting p Ve gt Harvest known amount of grain i e grain tank full truck load wagon load etc a When known load is completed stop machine and allow all harvested grain to enter grain tank 6 SE STOP button to stop calibration Display will ge to YIELD CALIBRATION IS STORP El 19 24SEP10 1 4 65 46 062111 PN 207 Documentation IMPORTANT Be sure to empty grain tank IMPORTANT Standard calibration procedure will not completely and be certain all grain is on change data already saved After changes are one vehicle wagon or truck made all harvest information collected from that point on will reflect changes 7 Have known amount of grain weighed While waiting for scale ticket to return you may continue by selecting NOTE If scale ticket weight is more than 50 higher RUN button or lower than displayed weight system will 8 When scale ticket returns to combine go to Yield NOT allow entry of scale weight Calibration Page 11 Select SCALE WE
272. ion prompts to obtain the 26 digit code On the display go to MENU gt GREENSTAR 3 PRO button gt GREENSTAR 3 PRO button gt ACTIVATIONS tab Input the activation code Display shows as Activated in the Pro Module area The Display Software Activation Process is completed Keep in mind if you have purchased SF2 level AutoTrac you are required to also activate the StarFire receiver to PC8663 UN O5AUG05 MENU button PC12685 UN 14JUL10 GREENSTAR 3 PRO button PC12686 UN 14JUL10 GREENSTAR 3 PRO button an SF2 level The StarFire is a separate 24 digit activation for SF2 and RTK CZ76372 000029A 19 28APR11 1 1 35 1 062111 PN 24 Display Setup Managing Activations The buttons and functions corresponding to each GreenStar Pro Module activation may be shown or hidden by checking the ON OFF checkbox for each activation The box must be checked to use the corresponding Pro Module By turning OFF activations that are not being used the corresponding buttons and functions will be hidden making the display simpler to navigate Demo Activations are available to try out each Pro Module for 15 hours of use The AutoTrac Demo is turned on by default To try another Demo such as Swath Control turn it on and the Swath Control buttons and functions will show up on the display if an implement controller capable of that Pro Module is connected Go to GreenStar Main gt gt Setti
273. is detected e Track has been set e Tracking mode selected e SSU is in normal operating mode e TCM is installed and turned ON e Clutch switch A is engaged e AutoTrac Row Guidance button B is ON Activating System TE While AutoTrac is active operator is responsible for steering at end of path and collision avoidance After system has been ENABLED operator must manually change system to ACTIVE status when steering assistance is desired Press resume switch A on multi function handle to activate AutoTrac This will initiate assisted steering In order to activate system following criteria must be met e Road Transport Switch is in field position e Row Track button needs to be turned ON e Main clutch is switched ON e Header is engaged e Forward vehicle speed is greater than 0 5 km h 0 3 mph or reverse vehicle speed is less than 10 km h 6 0 mph e Forward vehicle speed is less than 22 km h 13 2 mph e Vehicle heading is within 80 degrees of desired track if speed is less than 10 km h e Vehicle heading is within 45 degrees of desired track if speed is higher than 10 km h e Off track error is within 40 of track spacing e Operator is seated e TCM is installed and turned ON Deactivating System Acie Always turn off Deactivate AutoTrac system before entering a roadway Do not attempt to turn on Activate AutoTrac system while transporting on a roadway AutoTrac system can be made
274. is generated based on user s turn radius Continued on next page CZ76372 00001A5 19 010CT10 11 13 50 46 062111 PN 113 Guidance Remove AB Curve Track Data GUIDANCE VIEW tab gt gt SET AB CURVE button To remove curve track data 1 Select the AB Curve name that is to be deleted from the Current AB Curve drop down box 2 Press the remove button 3 Confirm the removal of the AB Curve A Current AB Curve E Record Stop Button B New Button F Pause Button C Remove Button G End Track Later Button D Track Spacing Button Set AB Curve Current AB Curve 2 NumberotSegments 0 Point A Lat 0 00000000 Point A Lon 0 00000000 0 eer Recording Cancel Cent Set AB Curve PC12630 UN 02JUN10 CZ76372 00001A5 19 010CT10 12 13 Guiding around Obstacles in a Field As the operator manually drives around the obstacle the AB curve path will remain on the screen The original path will not be altered Original Path will not be Altered PC9030B UN 240CT06 CZ76372 00001A5 19 010CT10 13 13 50 47 062111 PN 114 Guidance Circle Track Mode Track 0 Setup Guidance Settings Tracking Mode I General Settings PC12593 UN 29APR10 GreenStar 3 Pro Guidance A View C ShiftTrack Settings E General Settings B Guidance Settings D Tracking Mode NOTE Circle Track Mode is available in Parallel GUIDANCE SET
275. isplay should be the same value as on the Rawson or New Leader controller GS3 will control only one channel of Rawson controller for use with prescriptions NOTE Set Rawson or New Leader controller to GPS Mode under Mode Key to enable serial port communication with controller Connecting a third party receiver AutoTrac requires CAN GPS messages from an original StarFire receiver or StarFire iTC receiver Non John Deere GPS receivers that output correct NMEA 0183 standard messages can be used for documentation and manual guidance with a GreenStar application It is critical that receiver is setup to output the following messages e GGA e GSA e RMC setup at 19200 baud This is fixed and Non adjustable e Data bits 8 e Parity none e Stop bits 1 e Flow Control none e 1 or 5 Hz output rate Recommend operation at 5 Hz Guidance requires 5 Hz Without these messages receiver will not function with GreenStar application From the receiver manufacturer s wiring diagram determine which wires from the receiver are the signal transmit and signal ground Verify that Receiver Transmit connects to Pin 3 of the DB9 connector and receiver ground connects to pin 5 of the DB9 Look at the front face of the connector to see the pinout number designation Pinout number are located on the back side of the connector where the wires are inserted To Setup RS232 Serial Port 1 on a GS3 Display RS232 Wire Display
276. it and fire extinguisher handy Keep emergency numbers for doctors ambulance service hospital and fire department near your telephone TS291 UN 23AUG88 DX FIRE2 19 03MAR93 1 1 05 2 062111 PN 8 Safety Practice Safe Maintenance Understand service procedure before doing work Keep area clean and dry Never lubricate service or adjust machine while it is moving Keep hands feet and clothing from power driven parts Disengage all power and operate controls to relieve pressure Lower equipment to the ground Stop the engine Remove the key Allow machine to cool Securely support any machine elements that must be raised for service work Keep all parts in good condition and properly installed Fix damage immediately Replace worn or broken parts Remove any buildup of grease oil or debris On self propelled equipment disconnect battery ground cable before making adjustments on electrical systems or welding on machine On towed implements disconnect wiring harnesses from tractor before servicing electrical system components or welding on machine TS218 UN 23AUG88 DX SERV 19 17FEB99 1 1 Operate Guidance Systems Safely Do not use AutoTrac system on roadways e Take control of steering wheel when necessary to avoid field hazards bystanders equipment or other e Always turn off Deactivate and Disable AutoTrac obstacles y qP system before entering a roadway
277. ity Heading parameter and increase reduce the Heading Lead in the same manner as the previous step 4 If none of the previous steps were effective reset the Heading Lead and increase reduce the Steering Response Rate in a similar fashion to the previous steps Combining Settings lf the above procedure does not give satisfactory performance and once you have become more comfortable with how the parameters change AutoTrac performance as detailed in the previous step try different combinations of parameters while AutoTrac is active The following chart should be used as a reference and contains suggested values based on various types of conditions please note that values may need to be adjusted beyond these recommendations to achieve satisfactory performance Continued on next page To return all settings to their default values use the Return To Defaults button provided at the bottom of the Advanced Settings screen Most Common Conditions 1 Excessive Wheel Motion Adjust Steering Response Rate first before making any other adjustments Turn down this parameter until an acceptable amount of wheel motion exists Although it may be possible for this parameter to be changed independently you may need to increase Line Sensitivity Heading and or Line Sensitivity Tracking lateral gains to compensate for the wheel motion decrease Keep in mind that forcing this value too low may compromise AutoTrac accuracy because this re
278. ive IMPORTANT USB drive should have at least 1GB of free memory Large data sets may take several minutes to transfer Power loss or removing the USB drive during data transfer may cause data loss 3 A Data Transfer page will appear within about 10 seconds 4 Select Export Data Select or create a Profile Name where the data will be stored on the USB drive NOTE Do not use of the following characters lt gt when creating a Profile name It will cause the profile to fail to load to a display or Apex 6 Select Begin Transfer 7 When the data transfer is finished a Data Transfer is Complete message will appear IMPORTANT Exporting to an existing Profile will overwrite all setup information and data in that Profile except for Documentation files used by desktop software Export Data Select the Profile name then press Begin Transfer Export Profile Name Note Data remains on the display PC13256 UN 19APR11 Export takes less time when exporting repeatedly to the same Profile because the Documentation files e g As applied and Yield map files that are already in the Profile on the USB are not exported again See the Data Type Details table to understand what data will be overwritten during Export and review the examples below Begin Transfer Export Data CZ76372 0000289 19 19APR11 1 Importing Data to the Display Import Data will replace the setup
279. ive its number will appear on display with a slash through it CZ76372 0000181 19 24SEP10 4 5 65 54 062111 PN 215 Documentation 6 Select MACHINE MODEL button to toggle to proper DOE SETUP Recording ON OFF machine model There may be only one machine model available depending on software version DIER Material Recording ele Screen SETUP RECORDING ON OFF HEADER Press SETUP gt gt HARVEST MONITOR gt gt RECORDING TEN ON OFF BY Tele Combination This screen allows operator to setup recording on off using the following methods NES Manual Material Flow of Cotton H EE Co Header Raise Lower Picking Units www elslteleloiels S Combination Raise Lower Picking Units and Material p Flow Detected I d bes Manual On Off by operator from RUN page SETUP 3 Harvest Monitor s 2 Recording Source CZ76372 0000181 19 24SEP10 5 5 65 55 062111 PN 216 Documentation Harvest Monitor Cotton Calibration Calibration NOTE Always read the text to the left of the START STOP arrow This explains the current status of calibration Arrow changes back and forth between START and STOP When yield calibration is stopped START arrow is shown When yield calibration is running STOP arrow is shown STOP arrow CALIBRATION IS RUNNING Push button to STOP CALIBRATION START arrow CALIBRATION IS STOPPED Push button to START CALIBRATION Screen SETUP YIELD CAL
280. ives Air Carts must have Variable Rate Drives Application Plans must also be created with mass or weight units ex kilograms hectare or pounds acre Application plans cannot be in liquid or seed count form Multiple prescriptions can be applied simultaneously by creating an operation for each tank e Task control unit compliant implements e Sprayers and SprayStar Gen IV e 3rd Party Controllers Ensure that accurate data is recorded by setting control unit rate units equal to Application Plans 3rd Party Controllers compatible with the following list of variable rate control units Raven 440 450 460 660 SideKick GreenSeeker Rawson Accu Rate and Accu Plant New Leader Mark III and Mark IV LH Technologies e GreenStar Rate Controller NOTE 3rd Party control units are control units using RS232 connection Field Doc Connect and ISOBUS compliant control units supporting Task Controller functionality NOTE Depending on capability of control unit seed dry product and liquid can be applied NOTE It is not possible to run prescriptions of two seperate ISO implements or two Field Doc Connect implements However it is possible to run prescriptions for multiple operations performed by a single implement multiple operation implement Setup Prescriptions Client Farm Field and Task Setup NOTE See GreenStar 3 Basics and Pro General Setup RESOURCES and CONDITIONS button for more information on setting up Client Farm
281. izer soreader it spreads much farther than The physical width is smaller than the Implement the physical width of the buggy Confirm Configuration The physical width is smaller than the implement width which may not allow detection of all intersections with impassable boundaries width which may not allow detection of all intersections with impassable boundaries Confirm Configuration PC12865 UN 16SEP10 Continued on next page CF86321 000001F 19 12APR11 5 6 45 12 062111 PN 49 GreenStar General Implement 2 and Implement 3 tab GreenStar 2 Pro Equipment Implement Type Tillage implement Model Implement Name PC12842 UN 30AUG10 IMPLEMENT 2 tab A MACHINE tab B IMPLEMENT 1 tab C IMPLEMENT 2 tab D IMPLEMENT 3 tab The IMPLEMENT 2 and IMPLEMENT 3 tabs are primarily used for logging hours against the equipment For IMPLEMENT 2 tab to appear an implement type must be selected in IMPLEMENT 1 tab IMPLEMENT 2 tab allows setup of following Implement Type Used to select implement type e Implement Model Used to distinguish between different models Implement Name Used to distinguish multiple machines of the same model NOTE Implement widths or offsets cannot be defined for Implement 2 or 3 E IMPLEMENT TYPE drop down G IMPLEMENT NAME box drop down box F IMPLEMENT MODEL drop down box For IMPLEMENT 3 tab to appear implement type m
282. k This allows the operator to use more than two guidance lines in the field Operating with AutoTrac When the Swap Track Toggle button is selected and the system switches to the new guidance line AutoTrac disengages The AutoTrac Status Pie will show three pieces of the pie The operator only needs to press the resume switch to re engage AutoTrac Changing the Current Track while operating AutoTrac disengages AutoTrac when the Accept button is pressed A Swap Track Toggle button C AutoTrac Status Pie B Current Track PC13630 UN 15JUN11 Guidance View Swap Track Buttons CZ76372 000032A 19 17JUN11 4 4 50 54 062111 PN 121 Guidance AutoTrac Setup Operate Guidance Systems Safely Do not use AutoTrac system on roadways e Always turn off Deactivate and Disable AutoTrac system before entering a roadway e Do not attempt to turn on Activate AutoTrac system while transporting on a roadway The AutoTrac system is intended to aid operator in performing field operations more efficiently Operator is always responsible for machine path To prevent injury to operator and bystanders e Remain alert and pay attention to surrounding environment e Take control of steering wheel when necessary to avoid field hazards bystanders equipment or other obstacles e Stop operation if poor visibility conditions impair your ability to operate the machine or identify people or obstacles in
283. l Accuracy Vehicle Setup Implement Setup and Field Soil Conditions still affect the accuracy equation Implement Setup A common cause of unsatisfactory performance of the AutoTrac system is improper implement setup It is best to ensure AutoTrac performance of the vehicle alone is sufficient prior to attaching to an implement Once the vehicle is proven to sufficiently track up and back on the same line connect the implement to ensure overall system performance The implement must pull straight and level behind the vehicle meaning all parts Shanks planter units etc need to be spaced appropriately and should not be damaged or worn unevenly from one side to the other A good exercise is to measure from the center line of the tractor to each individual engagement point to ensure the implement is symmetrical This helps avoid uneven side to side draft on the tractor When using integral planters on flat and level ground sway blocks should be set to allow the free travel of the tractor separate from the implement approximately 3 8 5 0 cm 1 5 2 0 in of travel without allowing the lower arms of the three point to come in contact with the tires Sway blocks may need to be adjusted more tightly to accommodate side slopes and other side draft operations to achieve desirable implement performance Field Soil Conditions CZ76372 00001A7 19 010CT10 1 2 50 70 062111 PN 137 Guidance The environment in which th
284. l units are control units using RS232 connection Field Doc Connect NOTE Please visit www StellarSupport com for list of third party compatible control units Data from 3rd Party control units can be recorded directly from the following control units NOTE Go to www StellarSupport com to find the latest information about approved platforms e Rawson Accu Rate and Accu Plant e Dickey John Seed Manager e Vanguard PIC Seed Monitor e Amazone e LH Technologies System will record Actual Rate Implement Width and GPS Recording Status implement switch not required directly from Field Doc Connect control unit NOTE Rawson control units are also capable of accepting prescriptions from the GS3 display Com Port Settings Controller Manufacturer AMazone A v Model Amatron Required Baud Rate 19200 E s e J Model K Previous Page Button L Enter Button ZX1043717 UN 30DEC09 G Implement Name H Operation I Control Manufacturer In case of a 3rd Party control unit Com Port Assignment setup enter the necessary information requested by the 3 steps procedure as follows e Select NEW in the Profile A drop down box then enter the desired Profile name e Assign a Com Port B number to this Profile 1 or 2 e Select Field Doc Connect as Port Type C 1 Press Next Page button D to go to the next step or CANCEL button E to stop procedure e Select the I
285. least one of the requested assignments could not be completed It is necessary to check the Auxiliary Controls page by pressing the Mapping key G and review the assignments before Auxiliary Controls can be enabled S Ka 7 S Continued on next page CZ76372 000005D 19 09JUL10 2 5 85 3 062111 PN 266 Auxiliary Controls Auxiliary Control Not Available IMPORTANT Auxiliary Control is not available To utilize this display for the Auxiliary Control configuration set its function instance to 1 All other displays must be set to a function instance gt 1 This message occurs when the system detects that the display on which the Auxiliary Control function runs is not set as the primary Virtual Terminal Function Instance 1 Go to MENU Softkey gt gt DISPLAY Softkey gt gt DIAGNOSTIC Softkey gt gt ISOBUS Tab To assign the GS3 Display to be the primary Virtual Terminal set Function Instance C to 1 A ISOBUS Tab C Function Instance B Virtual Terminal Check Box Drop Down Menu D Restore Defaults Key Auxiliary Control is not available To utilize this display for the Auxiliary Control configuration set its function instance to 1 All other displays must be set toa function instance gt 1 Dispiay Diagnostics zs ee oe ZX1042513 UN 04DEC08 funcionmng Function instance Changing these settings may Cause devices to stop
286. lement Finally steering sensitivity will not address condition where front wheels are not able to turn tractor Always make sure front axle load with implement activated is sufficient for steering before adjusting steering sensitivity level PC8851 UN 300CT05 Figure B C Track performance is not achieved see TROUBLESHOOTING section for more detail Advanced AutoTrac Settings Tuning Recommendations NOTE AutoTrac Controller has been tuned to perform very well in most field conditions using the variety of implements encountered by AutoTrac However for those conditions outside of normal we have provided Advanced Settings to allow the operator fine tune their systems for specific field conditions and implements Problem or Situation AutoTrac performance during line acquisitions Curve Trac or in row S ing that can t be tuned out using the Steering Sensitivity adjustment Difficult ground conditions extremely soft or extremely rough require additional tuning beyond the capabilities of the standard Steering Sensitivity value Read this information in it s entirety BEFORE tuning AutoTrac Advanced Settings AutoTrac Advanced Settings software includes 6 different tunable sensitivities that allow finer adjustment of the AutoTrac system The following are details for tuning this software 1 Check amp fix other problems before you tune Perform necessary mechanical checks and calibrations through associat
287. lement the data was recorded with If a different implement width is used new data must be recorded IMPORTANT Make sure the USB drive contains the Curve Track data for this field e RESOURCES CONDITIONS softkey gt gt RESOURCES tab Select the Client Farm Field name to which the stored Curve Track data was assigned e GUIDANCE SETTINGS tab gt gt TRACKING drop down box gt gt ADAPTIVE CURVES e EQUIPMENT softkey gt gt IMPLEMENT tab gt gt enter implement width track spacing CZ76372 00001A4 19 040CT10 4 20 Smooth Tight Turns GreenStar 3 Pro GUIDANCE gt gt GUIDANCE SETTINGS tab gt gt CURVE TRACK SETTINGS CHANGE button Smooth Tight Turns When box is checked the system will automatically smooth a propagated path that was becoming tight Implement In Ground Turning Radius ft This is the value of how tight of a turn radius the implement can turn while in the ground A Curve Track Recording B Smooth Tight Turns C Implement In Ground Turn Radius D Clear Adaptive Curves Data E Repeat Mode F Accept Continued on next page Curve Track Settings Curve Track Recording Smooth Tight Turns Implement In Ground Turn Radius ft Clear Adaptive Curves Data D Data N Repeat Mode PC12588 UN 29APR10 Curve Track Settings CZ76372 00001A4 19 040CT10 5 20 50 27 062111 PN 94 Guidance Kai Kai S S Q Q o o amp amp l 2
288. ler and observe performance e While tuning adjust in increments of 10 between the range of 50 to 200 CZ76372 00001A8 19 010CT10 12 25 50 61 062111 PN 128 Guidance Step 2 Optimize Acquire Sensitivity e Tune speed by operating parallel to and 1 2 m 4 ft off of the A B Line e Activate AutoTrac Controller and observe performance e Tune Acquire Sensitivity until machine acquires the line smoothly A Desired Track Broken B Actual Track Solid Line Line PC8797 UN 21FEB06 Acquire Sensitivity Too Low PC8796 UN 21FEB06 Acquire Sensitivity Too High PC8999 UN 08MAR06 D CZ76372 00001A8 19 010CT10 13 25 Step 3 Optimize Line Sensitivity A Line Sensitivity Tracking e Tune line sensitivity tracking while operating on the A B line e If machine wanders too far from the A B line adjust line sensitivity tracking higher e If machine becomes unstable around A B line adjust line sensitivity tracking lower B Line Sensitivity Heading e Tune line sensitivity heading while operating on the A B line e If the front of the machine wanders too far from the track direction adjust line sensitivity heading higher e If machine becomes unstable adjust line sensitivity heading lower NOTE Line Sensitivities work together If both are set too high the vehicle will become unstable If both are set too low the vehicle will wander around the A B l
289. locations You 1 Go to Menu GS3 Pro Letter F GS3 Pro Main and may need to utilize a needle nosed pliers to push the select the Memory tab Select Assign Serial Port connections forward through the orange seal in the connector Select the Serial Port s 6 Once you have all 5 wires pushed up flush to the front 3 Select the option based on the device connected to of the connector face you need to lock the pins back the Serial Port s in place by pushing down on the 2 white locking tabs A Arrowtorward to complete until they are flush plete i e For additional information see the installation instruction Configure GS3 needs to be configured to recognize the that came with the RS232 adapter device connected to the Serial Port Assigned the Serial Port CZ76372 0000142 19 23AUG10 2 2 110 3 PN 305 Video Video Application Aor Do not rely on a camera for collision avoidance or bystander detection To avoid possible injury or death to operator or others always remain alert and aware of surroundings when operating the machine Read and understand AVOID BACKOVER ACCIDENTS in the safety section Video input 1 input eege ie IMPORTANT Correctly understand whether the camera is mirrored and whether the video J application is mirrored 7 e Mount the camera in a sturdy and 2 Esai Cem mm oe 5 secure location Mirror Off Sr z s Understand the camera s f
290. ls Assignment Error Auxiliary function is not responding Check assignment on Auxiliary Controls page T Ox amp ZX1042163 UN 04DEC08 Auxiliary Assignment Time out A Assignment Error B Assignment E Auxiliary Controls Page Access Key F Enter Key OUCC002 00029ED 19 04DEC08 1 4 When an auxiliary input is not responding to an assignment request the error message A appears Auxiliary input is not responding Check assignment on Auxiliary Controls page The related assignment B is displayed Press key E to reach the Auxiliary Controls page or enter key F to return to the previous screen IMPORTANT It is recommended to press key E to reach the Auxiliary Controls page and check the auxiliary input assignment NOTE The failed assignment is indicated by the missing status indicator while the input device and input are displayed Continued on next page A XXXX Auxiliary Controls Assignment Error Ai Auxiliary input ra not responding Check assignment on Auxiliary Controls page Wi E O xH amp 2ZX1042164 UN 04DEC08 Auxiliary Input Status Enable Time out A Assignment Error B Assignment E Auxiliary Controls Page Access Key F Enter Key OUCC002 00029ED 19 04DEC08 2 4 85 12 062111 PN 275 Auxiliary Controls When an implement rejects an assignment the error message A appears Assignment not accepted by auxiliary funct
291. lsletsls PC12882 UN 24SEP10 CZ76372 000017F 19 24SEP10 1 4 65 49 062111 PN 210 Documentation Moisture Correction NOTE Harvesting recording is ON determine how many points the moisture correction needs to be added or removed from the instantaneous moisture Not harvesting recording OFF will display average moisture of crop Average moisture does not need to be corrected If average moisture is corrected the instantaneous moisture could be over corrected 1 Screen SETUP MOISTURE CORRECTION Select SETUP gt gt HARVEST MONITOR gt gt MOISTURE gt gt MOISTURE CORRECTION NOTE Crop cell displays the selected crop 2 MOISTURE CORRECTION button and FIXED MOISTURE VALUE button allow the operator to correct the moisture reading on RUN PAGE 1 screen by toggling to FIXED MOISTURE VALUE moisture sensor will be disabled and forces moisture value to what was entered 3 If using MOISTURE CORRECTION Select MOISTURE CORRECTION button and using numeric keypad input a number value to be added to reading displayed on RUN PAGE 1 screen 4 Select MOISTURE CORRECTION button again to save this value 5 If using fixed moisture value Select FIXED MOISTURE VALUE button and using numeric keypad input a number value to be displayed on RUN PAGE 1 screen Advanced Moisture Correction NOTE This procedure is used to determine moisture correction when elevator r
292. ltage Too High nominal Cycle power on the display If this diagnostic code shows up again check the wiring The voltage level on the CAN_LOW line of the Vehicle CAN Bus Tractor CAN Bus 523774 4 Vehicle CAN Line Voltage Too Low __ is below the nominal Cycle power on the display If this diagnostic code shows up again check the battery and harness wiring 524050 12 Real Time Clock Malfunction Real Time Clock malfunctioned It may be caused by the damage on the RTC chip or no power applied to the chip Implement CAN Line Voltage Too The voltage on the CAN_HIGH line of the Implement Bus is above the nominal Cycle 524215 3 f Eng i A High power on the display If this diagnostic code shows up again check the harness wiring The voltage on the CAN_HIGH line of the Implement Bus is below 0 5 v Cycle power 524215 4 EH SES Voltage Too on the display If this diagnostic code shows up again check the battery power and recharge the battery as needed Implement CAN Line Voltage Too The voltage on the CAN_HIGH line of the Implement Bus is above nominal Cycle 524217 3 e Gees g i os High power on the display If this diagnostic code shows up again check wiring Implement CAN Line Voltage Too The voltage on the CAN_LOW line of the Implement Bus is below the nominal Cycle 524217 4 Ge 9 power on the display If this diagnostic code shows up again check the battery power and recharge the battery as needed OQU06050 000232A 19 130CT09 1 1
293. lugs with display for system power and communication e Video Connector connects video source to display e USB Connections holds USB drive used for data collection and saving selected display and implement settings e Ethernet Connector With an adapter an Ethernet cable can be used in the future e USB Connector With an adapter a USB cable can be used in the future NOTE Backside of display will have label with display model and serial number on it A Display mounting holes B Secondary navigation E USB Connections F Ethernet Connector Future C Primary Display connector Use D Video Connector G USB Connector Future Use PC12702 UN 20JUL10 E CZ76372 0000284 19 12JAN11 1 USB Drive USB Drive Requirements for John Deere Displays Most USB drives are compatible with John Deere displays Note the following USB drive requirements e Format Windows FAT or FAT32 This display will not recognize NTFS format e Capacity There are no specific limits to the memory capacity of the drive e Connectivity USB 2 0 e Maximum Dimensions 9 2 mm thick by 21 7 mm wide Best Practices e Wait 10 seconds because large USB drives may take time to be recognized e Use a USB drive that is 4GB or larger so multiple Backups can be stored e Clean all files off the USB drive that are not associated with John Deere displays CZ76372 0000287 19 12JAN11 1 Display Control
294. machine path e Consider field conditions visibility and vehicle configuration when selecting vehicle speed For example use duals when using AutoTrac at high speeds on tractors AutoTrac System General Information IMPORTANT AutoTrac system relies on GPS system operated by the United States government which is solely responsible for its accuracy and maintenance System is subject to changes that could affect accuracy and performance of all GPS equipment Operator must maintain responsibility for machine and must turn at end of each track This system will not turn at end of a track unless equipped with iTEC Pro AutoTrac basic system is intended to be used as an assistance tool to mechanical markers Operator must evaluate overall system accuracy to determine specific field operations where assisted steering may be used This evaluation is necessary because accuracy required Continued on next page for various field operations may differ depending on farming operation Because AutoTrac uses STARFIRE differential correction network along with Global Positioning System GPS slight shifts in position may occur over time AutoTrac Accuracy The overall AutoTrac system accuracy is dependent upon many variables The equation looks like AutoTrac System Accuracy Signal accuracy Vehicle Setup Implement Setup Field Soil Conditions It is very important to remember e Receiver has to go through a warm up period aft
295. mplement Type F e Select the Implement Name G e Select the associated Operation H e Select the Control Manufacturer I e Select the Model J e Press the next page button D to go to next step e Press previous page button K to go to the previous step e Press cancel button E to stop procedure Review Com Port assignment settings then press enter button L to save profile or cancel button E to stop procedure Continued on next page CZ76372 0000053 19 09JUL10 1 2 90 4 062111 PN 286 COM Port Assignment The Com Port assignment can be reviewed from the GreenStar 3 Pro Diagnostic Reading page To review the Com Port Settings select MENU button gt GREENSTAR 3 PRO button gt DIAGNOSTIC softkey C The Diagnostic Readings page appears see Com Port Setting Review Diagnostic Softkey ZX1043698 UN 03DEC09 CZ76372 0000053 19 09JUL10 2 2 90 5 062111 PN 287 COM Port Assignment COM Port Setting Review GreenStar Diagnostic Readings Read the latest Operator Manual prior to operation To obtain a copy see your dealer 3 or visit wanav StellarSupport com view COM Port a v O Omoa Orm Orma Profile Fertilizer YaraN Port Type Field Doc Connect N Sensing Implement Name Rauch OH Controller Manufacturer LHTechnologies N Sensing LH C Modal LH5000 SE Mapping Baud Rate O Communication Status rz zoz
296. n Loss of GPS While Recording Boundary GPS has been lost while recording the boundary Point logging will resume when the GPS signal returns This may result in an inaccurate boundary Memory Full Clear maps or export data to USB drive and then delete Documentation data Memory 90 Full Clear maps or export data to USB drive and then delete Documentation data No Memory No Memory available for Curve Track Clear maps or export data to USB drive and then delete Documentation data Low Memory Low Memory available for Curve Track Clear maps or export data to USB drive and then delete Documentation data No Memory No Memory available for Straight Track Clear maps or export data to USB drive and then delete Documentation data No Memory No Memory available for Circle Track Clear maps or export data to USB drive and then delete Documentation data Circle Definition Problem The distance from the vehicle to the center point is greater than 1 mile Select another center point or drive another circle Zero All Totals You have decided to zero all totals for the selected filter Incorrect RS232 Controller Model Selected The RS232 controller model selected is incorrect Please verify and reenter manufacturer and model number Prescription Error Controller is not setup to accept prescriptions Continued on next page CZ76372 00001B9 19 040CT10 1 2 1 30 22 062111 PN 340
297. n 1 Q Advanced Settings L Displays Populations Drive R Prescriptions Section 2 M Assign Varieties to Rows N Individual Planter Rows O Drive Selections Implement Selection The implement name is not pre populated If using a John Deere SeedStar planter only number of rows will be automatically populated Set up the implement using the Equipment Softkey H before setting up operation MENU gt GREENSTAR gt EQUIPMENT H If this step is not taken you will be required to enter setup information twice CZ76372 0000121 19 28SEP10 2 17 65 6 062111 PN 167 Documentation Variety Selection PC10857UB UN 30MAR10 Add The operator has the ability to document up to six varieties Variety at one time Select Add Variety Add Edit Variety Select from the drop down list of enter seed Brand A Optional Select from the drop down list of enter seed Variety B Select or allow automatic selection of the color that will represent the variety on the display and map C NOTE It is possible to manually select the same color for two or more varieties Documentation will still occur for each individual variety however the map will paint the colors that were chosen will make visual variety separation difficult D tot Number x Select and then enter the Lot Number using the key pad 2 i Indicates D Optional E field E Select ACCEPT d
298. n Implement Width Using a planter as an example the marker arms and blades are wider than the working width This width needs to be entered if markers are not used or are used and completely folded on the ends If markers are only partially folded during turns enter this larger dimension IMPORTANT Width measurements are used to help alert an operator of potential intersections between the implement and an impassable boundary The operator still needs to be aware of potential collisions if there are times the implement is wider than the dimension entered e g marker arm lowered If markers are used in the field add the width of both markers to give ultimate alarms of possible intersections NOTE As a buffer to avoid obstacles additional Physical Width may be added to the implement to compensate for several things one of these being GPS drift Signal Approximate Physical Width added to Implement RTK 0 6 m 2 ft SF2 0 9 m 3 ft SF1 3 4 m 11 ft Physical Width Table CF86321 000001F 19 12APR11 4 6 45 11 062111 PN 48 GreenStar General NOTE If the physical width is less than the implement GS3 working width a message will appear as a reminder that this is not usually correct A 16R30 planter is physically wider than its 12 2 m 40 ft working width An example where the working width is wider than the physical width is a dry Confirm Configuration fertil
299. n customize units for a mix of metric and imperial units CZ76372 00001BA 19 040CT10 1 1 35 7 062111 PN 30 Display Setup DIAGNOSTICS softkey The Diagnostics screen contains three tabs e READINGS tab e TESTS tab e ABOUT tab READINGS tab This tab will display operating voltages part numbers and hours of operation TESTS tab This tab will allow the user to perform 3 different screen calibrations Color Test Touchscreen Test Touchscreen Calibration The main function under the tests tab will be Touchscreen calibration Touchscreen calibration will be required when the screen icon does not align with the area depressed This may be caused by normal wear and tear age certain weather conditions and contaminants on the screen chemicals solvents etc Touchscreen Calibration 1 Under the Touchscreen Calibration button a new screen will appear with an X in the upper right corner 2 Press the screen at the X and continue to follow the X s around the screen Always press the screen directly at the center of the X Reset Touchscreen calibration will abort any saved calibrations and allow the user to start over and perform a new calibration Color Test Under the Test button select the color test The color test will display 3 distinct colors on the display for approximately 5 seconds If you do not see 3 distinct colors contact your John Deere Dealer for service Touchscreen
300. n either side of Track 0 When the vehicle drives past the 2nd track from Track 0 ten additional tracks will be generated in that direction The system will continue to generate additional passes when the vehicle drives past the last pass displayed on the screen NOTE Skip pass is available in AB Curves mode Generating AB Curve Path Information As the system generates the initial passes after recording Track 0 or when generating additional passes the text Generating AB Curve will be displayed on the perspective view The curvature of the path changes as the subsequent paths get more convex or concave C Paths Generated from Track 0 During this time you will not be able to track off of any paths AB Curve Generation Limits The initially recorded AB curve must be at least 10 feet in length to be a valid AB Curve to use for guidance The vehicle must be within 400 meters 0 25 miles of where Track 0 was recorded for the system to start generating curve paths If the vehicle is at this outer limit it may take several minutes to generate a path that shows up on the screen During this time Generating AB Curve will be displayed on the screen Straight Line Extensions AB Curve paths are generated with a 91 m 300 ft straight line extension attached to the end of the actual recorded path Multiple AB Curves in a field A field can contain multiple AB Curve paths Each AB curve for a field must be recorded and uniq
301. nce each arrow on the Path Accuracy Indicator represents e Vehicle Heading Arrow aids in tractor and implement alignment when an indication of heading direction is available OQU06050 00021E0 19 14NOVO06 1 1 50 9 062111 PN 76 Guidance Turning View NOTE Track 0 must be established for turning view to be active Select the check box next to Turning View to set turning view on or off Turning view provides a visual indicator of machine relationship to closest track as machine turns This view can be used as a guide when turning into next track Turning View will appear in Straight Track Curve Track Circle Track and Row Finder modes once vehicle has turned more than 45 degrees from track heading The Screen will revert back to perspective view once vehicle is within approximately 5 degrees of track The operator has the ability to cancel the Turning View once the screen transitions into turning view with a cancel button that appears in the top left corner of the guidance view Once the cancel button is selected the screen will switch back to the perspective view OQU06050 00021E1 19 14NOV06 1 1 Turn Predictor Turn predictor is intended to only predict turn point of a vehicle using Parallel Tracking or AutoTrac It is NOT a headland alert Because actual field boundary is unknown turn predictions are based solely on previous turn behavior of vehicle Turn predictions will not coincide
302. nction the same as the Original GreenStar Display NOTE The original GreenStar Monitor is only viewable as a full screen IMPORTANT If dual monitors are being used with an Original GreenStar Display on the system along with a GS3 display Harvest Monitor will automatically function on the Original GreenStar Display and the Original GreenStar PC8663 UN O5AUG05 PC12866 UN 16SEP10 ORIGINAL GREENSTAR MONITOR button Monitor application will not be available and will not appear on menu CZ76372 0000181 19 24SEP10 1 5 Harvest Monitor Cotton Flow Chart Setup Harvest Monitor Page 1 Page 2 Set Number of Rows Yield Calibration Run Page Recording Yield Units Area Units and Spacing ON OFF Total Width Quick Cal Material Bales Acres Spacing Standard Cal Header Pounds Hectares Active Rows Manual Cal Combination Kilograms Machine Model Row Correction Cal Manual Hundred wt Metric Tonnes Tons Setting Yield Units Harvest Mon Screen SETUP Yield Units Dia Press SETUP gt gt HARVEST MONITOR gt gt YIELD Bales UNITS Area Units NOTE See standard weight chart section for standard weights of crops e Bales e Pounds e Kilograms e Hundred Wt e Metric Tonnes e Tons Setting Area Units Screen SETUP HARVEST MON Press SETUP gt gt HARVEST MONITOR Press AREA UNIT button to toggle between ACRES and HECTARES Selection will appear boxed in a
303. nd capitalized Hectares d B ACRES Set Row amp Spacings Die e Yield Calibration PAGE RUN Pages Recording ON OFF By Header D CG Setup Harvest Monitor Cotton SETUP INFO RER eg PC12907 UN 24SEP10 Continued on next page CZ76372 0000181 19 24SEP10 2 5 65 52 062111 PN 213 Documentation Setting Rows and Spacing ey Sat Rows amp Spacing Screen SETUP ROWS amp SPACING DER Number of Rows Bia Select SETUP gt HARVEST MONITOR gt SET ROW amp Total Width ft 20 0 SPACINGS Bzoscieiiey Zeche Row Spacing B IMPORTANT Make certain rows and spacings are correct Wrong row spacing will result DIER in inaccurate area calculation oe Be 1 Select NUMBER OF ROWS button om Acne Active 2 Enter number of rows and select NUMBER OF ROWS Llesh WW button again to enter value EE ES P ver W Select NOTE An alarm will be displayed in section G to H v a state limits for row spacings serue machine Fh chine Kee PH G J Harvest Monitor Dfa Rows amp Spacing PC12908 UN 24SEP10 Continued on next page CZ76372 0000181 19 24SEP10 3 5 65 53 BE Documentation A Row 1 C Row 3 E Row 5 G Row Left of First Row B Row 2 D Row 4 F Row 6 H Row Right of Last Row 3 Enter row spacing for all rows starting with LEFT OF Between third and fourth row should a row Jooooo Tieessece goggo
304. nd Diagnostics AutoTrac Deactivation Messages Each time AutoTrac is deactivated a message is displayed in the upper left corner of the perspective view disappears indicating the reason for deactivation Messages are also displayed indicating why AutoTrac did not activate The deactivation messages displays for 3 seconds then Deactivation Message Description Steering wheel moved Operator turned steering wheel Speed too slow Vehicle speed is below minimum required speed Speed too fast Vehicle speed is above maximum allowed speed Invalid gear Vehicle operating in an invalid gear Track number changed Track number changed Invalid GPS signal SF1 SF2 or RTK signal was lost SSU fault See John Deere dealer Invalid display messages Check display settings Invalid display settings Check guidance settings and Track 0 setup No AutoTrac Activation No AutoTrac Activation on GS3 Heading error too large Vehicle is at an angle greater than 45 degrees from track Off track error too large Vehicle not within 40 of track spacing Out of seat Out of seat too long Oil temp too cold Hydraulic oil not above minimum required temperature No TCM corrections Make sure TCM is turned on Invalid SSU activation Need SSU activation code See John Deere dealer SSU in diagnostic mode Fuse is in diagnostic slot in vehicle fu
305. ned select the page forward soft key Choose the next variety to be assigned Choose the end row Notice that the start row is the row after the last end row Example Variety 1 was assigned to rows 1 through 4 page forward is pressed the next start row will be 5 Repeat this process until all rows of the planter that are dropping seed are assigned the correct variety If a row will not be planting you must select and assign Row Not Planting from the drop down list PC10857UE UN 30MAR10 Es Variety to Rows Assign Variety to Rows Select the variety Start Row 1 LS Fna Raw PC10857UF UN 30MAR10 If a change needs to be made to a previous row assignment pressing the page back key allows editing to occur to an earlier row variety CZ76372 0000121 19 28SEP10 5 17 Several examples of variety assignments are as follows 1 2 Planter 3 Varieties 1 2 Planter Single Variety PC10857UG UN 30MAR10 4 EI L 1b EH 24 as BERM _ EN 12 CZ76372 0000121 19 28SEP10 6 17 3 Varieties with the middle variety spanning the disconnect PC10857UH UN 30MAR10 4 S Iz 10 zu z C T a T P a El 12 CZ76372 0000121 19 28SEP10 7 17 5 Refuge with 4 contiguous rows Continued on next page PC10857UI UN 30MAR10 4 e 12 16 20 24 BRRSRRRRESRRRSRRRRRRRRSR 12 CZ76372 0000121 19 28SEP10 8 17 65 8 062111 PN 169 Documentation Seed Corn
306. ng power up of display a start up screen will show a status bar that indicates display is powering up Once the display has powered up if no implement is connected a default performance monitor screen will be shown If an ISO implement is connected that implement s information will be shown in application info area along with ten softkeys Input Fields There are a variety of input fields and buttons that allow the operator to navigate through the screens on the display and input values e Drop Down Box e Input Box e Check Box e Button Fields are selected by touching screen Keypad will appear to input alpha numeric data Continued on next page PC8845 UN 300CT05 PC8846 UN 300CT05 Drop Down Box A drop down box has a border with a numeric or text value and up down arrows on the right side that allow operator to select a pre populated item in a list To open highlight drop down box and press ENTER button List will appear Rotating thumb wheel will allow operator to move highlight focus through list to desired input value Pressing ENTER button will select new value To close the drop down box without making a selection press CANCEL button List will close and original value will remain CZ76372 0000298 19 12JAN11 1 4 30 1 062111 PN 22 Display Navigation Input Box An input box has a border with a numeric value or text This allows the operator to select and enter new v
307. ngle product and tank mix Button E allows the operator to input information on the product that is being applied Location F displays rate that is currently written in the prescriptions Button G displays the rate that is currently being commanded by the controller Location H displays the rate that is physically being applied to the field Location I displays the name of prescription if one is selected Location J displays the application method selected using the advanced settings button M Location K displays the Height Depth and is selected using the Advanced Settings button M Button L is disabled while connected to dry box controller P P P Product Application Type Single Product bd v P ipti Als 0 00 tonfac Prescription Target Rate ton ac Applicatio 3 00 Peen Broadcast J Actual Rate 2 00 Height Depth 0 0 H Actual Rate I Prescription J Application Method K Height Depth tonac A Product 1 B Product 2 C New Product 3 D Product Application Type E Product Type F Prescription Rate G tTarget Rate M Advance Settings N Prescription Button Button M is used to added details Button N is used to select prescription or convert shapefile to a prescription Continued on next page PC13225 UN 30MAR11 L Disable Operation Button CZ76372 0000292 19 30MAR11 2 3 65 19 062111 P
308. ngs CZ76372 00002D7 19 15APR11 2 3 Video Loop Loop Instead of manually changing the video source to see the different camera views the display can be configured to Loop Time 5 loop though the different sources Enter the amount of sec time between changes of the camera view Then select which videos will be included in the loop by checking the correct boxes Start the loop by pressing the Play softkey Whenever Include in Loop you want the loop to stop press the same button now labeled Pause V Input 1 V Input 2 ZS S T FA T 5 Loop Settings CZ76372 00002D7 19 15APR11 3 3 11 5 2 062111 PN 307 Video Video Viewing There are two locations to view video on the display Option 1 Select MENU gt VIDEO Option 2 In the Layout Manager setup a Home Page to view video Video is available in either full screen or quarter screen Video Input 1 BR A Ben s A Gi Be r Piy va _ E E Mirror Off PC13251 UN 18APR11 11 35am CZ76372 00002D5 19 18APR11 1 1 Adjusting Video Image Quality Increasing the contrast will brighten the video while decreasing contrast will darken the video Mirroring an image exchanges what is seen on the left and right sides of the image like a rear view mirror The camera or the display could mirror the image Check whether the image is mirrored before using the Video feature IMPORTANT Correctly understand
309. ngs gt gt Activations IMPORTANT Turning a Demo Activation OFF will not stop the activation time from counting down if the corresponding function has been setup and started It will simply hide the corresponding buttons Challenge Code abcdefg Serial Number PC GU2UA000000 Confirmation Code 1234 Component AutoTrac SF2 Demo This software was activated on PivotPro Demo This software was activated on iTEC Pro Demo This software was activated on iGuide Demo This software was activated on AutoTrac RowSense GS3 Demo This software was activated on 150 150 150 150 150 Status hrs left 0929 2010 VA hrs left 03 23 2010 JS hrs left 03 23 2010 JS hrs left 03 23 2010 hrs left 03 23 2010 GreenStar Activations PC12929 UN 29SEP10 CZ76372 00002F8 19 28APR11 1 1 35 2 062111 PN 25 Display Setup DISPLAY softkey b 4 Mode Standalone OC Volume N Highlight 69 7 UN 20JUL10 Display Main When display is initially installed in a vehicle it will havea settings are changed they will be saved and retained default setting for all features Operators have the ability through each power cycle to change these settings to fit their needs Once these Continued on next page CZ76372 0000059 19 20JUL10 1 6 062111 35 3 PN 26 Display Setup Go to MENU gt gt DISPLAY button gt gt DISPLAY softkey
310. ngs D Tracking Mode Drop Down Drop Down Menu H AutoTrac Controller Settings Menu F General Settings Continued on next page CZ76372 00001A8 19 010CT10 16 25 50 64 062111 PN 131 Guidance Advanced AutoTrac Settings The accept button L shall save and apply the current settings and return the user to the previous page The Restore Default Settings button K will set all settings to the factory default value See each setting for its default value The button A will display a pop up with help text for the specific setting A Help Button G Heading Lead sar PEP Tel eat Line ef Tracking B Decrease Button C lInput Box D lIncrease Button E Line Sensitivity Heading F Line Sensitivity Tracking H Steering Response Rate I Curve Sensitivity J Acquire Sensitivity K Restore Default Settings Button Se wl STEI Org A Response Rate L Accept Button Curve eee OI ensitivi Sensitivity Rest Default Advanced AutoTrac Settings PC11474 UN 15NOV08 CZ76372 00001A8 19 010CT10 17 25 Optimizing AutoTrac Controller Performance When operating in curves start with the curve sensitivity equal to the optimized acquire sensitivity These default settings are a good starting point for most conditions Each setting can be adjusted to try and optimize performance Operator may need to readjust line sensitivity heading and line sensitivity tra
311. nline offsets on the Header page The correct variety is recorded for each 3 meters 10 feet square grid dii ge s for each field selected in desktop software 3 The variety locator files must be saved to the flash drive Residus Mavnavement I prior to combining H gt A Variety Locator Message may appear telling the w S operator if the file for the current field is found or if a file is Accept 5 available but not used e Change Harvest Settings CZ76372 00002BB 19 30MAR11 3 5 IMPORTANT For Variety Locator to work on GS3 za displays varieties must be recorded when planting loaded to desktop software and saved to a flash drive All fields that will use Variety ECH Locator on a GS3 display at harvest must have ar the variety seeding information saved to a flash o drive using desktop software See the desktop software operator s manual for more information on how to properly save files to a flash drive i 5 H Desktop Software Continued on next page CZ76372 00002BB 19 30MAR11 4 5 65 28 062111 PN 189 Documentation Defining Residue Management Select desired residue management e Chop e Spread e Chop and Spread e Windrow e Undefined non specified es NEW Once selections have been made press the Accept button Loads NOTE Contractor and Contract can only be set up with desktop software and saved to a USB drive The Harvest tab screen allows an operator to view and
312. nt Auxiliary Control Detected CAUTION Auxiliary Control Detected To avoid the risk of death or serious injury to a bystander ensure Users know which function is mapped to each control Controls are properly labeled Improper operation can cause unintended implement movement To avoid the risk of death or serious injury to a bystander ensure e Users know which function is mapped to each control e Controls are properly labeled ZX1042319 UN 04DEC08 Disable This message occurs when the system detects an V Auxiliary Control Press Enter key F to navigate to the home page Go to the Auxiliary Controls page by pressing the Mapping key G to review or change the Auxiliary Control assignments If Enable is selected all Auxiliary Controls will be enabled If Disable is selected default all Auxiliary Controls will be disabled OUCC002 0002A57 19 28O0CT09 1 4 Auxiliary Control Configuration Changed ks S S AWARNING o SE g Auxiliary Control configuration AeA STON Auxiliary Control configuration changed Go to the Auxiliary changed Go to the Auxiliary Controls page Controls page to review ck to review configuration configuration Improper operation can cause unintended improper operation can cause unintended implement movement implement movement To avoid the risk of death or To avoid the risk of death or serious injury serious injur
313. nt e Ae rpe ni Model Ss Name Implement width m Track Spacing PC12829 UN 27AUG10 GreenStar 3 Pro Equipment CZ76372 00002BC 19 30MAR11 7 12 IMPORTANT The working width will be stored on the moisture board Header type and moisture curve will be selected automatically when a corresponding crop type and variety are selected in HDOC The crop type will be saved when the GS3 is shut down correctly You will have to re select it when you delete the data from your USB drive or put in a new one You have the ability to check the correct settings for Documentation by choosing Recording in the drop down menu of the Diagnostics Readings page Select MENU gt gt GS3 PRO gt gt DIAGNOSTICS gt gt view RECORDING GreenStar 2 Pro Diagnostic Readings Recording Field Defined Task Defined Operation s Property Defined Harvesting 1 Hin Hin His Recording Space Available GPS Available Vehicle Moving at Minimum Speed Selected Recording Source State Documentation and Coverage Recording Source PC12830 UN 27AUG10 GreenStar 3 Pro Diagnostic Readings Continued on next page CZ76372 00002BC 19 30MAR11 8 12 65 42 062111 PN 203 Documentation The Totals page will only be available when your harvest operation is properly defined Select MENU gt gt GS3 PRO gt gt TOTALS PC8679 UN O5AUG05 GreenStar 2 Pro Reports and Tot
314. o be used to indicate locations for soil sampling and field scouting When a POINT FLAG button is selected a flag will be marked for that location Multiple point flags can be selected for a particular field e Area flags are used to mark an area of interest such as a patch of weeds a low spot in a field or a tile line Width of an area flag is equal to implement width in Equipment settings When an AREA FLAG button is pressed FLAG ON button will flash indicating flag is active and map will indicate flag area Pressing FLAG button again will de activate flag Up to six flags can be configured Select button to setup from drop down box then indicate a name and flag mode Flags can only be removed using desktop software OQU06050 00022BD 19 20NOVO06 1 1 45 30 062111 PN 67 Guidance Read This Manual Before attempting to operate Parallel Tracking or AutoTrac read this manual fully to understand components and procedures required for safe and proper operation This manual is for both Parallel Tracking and AutoTrac guidance systems applications OUO06050 0000D01 19 22SEP07 1 1 Guidance Systems Parallel Tracking shows your position in field relative to track that you determine with your first pass through field Parallel Tracking has modes to follow a straight or Curve track and has a row finder mode Using machine icon and line on your display you know which way to steer in order to keep y
315. ocumentation 65 30 Row Hedde e ele ee eae ee E es 65 31 Compensation Implements 3 hace en cee eit teat ieien ete 45 8 COMON 225 eet helt ees ae eee EA 65 57 MachiNe ees gees eee 45 5 Crop Head 65 31 Moisture Row Finder Mode ek 50 6 Alarm ee genee ad cathe vee dente state cone 65 51 Track O Getup ssicccceccecvecccrncecteeescicectesessscneveewecnevees 50 18 Moisture Correchon 65 49 Row Spacing Moisture Curve ee 65 51 Cotton fos cst ee A E E 65 53 Multiple RUN Pages 40 5 RS 232 Receivers cccceeeeeeeeceeeeeteeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeees 110 1 Performance Monitor 60 2 lane SS vse ds aceasta desse eect Auth deat 110 2 Platform Agen Zeene ed NEE 65 31 SOLU EE 110 2 Prescriptions cies cess ncacdengcanceacgczegeusdcanceaedetdcansetess 65 60 RUM Eege eg tee es e EES ge 40 5 REM stave tees are erate te tate EE 110 1 Row Crop Header 65 31 S RS 232 ReceivefS sseesssssessrnsrinsrrnsrensrnerneernsena 110 2 Straight Track Mode cccesseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 50 20 Saving Data Typical BIC 45 10 AB Curve Track Mode 50 45 Typical Planter octet avccuadt hia see gei Aai 45 10 Scale Weight Yield Calibration Calibration Low Flow Compensation ss eseseeesseeeeeee eeen 65 48 COMbiNE sea eee ane a NC a ae 65 46 Yield Calibration Factor Sereen Captures eebe 15 4 Adjust Manually ENEE 65 49 Screen Layout ae cee heat kote later healt 15 5 40 1 Yield Monitor E 15 4 Area EE 65 32 Secondary Navigation EE EN 15 3 Yield Units 0
316. oduct starts or stops For a sprayer measure the time from when the switch is actuated to when product starts and stops reaching the crop Enter Turn on and off times to the nearest 0 1 of a second If the Turn on time is set to 0 3 seconds the command signal is sent when the system estimates the section to be 0 3 seconds from the boundary or non covered area The coverage map begins painting 0 3 seconds after the command signal is sent If the actual machine reaction time is 0 8 seconds the machine will travel 0 5 seconds past the boundary or into the non covered area before applying In this situation the coverage map began painting before the actual application started therefore the two did not match As the Turn on time increases the command signal is sent earlier as the boundary or non covered area is approached If the Turn on time is 1 0 second the command is sent 1 0 second before the implement is expected to reach the boundary or previously covered area The coverage map will start painting 1 0 second after the command signal is sent and Swath Control expects the machine to begin applying at this time as well because the operator entered a Turn on time of 1 0 second The more constant the ground speed is kept when entering or exiting boundary or previous coverage area Swath Control On Off Settings Operation 1 Planting Seeding Operation 2 fertilizer 1 Operation 3 fertilizer2 Operation 4 fertilizer3 4
317. on CZ76372 00002B8 19 30MAR11 5 8 Select Rate Units A Select the target rate B and enter the desired number on the key pad A Rate Units B Target Rate Box Assign Target Rate asi PC10857VF UN 31MAR10 CZ76372 00002B8 19 30MAR11 6 8 Advanced Settings The advanced settings softkey allows the user to provide more information about the operation that is going to be recorded This information will be available in APEX for later analysis Select Advanced Settings A Continued on next page PC13221 UN 30MAR11 A Advanced Settings button CZ76372 00002B8 19 30MAR11 7 8 65 14 062111 PN 175 Documentation Select Application Method A Select Tillage Practice B Enter Seed Height Depth C A Application Method B Tillage Practice C Seed Height Depth Advanced Settings Ai Application Method No Till B rintage Practice Seed Height Depth 1 0 tin 4 Cancel PC10857VH UN 31MAR10 CZ76372 00002B8 19 30MAR11 8 8 Seeding Product Details Europe Only The Product Details function allows documentation and communication of related information between desktop software and GS3 for products like chemicals fertilizer and crop Product Details are only available for the Operations Planting Seeding and Product Application Planting Seeding is supported by seeder NOTE The GreenStar Seede
318. on current track spacing og position and heading After starting turn turning view will Kacina owen guide operator into next pass E NOTE If SET ROW button is pressed when machine is stopped system will reset track 0 based on a 0 heading A Turning View G Tracking Tones B Turn Predictor Enable Disable C AutoTrac Deactivation H Tracking Tones Input Box Message I Previous Page D Vehicle Heading Arrow J Next Page E Lead Compensation K Accept F Off track Error Arrow Step one O 21 2 f Guidance General Settings 2 2 PC12583 UN 28APR10 CZ76372 00001A2 19 010CT10 1 1 50 1 8 062111 PN 85 Guidance Straight Track Mode Theory of Operation Straight Track mode assists operator in driving straight parallel paths by using display and audible tones to alert Straight Track allows the operator to create an initial operator when machine is off track straight track using a variety of different track 0 setups Once the Track 0 reference path has been defined all passes for the field are generated The generated passes can be used to operate Parallel Tracking or AutoTrac PC9508 UN 240CT06 Passes are identical copies of the original pass CZ76372 00001A3 19 010CT10 1 10 Set Tracking Mode E to Straight Track Implement Guidance Tracking Mode Mode A View E Tracking Mode Hil KE General Settings B Guidance Settings F Implement G
319. on which items in the dropdown menus are selected For example when a Harvest task is selected for a farm and field planting data will not show and when Crop Totals are shown information for each particular crop is not broken down by which farm or field the crop was in This can be filtered further by filtering by field crop and load All values shown are for the items that are used for filtering ITEM SPECIFICATION e Area Area harvested with recording ON e Date Range Beginning and ending date of harvest activity e Average Productivity The average amount of area harvested per hour when recording is ON e Moisture Percent of moisture of the crop as determined by Harvest Monitor e Yield dry Crop yield as determined by Harvest Monitor if dried down to the standard payable moisture The standard payable moisture is entered for each crop with desktop software e Yield wet Yield of the crop as it comes out of the field e Productivity Average wet mass of the crop per hour e Length of time Number of hours that recording has been ON e Fuel Used Estimated total fuel used e Mass dry Dry mass as determined by Harvest Monitor if dried down to the standard payable moisture e Mass wet Wet mass as determined by Harvest Monitor e Additional items that will show depending on how it is filtered include e Client Anyone including yourself that data will be collected for such as a landlord PC8663
320. ons on display If resetting the display is SS frequently required contact a John Deere dealer It alent ea O is recommended to turn power off before attaching or removing implements and other electrical components on CAN Bus communication system A DISPLAY RESET button Neg PC8705 UN 17AUG05 OQU06050 0002328 19 130CT09 1 1 Pre Season Checklist for Seeding Save all data to your USB Flash Drive In the Office In the Machine Review all current Operator s Manuals Quick Reference Make sure the display address is set to primary Guides Installation Instructions and Product Updates Adjust backlighting and contrast on the GS3 display Read and perform all implement calibration procedures Set record stop delay height for your machine s Review Prescriptions for Map Based Prescriptions in In the Field Apex or other compatible desktop software Check StarFire receiver for GPS Signal Review Pre Season Checklists for your specific machine and implement In Apex NOTE A is not lable in all EAME tries Ee SE NOTE When checking for GPS signal move machine to open view of sky and turn key to second position If receiver has been stored for longer than six months it may take the receiver one to two hours to lock on to a GPS and or differential signal Ensure all farm and field names are entered and accurate Enter all seed varieties Enter all
321. ontroller which is in most cases the first one When this alarm screen is displayed the John Deere Task Controller is not the first one and cannot use the ISO implements for documentation purposes Continued on next page Task Controller Invalid System configuration The John Deere Task Controller detected an other conflicting Task Controller in the system Disconnect the other devices for further operation J PC9748 UN 24SEP09 Invalid System Configuration CZ76372 00002B6 19 30MAR11 4 6 130 13 062111 PN 331 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Alarm Task Controller Invalid Implement Configuration The type of implement connected isn t supported by this version of the John Deere task controller Disconnect the not supported implement for further operation This alarm screen will be displayed whenever an ISO implement is detected which is not supported by the John Deere Task Controller All non supported ISO implements are ignored by the John Deere Task Controller and cannot be used for documentation purposes Task Controller Invalid Implement configuration The type of implement connected isn t supported by this version of the John Deere Task Controller i Disconnect the not supported implement for further operation a D E 2 T S 3 Invalid Implement Configuration CZ76372 00002B6 19 30MAR11 5 6 Task Controller Configuration of the connected implement not
322. operator error while steering or GPS error Shift Track When in Circle Track Mode Shift Track is used to shift the tracks radially closer or further from the center point Shift Track does not move the center point itself This method of Shift Track allows the operator to use various implement widths account for different lengths of center pivot towers or to account for stretching shrinking of the center pivot irrigation sections IMPORTANT When using SF2 or SF1 Differential Correction or when using RTK Quick Survey Mode the Circle Center may drift over time or at power cycles In Circles Track Mode Shift Track does not compensate for GPS drift In order to achieve accuracy and repeatability when using SF1 or SF2 Differential Correction the center point must be recalculated by manually driving the circle on a daily basis see Calculating Circle Center NOTE RTK Absolute Base Mode is highly recommended in high accuracy applications when using Circle Track Only RTK Absolute Base Mode provides consistent repeatability and accuracy in Circle Track CZ76372 00001A9 19 010CT10 3 4 50 50 062111 PN 117 Guidance Example 1 Operator makes first pass through the field saving Circle Center information to PASS 1 and RIVER FARM gt EAST FIELD pulling a 4 6 m 15 ft implement Operator returns for second pass in same field with 9 1 m 30 ft implement If operator desires to follow same track stored operato
323. or this field only clears Curve Track data for current field only in memory e For all fields clears Curve Track data for all fields stored in memory NOTE Coverage maps are retained through power cycles and will remain until the CLEAR FIELD MAP button is selected from the map settings pop up NOTE When Field is changed in the RE SOURCES CONDITIONS softkey coverage will disappear from the map Coverage will reappear by changing back to the associated field A Clear Adaptive Curves Data C For all fields B For this field only Continued on next page Clear Adaptive Curves Data For this field only For all fields PC9526 UN 260CT06 CZ76372 00001A4 19 040CT10 8 20 50 29 062111 PN 96 Guidance Repeat Mode While using adaptive curves Repeat Mode does the following e Repeat Mode ON repeats previous paths and disables recording e Repeat Mode OFF enables recording and projects guidance paths off of previously recorded passes NOTE In repeat mode the operator repeats previously recorded passes Toggle the Repeat Mode button upon entering the field While recording a new path the Repeat Mode button should be unchecked Off After turning around on the end or coming back after an obstacle where recording is off the customer will be able to see where the line is without having to turn Recording on Therefore Recording goes on only when you really want to be recor
324. ot driven same D Interior Boundary F Field size on all sides Impassable B Exterior Boundary Impassable Headland Constant Offset Boundary 1 An Exterior Boundary must exist for the field menu Continued on next page Kl amp D I PC10500A UN 210CT08 2 Choose Exterior Headland from the TYPE drop down JS56696 000049A 19 06OCT08 1 2 45 29 062111 PN 66 GreenStar General 3 Enter the name of the headland boundary in the HEADLAND GROUP drop down menu You can save several headland boundaries for a field for different implement widths In the Boundary Offset input box indicate the distance from the headland to the exterior boundary e g If the planter is a 16R30 and two passes are planted in the headland enter 24 4 m 80 ft Repeat steps 2 4 for Impassable Interior Headlands Also an Interior Boundary must exist and Interior Headland must be chosen JS56696 000049A 19 O6O0CT08 2 2 FLAGS tab FLAGS tab allows setup of flags for guidance and documentation There are three types of flags line point and area e Line flags marks tile lines When a LINE FLAG button is pressed FLAG ON button will flash indicating flag is active and map will indicate flag lines Pressing FLAG button again will de activate flag e Point flags mark a specific point in a field like a rock tree stump or where machine ran out of seed or spray Point flags can als
325. ot selected the Documentation screen displays the information that is still required Machine and Implement Setup NOTE See GreenStar General setup MACHINE IM PLEMENT softkey for more information on setting up Machine and Implement NOTE For some Task Controller supportive implements the operation type equipment type and implement width are set automatically when supported by the implement Grown Star Oocurrentaton The following information must be selected prior to defining an operation Client Farm Field Task Enter the required information in Resources Documentation Off A task other than Documentation Off E must be selected PC13625 UN 14JUN11 CZ76372 0000328 19 14JUN11 2 2 Field and Task Notes Press MAIN MENU gt gt GREENSTAR 3 PRO gt gt RESOURCES CONDITIONS softkey Notes can be used to provide detailed information to field operators logging notes while in field or gathering and reporting other information like soil sampling and field scouting Field notes are specific to a particular field and will only show for the currently selected field Task notes are organized by task and notes for a particular task are common across all clients farms and fields PC8676 UN O5AUG05 RESOURCES CONDITIONS softkey CZ76372 00002D3 19 15APR11 1 1 65 3 062111 PN 164 Documentation Operations Select MENU gt GREENST
326. our path parallel with your last Audible alerts accompany display so you can keep your eyes on field AutoTrac is an assisted steering system After operator enters a reference path Track 0 in AutoTrac machine will then steer itself parallel to that track OQU06050 0000D02 19 170CT07 1 1 50 1 062111 PN 68 Guidance GUIDANCE softkey The GREENSTAR 3 PRO GUIDANCE screen contains three tabs VIEW tab GUIDANCE SETTINGS tab SHIFT TRACK SETTINGS tab IMPORTANT If changes are made while machine is in auxiliary mode turn key off and wait for display s power light to turn off before starting the ignition This allows display to shut down and save data To turn guidance on Go to GUIDANCE softkey gt gt GUIDANCE SETTINGS tab gt gt TRACKING MODE Select a tracking mode other than GUIDANCE OFF To turn guidance off Select GUIDANCE softkey gt gt GUIDANCE SETTINGS tab gt gt TRACKING MODE drop down box gt gt GUIDANCE OFF The GUIDANCE softkey consists of three tabs which allow the operator to setup and view settings for Parallel Tracking AutoTrac and Row Finder The following items are required for guidance to function e Tracking mode set to Row Finder Straight Track Adaptive Curves AB Curves Circle Track NOTE Circle Track is available for Parallel Tracking but the PivotPro module is required to AutoTrac in Circle Track mode e Track spacing See equi
327. ows concentric tracks based upon the track spacing NOTE It may be necessary to line the vehicle up on the center pivot tower track or use center shift track to get the tracks lined up with the vehicle Circle Center Information IMPORTANT Circle Track must be selected in order to operate Circle Track Guidance Circle Center information Latitude and Longitude coordinates is named occurs during Set Circle procedure and assigned to a Field Name where it can be recalled for future use Farm and Field names are setup and changed in the RESOURCES CONDITIONS softkey gt RESOURCES tab See Resources Conditions section of manual to setup farm and field names The circle center information is saved on the USB drive and can be taken to another GS3 display and recalled for circle track operation Desktop software can also download circle center information and save the information to additional USB drives NOTE If farm and field names are not created circle center information will be saved to the farm and field If operator desires to perform multiple passes in same field throughout year or years and follow exact same passes then they would recall corresponding circle center information from that farm and field For example during planting operator sets up a Circle Center and names it Continued on next page Pass 1 for River Farm gt East Field When the operator comes back to spray the field a month later t
328. ows the reset button for hours since service and the second shows the confirmation alarm On CAN Based vehicles the operator will need to select and HOLD the reset button for 3 seconds See list of CAN Based vehicles in APM section PC9100 UN 17APR06 Q h Time Since Last Reset Time Since Last Reset CZ76372 00000C1 19 15JUL10 2 2 60 7 062111 PN 151 Performance Monitor PERFORMANCE MONITOR CALIBRATIONS Percent Slip Zeroing The operator is able to calibrate the wheel slip to zero on certain vehicles if radar is installed NOTE Wheel slip zeroing and radar calibration are not possible on CAN based vehicles in the UPM The only time the user will be able to perform wheel Slip zeroing is if they are on a CCD vehicle When the operator initiates this function the radar will be commanded to a new wheel speed calibration such that the slip is now zero If the system determines a calibration is not possible under the current operating conditions then an alarm will be issued stating the calibration was not successful The first figure below shows the zero slip button that when selected brings up the wheel slip calibration page The remaining figures PC9118 UN 17APRO6 shy ear j Zero Slip Button show the calibration pages for a successful or failed slip calibration NOTE Vehicle must be traveling between 7 and 9 km h 4 5 to 5 5 mph before the zero slip button will be enabled R
329. party desktop software is required for transferring data and setup information between different John Deere Display models i e Original GreenStar Display GS2 1800 GS2 2600 and GS3 2630 Due to different file versions data will not load when transferred directly between different models CZ76372 00002DF 19 19APR11 1 1 Delete Data Options There are four options for deleting data from the display 1 Delete Coverage and Swath Control Maps e Delete at the end of the season or to create a new map with the same Field Name e Go to Menu gt gt GS3 gt gt Mapping gt gt Map Settings gt gt Clear 2 Delete Adaptive Curve Data e If using Adaptive Curves delete Curve Data when no longer needed to repeat these guidance lines e Go to Menu gt gt GS3 gt gt Guidance gt gt Guidance Settings tab gt gt Change Curve Track Settings gt gt Clear Data 3 Delete Documentation Data Only e This option may be used for the following reasons a You want to delete your planting rate maps after planting season so that there is less data on the display and data transfers will take less time during harvest b The internal memory is full e Go to Menu gt gt GS3 gt gt GS3 softkey gt gt Memory tab gt gt Erase Data gt gt Documentation Data 4 Delete All Data e All data and setup information will be deleted from the display This option is rarely used and may be used for the following reasons a Yo
330. party display is connected to the Implement Bus It is recommended that a second CANbus be installed if problems occur CZ76372 000028F 19 12JAN11 1 1 20 1 062111 PN 19 Installation Moving ISO Implement Applications between Two ISOBUS Displays When the display is installed on newer John Deere vehicles that have an ISOBUS compatible display installed on the armrest ISO implements can appear on either display Select Menu on each display to find the implement icons for any ISO implements that are connected such as SeedStar2 StarFire receiver or GS Rate Controller There are two possible ways to move ISO Implement applications to the other display Some ISO Implements are designed to remember which display they were on last and return to that display each time the vehicle is started These implements can be moved from one display to the next using a button found within the Settings pages of the implement application This function is sometimes called NEXT VT Read the implement operator manual to determine whether it has this functionality and how to use it Other ISO Implements will appear on the display that boots up first each time the vehicle is started If the user prefers that these implements always appear on the corner post display turn OFF Implement Bus communication on the armrest display Read the vehicle operator manual to learn how to turn the Implement bus OFF on the armrest display The sett
331. pendent upon the field boundary This information is not available if the field does not have a boundary The fuel data is approximate and tends to reflect a greater quantity than used A Box on Left B Upper Box on Right C Lower Box on Right Wet Vieki buac 182 5 Dry Viet bute 181 2 Average Moisture Fa 14 38 Wet Weight iby 123614 oe 2207 5 Dry Weight ee aie 122720 ow 2191 5 Wet Tivoughput buh 3485 Average Productivity acm 19 09 Area Worked me 12 09 Area Remaining iac Tiree Worked Time Remaining th Fuel Usage ga 0 0 Date Range 03 19 2009 03 24 2009 PC12835 UN 30AUG10 CZ76372 000015A 19 30AUG10 2 3 Pressing the button next to Current Field Totals A changes the screen to display load totals The load totals screen is the same as the field totals but only displays the totals accumulated since the last time the Save Load button was pressed A Field Load Totals B Harvest Combine Corn Green Star 2 Pro Repo Wet Vield Hess PE 181 2 Average Moisture iu 14 38 Wet Weight Zo 123614 ow 2207 5 Dry Weight ey 122720 gt 2191 5 Wet Tivoughput buh 3485 Average Productivity acm 19 09 A Worked na an A Area Remaining iac Tise Worked n 0 63 Time Remaining dh Fuel Usage tgan 0 0 Date Range 03 19 2009 03 24 2009 PC12836 UN 30AUG10 CZ76372 000015A 19 30AUG10 3 3 70 10 062111 PN 2
332. perating speed of the machine when the machine is moving These units will be expressed in terms of distance time The PM will calculate the value by dividing the total distance traveled by the vehicle since the last reset by the total engine hours accumulated when the vehicle is moving since the last reset Hours Continued on next page PC9091 UN 17APRO6 0 0 amp Average Operating Speed accumulated when the vehicle is sitting still will not contribute to these calculations CZ76372 00000C3 19 15JUL10 7 12 60 13 062111 PN 157 Performance Monitor Total Engine Hours Engine hours are a value that represents the number of tenths of an hour that the vehicle s engine has run since last reset Engine hours are only incremented when the engine RPM s are above 0 PC9092 UN 17APR06 0 0 4 Total Engine Hours CZ76372 00000C3 19 15JUL10 8 12 Total Idle Time The operator will be able to view a value that represents how much time the vehicle has spent in the idle state This value will increment any time the vehicle is running and is at idle The vehicle is considered to be at idle if all of the following conditions are met e Engine RPM is above 0 e Vehicle is not moving based on radar GPS or wheel speed sensor e Front and Rear PTO are disabled PC9093 UN 17APR06 0 0 Total Idle Time e All SCV s are in neutral or float If all of the conditions listed
333. peration mandatory details are not defined No operation details defined Go to GreenStar setup and enter operation info Invalid prescription Prescription file is invalid Verify rate units on prescription are correct Totals Client Undefined Alarm issued stating that the user must select a Client to view totals Totals Client and Farm defined Field undefined Alarm issued stating that the user must select a Field to view Field Task or Load Totals Totals CFF Task and Operation defined Crop Product Type undefined wm No Alarm Operation defaulted to and Task Totals are listed Totals CFF and Crop Product Type defined Task and or Operation undefined Alarm issued stating that the user must select a Task and Operation to view Field or Load Totals Totals Client Crop and Task defined Farm and Field undefined wm No Alarm Task and Operation defaulted to and Crop Totals are listed Reset totals to zero Are you sure you want to zero the totals listed below In order to record a product application you must choose a product type and product name on one of the ADD PRODUCT boxes Choices will be CHANGE which takes the user to the product summary screen or REMOVE OPERATION which will flash up the Are you sure you want to delete this operation message In order to record a product application you must choose a product type and product name on one of the Add Pro
334. performance Increasing steering responsiveness generally results in better tracking performance Higher settings Result in better tracking performance but may also cause increased wheel motion or jittery behavior Lower settings Results in decreased wheel motion but may also result in worse tracking performance Range 50 to 200 e Curve Sensitivity Determines how aggressively AutoTrac responds to a curve in the track This setting affects performance in curve track guidance only Higher settings Turn the vehicle in a smaller radius tighter around the curve Lower settings Turn the vehicle in a larger radius around the curve Range 50 to 200 f Acquire Sensitivity Determines how aggressively the vehicle acquires the track This setting affects performance while acquiring the track only High settings Result in more aggressive line acquisitions Lower settings Result in smoother line acquisitions Range 50 to 200 Follow Tuning Instructions First try to adjust the settings based on how it was characterized in Step 2 If familiar with how the settings affect performance proceed to the general tuning instructions if desired Although the customer s comfort needs to be taken into account try to tune the tractor based on lateral error on the GS3 and the tracks that tractor leaves behind After finding a reasonable set of parameters try running the tractor at different speeds to ensure the settings are still accepta
335. perly NOTE Apex is not available in all EAME countries Continued on next page A Verify that both the display and desktop software have the latest software versions Go to StellarSupport com to determine the latest versions for the display and Apex If using Apex make sure to have the proper items check marked e g Enterprise Products Resources etc when saving data to the USB drive Then select the correct drive letter for the USB drive by the GS3 2630 display option Q My AutoTrac Universal unit will not activate when get a StarFire signal in the mornings Do have to drive around for a while before the resume switch engages AutoTrac Universal A ATU relies solely on the StarFire Receiver to obtain information about the direction you are traveling Therefore if the signal has been acquired but no vehicle movement has taken place the Direction under Info AutoTrac will say unknown Watch this Direction while driving forward in a gentle curve As soon as it changes from Unknown to Forward the ATU unit will operate properly when you activate AutoTrac Q What is the proper way to cycle power on my GreenStar 3 display A Turn the key off the screen will go dark and the green LED light in the bottom right corner will go out After the LED light is off the system may be powered back on If the GS3 has been powered off for less than 24 hours it will power right up to the last screen used If it has been more than 24
336. ph 5 mph Press and hold Slip Switch A for a minimum of 3 seconds to zero out slip It is recommended to have an implement connected to the tractor but not engaged in the ground no load PC9122 UN 17APRO6 OQUO06050 0000CDC 19 310CT07 1 1 60 9 tea PN 153 Performance Monitor Calibrating Dual Beam Radar 1 Select Menu button 2 Select Performance Monitor button 3 Select Calibration Softkey Place check in Dual Beam Radar check box A 5 Select Calibrate B a Dual Beam Radar Check Box b Calibrate Box CZ76372 000027F 19 11JAN11 1 1 RADAR CONNECTION SIGNAL VALIDATION UPM MODE ONLY 1 Ensure the radar connected check box is checked in the setup screen This check box will only display in UPM mode In APM mode radar feed is designated by the wire connection behind the command center denoted in the Configuring Tractor section PC9123 UN 17APR06 Radar connected to display v Radar Connected Checkbox The GS3 display will display the GPS radar feed value when connected This value should be 57 42 during normal operation To view this value once connected CZ76372 00000B0 19 15JUL10 1 7 2 Select the Clock Icon PC9124 UN 17APRO06 10 55pm Clock Icon CZ76372 00000B0 19 15JUL10 2 7 3 Select Soft Key G Continued on next page Moonee Conky Omori Asters po N frenn Teens ons t PC9125 UN 17APR06
337. ping of ISO compliant auxiliary implement functions to ISO compliant auxiliary controls Example The display has been set up in a tractor that is attached to a sprayer A switch box has been installed in the tractor containing two switches Switch 1 and Switch 2 The sprayer has two functions that can be controlled by the switch box turning the pump on and off and turning the nozzles on and off The operator can choose which switch will turn the pump on and off and which switch will turn the nozzles on and off The tractor could be attached to a different implement and the switches could be assigned to control functions of that implement Also a different input device such as a joystick could be installed and that device could be assigned control over the sprayer s functions PC8663 UN O5AUG05 MENU button I DISPLAY button 2ZX1042167 UN 140CT08 2ZX1042166 UN 140CT08 AUXILIARY CONTROLS button OUCC002 00029E8 19 05DEC08 1 1 85 7 062111 PN 270 Auxiliary Controls Auxiliary Controls Page Implement Function Mapping Display Auxiliarv Controls Status Enabled Co E Less Input Device STOP a Unmapped V Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Ose implement ST Po foo Fos ae Foo Auxiliary Controls A Status Selection B View Selection C Input Device Selection D Input Selec
338. planted in a 6 female 2 male configuration PC10857UJ UN 30MAR10 4 3 12 16 20 24 Eo O DR RB E aa EEN 12 CZ76372 0000121 19 28SEP10 9 17 Seed corn planted with male rows set to NOT PLANTING PC10857UK UN 30MAR10 4 3 12 16 20 24 MENNEN SSSRRR FENERE EE ra 12 CZ76372 0000121 19 28SEP10 10 17 5 refuge with 4 contiguous rows and 1 2 planter one il eae i e Ee EE ii E ets 12 CZ76372 0000121 19 28SEP10 11 17 Population Seeds Acre If using a John Deere SeedStar planter this number is set using that monitor This is also true for any compatible controller installed If using a non John Deere SeedStar planter the target rate button is active on the GS3 display PC10857UO UN 31MAR10 EE Select Target Rate Button CZ76372 0000121 19 28SEP10 12 17 Select Rate Units Continued on next page Use 1 Rale fur All Drive Sactions CZ76372 0000121 19 28SEP10 PC10857UP UN 11MAY10 13 17 65 9 062111 PN 170 Documentation Select the target rate box B and enter the desired number on the key pad If using a multiple drive planter wipe W JEL oss check the box A to assign the target rate for each drive gt e efor section on the planter If multiple targeted rates are Rate SEeds ac ail Siva Sections i Units v lt desired un check box A and assign each drive section a
339. plement Type Drop Down E Implement Name Drop Down Menu Menu F Change Offsets Button Cut width can be adjusted in two places e GREENSTAR 3 PRO EQUIPMENT screen gt gt HEADER tab e One of two home pages options The width of the header is shown on the HEADER tab screen as Implement width Continued on next page D Implement Model Drop Down G Change Widths Button H lIncrease Cut Width Left J Overlap Control Check Box K Decrease Cut Width Right Hand Side Hand Side I Decrease Cut Width Left L Increase Cut Width Right Hand Side Hand Side Press arrows H I K and L to increase or decrease the amount of cut width on the left or right side The Overlap Control Check Box J allows the operator enable or disengage the overlap control feature CZ76372 0000183 19 24SEP10 2 3 65 35 062111 PN 196 Documentation Seed Type Corn Variety Variety 18889 let io Half Screen Home Page Option PC12914 UN 24SEP10 Cut Width Adjustment is available in either a full or half the actual width of crop coming into the header It also screen on the home page creates accurate on screen and desktop software maps When the header is raised it will automatically go back To combine less than a full cut press the arrows D or F to reduce the gray bar B to the correct width and correct placement along the width of the header A Arrows C NOTE Changin
340. pment section of GreenStar Pro General Setup e Track 0 Reference Path Point e GPS signal StarFire signal required for AutoTrac PC8663 UN O5AUG05 MENU button PC12685 UN 14JUL10 GREENSTAR 3 PRO button PC8673 UN 140CT07 GUIDANCE softkey The following items are optional when operating guidance NOTE If a client farm and field are selected only the Track 0 s for that field will be displayed e Client Farm and Field if not selected all Track 0 s are saved to Client Farm and Field e Documenting field operational data See setting Documentation Off in Documentation setup e Field Boundaries Field Boundaries are required to create a headland boundary and enable headland boundary alerts See Setup Mapping for more information e Flags e Coverage Map NOTE It is important that the system be setup properly Read and follow each procedure to assure proper setup and operation of the guidance system CZ76372 0000190 19 29SEP10 1 1 50 2 062111 PN 69 Guidance VIEW tab O3 End of Path Ahead Set AB Curve 1 30 000 ft PC12578 UN 22APR10 GREENSTAR 3 PRO GUIDANCE VIEW tab A View tab B Guidance Settings tab C Shift Track Settings tab D Off track Error E Path Accuracy Indicator F Guidance Icon G Zoom Out button H Zoom In button The VIEW tab allows the operator to view and or change the following e
341. pped to input 2 and both functions 2 and 4 to be If an input sets a single assignment icon it can only mapped on input 3 Input 4 remains blank be mapped to ONE implement function e The assignment lock icon B states that the assignment This is called a preferred assignment and is requested by is requested automatically by the implement and cannot the implement as soon as implement and input device be set manually by the operator are connected Once an assignment has been changed Continued on next page CZ76372 0000294 19 12JAN11 1 2 85 1 4 062111 PN 277 Auxiliary Controls NOTE Depending on the implement functions the preferred assignment can also differ between the implement manufacturers CZ76372 0000294 19 12JAN11 2 2 Auxiliary Controls Conflicts and Disabled Functions S O Auxiliary Controls Conflicts J S When a conflict occurs the GS3 display shows a yellow 7 square A next to the Auxiliary Control symbol in the amp message center button This allows the operator to S recognize conflicts at any time independently from the X screen he is working on NOTE The joystick icon appears only if Auxiliary A Contict Occurrence Aled Controls has been enabled Continued on next page CZ76372 0000295 19 12JAN11 1 5 85 1 5 062111 PN 278 Auxiliary Controls Input Device Input Unmapped Unmapped A View Selection B Conflicts C Mapped D
342. pping key G and complete all assignments before enabling Auxiliary Controls OUCC002 0002A57 19 280CT09 4 4 85 2 062111 PN 265 Auxiliary Controls Auxiliary Control Alerts Auxiliary Control Disabled IMPORTANT Auxiliary Control is disabled because requested assignments could not be completed Go to the Auxiliary Controls page to enable This message occurs when the system detects an Auxiliary Control and at least one of the requested assignments could not be completed It is necessary to check the Auxiliary Controls page by pressing the Mapping key G and review the assignments before Auxiliary Control can be enabled XXXX Auxiliary Controls Es Auxiliary Control Disabled Auxiliary Control is disabled because requested assignments could not be completed Go to the Auxiliary Controls page to enable S 8 7 TA S CZ76372 000005D 19 09JUL10 1 5 Auxiliary Control Configuration Changed gt A XXXX i Auxiliary C I IMPORTANT Auxiliary Control configuration changed EEE NRPS Auxiliary Control is disabled because requested assignments could not be completed Go to Auxiliary Control Disabled the Auxiliary Controls page to enable Auxiliary Control configuration changed Auxiliary This message occurs when the Auxiliary Control h i is Segoe Saisie etc 2 configuration has been modified during run time e g e Ep i Sa Gier HE PS additional input and or implement added and at
343. previous recorded pass Each pass is generated from the previous pass to ensure steering errors are not propagated through the Continued on next page The curvature of the path changes as the subsequent paths get more convex or concave entire field The generated passes are not identical copies of the original pass The curvature of the pass changes to maintain pass to pass accuracy When necessary the operator can change the curve path anywhere in the field by simply steering the machine off the propagated path NOTE Skip pass is not available in Curve Track mode CZ76372 00001A4 19 040CT10 1 20 50 24 062111 PN 91 Guidance Track 0 Setup Guidance Settings Implement Guidance Mode None General Settings Curve Track Settings PC12586 UN 29APR10 GreenStar 3 Pro Guidance A View C Shift Track Settings E Implement Guidance Mode G Curve Track Settings B Guidance Settings D Tracking Mode F General Settings 1 GUIDANCE SETTINGS tab gt gt TRACKING MODE drop down box Select ADAPTIVE CURVES IMPORTANT Track Spacing must be set for operation of this mode Set track spacing in EQUIPMENT softkey gt gt IMPLEMENT tab 2 Drive to desired location in the field for start of Track 0 Continued on next page CZ76372 00001A4 19 040CT10 2 20 50 25 062111 PN 92 Guidance Steer Sensitivity T GE Se 30 000 ft Steer Off
344. profile will be automatically saved and default setup data loaded Update your display software and importa valid profile Accept CZ76372 00002E5 19 19APR11 1 2 PC13253 UN 19APR11 Update Display Software When the Apex software needs to be updated to be compatible with the display software version the following warning will appear d GS3 GreenStar Setup Data Invalid The setup data was created with an older version of desktop software A backup profile will be automatically saved and default setup data loaded Update your desktop software and import a valid profile PC13254 UN 19APR11 Accept CZ76372 00002E5 19 19APR11 2 2 Update Desktop Software 120 7 062111 PN 315 Data Management Alarm GreenStar Setup Data Corrupt If the setup data in the internal memory of the display becomes corrupt the display will not fully boot up After the display tries to boot up 3 times unsuccessfully the following warning will appear After the alarm is accepted the display will boot up and all settings will be blank The setup information and data from the internal memory will be saved to a backup Profile in the internal memory and can be exported to a USB drive by the user The user has 2 options 1 Re enter the setup information manually The display will NOT be able to use the coverage maps and guidance lines in the backup Profile 2 Export Data and use
345. quencies L1 and L2 The L2 frequency is weaker than L1 and thin objects like tree leaves will block L2 easily where the L1 signal will go right through To run AutoTrac the StarFire requires a 5 satellites solution with full communication with the both the L1 and L2 frequencies from each satellite Q What is Optimize Shading A The Optimize Shading feature available with StarFire iTC software versions 3 01K and newer allows you to continue using AutoTrac when SF1 SF2 reception is degraded due to shading Optimize Shading allows a minimum of 4 satellites in solution with only L1 communication to maintain running AutoTrac Optimize Shading is only available with SF1 and SF2 on iTC receivers and will not function with RTK or Gen 2 receivers When using RTK the Optimize Shading checkbox is still displayed but it has no affect on the receiver Optimize Shading can be used with both Original and GS3 displays Q Does Optimize Shading Affect AutoTrac Accuracy A Although Optimize Shading allows the user to continue using AutoTrac it is operating on a degraded signal level and the operator can expect the system to be less accurate Line jumps and shifts may be more prevalent Optimize Shading does not affect GPS accuracy when all of the L1 and L2 frequencies are available to the receiver It merely allows AutoTrac to stay activated when GPS signal is degraded If the receiver has full signal Optimize Shading does not affect accur
346. r ensure Users know which function is mapped to each control Controls are properly labeled ZX1042321 UN 04DEC08 there are still assignments which are not complete It is necessary to review the Auxiliary Controls mapping screen by pressing the Controls key G and complete all assignments before enabling Auxiliary Controls CZ76372 0000282 19 12JAN11 4 4 10 3 062111 PN 13 Getting Started Theory of Operation IMPORTANT It is important to follow proper use guidelines with the touchscreen on the 2630 GS3 display Do not contact the touchscreen with an object harder or sharper than a fingertip pen pencil point or any metal objects Heavy pressure can also damage underlying components and void the touchscreen warranty Light amounts of pressure if exerted continuously can degrade touchscreen reliability The display is primarily used as an operator interface for guidance and documentation applications The primary navigational point of the display is the touchscreen which allows the operator to input information by touching the screen The 2630 can also use the display control which allows use of input buttons and thumb wheel GreenStar Basics Software The display comes standard with a basic software feature set e Manual Guidance e Documentation field and harvest e On Screen Mapping e Prescriptions e ISOBUS VT functionality When connected to a GPS receiver th
347. r Sprayer Spreader Pro Universal activation enables the Product Details function Product Details isn t available in all countries 1 If Product Details button B is grayed out define Variety A first 2 Press Product Details button B Product details screen will appear Continued on next page Variety 1 Variety Lot Number Iindicates B required field Product 2 Details Accept PC12870 UN 22SEP10 CZ76372 0000178 19 22SEP10 1 3 65 15 062111 PN 176 Documentation NOTE Max 25 entries could be added To add a detail press D This will open the Product Details Entry screen A Seed Type D Button for new data set B Variety E Cancel Back to prior page C Button to change or delete a data set Product Details Seed Type Corn RL variety Variety 1 Ab Genetically Modified Variety 1 Continued on next page PC12871 UN 22SEP10 CZ76372 0000178 19 22SEP10 2 3 65 16 062111 PN 177 Documentation Information Types available for Planting Seeding e Germination Rate e Genetically Modified e Priming Information e Thousand Corn Weight After the operator defines Type A input in fields below will be possible When operator has finished the input either confirm or cancel If Type A is setup to Genetically Modified the popup provides a check box B to mark whether the product is modif
348. r Management ei Guidance MW o 2 E vi Boundaries C T zZ Ed be N N O a GreenStar 3 Pro Main Green Star Main A lz H ze H 1 What settings do you want to change Resources JY iTEC Pro v Machine A Swath Control Pro C Implement Implement Guidance Documentation MW Water Management ei Guidance JY o 2 E vi Boundaries V i E 3 14am 8 Select the C Softkey to view Ral E Deaprostios indicates required SES Aug GreenStar 3 Pro Main successful setup Those fields are visually indicated to the operator Progressing through Advanced Setup without completing the required fields causes the system not to function correctly CZ76372 0000139 19 28APR11 1 1 45 2 062111 PN 39 GreenStar General EQUIPMENT softkey The equipment screen is used to record data by machine to document total area and hours Equipment settings are also used for inputs on implement size GPS receiver location etc Track spacing is used for machine guidance and coverage maps The GREENSTAR 3 PRO EQUIPMENT screen can contain up to four tabs MACHINE tab IMPLEMENT 1 tab IMPLEMENT 2 tab optional IMPLEMENT 3 tab optional PC8663 UN O5AUG05 PC12685 UN 14JUL10 MENU button GREENSTAR 3 PRO button PC8677 UN O5AUG05 EQUIPMENT softkey CZ76372 0000063 19 15JUL10 1 1 45 3 062111 PN 40 GreenStar General
349. r recalls saved circle center PASS 1 line up on desired track and use a one time shift track to allow for difference in implement widths Example 2 Operator is using SF2 and defines a circle center point by manually driving the circle The following day the operator returns to the field and finds that the AutoTrac is not lining up properly with the previous day s path due to GPS drift The operator must re drive the circle to find the Circle Center Point Shift Track Operation To move line to left press left shift track button To move line to right press right shift track button Each time the left or right button is pressed line will move the amount defined in the SHIFT TRACK SETTINGS tab To re center line on vehicle s current location press the center shift track button Accuracy in Slope Conditions Circle Track was designed for center pivot operation on ground with less than 2 slope Customers who use circle track on slopes greater than 2 need to be aware of the performance of circle track in these conditions and why circle track performs the way that it does In operating Circle Track in some slope conditions there are cases where the circle track spacing and the center pivot tower track will not match in tower tracks away from the center pivot This is due to the difference between distance traveled over a hill and on a level plane AutoTrac draws the circle spacing as if the plane were level The tower tracks obvio
350. rage Moisture Wet Throughput ee 2 The configuration is different for each type of operation This example sets up the Harvest Combine Operation Type Each field on the screen can be changed to show the information that you want to see for that operation Spaces Spaced Area Work ed and 6 with Load controls when Continued on next page Time Worked A v PC10857IG UN 25MAR09 PC10857IF UN 25MAR09 OU06050 0001076 19 06APR09 2 4 70 4 062111 PN 233 Totals 3 For Harvest operations checking the box at lower left replace some of the spaces with the controls for recording load data A Load Controls Check Box Totals Screen Layout ene SS Space 1 Wet Yield Space 2 Ory viet Space Dry Yield E v Spaces Space 3 Space 6 HESA Dreri S Es Fa Replace spaces 1 2 3 and6 with Load controls when i viewing Load Totals z 7 I 5 8 5 a OQUO06050 0001076 19 O6APRO9 3 4 4 The Totals screen for the softkey region can be configured in the same way On both screens some of the regions can be left blank to make the remaining numbers stand out more clearly In this way the home page can be built to meet the needs of the individual inst mi operator with either a few key numbers or with a RG detailed screen that shows everything happening in the operation 2 ZS E FA 7 N 8 CH W a OQU06050 0001076 19 O6APR09 4
351. rage Only map data or As Applied map data from the map view e Current Field K e All Farms and Fields L Maps are retained through power cycles and will remain until a Clear Field Map Data button is used to clear the map s Returning to a partially applied field will prompt the user to clear map or continue field task Display GPS Accuracy on Coverage Map M Check this box to make the Coverage Only map paint orange when the Starfire receiver has reduced GPS accuracy CZ76372 000014E 19 28APR11 12 13 45 19 062111 PN 56 GreenStar General Displaying GPS Accuracy on Coverage Map This feature is specifically designed for Swath Control on Planters but can be useful for any precision application The Coverage Only map will paint an orange color when the GPS accuracy drops below the desired threshold It will continue to paint blue when GPS accuracy is acceptable Operating with reduced GPS accuracy may cause skips and overlaps when using Swath Control Turn on the feature by checking GPS ACCURACY in Map Settings MENU gt gt GREENSTAR 3 PRO gt gt MAPPING gt gt MAP SETTINGS gt gt check GPS ACCURACY box The threshold for desired GPS accuracy aligns with the black line in the GPS Accuracy Indicator bar graph under the StarFire receiver icon See your StarFire manual for more information on the GPS Accuracy Indicator The threshold that causes the Coverage Map to paint orange
352. rding new adaptive curve lines Adaptive curves repeat mode is enabled Do Press No to cancel leaving repeat mode on you want to turn It off NOTE The Repeat Mode Enabled alarm is displayed Press YES to turn repeat mode off and begin when repeat mode for adaptive curves is checked recording new adaptive curve lines and the user tries to record new adaptive curves Press NO to cancel leaving repeat mode on 2 A LI wn N 7 E Zeg D i PS N O a Repeat Mode Enabled Continued on next page CZ76372 00001A4 19 040CT10 10 20 50 3 1 062111 PN 98 Guidance Operating Curve Track SEET Steer Sensitivity SOE DLA 30 000 ft Steer Off PC12636 UN O09JUN10 GreenStar 3 Pro Guidance IMPORTANT RTK Absolute Base Mode is required in 12684 UN 09JUN10 high accuracy applications when repeatability is needed Only RTK Absolute Base Mode Ga provides consistent repeatability and accuracy in Curve Track Curve Track Record Button To start using Curve Track A View C ShiftTrack Settings GUIDANCE softkey gt gt VIEW tab select RECORD B Guidance Settings D Record button Recording button Circle Pause button To start using Adaptive Curves GUIDANCE softkey gt gt VIEW tab select RECORD button Drive initial pass IMPORTANT Recording has to be on to record NOTE No navigation line will appear until end of pass initial pass and to propag
353. re the new additional assignments can be used Selecting the Learn Mode allows the operator to map the functions semi automatically Therefore it is necessary to select the implement specific function on the Auxiliary Controls page and set any input device function IMPORTANT The preferred assignments which have been requested automatically by an implement with an assignment lock icon cannot be changed manually in the Learn Mode CZ76372 0000295 19 12JAN11 5 5 85 19 062111 PN 282 COM Port Assignment Why Assign the COM Port The RS232 Serial COM Port setup is necessary to connect different control unit or components to the GS3 display The GS3 Display features two serial COM ports to allow connection to the following components e In cab printer e N Sensing e Inoculant Dosing e Field Doc Connect e Serial Port on GPS Receiver Go to www StellarSupport com to check for other component compatibility Each Com Port can be assigned to a user profile and be automatically reloaded upon machine type selection See Setup Com Port Section IMPORTANT Connect the component to the GS3 display before setting up a Com Port see Setup Com Port section Once this component is disconnected from the GS3 display the relevant Com Port and Profile MUST be deactivated see Deactivate Com Port section CZ76372 0000051 19 09JUL10 1 1 90 1 062111 PN 283 COM Port Ass
354. rees from track Off track error too large Vehicle not within 40 of track spacing Out of seat Out of seat too long Oil temp too cold Hydraulic oil not above minimum required temperature No TCM corrections Make sure TCM is turned on Invalid SSU activation Need SSU activation code See John Deere dealer SSU in diagnostic mode Fuse is in diagnostic slot in vehicle fuse box remove fuse Header off Header was turned off Road mode In transport gear Invalid SSU voltage See John Deere dealer Reverse timeout In reverse gear for more than 45 seconds Vehicle too slow AutoTrac below minimum speed Curve too sharp Maximum curvature has been exceeded Vehicle not moving in a forward direction Vehicle must be in forward gear to activate Vehicle shutting down Vehicle is shutting down Gear data error See John Deere dealer Resume switch error See John Deere dealer Keyswitch error See John Deere dealer SPFH AutoTrac switch is not on Make sure SPFH AutoTrac switch is turned on SPFH Quick Stop switch is on Make sure SPFH Quick Stop switch is turned off AutoTrac Deactivation Messages Turn Predictor Headland Alert A visual indicator is displayed 10 seconds before approaching a predicted turning point or headland must be defined When the system detects a predicted turning point or headland the dis
355. rformance will vary by platform due to inherent vehicle design differences For example track tractors give an operator very good accuracy control but a sprayer or 4WD tractor loses some of that accuracy control due to differences in drive train and steering response Ground speed also affects performance With the ability to operate at higher speeds operators need to remember higher speeds impact Continued on next page performance Using AutoTrac above 19 km h 12 mph especially when using Curve Track will give accuracy on the ground that may be less than desirable for some row crop applications Please refer to machine operator s manual for complete recommendations on ballast Tracking Mode Tracking Mode refers to the AutoTrac mode being used with the system Straight Track Circle Track or Curve Track With Straight Track and Curve Track multiple A B lines can be set based off the initial track and implement width However in Adaptive Curve mode the track is navigated from the last recorded pass While John Deere Curve Track software smooths the track to record a better curved line there is still the opportunity for greater error on the ground with Curve Track than in both Straight Track and Circle Track Once all tracks have been laid and the vehicle is operating in repeat mode the vehicle still has the possibility for increased error due to the machine characteristics while navigating through a curve pass GPS Signa
356. ries Sprayer is in field gears e 5430i Series Sprayer is in 1st 2nd or 3rd range e Vehicle speed is less than 37 km h 23 mph Continued on next page e 4900 Series Sprayer is in Field Mode e 5430i Sprayer is in 1st 2nd or 3rd range and transport lock out switch is off e Hydraulic oil is warmed to minimum specification Specification Hydraulic Oil Minimum Temperature Tempera TEE 10 C 50 F e TCM must be installed and turned on Activating System S T 5 J S 4720 4920 30 Series and 5430i Sprayers Resume Switch e Vehicle heading is within 45 degrees of desired track above 11 3 km h 7 mph Vehicle heading is within 80 of desired track below 11 3 km h 7 mph e Off track error is within 40 of track spacing e Operator is seated e TCM is on e In reverse AutoTrac will remain activated for 45 seconds After 45 seconds the machine must be put in forward gear before reverse will activate again e On 5430i Sprayers AutoTrac is only possible in 2 wheel steering mode When operating in 4 wheel steering mode and AutoTrac is activated the rear wheels are going to be centred in neutral position and the system switches set to 2 wheel steering mode automatically When the operator activates the 4 wheel steering mode again AutoTrac will be disabled Deactivating System 2 CAUTION Always turn off Deactivate and Disable AutoTrac system before entering a roadway To turn off AutoTrac from GUIDANCE
357. rn on Activate AutoTrac system while transporting on a roadway IMPORTANT Although the AutoTrac system can be activated when SF2 correction signal is confirmed system accuracy may continue to increase after powering up the system NOTE Resume switch location may vary depending on vehicle model and year Press resume switch Right foot pedal or optional left hand command arm PC10470 UN 31AUG07 In order to activate the system the following criteria must be met e Ground drive controls are in forward and within 15 percent of each other e Forward vehicle speed is greater than 1 6 km h 1 mph AutoTrac system can be deactivated by the following e Vehicle heading within 80 degrees of desired track methods e Machine is within 40 percent of track spacing e Moving either Ground Drive levers more than 10 e Operator is seated degrees from the opposite control lever e Placing Ground Drive lever in neutral e Slowing to speeds less than 1 6 km h 1 mph e Degradation of differential correction signal from SF2 to KE Always turn off Deactivate and Disable SF1 for longer than 3 minutes Foot Switch Deactivating System AutoTrac system before entering a roadway e Pressing the Steer On Off button on the main run screen To turn off AutoTrac from GUIDANCE VIEW tab toggle STEER ON OFF button until e Operator out of seat for more than 5 seconds STEER OFF is displayed CZ76372 00001AE 19 010CT10 1 1 A
358. rnational Organization for Standardization ISO 11783 The purpose of ISO 11783 is to enable electronic units to communicate with each other providing a standardized system that is easy to read and understand The operator can use the display as a tractor performance monitor and a monitor for an ISO 11783 compliant implement Software updates are published at www StellarSup port com Each display also comes with a GreenStar Live Update CD Live Update can be installed on an internet connected PC and alert the user when updates to the display are available Live Update guides the user through the downloading process The download is stored on a USB drive and inserted into the display to complete the update CZ76372 0000285 19 12JAN11 1 1 15 1 062111 PN 14 Getting Started Front of Display LED B indicates power mode of display Cold boot progress bar is black with a yellow background Cold boot up occurs when the GS3 display has been powered down for over 6 hours or loses unswitched power It takes 60 80 seconds to power up Warm boot progress bar is yellow with a black background Warm boot up occurs when the GS3 display has been operating in the last 6 hours and has NOT lost unswitched power during that time It takes 20 30 seconds to power up Shutting Down or Standby mode LED is orange IMPORTANT If LED is FLASHING ORANGE and the screen is blank an out of range temperature condition is detected T
359. round an obstacle that deviation to the propagated path will be recorded and become a part of the path On the next pass when you approach the area in the field the propagated path for the pass that the machine is on will have incorporated that deviation and the machine will steer along that deviation To straighten out that deviation the operator must take over manual steering of the machine and straighten out that deviation Once the operator has driven past the deviation in the field and reacquired the Continued on next page C Gap Results in Next Path PC9030 UN 17APRO6 D Manually Driven to Reestablish Path intended path the resume switch may be engaged and AutoTrac will take over machine steering Recording OFF If recording is turned off when the obstacle is approached and steered around and then recording turned back on once the obstacle has been navigated around and AutoTrac activated to finish the pass there will be a gap in the recorded path where the obstacle is On the next path when the machine approaches the gap the operator must take over manual steering of machine and navigate through the gap Once the gap has been navigated and the propagated path is reacquired AutoTrac can be activated and the gap will not appear in subsequent passes CZ76372 00001A4 19 040CT10 15 20 50 35 062111 PN 102 Guidance Guidance Patterns The method of searching all line segments allows an
360. rs or feet for cut width to change on RUN PAGE 1 screen Use numeric keypad to input correct header width in meters or feet CZ76372 000017E 19 24SEP10 2 5 65 31 062111 PN 192 Documentation Selecting Recording There are different methods of starting recording and these methods will change based model of combine and moisture sensor The most common method is the Record Stop Height The operator raises the header to the desired height for recording to shut off Press the button next to Save anda percentage height will be saved If the header is lowered PC12876 UN 24SEP10 Record Stop Height 10 0 F Record Stop Height below that percentage recording will turn on If it is raised above that percentage recording will turn off CZ76372 000017E 19 24SEP10 3 5 Setting Yield Area Units This screen is a continuation of SETUP HARV MON PAGE 1 screen This screen allows operator to choose Yield Units and Area Units that will be displayed on RUN pages It also allows operator to configure RUN pages and turn on and off printer functions Area Units To select units of area select AREA UNITS button on SETUP HARV MON PAGE 2 screen AREA UNITS button will toggle between ACRES and HECTARES Selection will appear boxed in capital letters HEE HR SE SE A H D P PAGE SETUP INFO alli D z Continued on next page Bad Hary Mon REA Y
361. s SpreadStar is a trademark of Deere amp Company e Additional ISOBUS compatible implements are listed on www StellarSupport com To view available software and enter code to activate Swath Control see OBTAINING ACTIVATION CODE amp ACTIVATING SOFTWARE IN DISPLAY It is found in Display Setup section NOTE A 15 hour demo activation is available on every new display The 15 hours count down when Swath Control is activated and the master switch is on When the demo period is over Swath Control is unavailable until the activation code is purchased through a John Deere Dealer and entered into the display CZ76372 000029B 19 28APR11 1 1 Boundaries Boundaries though optional can be helpful when using Swath Control Using Minimize Overlap an exterior boundary can help ensure there is no application outside of the field if a section extends over the boundary Similarly a setting of Minimize Overlap on an interior boundary allows driving across a waterway and helps ensure that each section is off while crossing See GREENSTAR GENERAL BOUNDARY section for more details OU06050 00011F8 19 10SEP09 1 1 Coverage Map The As Applied coverage map is used to show where the vehicle has applied product The Coverage Only is used to show where the vehicle has been in the field same coverage map that is displayed on guidance pages See the GreenStar General Maps Tab section of this Operators Manual for details on
362. s e License Used to document applicator license for operator e Crop Season Used to separate data from different crop seasons CONDITIONS tab e Temperature PC8663 UN O5AUG05 MENU button PC12685 UN 14JUL10 GREENSTAR 3 PRO button PC8676 UN O5AUG05 Resource Conditions softkey e Wind Speed e Wind Direction e Sky Condition e Humidity e Crop Growth Stage e Soil Moisture e Soil Temperature CZ76372 000018E 19 18APR11 1 1 Fields Change Field Name Client Farm and Field name can be selected manually or automatically Several types of setup data are tied to Field Names including guidance lines maps and documentation data If fields have external boundaries saved in the display the field settings can be selected automatically and the operator will be alerted when the implement is completely out of the field NOTE Field Names can only be edited or deleted individually using Apex or another type of desktop software To delete all data and setup info in the display Backup data to a USB drive and select that option CZ76372 0000288 19 12JAN11 1 1 45 14 062111 PN 51 GreenStar General Field Locator Field Exit Detected Press the map to find fields O PC12863 UN 16SEP10 With external boundaries setup and Field Locator On Off box checked found in the resources and conditions tab when the implement leaves the current field tex
363. s on the same CANbus The Implement Bus may be turned ON or OFF on the armrest display depending on user preference Installation 1 Turn OFF vehicle 2 Attach the display harness to the corner post connector and the 26 pin display connector on the back of the display 3 Turn ON the vehicle The armrest display may display a message stating that another John Deere display has been detected If it does not see the vehicle Operator Manual to check that the Multiple Display settings are set correctly on the armrest display 4 Restart the vehicle so that both displays can reboot When both displays power up some applications will be set to ON or OFF on each display as shown in the table below If the armrest display MODE found on the Multiple Display Settings page is set to CUSTOM and the applications are not set as desired select RESTORE TO DEFAULT SETTINGS on the Multiple Display Settings on the armrest display Application Corner Post Display Armrest Display GreenStar ON OFF Original GreenStar ON OFF Display Emulator Implement Bus ON OFF Controller ON OFF Programming Task Controller ON ON Default Multiple Display Configuration Implement Bus is the only application that can be user configured to be ON or OFF on the armrest display Turn the Implement bus OFF for all ISO Implement applications to move to the other display NOTE The armrest display may not function properly if a third
364. s your John Deere dealer can assist in field installing GPS or a radar device CAN Based tractors equipped with radar must be re configured when switching to GPS receiver as the true ground speed input signal or vice versa for calibrating the ground based radar PC9120 UN 17APR06 Certain CAN Based vehicles will need CCU and TECU vehicle address configuration changes to enable radar operation Please see your John Deere Dealer for service support 1 Remove screw A and Command Center B 2 Inside right hand console locate console one wire lead marked GPS and one marked Radar Remove radar plug C from wiring connector E 4 Remove GPS plug D from dust cap F 5 Install GPS plug into connector and radar plug into dust cap 6 Install Command Center with previously removed screw PC9121 UN 17APRO6 A Screw D GPS Plug HDA EE B Command Center E Connector A C Radar Plug F Dust Cap Connect GPS side of Harness OU06050 0000CDB 19 08NOV07 1 1 Dual Beam Radar Sensor Only Automatic Calibration On tractors equipped with factory or dealer installed dual beam radars it is not necessary to calibrate vehicle speed Reset wheel slip value if e Wheel speed and radar speed are not equal when slip is not present Wheel slip is displayed where slip should not be present e Change tire size Reset slip value by driving tractor on a hard level surface at a constant speed of 8 k
365. s Product Details button A S Product details screen will appear Continued on next page LX1048292 CZ76372 0000179 19 22SEP10 1 3 65 20 062111 PN 181 Documentation NOTE Max 25 entries could be added To add a detail press F This will open the Product Details Entry scre A Type en B Name or Variety C Value designat D Value designat or 1 or 2 E Button to change or delete a data set F Button for new data set G Cancel Back to prior page Product Details Product Type Herbicide Product Name senct lt i D Buffer Zone Water 25 0 m Waiting Time Content H 12 00 Buffer Zone Pavement LX1048297 UN 24AUG09 Information Types available for Product Application e Active Ingredient e Indication e Buffer Zone e Content e Waiting Time After the operator defines field E an input in field F G and H is possible When operator has finished the input either confirms with K or cancel with J Delete Data Set 1 Select field E 2 Choose 3 Press button K A Type B Name C Units D Value E Dropdown list changed can t be F Dropdown list can be changed G Units dropdown list can t be changed H Value field J Cancel back to Product Details Screen K Accept changes back to Product Details Screen LX1048298 UN 24A
366. s Tab D Settings Tab E Coverage Map Legend F As applied Rates G Swath Control Master On Off H Section Status bar 40000 Y atual 20 0 ctual 10 0 ctual 10 0 wl O swan H Control Master Summary Screen wi v E e PC13237 UN 13APR11 CZ76372 00002C7 19 13APR11 1 1 Section Status Bar The Section Status bar displays different states depending on a couple factors The bars are colored blue if the operation that they are connected to has liquid units gal L and then are colored green if the operation has dry units Ibs kg seeds The Status bars will also be displayed with e A a solid box when the section is enabled and turned on e B a hashed box when the section is enabled by the implement controller but not turned on PC13243 UN 28APR11 CD eel EE LLL LALA B LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL L e Section Status Bar A Solid Box B Hashed Box C Outlined Box e C an outlined box when the section is disabled by the implement controller CZ76372 00002D1 19 28APR11 1 1 75 4 062111 PN 245 Swath Control View by Operation The View by Operation tab displays similar information to the Summary tab but only displays one operation at a time Operation buttons E above the map are labeled and arranged in the same manner that operation tabs are organized in Documentation Choose between different operations by selecting t
367. s if vehicle is differential correction traveling within the speed range limitations of the e H Differential Mode Selected Indicates the platform AutoTrac is operating on differential correction mode selected on the StarFire e Q Within 80 Degrees of Line Indicates if vehicle receiver SF1 SF2 RTK heading is within 80 degrees of the track the vehicle e I Tracking Mode Selected Displays which tracking is trying to acquire mode is currently selected e R Within 40 Tracking Width Indicates if vehicle off track error is within 40 of the track spacing Continued on next page CZ76372 00001A8 19 010CT10 24 25 50 69 062111 PN 136 Guidance AutoTrac System Accuracy Accuracy Equation AutoTrac System Accuracy GPS Signal Accuracy Steering Kit Type Vehicle Setup Tracking Mode Implement Setup Field Soil Conditions GPS Signal Accuracy The starting point of any system is the receiver Guidance begins with that receiver receiving raw GPS signals from satellites and a differential correction to that signal Raw GPS tells the receiver approximately where it is and the differential correction signal hones into its actual position Fifteen minute pass to pass accuracy is the range of accuracy that a customer will experience in typical conditions For example the SF1 signal has a 15 minute pass to pass accuracy of 33 cm 13 in 95 of the time This means that the accuracy of a StarFire iTC with SF1 signal
368. s the USB drive back to the farmer The Farmer deletes Documentation Data Only and Clears Maps from the displays internal memory so that Export times are faster during harvest Setup information guidance lines and boundaries remain on the display See the Data Type Details table to determine what data will be deleted for each option During Harvest Season 1 At the end of each day during harvest the farmer Exports data to the same Profile named Harvest 2011 This way the Planting 2011 Profile remains on the USB as a backup CZ76372 00002DC 19 19APR11 1 1 Example 3 Transferring Guidance Lines Operators 1 and 2 are both planting in the same field with 12 and 24 row planters respectively and would like to operate on the same guidance tracks Both machines have GS3 2630 displays Below is one method to properly manage the data on both displays 1 Operator 1 enters the field first and creates a straight track naming it Planter N S 2011 2 After 1 pass Operator 1 Exports the data from his display to a USB drive naming the Profile 2011 5 3 Planter 12 row 3 Operator 2 is given the USB drive and first Exports the data from his display so that no data is lost when he Imports the Profile from Operator 1 He Exports to the same USB drive using a different Profile name 2011 5 3 Planter 24 row Now there are now 2 Profiles in the GS3_2630 folder on the USB drive Operator 2 then Imports t
369. se box remove fuse Header off Header was turned off Road mode In transport gear Invalid SSU voltage See John Deere dealer Reverse timeout In reverse gear for more than 45 seconds Vehicle too slow AutoTrac below minimum speed Curve too sharp Maximum curvature has been exceeded Vehicle not moving in a forward direction Vehicle must be in forward gear to activate Vehicle shutting down Vehicle is shutting down Gear data error See John Deere dealer Resume switch error See John Deere dealer Keyswitch error See John Deere dealer SPFH AutoTrac switch is not on Make sure SPFH AutoTrac switch is turned on SPFH Quick Stop switch is on Make sure SPFH Quick Stop switch is turned off AutoTrac Deactivation Messages CZ76372 00000B9 19 09JUL10 1 1 130 24 062111 PN 342 Specifications Device Name Source Address and File Directory File Directory GS3 claims multiple CAN addresses some of which are inherited from legacy system to be more compatible with legacy controllers Device Name Source Address GS3 0x18 Basic Perf Monitor PrF GS3 0x26 Virtual Terminal on Implement Bus VTi GS3 0x26 Virtual Terminal on Vehicle Bus VTv GS3 Ox2a Guidance NAV GS3 0x2b Mobile Processor App MPD GS3 0x80 Original GreenStar
370. seed 5 Select the Rate Units pounds tons ounces or seeds per acre IMPORTANT Selecting the wrong units result in under or over application of product 6 Out of Field Rate default rate control unit uses if outside the field boundary 7 Loss of GPS Rate default rate control unit uses if GPS signal is lost Shapefile Conversion Product Type a Rate Units Out of Field Rate Loss of GPS Rate el m gt PC12747 UN 27AUG10 Shapefile Conversion Home Page 8 Once steps 1 7 are completed select ENTER button 9 To cancel all changes select the cancel button CZ76372 0000329 19 14JUN11 2 6 Shapefile Conversion in Progress Once the correct shapefile is selected and the values have been entered correctly in the Shapefile Conversion Page the shapefile conversion process begins NOTE NOTE The shapefile conversion process could take up to 30 seconds You can cancel the shapefile conversion process by selecting the cancel button Selecting the CANCEL button takes you back to the Shapefile Conversion Page Shapefile Conversion Shapefile conversion in progress Please wait Continued on next page PC12854 UN 31AUG10 CZ76372 0000329 19 14JUN11 3 6 65 63 062111 PN 224 Documentation Shapefile Conversion Failed If a shapefile cannot be converted this screen appears There are 7 different errors e File is missing or corrupt M
371. sel 13am A View D Port 2 G Implement Name J Baud Rate B lInformation E Profile H Controller Protocol K Communication Status C Port 1 F Port Type I Model L Operation When a machine is selected in the Machine Implement The information B column displays a summary of Setup tab GreenStar 3 Pro Equipment screen the associated profile is automatically recalled and loaded e E Profile name relevant to each Com Port Port Type G Implement Name H Controller Protocol 1 Model of Control Unit J Baud Rate transmittion speed K Communication Status active inactive L Operation Type Product Application To display the relevant COM Port profile for a specific machine proceed as follows e F Si ef 1 Select MENU button gt GREENSTAR 3 PRO button gt WW EQUIPMENT sofkey H gt MACHINE tab then select the desired Machine type S e 2 To review the Com Port Settings for this specific machine press DIAGNOSTIC softkey C 3 Select COM PORT in the VIEW A drop down box The information table B appears and displays the Port 1 C and Port 2 D profile assignments CZ76372 0000146 19 23AUG10 1 1 062111 90 6 PN 288 COM Port Assignment Deactivate COM Port GreenStar Equipment Mapping Machine Type Offsets lp Tractor 0 0 in Machine Model Connection Type Rear Rigid 3 pt Recording Source GE chen Radius Sensitivity
372. sequence or don t have my sequences properly named CZ76372 00002FA 19 28APR11 3 3 1 30 9 062111 PN 327 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Reprogramming Error Codes Error Number Meaning What to Do Reprogramming could not create a directory on the internal file system User should try again but 8 Directory creation error the session may fail again Check that all update files have been correctly saved to the USB flash drive all files listed in 12 Missing update file ManifestFile sdm should be on the drive in their proper path Reprogramming was not able to read one of the update files Check for file corruption when the 14 File read error files were saved to the drive Reprogramming was not able to write one of the update files to internal flash File system cleanup 16 File write error problem reboot the display and try again Reprogramming received a file handle that was not valid check validity of USB drive to make 37 Invalid file handle sure it matches the original image Reprogramming calculated a checksum that did not match the expected checksum Check that all 44 Checksum failed files match the original image Reprogramming parsed a file for a PF controller that was invalid Check that all files match the 45 Controller file invalid original image Customer is using an incorrect hardware revision version as the reprogramming image for the 47
373. signment Negative Response OUCC002 00029ED 19 04DEC08 4 4 85 13 062111 PN 276 Auxiliary Controls Auxiliary Controls Preferred Assignments Display Auxiliary Controls Status Enabled Function Implement 1 Unmapped Unmapped E m s GEN ee a gt Unmapped V Unmapped es A Single Assignment Icon B Assignment Lock Icon ZX1042158 UN 04DEC08 Auxiliary Controls allow an implement to request a by the operator the implement may store the mapping preferred assignment for a specific input The preferred as the new preferred assignment for this particular assignment depends on the input device and implement configuration If joystick and implement are disconnected configuration and reconnected at a later date the implement is able to reload the assignments again Example g g Based on input device and or implement requirements the A joystick 4 inputs and an implement 4 functions are assignments may be limited connected to the vehicle e The single assignment icon A can be set by an auxiliary function and or input If an implement function sets a single assignment icon it can only be mapped separately to ONE button e Input 1 function 1 e Input 2 function 3 e Input 3 function 2 and 4 e Input 4 not assigned of the input device and no additional function can be In this example the implement requests function 3 to assigned to this button be ma
374. sing a John Deere Air Cart each tank will be mmotement Name 1890 1990 42ft represented by an operation EEAO OIG Two Tank Cart The far left tab will always represent the front tank The second tab will represent the rear tank on erg a two tank cart Three Tank Cart The far left tab represents the front tank The second tab represents the middle tank A third ag O Add E tab will appear for the rear tank S Fill out each operation for each tank even if applying the i same product from two or more tanks 7 All aircart tanks will be represented by an operation S tab even if they are turned off The target rate will be z displayed as 0 for tanks that are turned off NOTE Before setting up Documentation make sure the A Select Seed Type G Assign Variety to Tank Air Cart is fully set up and connected to the tractor B Displays Name of H Bar Color indicates Variety See your aircart operator s manual for procedure Prescription if chosen Chosen C Implement Name I Section Variety is Assigned P D Variety Entered To Seed Type Selection E Tab Used to Add Variety J Disable Operation Button F Target Rate If using K Advanced Settings Select seed type from drop down box A SeedStar2 this is set on L Allows Operator to Apply When choosing the seed type A from drop down menu that monitor If using Prescription SC non Deere you can enter if the list is too long the user may check and re
375. so many times the turn on time is slightly greater than the turn off time Keep in mind that your ground speed only affects the distance traveled while the machine reaction delay is taking place and that the distance traveled varies between turn on and turn off times and from operator to operator PC10857WT UN 07JUN10 NO SWATH CONTROL Two Ranked Tools Entering Then Leaving Headland A Rank 1 B Rank 2 C System Delay D Switch Off System Delay Overlap A and Overlap B Continued on next page E Actual Off F Switch On G Actual On BA31779 0000174 19 28APR11 1 4 75 10 062111 PN 251 Swath Control System Delay Overlap A and Overlap B BA31779 0000174 19 28APR11 2 4 PC10857WU UN 07JUN10 NORMAL SWATH CONTROL Two Ranked Tools Entering Then Leaving Headland A Rank 1 B Rank 2 C System Delay D Actual Off E Swath Command F Actual On System Delay No Overlap A and No Overlap B System Delay Overlap A and No Overlap B Continued on next page BA31779 0000174 19 28APR11 3 4 75 11 062111 PN 252 Swath Control PC10857WV UN 07JUN10 RANKED TURN ON Two Ranked Tools Entering Then Leaving Headland A Rank 1 C System Delay E Ranked Turn On G Swath Command B Rank 2 D Rank Delay F Actual Off H Actual On System Delay No Overlap A and No Overlap B System Dela
376. so return to the current totals by pressing the pen Worked 0 04 View Current Totals button at the lower left of the screen 2 9 ime Remaining Z th A Refresh Filter Button C View Current Totals Button gas ane 0 0 8 B Modify Custom Filter OMA Paapa eee aa S Button a ah ted 2 CZ76372 000015B 19 040CT10 3 3 70 1 2 062111 PN 241 Swath Control Theory of Operation Swath Control is an optional software activation that can be purchased and activated on a display Swath Control is an operator assistance tool that can turn machine and implement sections on and off automatically Swath Control utilizes the following components for operation e Global Positioning System GPS receiver e Display activated with Swath Control e Capable control units Swath Control utilizes the previous as applied coverage and boundaries exterior interior and exterior headland to determine section status CZ76372 00002F2 19 28APR11 1 1 Compatibility IMPORTANT Swath Control only functions on vehicles and implements with compatible software e JD 4000 Series self propelled sprayer with SprayStar version 5 11 or higher e All versions of SpreadStar e JD Horst 700i 800i and 5430i Sprayer Europe Only e All versions of Rate Controller e All versions of Rate Controller Dry e All versions of SeedStar 2 Planters Air Carts and 1990CCS SeedStar 2 planters must be equipped with Individual Row Unit Clutche
377. sors need to be calibrated to achieve more accurate seed cotton weights shown on the display in the field This is done by performing a QUICK CAL or STANDARD CAL after a Row Compensation Calibration is performed in uniform crop STANDARD Cal which uses actual scale weights is the best form of calibration to use in order to attain more accurate cotton weights Once calibrated additional calibration may be used for any substantial changes in types of cotton variety change moisture crop management quality of defoliation weeds irrigated vs non irrigated crop conditions etc Any of these condition changes in cotton could cause shift in accuracy of the system Throughout the season it is recommended to check accuracy by weighing the cotton Recalibration is suggested if you find that the system is not accurate CZ76372 0000182 19 24SEP10 1 5 65 56 062111 PN 217 Documentation Row Compensation Screen SETUP STANDARD CAL Press SETUP gt gt HARVEST MONITOR gt gt YIELD CALIBRATION gt gt STANDARD CALIBRATION gt gt ROW COMPENSATION NOTE Only perform once This only needs to be performed after system has been installed or if sensor attachment has changed in any way 1 Press START button to begin procedure NOTE Sample must be of a uniform yield for all rows being harvested Sale Compensation Perform once for new system Perform in uniform crop for all rows being harvested If uniformit
378. sponsiveness determines how quickly the system can compensate for off track error The recommended Steering Wheel Speed setting should be adjusted until there is slightly less wheel motion than what is considered excessive by the operator Aggressive S ing Motion The two main adjustments to address aggressive s ing motion are Line Sensitivity Heading and Heading Lead Start by increasing Heading Lead to enable the system to look further ahead when making corrections If this is unsuccessful the likely cause is overaggressive Line Sensitivity Heading and this gain should then be reduced Forcing this gain low may require an increase in the Line Sensitivity Tracking Lateral gain to maintain the overall system performance at an acceptable level Lazy S ing Motion This may be the most difficult situation to address because the sluggish behavior can be caused by field conditions or machine setup In some cases tuning the gains may not achieve the performance desired Start by increasing Line Sensitivity Tracking and check performance If the system remains sluggish increase Line Sensitivity Heading until the system begins to respond more aggressively If fine tuning is needed the Steering Response Rate can be adjusted accordingly increasing this value will make the system more aggressive Step 1 Optimize Steering Response Rate e Tune speed by operating parallel to and 1 2 m 4 ft off of the A B Line e Activate AutoTrac Control
379. ssing STEER ON OFF button e Operator out of seat for more than 7 seconds e Activated in neutral longer than 30 seconds e In reverse for longer than 45 seconds e Reverse speed exceeds 9 6 km h 6 mph CZ76372 00001AA 19 010CT10 2 2 50 72 062111 PN 139 Guidance AutoTrac Sprayers Enabling System Press STEER ON OFF button to toggle between enable disable AutoTrac To enable system all of the following criteria must be met e AutoTrac activation is detected e Track 0 has been setup e Tracking mode selected e SSU is in normal operating mode e 4700 Series Sprayer is in 1st 2nd or 3rd range N63532 UN 07AUG03 4700 and 4710 Sprayer Resume Switch A Resume Switch AKT While AutoTrac is activated operator is responsible for steering at end of path and collision avoidance Do not attempt to turn on Activate AutoTrac system while transporting on a roadway After system has been ENABLED operator must manually change system to ACTIVATED status when steering assistance is desired Press resume switch A to activate AutoTrac This will initiate assisted steering NOTE 4700 and 4710 have resume switch on console 4720 4920 30 Series and 5430i Sprayers have 2 buttons on multi function lever In order to activate system the following criteria must be met Sprayer multi function lever is out of park e 4700 Series Sprayer is in 1st 2nd or 3rd range e 4900 Se
380. stance there may be a Planter group where the headlands are 36 6 m 120 ft and a Field Cultivator group where the headlands are 27 4 m 90 ft Different field operations can require different headlands Headland Boundaries can either be driven or offset from the Exterior or Interior Boundary New Boundary Type Exterior Headland Headland Group Planter02 6 Boundary Offset er ty Ke PC12926 UN 27SEP10 AOC M Record Pause N Stop Recording L Drive Boundary Check Box J Headland Indicator Check Box K Boundary Offset Input Box L Receiver Offset Toggle NOTE The defined Headlands need to be large enough for vehicle and implement to turn around without the use of brakes NOTE Headlands are for use with iTEC Pro Other GreenStar software may view headlands on the Guidance page but will not utilize them NOTE Swath Control functionality is based up on exterior interior and impassable interior boundaries Headlands will show on the Guidance View tab as dashed pink lines to show where the headlands exist in maps and perspective views Only Exterior Boundaries and Impassable Interior Boundaries can have a Headland Boundary CZ76372 000018F 19 28APR11 3 3 45 22 062111 PN 59 GreenStar General Delete and Rename Boundaries Data Cleanup Along with the Client Farm and Field drop down lists the Interior and Headland lists have the option to rename and del
381. stander ensure Users know which function is mapped to each control Controls are properly labeled ZX1042322 UN 04DEC08 i OUCC002 0002A57 19 280CT09 3 4 Auxiliary Control Enabled A ATON Auxiliary Control enabled Some requested assignments are not complete Improper operation can cause unintended implement movement To avoid the risk of death or serious injury to a bystander ensure s Users know which function is mapped to each control e Controls are properly labeled This message occurs when Auxiliary Control has been enabled manually however not all assignments have been completed successfully Press Enter key F to navigate to the home page Go to the Auxiliary Controls page by pressing the Mapping key G to review or change the Auxiliary Control assignments IMPORTANT If the Enter key F is selected the implement only follows the assignments which have been completed successfully however AWARNING Auxiliary Control enabled Some requested assignments are not complete Improper operation can cause unintended implement movement To avoid the risk of death or serious injury to a bystander ensure Users know which function is mapped to each control Controls are properly labeled ZX1042321 UN 04DEC08 there are still assignments which are not complete It is necessary to review the Auxiliary Controls mapping screen by pressing the Ma
382. ster checkbox Individual operations can be disabled for Swath Control by removing checks in corresponding boxes Operations displayed are the same operations shown in Documentation and match up with Documentation tabs NOTE Swath Control Master and at least one operation must be checked for Swath Control to operate Headland Control Check this box to turn on Headland Control Uncheck the box to turn it off Headland Control allows Swath Control to turn on and off at the Headland Boundary to apply product only to the main portion of the field while not applying to the headland area Product can be applied to the headland with Headland Control turned off NOTE Headland Control is only available if Swath Control is activated Deactivating Swath Control also disables Headland Control even if the corresponding checkbox is still checked If the operator changes Operation 1 Platting Operation 2 Fertilizer 1 Operation 3 fertitizer2 Operation 4 fertilizer3 Headiand Control Note Requires a headland boundary 8 Overlap Settings Turn On Off Settings Swath Control Settings PC13235 UN 12APR11 the field in the display headland control checkbox is deactivated If the operator wants to use headland control in the new field the headland control checkbox needs to be activated again CZ76372 00002CA 19 28APR11 1 1 75 6 062111 PN 247 Swath Control Overlap Settings
383. system components will not CZ76372 000028E 19 12JAN11 1 1 125 2 062111 PN 318 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics PC8663 UN O5AUG05 Message Center Message Center is used to access detailed diagnostic information and to manually initiate re programming sessions Message Center can also display detailed MENU button diagnostic information such as Control Unit Information PC12868 UN 16SEP10 and CAN Bus Information used by your John Deere Dealer for advanced troubleshooting Soft Keys are listed below Message e A Message Center Reprogramming Page Center e B Transfer Debug Files e C Messages e D Diagnostic Addresses MESSAGE CENTER button With Info Icon e E Trouble Codes e F Control Unit Information e G Bus Information Message Center screen can be reached by selecting the MENU button then MESSAGE CENTER button With Info Icon CZ76372 00002F0 19 28APR11 1 8 A S D S S 3 lad l zZ 5 SR o 8 S S Cleanup 2 O O a a COMPONENTS AND SOFTWARE VERSIONS button wo Kei O O O O en Es Es 8 8 2 2 7 7 Lod Ka 8 8 8 8 a a MESSAGES button 8 8 O O a pe f Z T T s Zz 7 7 g S Ea z z TROUBLE CODES button Electronic CONTROL UNIT INFORMATION button 8 O E 8 2 S 8 a BUS INFORMATION button Message center will display all active alarms alert messages and icons Continued on next page CZ76372 00002F0 19 28APR11 2 8 1 30 1 062111
384. t This message occurs when the system detects an ISOBUS implement For more information see READ OPERATOR MANUALS FOR ISOBUS IMPLEMENTS in EE Read and understand the implement Operator Manual OQUO6050 0000E6B 19 0O60CT08 1 1 PC10339 UN 23SEP07 Operating ISO Implement IMPORTANT Before using display to control ISOBUS to use When used with ISOBUS implements implements read operator manual provided by information and control functions placed on this implement manufacturer and observe all safety display are provided by implement and are the messages in manual and on implement prior responsibility of implement manufacturer QU06050 0002316 19 06OCT08 1 1 80 1 062111 PN 260 ISO Implements ISO Implements The John Deere Display GS3 display supports ISOBUS 11783 compliant implements These implements can be displayed and operated with this Display A standardized connector in the back of the tractor allows the connection of such implements ISOBUS implements may support the Aux Control functionality See Aux Control chapter for more details PC9744 UN 20NOV06 Standardized Connector CF86321 000001E 19 28APR11 1 3 The John Deere pull type sprayer presents its information as shown The machine layout allows the control and setup of all machine functions like tank volume boom sections spray rate control etc See specific product OM for details Continued on ne
385. t appears The following fields were detected Please select your field from the list below or select Cancel to keep your current field selection Verify your Guidance and Documentation settings after changing the field selection S Cancel Accept PC12864 UN 16SEP10 on the map When text appears by pressing on the map Select Field window will appear Within the drop down box the fields within 100 feet of the implement will appear CZ76372 000016A 19 19APR11 1 1 Delete and Rename Client Farm and Field The Client Farm and Field drop down lists have the option to rename and delete entries From the list select lt List Cleanup gt To rename an entry select the Rename button and type the new name with the keyboard To delete entries place checks next to the entries that need to be removed Then select the Delete Selected Data button IMPORTANT If a Client Farm or Field is renamed and then data is Exported to desktop software duplicate entries will appear in the desktop software NOTE Greyed out items can not be deleted because they may be related to other data or were created using desktop software PC13252 UN 19APR11 Delete Selected Data Data Cleanup BA31779 000016E 19 28APR11 1 1 45 15 062111 PN 52 GreenStar General PC8663 UN O5AUG05 Mapping Softkey MENU gt GreenStar 3 Pro gt Mapping The following functionality is a
386. t in inaccurate area calculation Header Width Screen SETUP HEADER Select SETUP gt gt HARVEST MONITOR gt gt HEADER TYPE gt gt HEADER WIDTH Enter header in rows width using numeric keypad Row Spacing Screen SETUP HEADER Select SETUP gt gt HARVEST MONITOR gt gt HEADER TYPE gt gt ROW SPACING Enter row spacing mm inches using numeric keypad Row Change Screen SETUP HEADER Select SETUP gt gt HARVEST MONITOR gt gt HEADER TYPE gt gt ROW CHANGE Set increments in rows for cut width to change on RUN PAGE 1 screen Use numeric keypad to enter number Continued on next page 1 2 ES Header Type T Se d e Dok Gn DES H Ce Jeng e INFO J an Harvest Mon Define Header DOGODE PC12875 UN 24SEP10 Platform Belt Pickup Screen SETUP HEADER Select SETUP gt gt HARVEST MONITOR gt gt HEADER TYPE gt gt HEADER WIDTH NOTE If row crop e g soybeans are being harvested with a platform and row spacing does not allow use of full header width adjust header width to crop width being cut For example 7 6 meter 25 ft platform may be 7 meters 24 ft depending on row spacing Platform Actual field cutting width in meters feet Belt Pickup Actual width of grain cut to produce windrow in meters feet Set increments in m ft for cut width to change on RUN PAGE 1 screen Use numeric keypad to enter number Change increments in mete
387. t the proper width has been sent from Harvest Monitor and shows in this tab This screen allows operator to define e Header Name e Header Width comes from Harvest Monitor see Original GreenStar Monitor or the 70 Series combine Operator Manual e Header Offset e Track Spacing See Guidance section NOTE Header Offset is used for operators using an offset head for example draper PC8663 UN O5AUG05 MENU button PC12685 UN 14JUL10 GREENSTAR 3 PRO button PC8677 UN 05AUG05 EQUIPMENT softkey Refer to Machine And Implement Setup section for more information Defining Header Width for Self Propelled Forage Harvesters Header width is set up in OBD RCP 180 and others See the user manual that came with the self propelled forage harvester to verify the correct setup in the OBD Do this for all other implements and headers which cannot be changed in the display itself field is grayed out Continued on next page CZ76372 0000183 19 24SEP10 1 3 65 34 062111 PN 195 Documentation Cut Width Adjustment GreenStar 2 Pro Equipment Implement Type Platform Implement Model Bill s Implement Name 30 s 0 0 tin KH 0 0 F Change Offsets Implement Width ft Track Spacing ft 30 0 30 000 Control On Off PC12913 UN 24SEP10 GREENSTAR 3 PRO EQUIPMENT screen gt gt HEADER A Machine B Header Menu C Im
388. t weather proof and should only be JS56696 0000491 19 04JUN10 1 1 062111 PN 2 Contents Page Safety Recognize Safety Information ssssseeseeeeeeee 05 1 Understand Signal VWords e 05 1 Follow Safety Instructions cceeeeeeeee 05 1 Avoid Backover Accidents cccceeeeeeeeteeeees 05 2 Prepare for Emergences e 05 2 Practice Safe Maintenance 05 3 Operate Guidance Systems Safely 0 05 3 Use Seat Belt Properly eececeeeeeeeeeeees 05 4 Read Operator Manuals for ISOBUS Implemente ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaee 05 4 Handle Electronic Components and Brackets Safely ccccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 05 4 Safety Signs Implement Detected Wang 10 1 Automatic Guidance System Detected 10 1 Auxiliary Control Safety Signs 00naaeeeeeeeeeeee 10 2 Getting Started Theory of Operation 15 1 Front of Display ccccceesseeeessessteeeeeeeeeeeeees 15 2 Back of Display ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetees 15 3 USB Drive EEN 15 3 Display Control 15 3 Display Secondary Navigation 15 4 Capturing Screenshots 15 4 Screen Layout 15 5 Installation Installation in Most GreenStar Ready Machines egene dee atin ie atest 20 1 Installation in a John Deere Vehicle with an ISOBUS Display 20 1 Moving ISO Implement Applications between Two ISOBUS Disnlavs 20 2 View Multiple Display Gettngs 20 2
389. tance to that turning point or headland will be displayed and will count down the intersection to that turning point or headland The visual indication is accompanied by tones NOTE If a headland boundary is defined and headland indicator is selected it will be displayed instead of turn predictor Guidance Icon The icon represents the implement and the pointer on the icon represents the center of the implement The icon changes width based upon the entered implement width Continued on next page GPS Indicator Indicates what level of accuracy the StarFire receiver is currently operating at 3D SF2 SF1 RTK If using a GPS receiver other than a StarFire the text 3D GPS will be displayed but the indicator bar will not fill NOTE AutoTrac SF1 must have a GPS accuracy level of SF1 and AutoTrac SF2 must have a GPS accuracy of SF2 or RTK Steer On Off The Steer On Off button transitions AutoTrac from being disabled to an enabled mode Shift Track Shift track is used to adjust position of machine left center or right of set track Shift track can be used to compensate for GPS drift Drift is inherent to any satellite based differentially corrected GPS system CZ76372 00001A0 19 30SEP10 2 9 50 4 062111 PN 71 Guidance AutoTrac Status Pie Allows AutoTrac user to view the stage that AutoTrac is in e INSTALLED 1 4 of pie AutoTrac SSU and all other hardware necessary for use are installed e C
390. tar NOTE In some cases a higher degree of precision can be achieved for track spacing when track spacing is entered in by rows instead of feet More decimal places are used in the track spacing calculation when entered in by rows versus the three decimal places allowed when entered by feet Defining Implement Width and Track Spacing Implement width and track spacing can be defined two ways enter the working width of the implement or enter the number of rows and the row spacing To toggle between these two select the m ft rows button Implement Width m ft enter total implement working width Implement Width rows enter number of rows and the row spacing in inches Track Spacing Used in guidance for how far each pass is from the last pass It is entered the same way as Implement Width For perfect guess rows this distance will be the same as Implement Width To ensure some Continued on next page PC9902 UN O9JANO7 Change Widths sso SO Width Width rows A tim A Track Spacing ei Row Oneal Width rows A fin F Physical Width 48 000 HO PC9903 UN 09JAN07 Track Spacing E Row Width overlap for tillage or spraying or to account for some GPS drift you may choose to make the Track Spacing somewhat less than the Implement Width Physical Width The actual width of the entire implement when being used in the field when the implement is raised It is sometimes larger tha
391. tarFire iTC on the Serial Port tab page to tab page CZ76372 0000185 19 27SEP10 2 2 100 1 062111 PN 295 GreenSeeker GreenSeeker IMPORTANT FieldDoc Connect Cable must be wired for COM Port 2 at the GreenStar 3 display If no implement controller is connected to the GS3 Display GreenSeeker cannot be selected as a prescription 1 Attach GreenSeeker hardware according to the GreenSeeker manual 2 Connect the GreenSeeker PDA to the GreenStar RS 232 cab connector 3 Calibrate the John Deere spray system according to the spray system s manual 4 Calibrate GreenSeeker System according to the GreenSeeker manual Calibration may not be needed 5 Set Master Spray Switch in cab to AUX to enable SprayStar to accept the prescription 6 Select MENU button gt gt GREENSTAR 3 PRO button gt gt RESOURCE CONDITIONS softkey gt gt RESOURCES tab 7 Fill in Client Farm Field and Task information to enable documentation PC8663 UN O5AUG05 MENU button PC12685 UN 14JUL10 GREENSTAR 3 PRO button PC8676 UN O5AUG05 RESOURCE CONDITION softkey CZ76372 0000143 19 27SEP10 1 6 8 Select MENU button gt gt GREENSTAR 3 PRO button gt gt EQUIPMENT softkey gt gt MACHINE tab Fill in machine information 9 Press COM Port button Continued on next page PC8663 UN O5AUG05 MENU button PC12685 UN 14JUL10 GREENSTAR 3 PRO button PC8677
392. te a folder named Rx in the root of the USB drive b Copy the shapefiles into this folder Turn off all types of Recording and stop the vehicle Insert USB drive A Data Transfer page will appear within about 10 seconds Select Import Global Prescriptions and Shapefile Data 5 When the data transfer is finished a Data Transfer is Complete message will appear IMPORTANT All Global and Shapefile Prescriptions On the Display on the display will be deleted prior to importing CZ76372 000028B 19 19APR11 1 1 Example 1 Importing and Exporting 3 Documentation Data Operator 1 records Flags in a field as he is planting 4 so those areas can be sprayed for weeds Currently Operator 2 is spraying in a different field Both machines have GS3 2630 displays Below is one method to properly manage the data on both displays Prior to the season 1 Using Apex the Farm Manager saved the Machine and Implement settings for all of his equipment along with field and product setup data to a USB drive with the Profile name 2011 4 15 Setup 2 Operators 1 and 2 both Imported this Profile into their displays Current day 5 1 Operator 1 finishes planting the field Exports the data from his display to the USB drive naming the Profile 2011 5 1 Planting 2 The same day Operator 2 receives the USB drive from Operator 1 and first Exports the data from his GS3 2630 on the sprayer so that no data is lost when
393. teering A Resume Switch Continued on next page CZ76372 00001AA 19 010CT10 1 2 062111 PN 138 50 71 Guidance A Track 0 C Track Spacing B Track 1 South D Off Track Lateral Error Track number changes at 50 of row spacing Once tractor is at end of row operator must turn system to next pass By turning steering wheel AutoTrac is deactivated operator must turn onto next track AutoTrac can be activated by pressing resume switch only after following conditions are met e Forward vehicle speed is less than 30 km h 18 6 mph e Reverse speed is less than 10 km h 6 mph e Vehicle heading is within 80 of desired track e The machine is within 40 of track spacing e Operator is seated e TCM is on e In reverse AutoTrac will remain activated for 45 seconds After 45 seconds the machine must be put in a forward gear before reverse will activate again Deactivating System P eral Always turn off Deactivate and Disable AutoTrac system before entering a roadway PC8866 UN 02NOV05 E Track Heading Error To turn off AutoTrac from GUIDANCE VIEW tab toggle STEER ON OFF button until STEER OFF is displayed Deactivating System AutoTrac system can be made DEACTIVE by the following methods e Turning steering wheel e Exceeding speed of 30 km h 18 6 mph e Degradation of differential correction signal from SF2 or RTK to WAAS EGNOS for longer than 3 minutes e Pre
394. tem files PONS PC12690 UN 16JUL10 CZ76372 00002DA 19 19APR11 1 1 Data Transfer Options Export Data from the display Data Profile is copied to the USB flash drive Use this option in the following examples e Backup Documentation data to a USB flash drive e Transfer setup information and guidance lines to another display e Transfer setup information and guidance lines to compatible desktop software e Transfer screenshots and debug files to a USB flash drive Import Data to the display Data Profile is copied to the display This option does NOT import global prescriptions and shapefiles Use this option in the following examples e Import Field Names boundaries and guidance lines from another GS3 2630 display or compatible desktop software e Import coverage and swath control maps from another GS3 2630 display e Import field specific prescription Rx files from compatible desktop software Import Global Prescriptions to the display Data Transfer Import Data Import Global Prescriptions and Shapefile Data Note To use GreenStar remove the USB device Data Transfer Options Only Global Prescription GRx files and shape files are imported into the display PC13258 UN 19APR11 CZ76372 00002E3 19 19APR11 1 1 120 1 062111 PN 309 Data Management Exporting Data from the Display 1 Turn off all types of Recording and stop the vehicle 2 Insert USB dr
395. ter can be reset by the operator in the totals page The PM will use the current implement width setting the speed priority is GPS speed radar speed wheel speed and the recording status to count hectares acres If recording is off area will not accumulate If the value PC9056 UN 17APR06 0 0 4 Area Counter exceeds 9999 9 then the counter will reset to zero The figure below shows the area counter icon CZ76372 00000BE 19 15JUL10 7 11 Distance Counter The user will be able to view and reset the distance counter This counter will accumulate any time the vehicle is moving regardless of recording status and will use the same speed as the area counter to calculate the distance The figure below shows the distance icon PC9057 UN 17APR06 OO Continued on next page Distance Counter CZ76372 00000BE 19 15JUL10 8 11 60 3 062111 PN 147 Performance Monitor SETTINGS SCREEN The setup screen of the PM application shown contains a number of major sections that include settings that the operator can adjust and or calibrate Each of these settings or calibration instructions are described in this section Totals and Settings Screens will remain similar in both the APM and UPM applications Resetting totals in APM mode will require the operator to depress and HOLD the reset button for 3 seconds Performance Monitor Settings ge A Gi AUTO E 30 0 e
396. the boundary the Stop button can be pressed after turning the last corner near the straight section If recording was started in a corner press the Stop button just prior to the point where recording was started Make PC10501A UN 210CT08 C Stop Recording Button D Recording Indicator Light A Record Pause Button B Toggle Button sure the point where recording was stopped does not intersect the point where it was started Pressing the stop button will complete the boundary by showing a straight line between the point where it was stopped and the starting point OQUO06050 0000E76 19 30SEP09 3 3 45 25 062111 PN 62 GreenStar General Top And Bottom Offsets Boundary Tp and Bottom Offset eadland Boundary B ick Boundary Impassable Pe ae Kl amp D D x Kal CO o pi Exterior Boundary 5 Impassable 8 8 S A Top and Bottom Offset B Exterior Boundary C Exterior Headland D Field Headland Boundary Impassable Continued on next page JS56696 0000499 19 280CT08 1 3 45 26 062111 PN 63 GreenStar General Top and Bottom On mee d Client Row 90 0000 5 co Heading arclay Bros ES X Offset 120 000 Farm ft Y Offset 120 000 8 ft 7 K Headland Settings oO A Maps Tab D Client Drop Down Menu G Boundary Type Drop Down J Headland Indicator Check B Boundaries Tab E Farm Name Drop Down M
397. the Original GreenStar Monitor application will not be available and will not appear on menu Starting NOTE Errors may appear when first powering up the system Cancel these errors before proceeding Screen SETUP HARV MON PAGE 1 Continued on next page PC8663 UN O5AUG05 PC12866 UN 16SEP10 ORIGINAL GREENSTAR MONITOR button Select SETUP gt gt HARVEST MONITOR Operator will need to setup information in HARVEST MONITOR on SETUP HARV MON PAGE 1 screen Header Width Header Type Yield Calibration Moisture Calibration Record Stop Height SEET NOTE Farm Field and Crop need to be setup in HarvestDoc on GS3 gt gt DOC I button CZ76372 000017E 19 24SEP10 1 5 65 30 062111 PN 191 Documentation Defining Header Screen SETUP HEADER Select SETUP gt gt HARVEST MONITOR gt gt HEADER TYPE IMPORTANT Make certain header type is correct when changing from one header to another The wrong header selection will result in an inaccurate information NOTE To change from feet to meters see SETUP GreenStar DISPLAY Depending on which type of header is selected there are additional items to be setup HEADER TYPE button will toggle between corn head row crop platform and belt pickup Select desired header type Corn Head Row Crop Head IMPORTANT Make certain row spacing is correct when header types are changed The wrong row spacing will resul
398. the software versions of the all the connected components against the versions on the USB drive and a Software Update message will appear listing all of the components that have new versions available on the USB drive Select the green arrow to Accept the software update Select the button with 3 lines to Cancel the update The Software Update message will be available again the next time the USB drive is inserted IMPORTANT Do not turn off power or remove USB drive while display is reprogramming Doing so can damage display and put software in an irrecoverable state NOTE The display will not be available for use during software updates Updating the display and other controllers may take an hour or more NOTE If this message is not displayed download and copy the software update to the USB drive again eis ISOBUS Display Software Update To install this software update for the following devices press the accept button GreenStar 3 Display The display will not be available for use during software updates Updating the display and other controllers may take an hour or more Z Software Update PC13092 UN 12JAN11 NOTE The display will reboot itself during the update 6 A message stating The Update Was Successfully Installed will appear when the update is complete 7 Remove the USB drive NOTE The display update files will be copied to the display but the install files for the other
399. the terns cf this ecrccine it or il yos sic Ino sut ar zee 10 sapt these icms o r becha fof you zonos er its nipluyces please click Lie Geel ne ballon bu deel ne Liese lernus end miLuns This license ersten reure seis Ube cnie ersten men iig lte soflware Lelween you are he lorisur and il reslas ariy prior Propusdl reureser lalin ur urcerslardiny belwecn you end Lic uensur This agreement is also included in the Cpermtors Manual _ am the purchaser mi this dicplay License Agreement OU06050 00011FC 19 19APR11 1 1 PC10857JD UN 12APR09 GREENSTAR 3 PRO button The GREENSTAR 3 PRO MAIN screen contains four tabs SETUP tab Simplifies initial setup and configuration of GS3 applications Summary tab Shows operational summaries ACTIVATIONS tab View available software and enter code to activate MEMORY tab Bar graph shows amount of memory used PC8663 UN O5AUG05 MENU button PC12685 UN 14JUL10 GEES GREENSTAR 3 PRO button GreenStar PC12686 UN 14JUL10 GREENSTAR 3 PRO button CZ76372 0000138 19 29SEP10 1 1 45 1 062111 PN 38 GreenStar General Setup Wizard The Setup Tab is intended to simplify initial setup and configuration of the GS3 applications while also helping the operator become familiar with where the setup and configuration settings are located and which settings are required for full functionality After using the A
400. tion E Status Indicator F Implement Function IMPORTANT Before using Auxiliary Controls read the operator manual provided by the implement manufacturer and observe all safety messages in the manual and on the implement prior to use When using Auxiliary Controls information and control functions placed on this display are provided by the implement AUXILIARY CONTROLS softkey H This screen allows the mapping of an ISO compliant implement functions to ISO compliant Auxiliary Input devices Continued on next page G Implement Type H Auxiliary Controls Softkey I Message Center Softkey An auxiliary input device C consists of a number of Inputs D These inputs may be buttons switches dials etc This Auxiliary Controls page allows the user to match these inputs with various implement functions This process is called Mapping an input to a function Once this Mapping is completed a function F may be performed by activating the associated input The available functions F and inputs D depend on the ISO compliant implements controls G that are currently connected 2ZX1042323 UN 11DEC08 OUCC002 00029E9 19 04DEC08 1 5 85 8 062111 PN 271 Auxiliary Controls Display Auxiliary Controls Status Enabled Unmapped Unmapped Display Auxiliarv Controls Status Enabled E Input Device Input Function Implement t el ZX1
401. tion For example an operation that is delivering to several elevators can create a Load Name for each elevator A single load can have totals from more than one field This allows you to finish a field and start another while tracking the load in a truck or cart OQU06050 000107D 19 06APRO9 1 1 Viewing Current Totals Reports The GreenStar 3 Pro field documentation system allows you to view the totals for the operations that you are performing This is a powerful tool that can display totals by field crop variety and load Totals reports can be viewed by selecting the J button from the GreenStar 3 Pro screens Continued on next page PC8663 UN O5AUG05 MENU button PC12685 UN 14JUL10 GREENSTAR 3 PRO button PC8679 UN O5AUG05 HIR TOTALS softkey CZ76372 000015A 19 30AUG10 1 3 70 9 062111 PN 238 Totals The Totals screen shows the current totals The operation type client farm and field and crop season are displayed in the box on the left A This box also contains the navigation buttons that allow you to change the contents of the screen The upper box on the right B shows the operational data This depends on the type of operation selected but normally reflects either the application or harvest data The box on the lower right C displays productivity data This information is displayed for all operation types The time and area remaining are de
402. tion A PC9033 UN 17APRO06 Home softkey CZ76372 0000160 19 29SEP10 1 5 Select Menu then select Softkey J which is the Layout Manager Option PC8663 UN O5AUG05 PC12869 UN 16SEP10 Continued on next page MENU button Layout Manager LAYOUT MANAGER button CZ76372 0000160 19 29SEP10 2 5 40 1 062111 PN 33 Layout Manager Press softkey A then press the large red area in main screen this will bring you to the selection of programs to operate in that defined red area You will see that Layout Manager A and F will have the largest selection of choices and layouts available If you select GreenStar 3 Pro you will then be taken to the confirmation screen seen below Continued on next page PC8870 UN 17NOV05 CZ76372 0000160 19 29SEP10 3 5 40 2 062111 PN 34 Layout Manager If you are satisfied with the selection press the ENTER SE Ee button If the selection is not what was intended press ei the large block area again or press the CANCEL button Uy to start over ENTER button CLEAR button Layout Manager Options with Example Layouts Layout naneger B rzgeg DD Kl S z e Soc d 2 z lt Select an area from above 7 gg 3 43pm 3 E Aw Ba ka Layout Manager Option A 5 a Example of Layout Option A IED EE o 0 08 0 0Z t ave ach 0 0BV Z s SACH e a i oa
403. tion factor 3 Press CALIBRATION FACTOR button to enter new value Displayed Calibration Factor 800 X New weight of cotton from scale ticket 4830 Weight of cotton shown on display 5125 New Calibration Factor 754 Example Displayed Calibration Factor 800 800 is factory default value for calibration factor Weight of cotton shown on display 5125 New weight of cotton from scale ticket 4830 New Calibration Factor 754 Tillage Operation Select TILLAGE Select Type e Primary Tillage e Rotary Hoe e Row Crop Cultivation e Secondary Tillage e New Select Depth 1 Enter number on keypad 2 Select ACCEPT CZ76372 0000182 19 24SEP10 5 5 PC10857TX UN 30MAR10 TILLAGE button Primary Tillage Type S i 5 Depth SS d z tin 2 S OQUO06050 000126C 19 11MAY10 1 1 65 59 062111 PN 220 Documentation Map Based Prescriptions Prescriptions Application Plans from desktop software can be applied using selected implement control units Map based prescriptions are compatible with the following equipment e SeedStar Generation II gray Boxes on planter frame 1900 carts PIN 690101 and higher and all 1910 carts with Variable Rate Drives Application Plans can be in seeds per hectare acre e SeedStar 2 planters with Variable Rate Drives e Gen2 1900 and 1910 model air carts with variable rate drives and SeedStar 2 air carts with variable rate dr
404. tire seed target rate here types using Apex to simplify future seed selection Implement Selection i Select MENU gt GREENSTAR gt EQUIPMENT The implement name is not pre populated If using a John Deere Aircart only number of tanks and sections will be If this step is not taken you will be required to enter setup pre populated information twice Set up the implement using the EQUIPMENT button before setting up operation Continued on next page CZ76372 00002B8 19 30MAR11 1 8 65 1 2 062111 PN 173 Documentation Variety Selection PC10857UZ UN 31MAR10 Add The operator has the ability to enter six varieties but will Variety only be able to document one variety at one time per tank Add Variety button Select ADD VARIETY button Add Edit Variety Select from the drop down menu or enter SEED BRAND A Optional Select from the drop down menu or enter SEED VARIETY erana B Vv Select or allow automatic selection of the color that will 2201 represent the variety on the display and map C B variety SW E NOTE It is possible to manually select the same color Om for two of more varieties Documentation will still occur for each individual variety however the map will paint the color chosen Select and then enter the Lot Number using the keypad z D Optional indicates I Select the accept button pou e 7 lt y z A Brand C Color c e l 2 B Variety D Lot Number BUES S
405. to make the most logical headlands based on the way the field normally is farmed If desired headlands are not coming out as expected change the Row Heading to several angles close to the direction of travel If still not satisfactory a Driven Headland boundary will need to be recorded PC10504 UN 11SEP07 NOTE Top and bottom headlands are calculated as offsets and may not be appropriate for all fields Machine Implement page The width of each headland Headlands will be created when the Row Heading is can be handed Geo if the west end has 32 more than 15 degrees from any side of the field 76 2 cm 30 in headland rows and the East end has 48 76 2 cm 30 in headland rows enter 24 4 m 80 The defaults for Offsets X and Y are twice ft for X and 36 6 m 120 ft for Y the implement width as entered from the JS56696 0000499 19 280CT08 3 3 45 28 PN 65 GreenStar General Constant Offset Boundary NOTE A boundary cannot intersect itself Press first before pressing the Record Pause button Record Pause button to pause recording eer to begin recording again prior to stoopina Alwavs start movina forwar Constant Offset Headland Boundary not driven same size on all sides B Exterior Boundary Impassable P Headland Exterior Boundary Impassable Constant Offset not driven same size on all sides A Constant Offset Headland C Exterior Headland E Interior Headland Boundary n
406. to rear of implement only needed if second C Lateral distance from implement is used connection point to control F Offset Toggle Button point of implement G A B Documentation D In line distance from Swath Control location connection point to control when in use point of implement Typical Planter Setup JD 1770 16R30 NT planter with a 2 point connection e A 3 8 m 12 6 ft B 0 m 0 ft even though it is physically 2 m 6 8 ft e C 0 m 0 feet Typical Disk Setup JD 637 F 10 8 m 35 5 ft disk setup e A 3 m 9 9 ft e B 5 m 16 4 ft eC 0m 0ft Continued on next page CF86321 000001F 19 12APR11 3 6 45 10 062111 PN 47 GreenStar General Change Widths ol Implement Width lt 8 tt O Track Spacing 40 000 ft Physical Width 48 000 e D tt Track Spacing A m ft rows button B Implement Width C Track Spacing D Physical Width Implement Widths Used to enter implement width and track spacing for guidance This value is also used to calculate total area when documenting the operation Verify implement type model name implement width and track spacing when changing implements Implement width and track spacing are independent of each other NOTE IMPLEMENT tab will show HEADER for Combines ROW UNITS for Cotton Pickers and BOOM for Sprayer NOTE Implement width may come from controller on select controllers such as SeedS
407. trollers on www StellarSupport com PC8663 UN O5AUG05 MENU button PC12685 UN 14JUL10 GREENSTAR 3 PRO button PC8678 UN O5AUG05 DOCUMENTATION button PC8704 UN 17AUG05 PRESCRIPTIONS button CZ76372 000017B 19 23SEP10 1 1 Other Operation The OTHER operation tab is used for activities that do not have a task controller associated Using a self propelled windrower and recording a coverage map would be one example Select or Enter a type Select or Enter a name Although the other operation tab will not allow yield recording the following information will be available PC10857VN UN 01APR10 Other e Area e Area Remaining e Time e Productivitiy 0QU06050 0001271 19 01APR10 1 1 65 67 062111 PN 228 Documentation Surface Water Management Select WATER MANAGEMENT gt TYPE Choose DITCH or LEVEE PC10857VM UN 01APR10 Water Management PC10857VO UN 01APR10 Type It PC10857VP UN 01APR10 OQU06050 0001270 19 01APR10 1 1 Surface Water Management PC10857VM UN 01APR10 Water Management PC10857VO UN 01APR10 Type H CZ76372 00002BD 19 30MAR11 1 2 Select WATER MANAGEMENT gt TYPE Choose DITCH or LEVEE PC10857VP UN 01APR10 CZ76372 00002BD 19 30MAR11 2 2 65 68 PN 229 Totals TOTALS button Totals The Totals page show the data based
408. ttings tab E Shifts On H Show Shift Track Totals on C Shift Track Settings F Small Shifts Map I Clear All Shifts If Show Shift Track Totals on Map check box H is selected shift track total and direction will be shown on Ge will remove all shifts previously made in Guidance View map when a Shift Track button is selected i Show Shift Track Totals on Map check box H is enabled only when Straight Track is the current tracking mode CZ76372 00001A1 19 040CT10 1 1 StarFire Signal Monitoring System EE The GS3 alerts the operator when the current StarFire signal is not optimal for high accuracy operations There are three alert levels Normal Marginal and Poor The levels are determined both by the StarFire Receiver s PDOP value and the number of satellites being tracked If the StarFire receiver is being used in high accuracy operations it is recommend that care be taken when the Normal StarFire Signal Monitoring system indicates the current status is Marginal or Poor as accuracy degradation may occur e Normal Operating Range e Acceptable range for high accuracy operations Normal e PDOP value 0 3 5 e Green Bar e Greater than or equal to 7 satellites being tracked Continued on next page CZ76372 000006B 19 09JUL10 1 3 50 1 6 062111 PN 83 Guidance Marginal PC9388 UN 170CT07 e Orange Bar with Permanent Alert Sign e Marginal Operating Range 3D e Moderate risk of accuracy degradation e PDOP
409. turn it OFF again from the alert screen CZ76372 0000291 19 12JAN11 1 1 Recording Turn Points For a new turn point to be recorded for current track vehicle must travel along track for more than 10 seconds at a speed greater than 0 8 km h 0 5 mph A turn point will be recorded at a point at which AutoTrac is deactivated and a point in which the heading error exceeds 45 degrees OQUO6050 0000D0A 19 170CT07 1 1 50 10 062111 PN 77 Guidance Predicting Turn Points To predict a turn display must have at least one stored turn point that is within 8 tracks of current track and on same end of field that vehicle is moving towards Turn XXXX m ft will be displayed on Perspective View screen as soon as predicted turn point has been calculated for a newly acquired track An advance notification both audible beep and visual Turn text changing to yellow from green will annunciate at approximately 10 seconds prior to actual predicted turn A turn notification both audible two beeps and visual Turn text changing to red shall annunciate when GPS position crosses predicted turn point NOTE XXXX can represent any value depending z upon the location of the machine T el The following are examples of how turns are predicted 2 1 The end point of current track if one exists a Continued on next page OQUO06050 00021E4 19 O6NOV08 1 2 50 11 062111 PN 78 Guidance
410. ty Determines how aggressively the vehicle acquires the track This setting affects performance while acquiring the track only High settings Results in a more aggressive track line acquisition Lower settings Results will give smoother entry into the next track Acquire Sensitivity Determines how aggressively the vehicle acquires the track This setting affects performance while acquiring the track only Higher Settings Result In more aggressive line acquisitions Lower Settings Result In smoother line acquisitions Acquire Sensitivity Too Low Acquire Sensitivity Too High Acquire Sensitivity Continued on next page PC11481 UN 15NOV08 CZ76372 00001A8 19 010CT10 23 25 50 68 062111 PN 135 Guidance Diagnostic Readings GreenStar Diagnostic Readings Read the latest Operator Manual prior to operation To obtain a copy see your dealer or visit wanav StellarSupport com Saig h Last Exit Code Issued N a Time of Last Exit Code 000 000 000 O Steer Ctrl Capabilities Curve Reverse Steer Sensitivity AutoTrac License GPS Valid O Differential Correction Differential Mode Selected OSN Tracking Mode Selected Pivot Pro License K AB Line Defined Free of Steer Ctri Trouble Codes M Valid Implement Guidance Configuration gt Steer On Off Button 0 Vehicle Gear Selected Speed Vithin Range Q gt thin 80 Degrees of
411. ty signs in good condition Replace missing or damaged safety signs Be sure new equipment components and repair parts include the current safety signs Replacement safety signs are available from your John Deere dealer There can be additional safety information contained on parts and components sourced from suppliers that is not reproduced in this operator s manual TS201 UN 23AUG88 Learn how to operate the machine and how to use controls properly Do not let anyone operate without instruction Keep your machine in proper working condition Unauthorized modifications to the machine may impair the function and or safety and affect machine life If you do not understand any part of this manual and need assistance contact your John Deere dealer DX READ 19 16JUNO09 1 1 05 1 062111 PN 7 Safety Avoid Backover Accidents Before moving machine be sure that all persons are clear of machine path Turn around and look directly for best visibility Use a signal person when backing if view is obstructed or when in close quarters Do not rely on a camera to determine if personnel or obstacles are behind the machine The system can be limited by many factors including maintenance practices environmental conditions and operating range DX AVOID BACKOVER ACCIDENTS 19 30AUG10 1 1 PC10857XW UN 24JUN10 Prepare for Emergencies Be prepared if a fire starts Keep a first aid k
412. u want to start over b You want to sell the display to someone else c You think the setup data may be causing a problem to occur on the display e Go to Menu gt gt GS3 gt gt GS3 softkey gt gt Memory tab gt gt Erase Data gt gt All Data See the Data Type Details table to determine what data will be deleted for each option CZ76372 00002E0 19 19APR11 1 1 120 5 062111 PN 313 Data Management Data Type Details i Deleted with Deleted when Overwritten Data Type File Type Created in Read by Documentation maps are cleared when Importing Only Option Exporting Client Farm Field Tasks Machine Implement Setup fds Display and Apex Display and Apex No No Yes Settings Crop Product Settings Guidance Lines JDShape Display and Apex Display and Apex No No Yes Boundary JDShape Display and Apex Display and Apex No No Yes Flags JDShape Display and Apex Display and Apex No No Yes Swath Control Map Grid Display Display only No Yes Yes Coverage Map Grid Display Display only No Yes Yes mein Yield Grid Display Display only No Yes Yes ere veld Log Display Apex only Yes No No Totals Database Display Display and Apex No No Yes ESRI Shapefiles ESRI Shapefile 3rd Party Software Display and Apex No No No Global Rx Grid Ee Display No No No Field Specific Rx JDShape Apex Display and Apex No No Yes Variety Locator Grid Apex Display and
413. uely named Track Numbering Tracks will be numbered to allow for skip pass and to aid in finding passes The direction label N S E or W is defined by the heading determined between the first and last point in the curve Continued on next page CZ76372 00001A5 19 010CT10 1 13 062111 PN 107 50 40 Guidance Straight Line Extensions PC9540 UN 210CT07 A Headland Boundary may or may not be defined by the GS3 system shown for reference only B End of Projected A B Curve Straight Line Extensions A B Curve paths are generated with a 91 m 300 ft straight line extension attached to the end of the actual recorded path This straight line extension allows the operator to get the vehicle back Continued on next page A C 91 m 300 ft Straight Line Extension PC9541 UN 210CT07 D Beginning of Projected A B Curve on the path prior to entering the field It may also aid in continuing the guidance path when the recorded path gets shorter than the field boundary CZ76372 00001A5 19 010CT10 2 13 50 41 062111 PN 108 Guidance KAET EEEE EN End of Path Ahead Steer Sensitivity 1 30 000 ft Steer Off GreenStar 3 Pro Guidance Screen A View B Guidance Settings e GUIDANCE SETTINGS tab gt gt TRACKING MODE drop down box gt gt AB CURVE C ShiftTrack Settings D Set AB Curve IMPORTANT AB Curve must be selected
414. uidance Mode C Shift Track Settings G General Settings D iTEC Pro 2 x a E d Ka pee ka 0 wo EN O A GreenStar 3 Pro Guidance Continued on next page CZ76372 00001A3 19 010CT10 2 10 50 1 9 062111 PN 86 Guidance Idd dd tab b pbb pp Turn None Q Set Track 0 1 30 000 ft Steer On PC12585 UN 28APR10 GreenStar 3 Pro Guidance A View B Guidance Settings C ShiftTrack Settings D Set Track 0 NOTE Track 0 and A B lines are two terms used e A Heading interchangeably we will use term Track 0 e Auto B e Lat Lon Track 0 is the reference point from which all parallel e Lat Lon Heading passes in field are based Use the following procedures to setup Track 0 and Track Spacing Methods of defining Track 0 are explained later in this section Creating Track 0 1 GUIDANCE SETTINGS tab Select STRAIGHT 7 Set Track Spacing TRACK mode Track spacing can be defined two different ways 2 VIEW tab Press SET TRACK 0 e Select track spacing button from Set Track 0 dialog box 3 Press NEW button below the CURRENT TRACK 0 Enter implement width drop down box Enter desired track spacing 4 Enter a name for Track 0 using the alpha numeric NOTE A higher degree of precision can be achieved keypad for track spacing when track spacing is entered in by rows instead of feet More decimal places 5 Press ENTER button are used in the track spac
415. uld be half drop down menu the implement width Continued on next page OQUO6050 0000E76 19 30SEP09 1 3 Boundary Exterior Interior Boundary Boundary Impassable Headland Impassable Kl amp D I 45 24 KE GreenStar General 6 Choose whether the boundary will be left or right of the tractor s receiver or left or right of the implement s calculated position NOTE Select the toggle button to record left or right of either the tractor receiver or the implement If set from the implement the location will be left or right of the rear of the implement IMPORTANT When toggling the button to change the recording position recording must be PAUSED or OFF OU06050 0000E76 19 30SEP09 2 3 7 Press the Record Pause button at least 1 or more seconds after the vehicle begins moving forward around the section of the field for the boundary being recorded Record light should blink red and pink when recording is on If you need to pause recording to drive around an obstacle press the Record Pause button Record light will show solid red When Record Pause button is pressed again recording will resume The boundary will show a straight line from where recording was paused to where it was resumed NOTE Many times the boundary should be recorded around an obstacle so iTEC Pro can alert the operator of these obstacles 8 If recording was started along a straight section of
416. umentation Manual Adjustment of Calibration Factor Screen SETUP STANDARD CAL Press SETUP gt gt HARVEST MONITOR gt gt YIELD CALIBRATION gt gt STANDARD CALIBRATION NOTE If scale weight is more than 50 higher or lower than displayed weight system will not allow entry of scale weight It is recommended that you review harvesting procedures and verify vehicle hauling cotton away from picker is also following correct procedures At that time repeat calibration procedures Do not change calibration factor in the middle of a field Always read the text to the left of the START STOP arrow This explains the current status of calibration Arrow changes back and forth between START and STOP When yield calibration is stopped START arrow is shown When yield calibration is running STOP arrow is shown STOP arrow CALIBRATION IS RUNNING Push button to STOP CALIBRATION START arrow CALIBRATION IS STOPPED Push button to START CALIBRATION A new calibration factor can also be entered manually To calculate calibration factor divide weight shown on display by new weight on scale ticket Multiply result by PC12881 UN 24SEP10 Calibration Factor F D Calibration Factor displayed calibration factor see example below This is the new calibration factor To manually enter a calibration factor 1 Press CALIBRATION FACTOR button to change calibration factor 2 Using numeric keypad input calibra
417. unction Mapping s ssseeeee 85 8 Line Sensitivity Tracking scccscessesteceeseeseestenees 50 66 Preferred ASS gNMENntS ssssssittteseessstrrtereeeenens 85 14 Optimizing AutoTrac Controller Performance 50 59 B10 1 E a ee 85 7 Steering Response Rate 50 67 Average Fuel Economy Air Carns Ee 65 42 Performance Monitor En 60 13 Alarm ScreenS EE 130 11 Average Fuel Per Area Alarms Performance Monitor 60 13 LESA Oleh cc a tce eet tat teats 130 12 Average Operating Speed Alerts Performance Monitor sssnsesesisisiristserererrnreen e 60 13 Auxiliary e TE 85 3 Average Productivity Resetting E 130 5 Performance Monitor sssss1ssss1rrrrtnrrrrtnrrntnnrnnnn ts 60 13 Continued on next page Index 1 062111 PN 1 Page Page Track 0 Setup B Center Point 50 50 Drive Circle 50 49 TEE 15 2 30 1 Cleaning Display 15 2 B ndarieS tee ee a secede a eee 45 21 Clearing Data Boundary Type Description 45 21 Adaptive Curve Track Mode nsssssnnnnnnenneennneaeenne 50 28 Exterior Boundary cccccccccccsseeesseessecenseeesseeens A524 Client teehee tA ea Mn el ae ante daete 45 14 Exterior Headland cccccceseeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeees eet EE 35 8 Headland Boundary ccsssscccceeesssteeeeeeeeseeeees 45 21 COM Port assignment Headland Group 45 22 Deactivate eceeecccceeeeeeesseeeeceeeetseeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeees 90 7 Impassable Interior Boundary 45 21 IR Le EE 90
418. urn unit off to prevent damage to the display Operating Temperature Range 20 to 70 C 4 to 158 F Storage Temperature 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Status of the LED is green when display is on orange when display is starting up and shutting down If the LED is RED the unit is not operational Turn unit off The display has encountered an error or issue and is working to recover IMPORTANT Always clean screen display with power off Cleaning screen while operating could result in unintended button selections PC12701 UN 20JUL10 display A Display C USB Connections B LED Power Light To clean display power down and wipe screen with a soft cloth sprayed with a non ammonia based cleaner such as John Deere glass or multipurpose cleaner USB connection used to transfer data to and from display and also updating software Most USB drives will work with the display NOTE The display has two USB connections for redundancy in case one was to fail Only one USB drive may be inserted at a time The USB connections are meant for data transfer and reprogramming only CZ76372 0000283 19 12JAN11 1 1 062111 PN 15 15 2 Getting Started Back of Display Backside of Display contains Display Mounting Holes attach to bracket on machine e Secondary Navigational Point provides backup navigation with display e Display Connector connects vehicle wiring harness p
419. urrent AB Curve A P Number of Segments 0 Point A Lat 0 00000000 Point A Lon 0 00000000 Se Recording End Track Later Set AB Curve Orr Cancel A Current AB Curve B New C Remove D Track Spacing E Record Stop Button F Pause Button G Cancel Button H End Track Later Button I Accept Button PC12592 UN 29APR10 CZ76372 00001A5 19 010CT10 9 13 50 45 062111 PN 112 Guidance Smooth Tight Turns Curve Track Settings GreenStar 3 Pro GUIDANCE gt gt GUIDANCE SETTINGS tab gt gt CURVE TRACK SETTINGS CHANGE button Curve Track Settings will automatically smooth a propagated path that was gt Smooth B Tight Turns 3 i i mplement In Groun Smooth Tight Turns When box is checked the system deet cal rasa ft becoming tight S QO r GREEN CO Implement In Ground Turning Radius ft This is the g value of how tight of a turn radius the implement can turn Z while in the ground l N 8 A Curve Track Settings C Implement In Ground Turn T B Smooth Tight Turns Radius ft CZ76372 00001A5 19 010CT10 10 13 Kai Kai Q Q O CO N N l 2 8 D Dn o a a Smoothing Tight Turns OFF Smoothing Tight Turns ON A Previous Pass B Next Pass Smoothing Tight C Next Pass Smoothing Tight D In Ground Turn Radius Turns Off Turns On With Smoothing Tight Turns On the path
420. usly go over the hill terrain This difference in distance will increase as slope increases CZ76372 00001A9 19 010CT10 4 4 50 51 062111 PN 118 Guidance Swap Track Mode Tracking Mode Swap Track General Settings EEO Lightbar Settings 5 2 T 5 d Guidance Settings Swap Track A View tab C Shift Track Settings tab E General Settings button B Guidance Settings tab D Tracking Mode selection Swap track allows operators to switch between two NOTE Only Straight Track AB Curve and Circle guidance lines in the same field This can be used to Track lines can be used switch between any Straight Track AB Curve or Circle i Track guidance line within a field 1 Select Guidance Settings tab Swap Track will automatically change Tracking Mode and Track Name associated to the tracks selected without the 21D Tracking Made selection enogse Swap Track operator having to do this manually NOTE Swap Track works with existing guidance lines Lines must be created prior to using Swap Track Continued on next page CZ76372 000032A 19 17JUN11 1 4 50 52 062111 PN 119 Guidance 3 Select VIEW tab 4 Select Swap Track Setup button A View tab B Swap Track Setup button KKKKKKKKKKKK I SS DPED E Turn 999 Guidance View Swap Track PC13628 UN 15JUN11 CZ76372 000032A 19 17JUN11 2 4 5 Ifa guidance line has already been selected it will be displaye
421. ust be selected in IMPLEMENT 2 tab IMPLEMENT 3 tab allows setup of the following Implement Type Used to select implement type e Implement Model Used to distinguish between different models or multiple machines or the same model Implement Name The name is used to further clarify which implement is being used NOTE Implement widths or offsets cannot be defined for Implement 3 CF86321 000001F 19 12APR11 6 6 45 13 062111 PN 50 GreenStar General Resource Conditions Softkey Settings in Resource Conditions screen are used for guidance documentation and mapping and are saved to a USB drive and can be unloaded to John Deere desktop software NOTE If Alerts occur indicating memory space is full desktop software can be utilized to remove unused items The GREENSTAR 3 PRO RESOURCES CONDITIONS screen contains two tabs RESOURCES tab e Client Used to separate data from different clients typically used by custom and commercial operators Allows data to be unloaded for a specific client e Farm Used to separate data from different farms and landowners e Field Used to separate data from different fields within a farm e Task Used to separate data from different field tasks like planting spraying and others Set to Documentation Off for operators who only use guidance and do not want to document field operation data e Operator Used to separate data from different operator
422. utoTrac Universal AutoTrac Universal For instructions on operating AutoTrac Universal see the AutoTrac Universal operator s manual CZ76372 00001AF 19 010CT10 1 1 50 76 PN 143 Original GreenStar Monitor Compatible Systems Press MENU button gt gt ORIGINAL GREENSTAR meee eS Neate MONITOR button The following section explains operation of Original GreenStar Monitor software Original GreenStar Monitor can be used to display information from controllers that We are designed for use with original GreenStar display NOTE The original GreenStar Monitor is only viewable as a full screen Compatible Systems Original GreenStar Monitor application is compatible with following John Deere 2 5 v controllers ORIGINAL GREENSTAR MONITOR button e SeedStar Gen 1 Seed Monitor and Variable Rate Drive e SeedStar Gen 2 Seed Monitor and Variable Rate Drive e SeedStar Air Cart e SprayStar e Accu Depth e Original StarFire Receiver e TCM e European Drill e European Sprayer e European Spreader e European Wrapping Baler e Rauch Axera Fertilizer Spreader e Harvest Monitor Except 70 Series Combines e Self Propelled Forage Harvester CZ76372 0000170 19 16SEP10 1 1 Operating Original GreenStar Monitor IMPORTANT If dual monitors are being used with an Original GreenStar Display on the system along with a GS3 display the Original GreenStar Monitor application will not be available and will
423. value 3 5 4 5 SF2 e Less than or equal to 6 satellites being tracked a Marginal CZ76372 000006B 19 09JUL10 2 3 Poor PC9388 UN 170CT07 e Red Bar and Flashing Alert Sign e Poor Operating Range 3D e Significant risk of accuracy degradation high accuracy SF2 operations are not advised e PDOP value greater than 4 6 e Less than or equal to 5 satellites being tracked a Poor CZ76372 000006B 19 09JUL10 3 3 50 17 062111 PN 84 Guidance Row Finder Mode General Settings Theory of Operation Row Finder Parallel Tracking Only mode is intended for O ert use in row crop applications where rows are not always equally spaced Row Finder will aid the operator in finding Turn Predictor which set of rows to enter back into the field on after setting a reference point when coming out of the previous set of rows Track 0 Setup GUIDANCE SETTINGS tab gt gt TRACKING MODE drop down box gt gt ROW FINDER NOTE Row Finder can only be operated in Parallel Tracking Mode Track Spacing must be set for operation of this mode Set track spacing in EQUIPMENT softkey gt gt IMPLEMENT tab PC12582 UN 28APR10 Operating Row Finder To use Row Finder press SET ROW button at end of pass before starting turn IMPORTANT For optimal performance the SET ROW button must be pressed before machine bewege M begins making turn at end of pass L Track 0 will be reset based
424. ver and perform operation again Curve Track Memory Full Internal memory available for Curve Track is full Data must be cleared to continue Curve Track Operation Clear curved track data from system AutoTrac Disabled AutoTrac SF1 license cannot operate with current StarFire software Update StarFire software to operate AutoTrac AutoTrac Disabled AutoTrac SF1 license cannot operate while SF2 corrections are turned on Turn SF2 corrections off to operate AutoTrac License Problem No license available for the selected tracking mode Previous tracking mode will be selected Duplicate Name Name already exists Select another name Curve Track Recording Curve Track recording in progress Cannot perform operation until recording is turned off Circle Definition Problem There was an internal error during Circle definition Redefine the circle Circle Definition Problem Communication with GPS receiver was lost during circle definition Redefine the circle once communication has been re established Circle Definition Problem Center point is too far Select another center point A B Line Definition Problem There was an internal error during A B line definition Redefine the A B line A B Line Definition Problem A timeout occurred during A B line definition Redefine the A B line A B Line Definition Problem A and B points of the A B line are too close Perform operation agai
425. version Homepage A Look Ahead Seconds B Text with Accept button gees em prayt Prescription Spray 6 30 2008 Fertilizer Una LZ kb Name Date Created Product Type Rate Units Look Ahead sec Prescription Multiplier Out of Field Loss of GPS Prescription Rate 0 00 ma Rate Units do not match Prescription Rate Units Prescription cannot be applied 4 Lo PC10857QW UN 14SEP09 CZ76372 00002B4 19 30MAR11 3 3 65 61 062111 PN 222 Documentation Shapefile Converter The Shapefile Converter converts shapefile prescriptions to a form that can be used in the GreenStar 3 System Not all desktop software solutions are compatible with the GS3 The Shapefile Converter allows prescription shapefiles to be converted from many different types of farm management software solutions With shapefiles being the most common form of prescription format it is important to provide this capability with the GreenStar 3 Display The conversion process converts shapefile prescriptions into a acceptable fdShape file format and saves the files in the GRx folder on the USB drive Shapefile Converter Process Supported Shapefile format ESRI format WGS 84 non projected NOTE Most farm management software has the capability to create a shapefile in WGS 84 non projected format To confirm the prescription shapefile from the 3rd Party software program is compatible
426. vice not reporting version info An error occurred during reprogramming Perform reprogramming process again If problem reoccurs contact your John Deere dealer Legacy device not found while programming product Device not found while programming product Check wiring and connectors Attempt to copy the setup data to a new USB drive that already has setup data on it Prior setup data found on USB drive Select CONTINUE button to overwrite this data Select CANCEL button to abort the operation If the user decides to continue there will be a second popup Are you sure you want to overwrite Wrong activation code Invalid activation code Please reenter activation code Customer attempts to record boundary when one already exists Are you sure you want to redefine the boundary All New Edit Screens User attempts to create a duplicate name in any of the New Edit screens This entry is already being used Please select a new entry or cancel to modify the entry This alarm will be shown after we have received a touch event for 60 seconds The touchscreen is malfunctioning Try to reboot the device utilize an external display control or the bezel keys on the backside of this display for screen response If problem persists please contact your John Deere Dealer This alarm will be shown after we have received a touch event for 60 seconds A button is malfunctioning Try to reboot the display If the
427. witchbox Turn on Master Switch foot switch or switchbox Make a partial or complete pass Verify seed placement by digging Additional Resources available on www StellarSup port com e Swath Control ORG e GreenStar Rate Controller ORG e Swath Control Settings Quick Sheet e GS3 button H Setup Guide e Tips for Operating iTEC Pro and Swath Control CZ76372 00002F9 19 28APR11 1 1 130 6 062111 PN 324 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Frequently Asked Questions e Q When try to record in GreenStar 3 get the message Implement Recording Not Allowed What do need to do to fix this A Verify you have the correct Client Farm Field and Task set up under GS3 button G Then make sure you have an operation setup in button I If you have Tillage Product Application or Other operation defined verify you only have one operation set up If running a Planting or Seeding operation it is possible to set up a Product Application operation as well If the error message remains select button C and select Recording from the drop down menu This is a Recording Diagnostics page and will give you an idea of why the system will not allow recording Q I m attempting to dial in my AutoTrac Universal system and don t understand what each sensitivity is for A Refer to the
428. with a Front PTO PC9060 UN 17APR06 S A 4 gt Front PTO CZ76372 00000BF 19 15JUL10 3 8 Rear PTO This item is only available in the list if the vehicle is equipped with a Rear PTO PC9061 UN 17APR06 4 gt Rear PTO CZ76372 00000BF 19 15JUL10 4 8 Implement Switch Closed This item is always available and functions based on the position of the implement switch Continued on next page PC9062 UN 17APR06 BS Implement Switch Closed 4 gt CZ76372 00000BF 19 15JUL10 5 8 60 5 062111 PN 149 Performance Monitor Implement Switch Open This item is always available and functions based on the position of the implement switch PC9063 UN 17APR06 N Implement Switch Open h CZ76372 00000BF 19 15JUL10 6 8 AUTO If a John Deere implement is connected to the system that is broadcasting its work status this item will be selected in this list and then the rest of the list will be disabled PC9064 UN 17APR06 AUTO AUTO a h CZ76372 00000BF 19 15JUL10 7 8 SCV I VI The user can assign any SCV to turn the recording source on These selections will only show up if the vehicle has the corresponding SCV s Selective Control Valves for PC9065 UN 17APR06 se 4 gt the Hydraulics SGVV CZ76372 00000BF 19 15JUL10 8 8 Recording Sources for APM DOT Recording Sources for UPM A
429. with application Reload software to USB drive Timeout waiting for CAN62 Response To Request Device failed to start programming language Reload software to USB drive Target sent FAIL in CAN62 Response To Request Device failed to continue programming language Reload software to USB drive Timeout waiting for CAN62 Response To Checksum Device failed to report a language checksum Reload software to USB drive Target sent FAIL in CAN62 Response To Checksum Device reported an invalid language checksum Reload software to USB drive Timeout waiting for CAN62 Response To Remove Device didn t respond to the request to remove language Reload software to USB drive Target sent FAIL in CAN62 Response To Remove Device failed to remove a language Reload software to USB drive Flash Write Failure Device failed while writing language to memory Reload software to USB drive Timeout waiting for CAN62 Response To New Data Device stopped programming language prematurely Reload software to USB drive Product ID mismatch Language is incompatible with loaded product Reload software to USB drive Platform Core Software CZ76372 0000296 19 12JAN11 2 2 130 19 PN 062111 337 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Trouble Code Pop Up Boxes Documentation Software FAULT CONDITION FAULT DESCRIPTION ALARM TEXT Task selected recording is on the o
430. with field boundary if field boundary is not linear and continuous or if operator makes turns before or after field boundary NOTE Turn predictor cannot be turned off if no seat switch is present on the vehicle Parallel Tracking Turn Predictor will default to ON To turn off go to MENU gt gt GREENSTAR 3 PRO button gt gt GUIDANCE softkey gt gt GUIDANCE SETTINGS tab Deselect the check box Once turned OFF it will remain off through power cycles until manually turned back on by operator Turn OFF will be displayed on guidance screen when turn predictor is turned off AutoTrac Turn Predictor will default to ON after every power cycle or after every seat switch time out To turn off go to Menu gt gt GREENSTAR 3 PRO button gt gt GUIDANCE softkey gt gt GUIDANCE SETTINGS tab Deselect the check box Turn Predictor cannot be turned off on vehicles with out an operator presence switch tied to CAN line Once turned OFF it will remain off only until next power cycle seat switch time out or if manually turned back on by operator Turn OFF will be displayed on guidance screen when turn predictor is turned off Whenever Display resets Turn Predictor back to ON after a seat switch time out operator out of seat for 7 seconds on tractors 5 seconds on combines and sprayers it will display an alert indicating Turn Predictor has been reset to ON due to operator leaving seat An option will be available allowing the operator to
431. word can be retrieved using Message Center It is stored in Diagnostic Address 62 See the Troubleshooting and Diagnostics section for how to view Diagnostic Addresses each display individually CZ76372 0000167 19 16SEP10 1 1 062111 25 1 PN 21 Display Navigation Power Up IMPORTANT Do not remove 12 volt power from display until the LED light is black Prematurely removing power green or orange light status may cause loss of data and or the display to lose functionality It may take up to 20 seconds after removing key power for the LED light to completely go black IMPORTANT When setting up the display with vehicle key in the accessory position power on engine off turn key to OFF position for 20 seconds BEFORE starting the vehicle This will ensure the setup data is saved to the internal memory prior to operating If the vehicle is running during setup and programming turn the vehicle off with key in the OFF position and wait 30 seconds before restarting This ensures that all data is saved to the internal memory DO NOT turn the key to the start position directly from the accessory position The reduction in voltage during the starting phase could result in a loss of all setup data IMPORTANT If changes are made while machine is in auxiliary mode turn key off and wait for display s power light to turn off before starting the ignition This allows display to shut down and save data Duri
432. xiliary Control Softkey ceee Auxiliary Controls Page Implement Function Mappimg Auxiliary Controls Assignment Error Messages Auxiliary Controls Preferred Assignments Auxiliary Controls Conflicts and Disabled Funchons COM Port Assignment Why Assign the COM Port Setup COM Port Com Port Settings cccessseeesesssteeeeeeeees COM Port Settings 3rd Party Control Units COM Port Setting Review Deactivate COM Port Com Port Settings ccccsssseeesssssteeeeeeess YARA N Sensor VARANGensor oeenn GreenSeeker GPS SettingS ienai ieinter tasie GreenSeeker ccccccceeeceecccsseeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeuaes Central Insecticide System Central Insecticide System ccccceeeeees Connecting RS 232 GPS Receivers Connecting RS 232 GPS Receivers RS232 Harness kt Video Video Application snnnnnnneeeneeeee eenen eenen Installing Video Video Settings ec eceeesseeeeeeesstteeeeeeeseseeees Video Viewing Adjusting Video Image Quality 25 Data Management Theory of Operation 90 1 90 2 Page Data Transfer Option 120 1 Exporting Data from the Display 120 2 Importing Data to the Display 120 2 Importing Global or Shapefile Prescriptions 120 3 Example 1 Importing and Exporting Documentation Data aaeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eeen 120 3 Example 2 Backup Documentation Data
433. xt page Spuit Hoofdmenu OIZ o WZ tina Ri GE G o o E ihe A F e0 a TARGET RATE IMPOSSIBLE ACTUAL RATE TOO HIGH 6 06am ee Ka ole o gt EI 0 00 Sr PC13245 UN 15APR11 John Deere Pull type Sprayer Menu CF86321 000001E 19 28APR11 2 3 80 2 062111 PN 261 ISO Implements TASK CONTROLLER Some ISOBUS compliant implements support the Task Controller based documentation Task Controller is part of the documentation functionality built into the Display Software and supports Documentation of ISOBUS implements The communication depends on the availability of the optional Task Controller support in the implement controller IMPORTANT The current Task Controller implementation is limited to certain machines The documentation package can only communicate with one implement at a time Implement width sections operation type implement type machine type recording source target amp actual rate parameters are set automatically with Task controller based on the ISO implement Speed Pump Mode 20 CT Py200 SOT TTS Carrier Injection Pressure Pressure Fiov Rare Aavive Stark 3 ER Rates osa oP OS CEB Park Brak PC13246 UN 15APR11 Raven Direct Injection CF86321 000001E 19 28APR11 3 3 Softkeys 64 Softkeys VT VT version 4 and later displays support exactly 6
434. y Ranked Delay No Overlap A and No Overlap B BA31779 0000174 19 28APR11 4 4 75 1 2 062111 PN 253 Swath Control Diagnostic Readings GreenStar Diagnostic Readings Read the latest Operator Manual prior to operation To obtain a copy see your dealer or visit www Stellar Support com view Swath Control As v B Status Defining field center License Activated No of Operations Master Turn On Time sec 1 000 Master Turn Off Time sec 0 600 Master Swath Control Enabled No of Boundaries T pistance trom Reference Point ft Memory Usage G i E E GreenStar Diagnostic Readings 1 2 PC13510 UN 27APR11 Select GREENSTAR 3 gt DIAGNOSTIC gt SWATH Activated The Swath Control license is activated CONTROL Not Activated The Swath Control License is not activated e A View drop down box Indictes the type of diagnostics information currently being viewed e B Status Indicates the current Swath Control status Waiting No Swath Control compatible implement connected to the system Initializing System is initializing Loading bitmap center System is loading center point from Bitmap Loading bnd center System is loading center point from Boundary map e D No of Operations Indicates the number of operations that are Swath Control capable e E Master Turn On Time sec Indicates the turn on time which is the largest amon
435. y 2 ENEE ENEE deen 45 7 Smooth Tight Turns Adaptive Curve Track Mode 50 27 Turn Preddcor teete aaea 50 9 50 10 Turning Points 50 9 eror lmg eg ee gege Weeer 50 10 Turning View cccccccccccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetes 50 9 Turning View 50 10 U Universal Performance Monitor UPM 0 60 1 USB Drive EN EEN 15 3 USB Drive Connector eeeeseeeerrririeeerrrrrrrrererrrenenn 15 3 V Vanguard A EEEE E EE 65 66 Variety Locator 65 28 Vehicle Heading Arrow ccccssseceeeeeeeeeteteeeeeeeneee 50 13 View Taser ect Ee eh cesta ioe rah le ne re 50 3 Volume Button ia aeaieie irh a aia aain 35 4 W Warnings aL e 6 F AL eee mee ae a a E 50 4 WING sc E PEA A cece E 45 14 Direction gebeten Arcane 45 14 ee BEE 45 14 Y VARANGensor 95 1 de WH ln Ee 65 33 Index 9 062111 PN 9 Index Index 10 Hen John Deere Service Literature Available Technical Information Technical information can be purchased from John Deere Some of this information is available in electronic media such as CD ROM disks and in printed form Search online from http Awww JohnDeere com Please have available the model number serial number and name of the product Available information includes e PARTS CATALOGS list service parts available for your machine with exploded view illustrations to help you identify the correct parts It is also useful in assembling and disassembling OPERATOR
436. y of crop changes stop and decline run r EN oO Row Compensation is H H Stopped e e Row D Date Fi oe ee 2 Harvest a yield sample 30 5 m 100 ft or 1 4 basket g 3 Press STOP button 4 Accept or decline run made P ES a S O 5 A date will be displayed if successful Se ttl S Row Compensation CZ76372 0000182 19 24SEP10 2 5 Quick Calibration DOE SETUP Yield Cal Screen SETUP YIELD CAL BB 1 Start Quick Calibration Press SETUP gt gt HARVEST MONITOR gt gt YIELD 2 Haryest a Yield Sample CALIBRATION 5 6 3 Stop Quick Calibration F IMPORTANT Before calibrating be sure that 4 Enter Yield Estimate harvester basket is empty Be sure boll buggy ole ee or cotton module is empty ae peas is oppe Procedure should be performed at maximum D PP ground speed which operator expects to run far Indicated Yield Area in this crop and condition and in an area that 0 00ba ac 0 00 ac is reasonably level and of uniform yield z pace te New Yield If standard calibration is running estimated yield Estimate ba ac 2 will be adding up because they are tied together M it If standard calibration has been performed Standard Calibration br i operator does not need to run quick 7 calibration process e Di el NOTE Always read the text to the left of the START STOP Harvest Monitor S arrow This explains the current status of calibration Arrow changes back and forth between START and S
437. y operational changes needed for documentation are turning recording on off changing details within the operation and changing Client Farm Field as needed If product details change while operating go to DOCUMENTATION softkey and select tab for affected operation To remove a controller you must select the remove button from the 3rd Party controller setup page NOTE 3rd Party controllers are controllers using RS232 connection Field Doc Connect and ISOBUS compliant controllers supporting Task Controller functionality CZ76372 00002B3 19 30MAR11 1 1 Remove Disable and Enable Operations User created operations will have a Remove button in the lower left hand corner of the operations page Selecting this button and accepting the Remove Operation popup will remove the operation from Documentation and data will no longer be recorded for that operation PC13217 UN 30MAR11 Remove Operation CZ76372 00002B7 19 30MAR11 1 2 When operations are created by controllers the button in the lower left hand corner changes to an Enable Disable button This allows the operator to disable recording of certain operations while still recording others if needed Pressing the Disable button will grey out the options on the screen and they will remain greyed out until the button is pressed again to Enable Operation PC13218 UN 30MAR11 Disable Operation Disable Operation PC13219 UN 30MAR11 Enable Oper
438. y results In Higher settings Results in better tracking performance better tracking performance but may also cause increased wheel motion or jittery behavior Higher Settings Result In better tracking A performance but may also cause Increased Lower Settings Results in decreased wheel motion but wheel motion or jittery behavior may also result in worse tracking performance Lower Settings Result In decreased wheel motion but may also result In worse tracking performance Kal S O S Zz T wo Si 2 Steering Response Rate Continued on next page CZ76372 00001A8 19 010CT10 21 25 50 67 062111 PN 134 Guidance Curve Sensitivity Determines how aggressively AutoTrac responds to a curve in the track This setting affects performance in curve track guidance only Higher settings Turns the vehicle in a smaller radius tighter around the curve Lower Settings Turns the vehicle in a larger radius around the curve Curve Sensitivity Determines how aggressively AutoTrac responds to a curve In the track This setting affects performance In curve track guidance only Higher Settings Tum the vehicle In a smaller radius tighter around the curve Lower Settings Tum the vehicle In a larger radius around the curve Curve Sensitivity Too Low Curve Sensitivity Too High Curve Sensitivity PC11480 UN 15NOV08 CZ76372 00001A8 19 010CT10 22 25 Acquire Sensitivi
439. y to a bystander S to a bystander ensure ensure Q i A Users know which function is T e Users know which function is mapped mapped to each control Z to each control Controls are properly labeled d s Controls are properly labeled S Ka p O A OK x This message occurs when the system detects an _ EES N Auxiliary Control and that configuration has been modified during run time e g additional input and or implement d e d We added Press Enter key F to navigate to the home Mapping key G to review or change the Auxiliary Control page Go to the Auxiliary Controls page by pressing the assignments Continued on next page OUCC002 0002A57 19 280CT09 2 4 85 1 062111 PN 264 Auxiliary Controls Auxiliary Control Enabled AASTON Auxiliary Control enabled Improper operation can cause unintended implement movement To avoid the risk of death or serious injury to a bystander ensure e Users know which function is mapped to each control e Controls are properly labeled This message occurs when the operator enables the Auxiliary Control manually Press Enter key F to navigate to the home page Go to the Auxiliary Controls page by pressing the Mapping key G to review or change the Auxiliary Control assignments Awarnine Auxiliary Control enabled V Improper operation can cause unintended implement movement To avoid the risk of death or serious injury to a by

John Deere 2630 Display

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents